Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutResolution - 2011-R0131 - Contract - DM Construction LLC - Citibus Downtown Placa Renovations - 03_22_2011 (3)Resolution No. March 22, 2011 Item No. 5.21 2011—RO131 RESOLUTION BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK: THAT the Mayor of the City of Lubbock is hereby authorized and directed to execute for and on behalf of the City of Lubbock, Contract No. 9916 for Citibus downtown transfer plaza renovations and addition construction project, by and between the City of Lubbock and DM Construction, LLC, and related documents. Said Contract is attached hereto and incorporated in this resolution as if fully set forth herein and shall be included in the minutes of the City Council. Passed by the City Council on March 22, 2011 TOM MARTIN, MAYOR ATTEST: Rebeccla Garza, City Secretary APPROVED AS TO CONTENT: rAAAIC--�/f>� uiney Whi e Assistant City Manager APPROVED AS TO FORM: Chad Weaver, Assistant City Attorney vw:ccdocs/RES.Contract-DM Construction, LLC March 1, 2011 DATE ISSUED: CLOSE DATE: BID No. 11-9916-MA ADDENDUM # I BID No. 11-9916-MA Citibus Downtown Transfer Plaza Renovation & Addition Construction Project a-O I - Rd 13l February 11, 2011 February 23, 2011 @ 3:00 p.m. The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named BID. Where any [ item called for in the BID documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not affected by this addendum, shall remain in effect. BIDDERS are invited to review the following: 1. The Contract Checklist REVISED 2. Contractors Statement of Qualifications ADDED 3. Citibus FTA Clauses REVISED 4. Handrail — MODIFIED Marta Alvarez, Director of Purchasing and Contract Management, City of Lubbock, P.O. Box 2000, Lubbock, Texas 79457 Questions may be faxed to (806)775-3326 or Email to malvarezAmylubbock.us THANK YOU, CITY OF LUBBOCK Marta Alvarez Director of Purchasing and Contract Management It is the intent and purpose of the City of Lubbock that this request permits competitive bids. It shall be the offeror's responsibiW to advise the Director of Purchasing and Contract Management if any lguaae, reauirements. etc.. or any combinations thereof, inadvertently restricts or limits the requirements stated in this BID to a single source. Such notification must be submitted in writing and must be received by the Director of Purchasing and Contract Management no later than five (5) business days prior to the bid close date. A review of such notifications will be made. Contractor Checklist Before submitting your bid, please ensure you have completed and included the following documents in the order they are listed. The contractor is only to submit (1), one original copy of every item listed. 1. Carefully read and understand the plans and specifications and properly complete the BID . SUBMITTAL FORM. Bid submittal form MUST be completed in blue or black ink or by typewriter. Signatures must be original, in blue or black ink, and by hand. The bidder binds himself on acceptance of his bid to execute a contract and any required bonds, according to the accompanying forms, for performing and completing the said work within the time stated and for the prices stated below. "Include corporate seal and Secretary's signature. Identify addenda received (if any). Include firm's FEDERAL TAX ID number or Owner's SOCIAL SECURITY number. 2. Include BID BOND or CASHIER'S OR CERTIFIED CHECK as your bid surety. Failure to provide a bid surety WILL result in automatic rejection of your bid. 3. Complete and sign the CITY OF LUBBOCK INSURANCE REQUIREMENT AFFIDAVIT. This must include the signature of the agent or broker. Contractor's signature must be original. 4. Clearly mark the bid number, title, due date and time and your company name and address on the outside of the envelope or container. 5. Ensure your bid is RECEIVED by the City of Lubbock Purchasing and Contract Management Office prior to the deadline. Late bids will not be accepted. 6. Complete and sign the CONTRACTORS QUALIFICATIONS ' 7. Complete and sign the SAFETY RECORD QUESTIONNAIRE. All "YES" responses must be explained in detail and submitted with Bid. 8. Complete and sign the SUSPENSION AND DEBARMENT CERTIFICATION. Include firm's FEDERAL TAX ID number or Owner's SOCIAL SECURITY number. 9. Complete and submit the CITIBUS FTA CLAUSES 9. Complete and submit the LIST OF SUB -CONTRACTORS. DOCUMENTS REQUIRED WITHIN SEVEN BUSINESS DAYS AFTER CLOSING: 10. Complete and submit the FINAL LIST OF SUB -CONTRACTORS. FAILURE TO PROVIDE ANY OF THE ABOVE MAY RESULT IN YOUR BID BEING DEEMED NON- RESPONSIVE AND, THEREFORE, NOT FURTHER EVALUATED. PLEASE INCLUDE THIS COMPLETED PAGE AS THE FIRST PAGE OF YOUR BID SUBMITTAL. (Type or Print Company Name) INDEX • 1 CONTRACTORS STATEMENT OF QUALIFICATIONS Individual contractors and joint ventures submitting a bid must complete the following evaluation information for the Project. Joint ventures shall be composed of not more than two firms and each firm must complete separate evaluations. Evaluation information must be submitted at time of bid submittal. Failure to submit the following Bidder Evaluation information may result in the OWNER considering the bid non -responsive and result in rejection of the bid by the OWNER. Bidders are to provide any additional information requested by the OWNER. ` In evaluating a firm's qualifications, the following major factors will be considered: A. FINANCIAL CAPABILITY: For thisproject, the CONTRACTOR'S financial capability to undertake the project will be determined by the CONTRACTOR'S ability to secure bonding satisfactory to the OWNER. B. EXPERIENCE: Do the organization and key personnel have appropriate technical experience on similar projects? C. SAFETY: Does the organization stress and support safety as an important function of the work process? D. QUALITY OF WORK: (1) Does the organization have a commitment to quality in every facet of their work - the process as well as the product? (2) Does the organization have a written quality philosophy and/or principles that exemplifies their work? If so, submit as Attachment "A". (3) Has this organization ever received an award or been recognized for doing "quality" work on a project? If so, give details under Attachment "A". E. CONFORMANCE TO CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: (1) Does the organization have a commitment and philosophy to construct projects as designed and as defined in the Contract Documents? The OWNER reserves the right to waive irregularities in determining the firm's qualifications and reserves the right to require the submission of additional information. The qualifications of a firm shall not deprive the OWNER of the right to accept a bid, which in its judgment is the lowest and best bid, to reject any and all bids, to waive irregularities in the bids, or to reject nonconforming, non -responsive, or conditional bids. In addition, the OWNER reserves the right to reject any bid where circumstances and developments have in the opinion of the OWNER changed the qualifications or responsibility of the firm. Material misstatements on the qualifications forms may be grounds for rejection of the firm's bid on this project. Any such misstatement, if discovered after award of the contract to such firm, may be grounds for immediate termination of the contract. Additionally, the firm will be liable to the OWNER for any additional costs or damages to the OWNER resulting from such misstatements, including costs and attorney's fees for collecting such costs and damages. Complete the following information for your organization: Contractor's General Information Organization Doing Business As Business Address of Principle Office Telephone Numbers Main Number Fax Number Web Site Address Form of Business (Check One) If a Corporation Date of Incorporation A Corporation A Partnership An Individual State of Incorporation Chief Executive Officer's Name President's Name Vice President's Name(s) Secretary's Name Treasurer's Name If a Partnership Date of Organization State whether partnership is general or limited If an Individual Name Business Address Identify all individuals not previously named which exert a significant amount of business control over the organization Indicators of Organization Size Average Number of Current Full Time Average Estimate of Revenue for Em to m the Current Year Contractor's Organizational Experience Organization Doing Business As Business Address of Regional Office Name of Regional Office Manager Telephone Numbers Main Number Fax Number Web Site Address Organization List of names that this organization currently, has or anticipates operating under over the history of the organization, including the names of related companies presently doing business: Names of Organization From Date To Date List of companies, firms or organizations that own any part of the organization. Name of companies, firms or organization Percent Ownership Constrtiction Experience Years experience in projects' similar to the proposed'project: As a General Contractor I I As a Joint Venture Partner Has this or a predecessor organization ever defaulted on a project or failed to complete any work awarded to it? If yes provide full details in a separate attachment. See attachment No. Has this or a predecessor organization been released from a bid or proposal in the past ten ears? If yes provide full details in a separate attachment. See attachment No. Has this or a predecessor organization ever been disqualification as a bidder or proposer by any local state or federal agency within the last five ears? If yes provide full details in a separate attachment. See attachment No. Is this organization or your proposed surety currently in any litigation or contemplating litigation? If yes provide full details in a separate attachment. See attachment No. Has this or a predecessor organization ever refused to construct or refused to provide materials defined in the contract documents? If yes provide full details in a separate attachment. See attachment No. Contractor's Proposed Key Personnel Organization Doing Business As Proposed ' • • Provide a brief description of the managerial structure of the organization and illustrate with an organizational chart. Include the title and names of key personnel. Include this chart at an attachment to this description. See attachment No. Provide a brief description of the managerial structure proposed for this project and illustrate with an organizational chart. Include the title and names of proposed key personnel and alternates. Include this chart at an attachment to this description. See attachment No. Experieiice of Pei -sonnet Provide information on the key personnel proposed for this project that will provide the following key functions. Provide information for candidates for each of these positions on the pages for each of these key personnel. Also provide biographical information for each primary and alternate candidate as an attachment. The biographical information must include the following as a minimum: technical experience, managerial experience, education and formal training, work history which describes project experience, including the roles and responsibilities for each assignment, and primary language. Additional information highlighting experience which makes them the best candidate for the assignment should also be included. Role Primary Candidate Alternate Candidate Project Manager Project Superintendent Project Safety Officer Quality Control Manager If key personnel are to fulfill more than one of the roles listed above, provide a written narrative describing how much time will be devoted to each function, their qualifications to fulfill each role and the percentage of their time that will be devoted to each role. If the individual is not to be devoted solely to this project, indicate how time it to be divided between this project and their other assignments. 1-J r Proposed Project Managers Organization Doing Business As Priniary Candidate Name of Individual Years of Experience as Project Manager Years of Experience with this organization Number of similar projects as Project Manager Number of similar projects in other positions Current Project Assignments Name of Assignment Percent of Time Used for this Project Estimated Project Completion Date Reference Contact Information(listing names indicates ap roval to contacting the names individuals as a reference Name Name Title/ Position Title/ Position Organization Organization Telephone Telephone E-mail E-mail Project Project Candidate role on Project Alternate Candidate Name of Individual Candidates role on Project Years of Experience as Project Manager Years of Experience with this organization Number of similar projects as Project Manager Number of similar projects in other positions Current Project Assignments Name of Assignment Percent of Time Used for this Project Estimated Project Completion Date Name Name Title/ Position Title/ Position Or anization Organization Telephone Telephone E-mail E-mail Project Project Candidate role on Project Candidate role on Project Proposed Project Superintendent Organization Doing Business As Priniary Candidate Name of Individual Years of Experience as Project Superintendent Years of Experience with this organization Number of similar projects as Superintendent Number of similar projects in other positions Current Project Assignments Name of Assignment Percent of Time Used for this Project Estimated Project Completion Date Reference Contact Information(listing names indicates a roval to contactingthe names individuals as a reference Name Name Title/ Position Title/ Position Organization Organization Telephone Telephone E-mail E-mail Project I Project Candidate role on Project Alternate Candidate Name of Individual Candidate role on Project Years of Experience as Project Superintendent Years of Experience with this organization Number of similar projects as Superintendent Number of similar projects in other positions Current Project Assignments Name of Assignment Percent of Time Used for this Project Estimated Project Completion Date Reference Contact Name •approval Name Title/ Position Title/ Position Organization Organization Telephone Telephone E-mail E-mail Project Project Candidate role on Project Candidate role on Project Proposed Project Safety Officer Organization Doing Business As Name of Individual Years of Experience as Project Safety Officer Years of Experience with this organization Number of similar projects as Safety Officer Number of similar projects in other positions Current Project Assignments Name of Assignment Percent of Time Used for this Project Estimated Project Completion Date Reference Contact Information listin names indicates a royal to contactingthe names individuals as a reference Name Name Titlet Position Title/ Position Organization Organization Telephone Telephone E-mail E-mail Project I I Project Candidate role on Project 1 Name of Individual Candidate role .on Project Years of Experience as Project Safety Officer Years of Experience with this organization Number of similar projects as Safety Officer Number of similar projects in other positions Current Project Assignments Name of Assignment Percent of Time Used for this Project Estimated Project. Completion Date Name Name Title/ Position Title/ Position Organization Organization Tele hone Telephone E-mail E-mail Project Project Candidate role on Project Candidate role on Project 8 Proposed Project Quality Control Manager Organization Doing Business As Ptiinaiy Candidate Name of Individual Years of Experience as Quality Control Manager Years of Experience with this organization Number of similar projects as Quality Manager Number of similar projects in other positions Current Project Assignments Name of Assignment Percent of Time Used for this Project Estimated Project Completion Date Reference Contact Information(listing names indicates ap al to contacting the names individuals as a reference Name Name Title/ Position Title) Position Organization Organization Telephone Telephone E-mail E-mail Project I Project Candidate role on Project Alternate Candi(fate Name of Individual Candidate role on Project Years of Experience as Quality Control Manager Years of Experience with this organization Number of similar projects as Quality Manager Number of similar projects in other positions Current Project Assignments Name of Assignment Percent of Time Used for this Project Estimated Project Completion Date Reference Contact• Name . contacting Name Title/ Position Title/ Position Organization Organization Telephone Telephone E-mail E-mail Project I Project Candidate role on_l_ Project Candidate role on Project Contractor's Project Experience and Resources Organization Doing Business As Projects Provide a list of major prcjects`that are currently underway, or have been completed within the last ten years on Attachment A Provide a completed Project Information form (Attachment B) for projects that have been completed in the last five ears which specifically illustrate the organizations capability to provide best value to the Owner for this project. Include a completed Project Information form (Attachment B) for projects which illustrate the experience of the proposed key rsonnel. Provide a description of your organizations approach to completing this project to provide best value for the Owner. Including a description of your approach in the following areas: 1. Contract administration 2. Management of subcontractor and suppliers 3. Time management 4. Cost control 5. Quality management 6. Project site safety 7. Managing changes to the project 8. Managing equipment 9. Meeting HUB / MWBE Participation Goal Provide a list of major equipment proposed for use on this project. Attach Additional Information if necess Equipment Item Primary Use on Project Own B ill Lease Divisioii of Work between • What work will the organization complete using its own resources? What work does the organization propose to subcontract on thisproject? 10 Contractor's Subcontractors and Vendors Organization Doing Business As Project• Provide a list of subcontractors that will provide more than 10 percent of the work ased on contract amounts Name Work to be Provided Est. Percent of Contract HUB/MWBE Firm Provide information on the proposed key personnel, project experience and a description of past relationship and work experience for each subcontractor listed above using the Project Information Forms. Provide a list of major equipment proposed for use on this project. Attach Additional Information if necess Vendor Name Equipment / Material Provided Famish Only Furnish and Install HUB/M WBE Firm 11 Attachment A Current Projects and Project Completed within the last 10 Years Project Owner I I Project Name General Description of Project: Project Cost Date Project Completed Key Project Personnel Project Manager Project Superintendent Safety Officer Quality ` Control Manager Name Reference Contact Information (listing names indicates approval to contacting the names individuals as a reference) Name Title/ Position Organization Telephone E-mail Owner Designer Construction Manager Project Owner I I Project Name General Description of Project: Project Cost Date Project Completed Key Project Personnel Project Manager Project Superintendent Safety Officer Quality Control Manager Name Reference Contact Information (listing names indicates approval to contacting the names individuals as a reference) Name Title/ Position Organization Telephone E-mail Owner Designer Construction Manager Project Owner Project.Name General Description of Project: Project Cost Date Project Completed Key Project Personnel Project Manager Project Superintendent Safety Officer Quality Control Manager Name Reference Contact Information (listing names indicates approval to contacting the names individuals as a reference) Name Title/ Position Organization Telephone E-mail Owner Designer Construction Manager w Proiect Information Project Owner I I Project Name General Description of Project Project e Budget History Schedule Performance Amount % of Bid Amount Date Days Bid Notice to Proceed Change Orders Contract Substantial Completion Date at Notice to Proceed Owner Enhancements Contract Final Completion Date at Notice to Proceed Unforeseen Conditions Change Order Authorized Substantial Completion Date Design Issues Change Order Authorized Final Completion Date Total Actual / Estimated Substantial Completion Date Final Cost ProjectKey Personnel Actual / Estimated Final Completion Date Project Manager Project Sup Safety Officer Quality Control Manager Name Percentage of Time Devoted to the Project Proposed for this Project Did Individual Start and Complete the Project? If not, who started or completed the project in their place. Reason for change. ContactReference • .n (listing narnes indicates approval to contacting• Name Title/ Position Organization Telephone E-mail Owner Designer Construction Manager Sure ISSLIeS / DiSpUtes Resolved or Pending ResolLition by Arbitration, Litigation or DiSpLite Review Boards Number of Issues Total Amount involved in Number of Issues Total Amount involved in Resolved I I Resolved Issues I I Pending Resolved Issues �� ­ 7 REVISED CITIBUS FTA CLAUSES 1. No Federal Government Obligations to Third Parties 2. False Statements or Claims Civil and Criminal Fraud 3. Access to Third Party Contract Records (ADDED) 4. Changes to Federal Requirements 5. Termination 6. Civil Rights (Title V1, EEO, ADA) 7. Disadvantaged Business Enterprises 8. Incorporation of FTA Terms 9. Debarment and Suspension 10. Buy America 11. Resolution of Disputes, Breaches, or Other Litigation 12. Lobbying 13. Clean Air 14. Clean Water 15. Davis -Bacon Act - 16. Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act 17. Copeland Anti -Kickback Act 18. Bonding 19. Seismic Safety 20. Energy Conservation 21. Recycled Products 22. Conformance with ITS National Architecture 23. ADA Access The bidder or offeror hereby certifies that it will meet the requirements of the above listed FTA Clauses: Date Signature Company Name. Title NO GOVERNMENT OBLIGATION TO THIRD PARTIES Applicability to Contracts Applicable to all contracts. Applicability to Micro -Purchases Micro -purchases are defined as those purchases under $2,500. These requirements do not apply to micro - purchases. Flow Down Not required by statute or regulation for either primary contractors or subcontractors, this concept should flow down to all levels to clarify, to all parties to the contract, that the Federal Government does not have contractual liability to third parties, absent specific written consent. Model Clause/Language While no specific language is required, FTA has developed the following language. No Obligation by the Federal Government. (1) The Purchaser and Contractor acknowledge and agree that, notwithstanding any concurrence by the Federal Government in or approval of the solicitation or award of the underlying contract, absent the express written consent by the Federal Government, the Federal Government is not a party to this contract and shall not be subject to any obligations or liabilities to the Purchaser, Contractor, or any other party (whether or not a party to that contract) pertaining to any matter resulting from the underlying contract. (2) The Contractor agrees to include the above clause in each subcontract financed in whole or in part with Federal assistance provided by FTA. It is further agreed that the clause shall not be modified, except to identify the subcontractor who will be subject to its provisions. Date Signature Company Name Title PROGRAM FRAUD AND FALSE OR FRAUDULENT STATEMENTS AND RELATED ACTS 31 U.S.C. 3801 et seq. 49 CFR Part 3118 U.S.C. 1001 49 U.S.C. 5307 Applicability to Contracts These requirements are applicable to all contracts. Applicability to Micro -Purchases Micro -purchases are defined as those purchases under $2,500. These requirements do not apply to micro - purchases. Flow Down These requirements flow down to contractors and subcontractors who make, present, or submit covered claims and statements. Model Clause/Language These requirements have no specified language, so FTA proffers the following language. Program Fraud and False or Fraudulent Statements or Related Acts. (1) The Contractor acknowledges that the provisions of the Program Fraud Civil Remedies Act of 1986, as amended, 31 U.S.C. § § 3801 et sec . and U.S. DOT regulations, "Program Fraud Civil Remedies," 49 C.F.R. Part 31, apply to its actions pertaining to this Project. Upon execution of the underlying contract, the Contractor certifies or affirms the truthfulness and accuracy of any statement it has made, it makes, it may make, or causes to be made, pertaining to the underlying contract or the FTA assisted project for which this contract work is being performed. In addition to other penalties that may be applicable, the Contractor further acknowledges that if it makes, or causes to be made, a false, fictitious, or fraudulent claim, statement, submission, or certification, the Federal Government reserves the right to impose the penalties of the Program Fraud Civil Remedies Act of 1986 on the Contractor to the extent the Federal Government deems appropriate. (2) The Contractor also acknowledges that if it makes, or causes to be made, a false, fictitious, or fraudulent claim, statement, submission, or certification to the Federal Government under a contract connected with a project that is financed in whole or in part with Federal assistance originally awarded by FTA under the authority of 49 U.S.C. § 5307, the Government reserves the right to impose the penalties of 18 U.S.C. § 1001 and 49 U.S.C. § 5307(n)(1) on the Contractor, to the extent the Federal Government deems appropriate. (3) The Contractor agrees to include the above two clauses in each subcontract financed in whole or in part with Federal assistance provided by FTA. It is firther agreed that the clauses shall not be modified, except to identify the subcontractor who will be subject to the provisions. Signature Company Name Title CHANGES MADE TO 4220.1F REV 4-14-09 on 7/1/2010 FTA Circular 4220.IF, "Third Party Contracting Guidance," November 1, 2008, Rev. April 14, 2009, is further revised to make the follow citation revisions and editorial clarifications: 1. Chapter H. Subparagraph 2.b(1)(b) has been revised to announce the inclusion of procedures for procuring art works and the services of artists. 2. Chapter III. A new section 5 has been added to discuss prohibitions against fraud. 3. Chapter IV. A new Paragraph 2.a(9) has been added to Chapter IV to include the requests of President Obama and Secretary LaHood to ban texting while driving. 4. Chapter IV. A new Subsection 2.g has been added to Chapter IV that includes procedures for the procurement of art. Other information pertaining to art is available on the FTA website and FTA's Best Practices Procurement Manual. Former Subsections 2.g through 2 j have been re -numbered Subsections 2.h through 21 respectively. 5. Chapter IV. Paragraph 2.i(6) has been amended to show that Section 1 of the Copeland "Anti -Kickback" Act, 18 U.S.C. § 874, applies to all construction contracts, and Section 2 of the Copeland Anti -Kickback" Act, 40 U.S.C. § 3145, and implementing U.S. Department of Labor regulations apply to construction, contracts exceeding $2,000. Appendix D to the circular has also been corrected. 6. Chapter VI. Paragraph 2.c(2) has been divided into three subparagraphs (rather than two) to emphasize better that the cost plus a percentage of cost method of contracting and the percentage of construction cost method of contracting are both prohibited, and the time and materials method of contracting is restricted. 7. Chapter VI. Paragraph 3.a(1) has been amended for consistency with Subsection 3.a to state that a micro -purchase is valued at $3,000 or less, except for contracts covered by the Davis - Bacon Act. Appendix D has also been revised accordingly. 8. Chapter VI. Former Paragraph 6.a(2) "Establishing Indirect Cost Rates," has been deleted, and former Paragraph 6.a(3) has been re -numbered Paragraph 6.a(2). 9. Appendix D. Changes have been made to reflect the nature of the circular as guidance rather than requirements as well as for consistency with other revisions described above, and re -arranged the order of the matrices for easier use. 11. For your convenience, attached are the April 14, 2009, changes to the original FTA Circular 4220.1F. Signature Company Name f L ATTACHMENT 1. No changes have been made to FTA Circular 4220.1F as a result of enactment of the American Recovery and Reinvestment Act of 2009, Pub. L. 111-5, signed into law February 17, 2009. 2. However, the following substantive changes and technical corrections have been made. a. Chapter IV, Subsection 2.h(8) pertaining to the use of Project Labor Agreements (PLA) has been revised to reflect the new Executive Order No. 13502 of, "Use of Project Labor Agreements for Federal Construction Projects," February 6, 2009, that removes restrictions on a recipient's use of Project Labor Agreements and rescinds former Executive Order No. 13202, "Preservation of Open Competition and Government Neutrality Towards Government Contractors' Labor Relations on Federal and Federally Funded Construction Projects," February 17, 2001, as amended by Executive Order No. 13208, April 6, 2001, 41 U.S.C. Section 251 note. b. Chapter VI, Subsection 3(a)(1) has been corrected to state that micro -purchase standards may be used for contracts of $3,000 or less, except that Davis -Bacon requirements will apply to third party contracts of more than $2,000. C. In Appendix A, a reference to the new Executive Order, No. 13502 of, "Use of Project Labor Agreements for Federal Construction Projects," February 6, 2009, has been added. d. In Appendix D, "FEDERALLY REQUIRED AND OTHER MODEL CLAUSES," "A. REQUIRED THIRD PARTY CONTRACT CLAUSES," we set out separate category for Termination clauses for third party contracts exceeding $10,000 to which 49 CFR Part 18 applies. [Appendix D, Page 1 of 8]. e. In Appendix D, "FEDERALLY REQUIRED AND OTHER MODEL CLAUSES," "A. REQUIRED THIRD PARTY CONTRACT CLAUSES," we set out separate category for Suspension and Debarment clauses for third party contracts exceeding $25,000. [Appendix D, Page 1 of 8]. f. In Appendix D, "FEDERALLY REQUIRED AND OTHER MODEL CLAUSES," "APPLICABILITY OF THIRD PARTY CONTRACT CLAUSES," we added information that the requirement for a Termination clause applies to third party contracts exceeding $10,000 to which 49 CFR Part 18 applies. [Appendix D, Page 6 of 81 g. In Appendix D, "FEDERALLY REQUIRED AND OTHER MODEL CLAUSES," "APPLICABILITY OF THIRD PARTY CONTRACT CLAUSES," we added information that the requirement for a Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act clause applies to third party contracts exceeding $100,000 to which 49 CFR Part 18 applies. [Appendix D, Page 6 of 8]. Date Company Name FEDERAL CHANGES 49 CFR Part 18 Applicability to Contracts The Federal Changes requirement applies to all contracts. Flow Down The Federal Changes requirement flows down appropriately to each applicable changed requirement. Model Clause/Lang_uage No specific language is mandated. The following language has been developed by FTA. Federal Changes - Contractor shall at all times comply with all applicable FTA regulations, policies, procedures and directives, including without limitation those listed directly or by reference in the Master Agreement between Purchaser and FTA, as they may be amended or promulgated from time to time during the term of this contract. Contractor's failure to so comply shall constitute a material breach of this contract. Date Signature Company Name. Title Date Signature Company Name TERMINATION sTitle , 49 U.S.C.Part 18 FTA Circular 4220.1E Applicability to Contracts All contracts (with the exception of contracts with nonprofit organizations and institutions of higher education,) in excess of $10,000 shall contain suitable provisions for termination by the grantee including the manner by which it will be effected and the basis for settlement. (For contracts with nonprofit organizations and institutions of higher education the threshold is $100,000.) In addition, such contracts shall describe conditions under which the contract may be terminated for default as well as conditions where the contract may be terminated because of circumstances beyond the control of the contractor. Flow Down The termination requirements flow down to all contracts in excess of $10,000, with the exception of contracts with nonprofit organizations and institutions of higher learning. Model Clause/Lan aee FTA does not prescribe the form or content of such clauses. The following are suggestions of clauses to be used in different types of contracts: a. Termination for Convenience (General Provision) The (Recipient) may terminate this contract, in whole or in part, at any time by written notice to the Contractor when it is in the Government's best interest. The Contractor shall be paid its costs, including contract close-out costs, and profit on work performed up to the time of termination. The Contractor shall promptly submit its termination claim to (Recipient) to be paid the Contractor. If the Contractor has any property in its possession belonging to the (Recipient), the Contractor will account for the same, and dispose of it in the manner the (Recipient) directs. b. Termination for Default [Breach or Cause] (General Provision) If the Contractor does not deliver supplies in accordance with the contract delivery schedule, or, if the contract is for services, the Contractor fails to perform in the manner called for in the contract, or if the Contractor fails to comply with any other provisions of the contract, the (Recipient) may terminate this contract for default. Termination shall be effected by serving a notice of termination on the contractor setting forth the manner in which the Contractor is in default. The contractor will only be paid the contract price for supplies delivered and accepted, or services performed in accordance with the manner of performance set forth in the contract. If it is later determined by the (Recipient) that the Contractor had an excusable reason for not performing, such as a strike, fire, or flood, events which are not the fault of or are beyond the control of the Contractor, the (Recipient), after setting up a new delivery of performance schedule, may allow the Contractor to continue work, or treat the termination as a termination for convenience. c. Opportunity to Cure (General Provision) The (Recipient) in its sole discretion may, in the case of a termination for breach or default, allow the Contractor [an appropriately short period of time] in which to cure the defect. In such case, the notice of termination will state the time period in which cure is permitted and other appropriate conditions If Contractor fails to remedy to (Recipient)'s satisfaction the breach or default of any of the terms, covenants, or conditions of this Contract within [ten (10) days] after receipt by Contractor of written notice from (Recipient) setting forth the nature of said breach or default, (Recipient) shall have the right to terminate the Contract without any fin-ther obligation to Contractor. Any such termination for default shall not in any way operate to preclude (Recipient) from also pursuing all available remedies against Contractor and its sureties for said breach or default. i d. Waiver of Remedies for any Breach In the event that (Recipient) elects to waive its remedies for any breach by Contractor of any covenant, term or condition of this Contract, such waiver by (Recipient) shall not limit (Recipient)'s remedies for any succeeding breach of that or of any other term, covenant, or condition of this Contract. e. Termination for Convenience (Professional or Transit Service Contracts) The (Recipient), by written notice, may terminate this contract, in whole or in part, when it is in the Government's interest. If this contract is terminated, the Recipient shall be liable only for payment under the payment provisions of this contract for services rendered before the effective date of termination. f. Termination for Default (Supplies and Service) If the Contractor fails to deliver supplies or to perform the services within the time specified in this contract or any extension or if the Contractor fails to comply with any other provisions of this contract, the (Recipient) may terminate this contract for default. The (Recipient) shall terminate by delivering to the Contractor a Notice of Termination specifying the nature of the default. The Contractor will only be paid the contract price for supplies delivered and accepted, or services performed in accordance with the manner or performance set forth in this contract. If, after termination for failure to fulfill contract obligations, it is determined that the Contractor was not in default, the rights and obligations of the parties shall be the same as if the termination had been issued for the convenience of the Recipient. g. Termination for Default (Transportation Services) If the Contractor fails to pick up the commodities or to perform the services, including delivery services, within the time specified in this contract or any extension or if the Contractor fails to comply with any other provisions of this contract, the (Recipient) may terminate this contract for default. The (Recipient) shall terminate by delivering to the Contractor a Notice of Termination specifying the nature of default. The Contractor will only be paid the contract price for services performed in accordance with the manner of performance set forth in this contract. If this contract is terminated while the Contractor has possession of Recipient goods, the Contractor shall, upon direction of the (Recipient), protect and preserve the goods until surrendered to the Recipient or its agent. The Contractor and (Recipient) shall agree on payment for the preservation and protection of goods. Failure to agree on an amount will be resolved under the Dispute clause. If, after termination for failure to fulfill contract obligations, it is determined that the Contractor was not in default, the rights and obligations of the parties shall be the same as if the termination had been issued for the convenience of the (Recipient). h. Termination for Default (Construction) If the Contractor refuses or fails to prosecute the work or any separable part, with the diligence that will insure its completion within the time specified in this contract or any extension or fails to complete the work within this time, or if the Contractor falls to comply with any other provisions of this contract, the (Recipient) may terminate this contract for default. The (Recipient) shall terminate by delivering to the Contractor a Notice of Termination specifying the nature of the default. In this event, the Recipient may take over the work and compete it by contract or otherwise, and may take possession of and use any materials, appliances, and plant on the work site necessary for completing the work. The Contractor and its sureties shall be liable for any damage to the Recipient resulting from the Contractor's refusal or failure to complete the work within specified time, whether or not the Contractor's right to proceed with the work is terminated. This liability includes any increased costs incurred by the Recipient in completing the work. The Contractor's right to proceed shall not be terminated nor the Contractor charged with damages under this clause if- t 1. the delay in completing the work arises from unforeseeable causes beyond the control and without the fault or negligence of the Contractor. Examples of such causes include: acts of God, acts of the Recipient, acts of janother Contractor in the performance of a contract with the Recipient, epidemics, quarantine restrictions, strikes, freight embargoes; and 2. the contractor, within [10] days from the beginning of any delay, notifies the (Recipient) in writing of the t- causes of delay. If in the judgment of the (Recipient), the delay is excusable, the time for completing the work shall be extended. The judgment of the (Recipient) shall be final and conclusive on the parties, but subject to appeal under the Disputes clauses. If, after termination of the Contractor's right to proceed, it is determined that the Contractor was not in default, or that the delay was excusable, the rights and obligations of the parties will be the same as if the termination - - had been issued for the convenience of the Recipient. i. Termination for Convenience or Default (Architect and Engineering) The (Recipient) may terminate this contract in whole or in part, for the Recipient's convenience or because of the failure of the Contractor to fulfill the contract obligations. The (Recipient) shall terminate by delivering to the Contractor a Notice of Termination specifying the nature, extent, and effective date of the termination. Upon receipt of the notice, the Contractor shall (1) immediately discontinue all services affected (unless the notice directs otherwise), and (2) deliver to the Contracting Officer all data, drawings, specifications, reports, estimates, summaries, and other information and materials accumulated in performing this contract, whether completed or in process. If the termination is for the convenience of the Recipient, the Contracting Officer shall make an equitable adjustment in the contract price but shall allow no anticipated profit on unperformed services. If the termination is for failure of the Contractor to fulfill the contract obligations, the Recipient may complete the work by contact or otherwise and the Contractor shall be liable for any additional cost incurred by the Recipient. If, after termination for failure to fulfill contract obligations, it is determined that the Contractor was not in default, the rights and obligations of the parties shall be the same as if the termination had been issued for the ` convenience of the Recipient. j. Termination for Convenience of Default (Cost -Type Contracts) The (Recipient) may terminate this contract, or any portion of it, by serving a notice or termination on the Contractor. The notice' shall state whether the termination is for convenience of the (Recipient) or for the default of the Contractor. If the termination is for default, the notice shall state the manner in which the contractor has failed to perform the requirements of the contract. The Contractor shall account for any property in its possession paid for from funds received from the (Recipient), or property supplied to the Contractor by the (Recipient). If the termination is for default, the (Recipient) may fix the fee, if the contract provides for a fee, to be paid the contractor in proportion to the value, if any, of work performed up to the time of termination. The Contractor shall promptly submit its termination claim to the (Recipient) and the parties shall negotiate the termination settlement to -be paid the Contractor. If the termination is for the convenience of the (Recipient), the Contractor shall be paid its contract close-out costs, and a fee, if the contract provided for payment of a fee, in proportion to the work performed up to the time of termination. If, after serving a notice of termination for default, the (Recipient) determines that the Contractor has an [_ excusable reason for not performing, such as strike, fire, flood, events which are not the fault of and are beyond the control of the contractor, the (Recipient), after setting up a new work schedule, may allow the Contractor to continue work, or treat the termination as a termination for convenience. i CIVIL RIGHTS REQUIREMENTS 29 U.S.C. § 623,42 U.S.C. § 2000 42 U.S.C. § 6102, 42 U.S.C. § 12112 42 U.S.C. § 12132, 49 U.S.C. § 5332 29 CFR Part 1630, 41 CFR Parts 60 et seq. Applicability to Contracts The Civil Rights Requirements apply to all contracts. Applicability to Micro -Purchases Micro -purchases are defined as those purchases under $2,500. These requirements do not apply to micro - purchases. Flow Down The Civil Rights requirements flow down to all third party contractors and their contracts at every tier. Model Clause/Language The following clause was predicated on language contained at 49 CFR Part 19, Appendix A, but FTA has shorten the lengthy text. Civil Rights - The following requirements apply to the underlying contract: (1) Nondiscrimination - In accordance with Title VI of the Civil Rights Act, as amended, 42 U.S.C. § 2000d, section 303 of the Age Discrimination Act of 1975, as amended, 42 U.S.C. § 6102, section 202 of the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990, 42 U.S.C. § 12132, and Federal transit law at 49 U.S.C. § 5332, the Contractor agrees that it will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, color, creed, national origin, sex, age, or disability. In addition, the Contractor agrees to comply with applicable Federal implementing regulations and other implementing requirements FTA may issue. (2) Equal Employment Opportunity - The following equal employment opportunity requirements apply to the underlying contract: (a) Race, Color, Creed, National Origin, Sex - In accordance with Title VII of the Civil Rights Act, as amended, 42 U.S.C. § 2000e, and Federal transit laws at 49 U.S.C. § 5332, the Contractor agrees to comply with all applicable equal employment opportunity requirements of U.S. Department of Labor (U.S. DOL) regulations, "Office of Federal Contract Compliance Programs, Equal Employment Opportunity, Department of Labor," 41 C.F.R. Parts 60 et seq ., (which implement Executive Order No. 11246, 'Equal Employment Opportunity," as amended by Executive Order No. 11375, "Amending Executive Order 11246 Relating to Equal Employment Opportunity," 42 U.S.C. § 2000e note), and with any applicable Federal statutes, executive orders, regulations, and Federal policies that may in the future affect construction activities undertaken in the course of the Project. The Contractor agrees to take affirmative action to ensure that applicants are employed, and that employees are treated during employment, without regard to their race, color, creed, national origin, sex, or age. Such action shall include, but not be limited to, the following: employment, upgrading, demotion or transfer, recruitment or recruitment advertising, layoff or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship. In addition, the Contractor agrees to comply with any implementing requirements FTA may issue. (b) Age - In accordance with section 4 of the Age Discrimination in Employment Act of 1967, as amended, 29 _ i U.S.C. § § 623 and Federal transit law at 49 U.S.C. § 5332, the Contractor agrees to refrain from discrimination against present and prospective employees for reason of age. In addition, the Contractor agrees to comply with any implementing requirements FTA may issue._ (c) Disabilities - In accordance with section 102 of the Americans with Disabilities Act, as amended, 42 U.S.C. § 12112, the Contractor agrees that it will comply with the requirements of U.S. Equal Employment Opportunity Commission, "Regulations to Implement the Equal Employment Provisions of the Americans with Disabilities Act," 29 C.F.R. Part 1630, pertaining to employment of persons with disabilities. In addition, the Contractor agrees to comply with any implementing requirements FTA may issue. (3) The Contractor also agrees to include these requirements in each subcontract financed in whole or in part with Federal assistance provided by FTA, modified only if necessary to identify the affected parties. Signature Company Name Title DISADVANTAGED BUSINESS ENTERPRISE (DBE) 49 CFR Part 26 Background and Applicability The newest version on the Department of Transportation's Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (DBE) program became effective July 16, 2003. The rule provides guidance to grantees on the use of overall and contract goals, requirement to include DBE provisions in subcontracts, evaluating DBE participation where specific contract goals have been set, reporting requirements, and replacement of DBE subcontractors. Additionally, the DBE program dictates payment terms and conditions (including limitations on retainage) applicable to all subcontractors regardless of whether they are DBE firms or not. The DBE program applies to all DOT -assisted contracting activities. A formal clause such as that below must be included in all contracts above the micro -purchase level. The requirements of clause subsection b flow down to subcontracts. A substantial change to the payment provisions in this newest version of Part 26 concerns retainage (see section 26.29). Grantee choices concerning retainage should be reflected in the language choices in clause subsection d. Clause Language The following clause language is suggested, not mandatory. It incorporates the payment terms and conditions applicable to all subcontractors based in Part 26 as well as those related only to DBE subcontractors. The suggested language allows for the options available to grantees concerning retainage, specific contract goals, and evaluation of DBE subcontracting participation when specific contract goals have been established. Disadvantaged Business Enterprises a. This contract is subject to the requirements of Title 49, Code of Federal Regulations, Part 26, Participation by Disadvantaged Business Enterprises in Department of Transportation Financial Assistance Programs. The national goal for participation of Disadvantaged Business Enterprises (DBE) is 10%. The agency's overall goal for DBE participation is _ %. A separate contract goal [of _ % DBE participation has] [has not] been established for this procurement. b. The contractor shall not discriminate on the basis of race, color, national origin, or sex in the performance of this contract. The contractor shall carry out applicable requirements of 49 CFR Part 26 in the award and administration of this DOT -assisted contract. Failure by the contractor to carry out these requirements is a material breach of this contract, which may result in the termination of this contract or such other remedy as {insert agency name} deems appropriate. Each subcontract the contractor signs with a subcontractor must include the assurance in this paragraph (see 49 CFR 26.13(b)). c. {If a separate contract goal has been established, use the following} Bidders/offerors are required to t...i document sufficient DBE participation to meet these goals or, alternatively, document adequate good faith efforts to do so, as provided for in 49 CFR 26.53. Award of this contract is conditioned on submission of the-� following [concurrent with and accompanying sealed bid] [concurrent with and accompanying an initial proposal] [prior to award]: a 1. The names and addresses of DBE firms that will participate in this contract; 2. A description of the work each DBE will perform; 3. The dollar amount of the participation of each DBE firm participating; 4. Written documentation of the bidder/offeror's commitment to use a DBE subcontractor whose participation it submits to meet the contract goal; 5. Written confirmation from the DBE that it is participating in the contract as provided in the prime contractor's commitment; and 6. If the contract goal is not met, evidence of good faith efforts to do so. [Bidders][Offerors] must present the information required above [as a matter of responsiveness] [with initial proposals] [prior to contract award] (see 49 CFR 26.53(3)). {If no separate contract goal has been established, use the following} The successful bidder/offeror will be required to report its DBE participation obtained through race -neutral means throughout the period of performance. d. The contractor is required to pay its subcontractors performing work related to this contract for satisfactory performance of that work no later than 30 days after the contractor's receipt of payment for that work from the {insert agency name}. In addition, [the contractor may not hold retainage from its subcontractors.] [is required to return any retainage payments to those subcontractors within 30 days after the subcontractor's work related to this contract is satisfactorily completed.] [is required to return any retainage payments to those subcontractors within 30 days after incremental acceptance of the subcontractor's work by the {insert agency name} and contractor's receipt of the partial retainage payment related to the subcontractor's work.] e. The contractor must promptly notify {insert agency name}, whenever a DBE subcontractor performing work related to this contract is terminated or fails to complete its work, and must make good faith efforts to engage another DBE subcontractor to perform at least the same amount of work. The contractor may not terminate any DBE subcontractor and perform that work through its own forces or those of an affiliate without prior written consent of {insert agency name). Date Company Name Title INCORPORATION OF FEDERAL TRANSIT ADMINISTRATION (FTA) TERMS FTA Circular 4220.1E Applicability to Contracts The incorporation of FTA terms applies to all contracts. Flow Down The incorporation of FTA terms has unlimited flow down. Model Clause/Language FTA has developed the following incorporation of terms language: Incorporation of Federal Transit Administration (FTA) Terms - The preceding provisions include, in part, certain Standard Terms and Conditions required by DOT, whether or not expressly set forth in the preceding contract provisions. All contractual provisions required by DOT, as set forth in FTA Circular 4220.1E, are hereby incorporated by reference. Anything to the contrary herein notwithstanding, all FTA mandated terms shall be deemed to control in the event of a conflict with other provisions contained in this Agreement. The Contractor shall not perform any act, fail to perform any act, or refuse to comply with any (name of grantee) requests which would cause (name of grantee) to be in violation of the FTA terms and conditions. Date Signature Company Name Title GOVERNMENT -WIDE DEBARMENT AND SUSPENSION (NONPROCUREMENTI 49 CFR Part 29 Executive Order 12549 Background and Applicability In conjunction with the Office of Management and Budget and other affected Federal agencies, DOT published an update to 49 CFR Part 29 on November 26, 2003. This government -wide regulation implements Executive Order 12549, Debarment and Suspension, Executive Order 12689, Debarment and Suspension, and 31 U.S.C. 6101 note (Section 2455, Public Law 103-355, 108 Stat. 3327). The provisions of Part 29 apply to all grantee contracts and subcontracts at any level expected to equal or exceed $25,000 as well'as any contract or subcontract (at any level) for Federally required auditing services. 49 CFR 29.220(b). This represents a change from prior practice in that the dollar threshold for application of these rules has been lowered from $100,000 to $25,000. These are contracts and subcontracts referred to in the regulation as "covered transactions." Grantees, contractors, and subcontractors (at any level) that enter into covered transactions are required to verify that the entity (as well as its principals and affiliates) they propose to contract or subcontract with is not excluded or disqualified. They do this by (a) Checking the Excluded Parties List System, (b) Collecting a certification from that person, or (c) Adding a clause or condition to the contract or subcontract. This represents a change from prior practice in that certification is still acceptable but is no longer required. 49 CFR 29.300. Grantees, contractors, and subcontractors who enter into covered transactions also must require the entities they contract with to comply with 49 CFR 29, subpart C and include this requirement in their own subsequent i covered transactions (i.e., the requirement flows down to subcontracts at all levels). Clause Language --' The following clause language is suggested, not mandatory. It incorporates the optional method of verifying that contractors are not excluded or disqualified by certification. Suspension and Debarment This contract is a covered transaction for purposes of 49 CFR Part 29. As such, the contractor is required to verify that none of the contractor, its principals, as defined at 49 CFR 29.995, or affiliates, as defined at 49 CFR 29.905, are excluded or disqualified as defined at 49 CFR 29.940 and 29.945. The contractor is required to comply with 49 CFR 29, Subpart C and must include the requirement to comply with 49 CFR 29, Subpart C in any lower tier covered transaction it enters into. By signing and submitting its bid or proposal, the bidder or proposer certifies as follows: The certification in this clause is a material representation of fact relied upon by (insert agency name). If it is later determined that the bidder or proposer knowingly rendered an erroneous certification, in addition to remedies available to {insert agency name}, the Federal Government may pursue available remedies, including but not limited to suspension and/or debarment. The bidder or proposer agrees to comply with the requirements of 49 CFR 29, Subpart C while this offer is valid and throughout the period of any contract that may arise from this offer. The bidder or proposer further agrees to include a provision requiring such compliance in its lower tier covered transactions. c, t_ BUY AMERICA REQUIREMENTS 49 U.S.C. 53230) 49 CFR Part 661 Apylicabilb to Contracts ' The Buy America requirements apply to the following types of contracts: Construction Contracts and Acquisition of Goods or Rolling Stock (valued at more than $100,000). Flow Down The Buy America requirements flow down from FTA recipients and subrecipients to first tier contractors, who are responsible for ensuring that lower tier contractors and subcontractors are in compliance. The $100,000 threshold applies only to the grantee contract, subcontracts under that amount are subject to Buy America. Mandatory Clause/Langu. ag_e The Buy America regulation, at 49 CFR 661.13, requires notification of the Buy America requirements in FTA-funded contracts, but does not specify the language to be used. The following language has been developed by FTA. Buy America - The contractor agrees to comply with 49 U.S.C. 53230) and 49 C.F.R. Part 661, which provide that Federal funds may not be obligated unless steel, iron, and manufactured products used in FTA-funded projects are produced in the United States, unless a waiver has been granted by FTA or the product is subject to a general waiver. General waivers are listed in 49 C.F.R. 661.7, and include final assembly in the United States for 15 passenger vans and 15 passenger wagons produced by Chrysler Corporation, and microcomputer equipment and software. Separate requirements for rolling stock are set out at 49 U.S.C. 53230)(2)(C) and 49 C.F.R. 661.11. Rolling stock must be assembled in the United States and have a 60 percent domestic content. A bidder or offeror must submit to the FTA recipient the appropriate Buy America certification (below) with all bids or offers on FTA-funded contracts, except those subject to a general waiver. Bids or offers that are not accompanied by a completed Buy America certification must be rejected as nonresponsive. This requirement does not apply to lower tier subcontractors. Certification requirement for procurement of steel, iron, or manufactured products. Certificate of Compliance with 49 U.S.C. 53236)(1) The bidder or offeror hereby certifies that it will meet the requirements of 49 U.S.C. 53230)(1) and the applicable regulations in 49 CFR Part 661.5. Date Signature Company Name Title Certificate ofNon-Compliance with 49 U.S.C. 53236)(1) 1 The bidder or offeror hereby certifies that it cannot comply with the requirements of 49 U.S.C. 53230)(1) and 49 C.F.R. 661.5, but it may qualify for an exception pursuant to 49 U.S.C. 53230)(2)(A), 53230)(2)(B), or 53230)(2)(D), and 49 C.F.R. 661.7. Date Signature Company Name Title Certification requirement for procurement of buses, other rolling stock and associated equipment. Certificate of Compliance with 49 U.S C. 53236)(2)(C). The bidder or offeror hereby certifies that it will comply with the requirements of 49 U.S.C. 53230)(2)(C) and the regulations at 49 C.F.R. Part 661.11. Date Signature Company Name Title Certificate ofNon-Compliance with 49 U.S.C. 53236)(2)(C) The bidder or offeror hereby certifies that it cannot comply with the requirements of 49 U.S.C. 53230)(2)(C) and 49 C.F.R. 661.11, but may qualify for an exception pursuant to 49 U.S.C. 53230)(2)(A), 53230)(2)(B), or 53230)(2)(D), and 49 C.F.R. 661.7. Date Signature Company Name Title BREACHES AND DISPUTE RESOLUTION 49 CFR Part 18 FTA Circular 4220.1E Applicability to Contracts All contracts in excess of $100,000 shall contain provisions or conditions which will allow for administrative, contractual, or legal remedies in instances where contractors violate or breach contract terms, and provide for such sanctions and penalties as may be appropriate. This may include provisions for bonding, penalties for late or inadequate performance, retained earnings, liquidated damages or other appropriate measures. Flow Down The Breaches and Dispute Resolutions requirements flow down to all tiers. Model Clauses/Language FTA does not prescribe the form or content of such provisions. What provisions are developed will depend on the circumstances and the type of contract. Recipients should consult legal counsel in developing appropriate clauses. The following clauses are examples of provisions from various FTA third party contracts. Disputes - Disputes arising in the performance of this Contract which are not resolved by agreement of the parties shall be decided in writing by the authorized representative of (Recipient)'s [title of employee]. This decision shall be final and conclusive unless within [ten (10)] days from the date of receipt of its copy, the Contractor mails or otherwise furnishes a written appeal to the [title of employee]. In connection with any such appeal, the Contractor shall be afforded an opportunity to be heard and to offer evidence in support of its position. The decision of the [title of employee] shall be binding upon the Contractor and the Contractor shall abide be the decision. Performance During Dispute - Unless otherwise directed by (Recipient), Contractor shall continue performance under this Contract while matters in dispute are being resolved. Claims for Damages - Should either party to the Contract suffer injury or damage to person or property because of any act or omission of the party or of any of his employees, agents or others for whose acts he is legally liable, a claim for damages therefor shall be made in writing to such other party within a reasonable time after the fast observance of such injury of damage. Remedies - Unless this contract provides otherwise, all claims, counterclaims, disputes and other matters in question between the (Recipient) and the Contractor arising out of or relating to this agreement or its breach will be decided by arbitration if the parties mutually agree, or in a court of competent jurisdiction within the State in which the (Recipient) is located. Rights and Remedies - The duties and obligations imposed by the Contract Documents and the rights and remedies available thereunder shall be in addition to and not a limitation of any duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise imposed or available by law. No action or failure to act by the (Recipient), (Architect) or Contractor shall constitute a waiver of any right or duty afforded any of them under the Contract, nor shall any such action or failure to act constitute an approval of or acquiescence in any breach thereunder, except as may be specifically agreed in writing. Date Signature Company Name Title 1 LOBBYING 31 U.S.C. 1352 49 CFR Part 19 49 CFR Part 20 Applicability to Contracts The Lobbying requirements apply to Construction/Architectural and Engineering/Acquisition of Rolling Stock/Professional Service Contract/Operational Service Contract/Turnkey contracts. Flow Down The Lobbying requirements mandate the maximum flow down, pursuant to Byrd Anti -Lobbying Amendment, 31 U.S.C. § 1352(b)(5) and 49 C.F.R. Part 19, Appendix A, Section 7. Mandatory Clause/Langnage Clause and specific language therein are mandated by 49 CFR Part 19, Appendix A. Modifications have been made to the Clause pursuant to Section 10 of the Lobbying Disclosure Act of 1995, P.L. 104-65 [to be codified at 2 U.S.C. § 1601, et seq.] - Lobbying Certification and Disclosure of Lobbying Activities for third party contractors are mandated by 31 U.S.C. 1352(b)(5), as amended by Section 10 of the Lobbying Disclosure Act of 1995, and DOT implementing regulation, "New Restrictions on Lobbying," at 49 CFR § 20.110(d) - Language in Lobbying Certification is mandated by 49 CFR Part 19, Appendix A, Section 7, which provides that contractors file the certification required by 49 CFR Part 20, Appendix A. Modifications have been made to the Lobbying Certification pursuant to Section 10 of the Lobbying Disclosure Act of 1995. - Use of "Disclosure of Lobbying Activities," Standard Form-LLL set forth in Appendix B of 49 CFR Part 20, t, as amended by "Government wide Guidance For New Restrictions on Lobbying," 61 Fed. Reg. 1413 (1/19/96) is mandated by 49 CFR Part 20, Appendix A. Byrd Anti -Lobbying Amendment, 31 U.S.C. 1352, as amended by the Lobbying Disclosure Act of 1995, P.L. 104-65 [to be codified at 2 U.S.C. § 1601, et seq.] - Contractors who apply or bid for an award of $100,000 or more shall file the certification required by 49 CFR part 20, "New Restrictions on Lobbying." Each tier certifies to the tier above that it will not and has not used Federal appropriated funds to pay any person or organization for influencing or attempting to influence an officer or employee of any agency, a member of Congress, officer or employee of Congress, or an employee of a member of Congress in connection with obtaining any Federal contract, grant or any other award covered by 31 U.S.C. 1352. Each tier shall also disclose the name of any registrant under the Lobbying Disclosure Act of 1995 who has made lobbying contacts on its behalf with non - Federal funds with respect to that Federal contract, grant or award covered by 31 U.S.C. 1352. Such disclosures are forwarded from tier to tier up to the recipient. APPENDIX A, 49 CFR PART 20--CERTIFICATION REGARDING LOBBYING Certification for Contracts, Grants, Loans, and Cooperative Agreements (To be submitted with each bid or offer exceeding $100, 000) The undersigned [Contractor] certifies, to the best of his or her knowledge and belief, that: (1) No Federal appropriated funds have been paid or will be paid, by or on behalf of the undersigned, to any person for influencing or attempting to influence an officer or employee of an agency, a Member of Congress, an officer or employee of Congress, or an employee of a Member of Congress in connection with the awarding of any Federal contract, the making of any Federal grant, the making of any Federal loan, the entering into of any cooperative agreement, and the extension, continuation, renewal, amendment, or modification of any Federal contract, grant, loan, or cooperative agreement. (2) If any funds other than Federal appropriated funds have been paid or will be paid to any person for making lobbying contacts to an officer or employee of any agency, a Member of Congress, an officer or employee of Congress, or an employee of a Member of Congress in connection with this Federal contract, grant, loan, or cooperative agreement, the undersigned shall complete and submit Standard Form--LLL, "Disclosure Form to Report Lobbying," in accordance with its instructions [as amended by "Government wide Guidance for New Restrictions on Lobbying," 61 Fed. Reg. 1413 (1/19/96). Note: Language in paragraph (2) herein has been modified in accordance with Section 10 of the Lobbying Disclosure Act of 1995 (P.L. 104-65, to be codified at 2 U.S.C. 1601, etseq.)] (3) The undersigned shall require that the language of this certification be included in the award documents for all subawards at all tiers (including subcontracts, subgrants, and contracts under grants, loans, and cooperative agreements) and that all subrecipients shall certify and disclose accordingly. This certification is a material representation of fact upon which reliance was placed when this transaction was made or entered into. Submission of this certification is a prerequisite for making or entering into this transaction imposed by 31, U.S.C. § 1352 (as amended by the Lobbying Disclosure Act of 1995). Any person who fails to file the required certification shall be subject to a civil penalty of not less than $10,000 and not more than $100,000 for each such failure. [Note: Pursuant to 31 U.S.C. § 1352(c)(1)-(2)(A), any person who makes a prohibited expenditure or fails to file or amend a required certification or disclosure form shall be subject to a civil penalty of not less than $10,000 and not more than $100,000 for each such expenditure or failure.] The Contractor, certifies or affirms the truthfulness and accuracy of each statement of its certification and disclosure, if any. In addition, the Contractor understands and agrees that the provisions of 31 U.S.C. A 3801, et seq., apply to this certification and disclosure, if any. Signature of Contractor's Authorized Official Name and Title of Contractor's Authorized Official Date 1 I CLEAN AIR 42 U.S.C. 7401 et seq 40 CFR 15.61 49 CFR Part 18 Applicability to Contracts The Clean Air requirements apply to all contracts exceeding $100,000, including indefinite quantities where the amount is expected to exceed $100,000 in any year. Flow Down The Clean Air requirements flow down to all subcontracts which exceed $100,000. Model Clauses/Language No specific language is required. FTA has proposed the following language. Clean Air - (1) The Contractor agrees to comply with all applicable standards, orders or regulations issued pursuant to the Clean Air Act, as amended, 42 U.S.C. §§ 7401 et se . The Contractor agrees to report each violation to the Purchaser and understands and agrees that the Purchaser will, in turn, report each violation as required to assure notification to FTA and the appropriate EPA Regional Office. (2) The Contractor also agrees to include these requirements in each subcontract exceeding $100,000 financed in whole or in part with Federal assistance provided by FTA. Signature Company Name Title ['11111 CLEAN WATER REQUIREMENTS 33 U.S.C. 1251 Applicability to Contracts The Clean Water requirements apply to each contract and subcontract which exceeds $100,000. Flow Down The Clean Water requirements flow down to FTA recipients and subrecipients at every tier. Model Clause/Lan wage While no mandatory clause is contained in the Federal Water Pollution Control Act, as amended, the following language developed by FTA contains all the mandatory requirements: Clean Water - (1) The Contractor agrees to comply with all applicable standards, orders or regulations issued pursuant to the Federal Water Pollution Control Act, as amended, 33 U.S.C. 1251 et seq. The Contractor agrees to report each violation to the Purchaser and understands and agrees that the Purchaser will, in turn, report each violation as required to assure notification to FTA and the appropriate EPA Regional Office. (2) The Contractor also agrees to include these requirements in each subcontract exceeding $100,000 financed in whole or in part with Federal assistance provided by FTA. Date Signature Company Name DAVIS-BACON AND COPELAND ANTI -KICKBACK ACTS Background and Application The Davis -Bacon and Copeland Acts are codified at 40 USC 3141, et seq. and 18 USC 874. The Acts apply to grantee construction contracts and subcontracts that "at least partly are financed by a loan or grant from the Federal Government." 40 USC 3145(a), 29 CFR 5.2(h), 49 CFR 18.36(i)(5). The Acts apply to any construction contract over $2,000.40 USC 3142(a), 29 CFR 5.5(a). `Construction,' for purposes of the Acts, includes "actual construction, alteration and/or repair, including painting and decorating." 29 CFR 5.5(a). The requirements of both Acts are incorporated into a single clause (see 29 CFR 3.11) enumerated at 29 CFR 5.5(a) and reproduced below. The clause language is drawn directly from 29 CFR 5.5(a) and any deviation from the model clause below should be coordinated with counsel to ensure the Acts' requirements are satisfied. Clause Language Davis -Bacon and Copeland Anti -Kickback Acts (1) Minimum wages - (i) All laborers and mechanics employed or working upon the site of the work (or under the United States Housing Act of 1937 or under the Housing Act of 1949 in the construction or development of the project), will be paid unconditionally and not less often than once a week, and without subsequent deduction or rebate on any account (except such payroll deductions as are permitted by regulations issued by the Secretary of Labor under the Copeland Act (29 CFR part 3)), the full amount of wages and bona fide fringe benefits (or cash equivalents thereof) due at time of payment computed at rates not less than those contained in the wage determination of the Secretary of Labor which is attached hereto and made a part hereof, regardless of any contractual relationship which may be alleged to exist between the contractor and such laborers and mechanics. Contributions made or costs reasonably anticipated for bona fide fringe benefits under section l(b)(2) of the Davis -Bacon Act on behalf of laborers or mechanics are considered wages paid to such laborers or mechanics, subject to the provisions of paragraph (1)(iv) of this section; also, regular contributions made or costs incurred for more than a weekly period (but not less often than quarterly) under plans, funds, or programs which cover the particular weekly period, are deemed to be constructively made or incurred during such weekly period. Such laborers and mechanics shall be paid the appropriate wage rate and fringe benefits on the wage determination for the classification of work actually performed, without regard to skill, except as provided in 29 CFR Part 5.5(a)(4). Laborers or mechanics performing work in more than one classification may be compensated at the rate specified for each classification for the time actually worked therein: Provided, That the employer's payroll records accurately set forth the time spent in each classification in which work is performed. The wage determination (including any additional classifications and wage rates conformed under paragraph (1)(ii) of this section) and the Davis -Bacon poster (WH-1321) shall be posted at all times by the contractor and its subcontractors at the site of the work in a prominent and accessible place where it can be easily seen by the workers. (ii)(A) The contracting officer shall require that any class of laborers or mechanics, including helpers, which is not listed in the wage determination and which is to be employed under the contract shall be classified in conformance with the wage determination. The contracting officershall approve an additional classification and wage rate and fringe benefits therefore only when the following criteria have been met: (1) Except with respect to helpers as defined as 29 CFR 5.2(n)(4), the work to be performed by the classification requested is not performed by a classification in the wage determination; and (2) The classification is utilized in the area by the construction industry; and (3) The proposed wage rate, including any bona fide fringe benefits, bears a reasonable relationship to the I wage rates contained in the wage determination; and I s (4) With respect to helpers as defined in 29 CFR 5.2(n)(4), such a classification prevails in the area in which the work is performed. (B) If the contractor and the laborers and mechanics to be employed in the classification (if known), or their representatives, and the contracting officer agree on the classification and wage rate (including the amount designated for fringe benefits where appropriate), a report of the action taken shall be sent by the contracting officer to the Administrator of the Wage and Hour Division, Employment Standards Administration, U.S. Department of Labor, Washington, DC 20210. The Administrator, or an authorized representative, will approve, modify, or disapprove every additional classification action within 30 days of receipt and so advise the contracting officer or will notify the contracting officer within the 30-day period that additional time is necessary. (C) In the event the contractor, the laborers or mechanics to be employed in the classification or their representatives, and the contracting officer do not agree on the proposed classification and wage rate (including the amount designated for fringe benefits, where appropriate), the contracting officer shall refer the questions, including the views of all interested parties and the recommendation of the contracting officer, to the Administrator for determination. The Administrator, or an authorized representative, will issue a determination within 30 days of receipt and so advise the contracting officer or will notify the contracting officer within the 30-day period that additional time is necessary. (D) The wage rate (including Tinge benefits where appropriate) determined pursuant to paragraphs (a)(1)(ii) (B) or (C) of this section, shall be paid to all workers performing work in the classification under this contract from the first day on which work is performed in the classification. (iii) Whenever the minimum wage rate prescribed in the contract for a class of laborers or mechanics includes a fiinge benefit which is not expressed as an hourly rate, the contractor shall either pay the benefit as stated in the wage determination or shall pay another bona fide fringe benefit or an hourly cash equivalent thereof. (iv) If the contractor does not make payments to a trustee or other third person, the contractor may consider as part of the wages of any laborer or mechanic the amount of any costs reasonably anticipated in providing bona fide fringe benefits under a plan or program, Provided, That the Secretary of Labor has found, upon the written request of the contractor, that the applicable standards of the Davis -Bacon Act have been met. The Secretary of Labor may require the contractor to set aside in a separate account assets for the meeting of obligations under the plan or program. (v)(A) The contracting officer shall require that any class of laborers or mechanics which is not listed in the wage determination and which is to be employed under the contract shall be classified in conformance with the wage determination. The contracting officer shall approve an additional classification and wage rate and fringe benefits therefor only when the following criteria have been met: (1) The work to be performed by the classification requested is not performed by a classification in the wage determination; and (2) The classification is utilized in the area by the construction industry; and (3) The proposed wage rate, including any bona fide fringe benefits, bears a reasonable relationship to the wage rates contained in the wage determination. (B) If the contractor and the laborers and mechanics to be employed in the classification (if known), or their representatives, and the contracting officer agree on the classification and wage rate (including the amount designated for fringe benefits where appropriate), a report of the action taken shall be sent by the contracting b officer to the Administrator of the Wage and Hour Division, Employment Standards Administration, Washington, DC 20210. The Administrator, or an authorized representative, will approve, modify, or disapprove every additional classification action within 30 days of receipt and so advise the contracting officer or will notify the contracting officer within the 30-day period that additional time is necessary. (C) In the event the contractor, the laborers or mechanics to be employed in the classification or their representatives, and the contracting officer do not agree on the proposed classification and wage rate (including the amount designated for Tinge benefits, where appropriate), the contracting officer shall refer the questions, including the views of all interested parties and the recommendation of the contracting officer, to the Administrator for determination. The Administrator, or an authorized representative, will issue a determination with 30 days of receipt and so advise the contracting officer or will notify the contracting officer within the 30 day period that additional time is necessary. (D) The wage rate (including fringe benefits where appropriate) determined pursuant to paragraphs (a)(1)(v) (B) or (C) of this section, shall be paid to all workers performing work in the classification under this contract from the first day on which work is performed in the classification. (2) Withholding - The [ insert name of grantee ] shall upon its own action or upon written request of an authorized representative, of the Department of Labor withhold or cause to be withheld from the contractor under this contract or any other Federal contract with the same prime contractor, or any other federally -assisted contract subject to Davis -Bacon prevailing wage requirements, which is held by the same prime contractor, so much of the accrued payments or advances as may be considered necessary to pay laborers and mechanics, including apprentices, trainees, and helpers, employed by the contractor or any subcontractor the full amount of wages required by the contract. In the event of failure to pay any laborer or mechanic, including any apprentice, trainee, or helper, employed or working on the site of the work (or under the United. States Housing Act of 1937 or under the Housing Act of 1949 in the construction or development of the project), all or part of the wages required by the contract, the [ insert name of grantee ] may, after written notice to the contractor, sponsor, applicant, or owner, take such action as may be necessary to cause the suspension of any further payment, advance, or guarantee of funds until such violations have ceased. (3) Payrolls and basic records - (i) Payrolls and basic records relating thereto shall be maintained by the contractor during the course of the work and preserved for a period of three years thereafter for all laborers and mechanics working at the site of the work (or under the United States Housing Act of 1937, or under the Housing Act of 1949, in the construction or development of the project). Such records shall contain the name, address, and social security number of each such worker, his or her correct classification, hourly rates of wages paid (including rates of contributions or costs anticipated for bona fide fringe benefits or cash equivalents thereof of the types described in section 1(b)(2)(B) of the Davis -Bacon Act), daily and weekly number of hours worked, deductions made and actual wages paid. Whenever the Secretary of Labor has found under 29 CFR 5.5(a)(1)(iv) that the wages of any laborer or mechanic include the amount of any costs reasonably anticipated in providing benefits under a plan or program described in section I(b)(2)(B) of the Davis -Bacon Act, the contractor shall maintain records which show that the commitment to provide such benefits is enforceable, that the plan or program is financially responsible, and that the plan or program has been communicated in writing to the laborers or mechanics affected, and records which show the costs anticipated or the actual cost incurred in providing such benefits. Contractors employing apprentices or trainees under approved programs shall maintain written evidence of the registration of apprenticeship programs and certification of trainee programs, the registration of the apprentices and trainees, and the ratios and wage rates prescribed in the applicable programs. (ii)(A) The contractor shall submit weekly for each week in which any contract work is performed a copy of all payrolls to the [ insert name of grantee ] for transmission to the Federal Transit Administration. The payrolls submitted shall set out accurately and completely all of the information required to be maintained under section 5.5 a 3 i of Regulations, 29 CFR part 5. This information may be submitted in any form desired. Optional Form WH-347 is available for this purpose and may be purchased from the Superintendent of Documents (Federal Stock Number 029-005-00014-1), U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, DC 20402. The prime contractor is responsible for the submission of copies of payrolls by all subcontractors. (B) Each payroll submitted shall be accompanied by a "Statement of Compliance," signed by the contractor or subcontractor or his or her agent who pays or supervises the payment of the persons employed under the contract and shall certify the following: (1) That the payroll for the payroll period contains the information required to be maintained under section 5.5(a)(3)(i) of Regulations, 29 CFR part 5 and that such information is correct and complete; (2) That each laborer or mechanic (including each helper, apprentice, and trainee) employed on the contract during the payroll period has been paid the full weekly wages earned, without rebate, either directly or indirectly, and that no deductions have been made either directly or indirectly from the full wages earned, other than permissible deductions as set forth in Regulations, 29 CFR part 3; (3) That each laborer or mechanic has been paid not less than the applicable wage rates and fringe benefits or cash equivalents for the classification of work performed, as specified in the applicable wage determination incorporated into the contract. (C) The weekly submission of a properly executed certification set forth on the reverse side of Optional Form WH-347 shall satisfy the requirement for submission of the "Statement of Compliance" required by paragraph (a)(3)(ii)(B) of this section. (D) The falsification of any of the above certifications may subject the contractor or subcontractor to civil or criminal prosecution under section 1001 of title 18 and section 231 of title 31 of the United States Code. (iii) The contractor or subcontractor shall make the records required under paragraph (a)(3)(i) of this section available for inspection, copying, or transcription by authorized representatives of the Federal Transit Administration or the Department of Labor, and shall permit such representatives to interview employees during working hours on the job. If the contractor or subcontractor fails to submit the required records or to make them available, the Federal agency may, after written notice to the contractor, sponsor, applicant, or owner, take such action as may be necessary to cause the suspension of any further payment, advance, or guarantee of funds. Furthermore, failure to submit the required records upon request or to make such records available may be grounds for debarment action pursuant to 29 CFR 5.12. (4) Apprentices and trainees - (i) Apprentices - Apprentices will be permitted to work at less than the predetermined rate for the work they performed when they are employed pursuant to and individually registered in a bona fide apprenticeship program registered with the U.S. Department of Labor, Employment and Training Administration, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training, or with a State Apprenticeship Agency t recognized by the Bureau, or if a person is employed in his or her first 90 days of probationary employment as an apprentice in such an apprenticeship program, who is not individually registered in the program, but who has been certified by the Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training or a State Apprenticeship Agency (where appropriate) to be eligible for probationary employment as an apprentice. The allowable ratio of apprentices to journeymen on the job site in any craft classification shall not be greater than the ratio permitted to the contractor as to the entire work force under the registered program. Any worker listed on a payroll at an �...� apprentice wage rate, who is not registered or otherwise employed as stated above, shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the classification of work actually performed. In addition, any apprentice performing work on the job site in excess of the ratio permitted under the registered program shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the work actually performed. Where a contractor is performing construction on a project in a locality other than that in which its program is registered, the ratios and wage rates (expressed in percentages of the journeyman's hourly rate) specified in the contractor's or subcontractor's registered program shall be observed. Every apprentice must be paid at not less than the rate specified in the registered program for the apprentice's level of progress, expressed as a percentage of the journeymen hourly rate specified in the applicable wage determination. Apprentices shall be paid fringe'benefits in accordance with the provisions of the apprenticeship program. If the apprenticeship program does not specify fringe benefits, apprentices must be paid the full amount of fringe benefits listed on the wage determination for the applicable classification. If the Administrator of the Wage and Hour Division of the U.S. Department of Labor determines that a different practice prevails for the applicable apprentice classification, fringes shall be paid in accordance with that determination. In the event the Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training, or a State Apprenticeship Agency recognized by the Bureau, withdraws approval of an apprenticeship program, the contractor will no longer be permitted to utilize apprentices at less than the applicable predetermined rate for the work performed until an acceptable program is approved. (ii) Trainees - Except as provided in 29 CFR 5.16, trainees will not be permitted to work at less than the predetermined rate for the work performed unless they are employed pursuant to and individually registered in a program which has received prior approval, evidenced by formal certification by the U.S. Department of Labor, Employment and Training Administration. The ratio of trainees to journeymen on the job site shall not be greater than permitted under the plan approved by the Employment and Training Administration. Every trainee must be paid at not less than the rate specified in the approved program for the trainee's level of progress, expressed as a percentage of the journeyman hourly rate specified in the applicable wage determination. Trainees shall be paid fringe benefits in accordance with the provisions of the trainee program. If the trainee program does not mention fringe benefits, trainees shall be paid the full amount of fringe benefits listed on the wage determination unless the Administrator of the Wage and Hour Division determines that there is an apprenticeship program associated with the corresponding journeyman wage rate on the wage determination which provides for less than full fringe benefits for apprentices. Any employee listed on the payroll at a trainee rate who is not registered and participating in a training plan approved by the Employment and Training Administration shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the classification of work actually performed. In addition, any trainee performing work on the job site in excess of the ratio permitted under the registered program shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the work actually performed. In the event the Employment and Training Administration withdraws approval of a training program, the contractor will no longer be permitted to utilize trainees at less than the applicable predetermined rate for the work performed until an acceptable program is approved. (iii) Equal employment opportunity - The utilization of apprentices, trainees and journeymen under this part E_ shall be in conformity with the equal employment opportunity requirements of Executive Order 11246, as amended, and 29 CFR part 30. (5) Compliance with Copeland Act requirements - The contractor shall comply with the requirements of 29 CFR part 3, which are incorporated by reference in this contract. (6) Subcontracts - The contractor or subcontractor shall insert in any subcontracts the clauses contained in 29 CFR 5.5(a)(1) through (10) and such other clauses as the Federal Transit Administration may by appropriate instructions require, and also a clause requiring the subcontractors to include these clauses in any lower tier subcontracts. The prime contractor shall be responsible for the compliance by any subcontractor or lower tier subcontractor with all the contract clauses in 29 CFR 5.5. (7) Contract termination: debarment - A breach of the contract clauses in 29 CFR 5.5 may be grounds for termination of the contract, and for debarment as a contractor and a subcontractor as provided in 29 CFR 5.12. (8) Compliance with Davis -Bacon and Related Act requirements - All rulings and interpretations of the Davis -Bacon and Related Acts contained in 29 CFR parts 1, 3, and 5 are herein incorporated by reference in this contract. r, (9) Disputes concerning labor standards - Disputes arising out of the labor standards provisions of this contract shall not be subject to the general disputes clause of this contract. Such disputes shall be resolved in accordance with the procedures of the Department of Labor set forth in 29 CFR parts 5, 6, and 7. Disputes within the meaning of this clause include disputes between the contractor (or any of its subcontractors) and the } contracting agency, the U.S. Department of Labor, or the employees or their representatives. (10) Certification of eligibility - (i) By entering into this contract, the contractor certifies that neither it (nor he or she) nor any person or firm who has an interest in the contractor's firm is a person or firm ineligible to be awarded Government contracts by virtue of section 3(a) of the Davis -Bacon Act or 29 CFR 5.12(a)(1). (ii) No part of this contract shall be subcontracted to any person or firm ineligible for award of a Government contract by virtue of section 3(a) of the Davis -Bacon Act or 29 CFR 5.12(a)(1). (iii) The penalty for making false statements is prescribed in the U.S. Criminal Code, 18 U.S.C. 1001. Date Signature Company Name Title al, 9 CONTRACT WORK HOURS AND SAFETY STANDARDS ACT - Background and Application The Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act is codified at 40 USC 3701, et seq. The Act applies to grantee contracts and subcontracts "financed at least in part by loans or grants from ... the [Federal] Government." 40 USC 3701(b)(1)(B)(iii) and (b)(2), 29 CFR 5.2(h), 49 CFR 18.36(i)(6). Although the original Act required its application in any construction contract over $2,000 or non -construction contract to which the ' Act applied over $2,500 (and language to that effect is still found in 49 CFR 18.36(i)(6)), the Act no longer applies to any "contract in an amount that is not greater than $100,000." 40 USC 370 1 (b)(3)(A)(iii). The Act applies to construction contracts and, in very limited circumstances, non -construction projects that employ "laborers or mechanics on a public work." These non -construction applications do not generally apply to transit procurements because transit procurements (to include rail cars and buses) are deemed "commercial items." 40 USC 3707, 41 USC 403 (12). A grantee that contemplates entering into a contract to procure a developmental or unique item should consult counsel to determine if the Act applies to that procurement and that additional language required by 29 CFR 5.5(c) must be added to the basic clause below. The clause language is drawn directly from 29 CFR 5.5(b) and any deviation from the model clause below should be coordinated with counsel to ensure the Act's requirements are satisfied. Clause Lan2uaee Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards (1) Overtime requirements - No contractor or subcontractor contracting for any part of the contract work which may require or involve the employment of laborers or mechanics shall require or permit any such laborer or mechanic in any workweek in which he or she is employed on such work to work in excess of forty hours in such workweek unless such laborer or mechanic receives compensation at a rate not less than one and one-half times the basic rate of pay for all hours worked in excess of forty hours in such workweek. (2) Violation; liability for unpaid wages; liquidated damages - In the event of any violation of the clause set forth in paragraph (1) of this section the contractor and any subcontractor responsible therefor shall be liable for the unpaid wages. In addition, such contractor and subcontractor shall be liable to the United States for 1 liquidated damages. Such liquidated damages shall be computed with respect to each individual laborer or mechanic, including watchmen and guards, employed in violation of the clause set forth in paragraph (1) of this section, in the sum of $10 for each calendar day on which such individual was required or permitted to work in excess of the standard workweek of forty hours without payment of the overtime wages required by the clause set forth in paragraph (1) of this section. (3) Withholding for unpaid wages and liquidated damages - The (write in the name of the grantee) shall upon its own action or upon written request of an authorized representative of the Department of Labor withhold or cause to be withheld, from any moneys payable on account of work performed by the contractor or subcontractor under any such contract or any other Federal contract with the same prime contractor, or any other federally -assisted contract subject to the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act, which is held by the same prime contractor, such sums as may be determined to be necessary to satisfy any liabilities of such contractor or subcontractor for unpaid wages and liquidated damages as provided in the clause set forth in paragraph (2) of this section. (4) Subcontracts - The contractor or subcontractor shall insert in any subcontracts the clauses set forth in paragraphs (1) through (4) of this section and also a clause requiring the subcontractors to include these clauses in any lower tier subcontracts. The prime contractor shall be responsible for compliance by any subcontractor - or lower tier subcontractor with the clauses set forth in paragraphs (1) through (4) of this section. Date -" Signature Company Name _ X Title ]'IIIlaMIUVInfI1Fc1 Applicability to Contracts For those construction or facility improvement contracts or subcontracts exceeding $100,000, FTA may accept the bonding policy and requirements of the recipient, provided that they meet the minimum requirements for construction contracts as follows: a. A bid guarantee from each bidder equivalent to five (5) percent of the bid price. The "bid guarantees" shall consist of a firm commitment such as a bid bond, certifies check, or other negotiable instrument accompanying a bid as assurance that the bidder will, upon acceptance of his bid, execute such contractual documents as may be required within the time specified. b. A performance bond on the part to the Contractor for 100 percent of the contract price. A "performance bond" is one executed in connection with a contract to secure fulfillment of all the contractor's obligations under such contract. c. A payment bond on the part of the contractor for 100 percent of the contract price. A "payment bond" is one executed in connection with a contract to assure payment, as required by law, of all persons supplying labor and material in the execution of the work provided for in the contract. Payment bond amounts required from Contractors are as follows: (1) 50% of the contract price if the contract price is not more than $1 million; (2) 40% of the contract price if the contract price is more than $1 million but not more than $5 million; or (3) $2.5 million if the contract price is more than $5 million. d. A cash deposit, certified check or other negotiable instrument may be accepted by a grantee in lieu of performance and payment bonds, provided the grantee has established a procedure to assure that the interest of FTA is adequately protected. An irrevocable letter of credit would also satisfy the requirement for a bond. Flow Down Bonding requirements flow down to the first tier contractors. Model Clauses/Lanuguaag_e FTA does not prescribe specific wording to be included in third party contracts. FTA has prepared sample clauses as follows: Bid Bond Requirements (Construction) (a) Bid Security A Bid Bond must be issued by a fully qualified surety company acceptable to (Recipient) and listed as a company currently authorized under 31 CFR, Part 223 as possessing a Certificate of Authority as described thereunder. (b) Rights Reserved In submitting this Bid, it is understood and agreed by bidder that the right is reserved by (Recipient) to reject any and all bids, or part of any bid, and it is agreed that the Bid may not be withdrawn for a period of [ninety_ r (90)] days subsequent to the opening of bids, without the written consent of (Recipient). It is also understood and agreed that if the undersigned bidder should withdraw any part or all of his bid within [ninety (90)] days after the bid opening without the written consent of (Recipient), shall refuse or be unable to I enter into this Contract, as provided above, or refuse or be unable to furnish adequate and acceptable Performance Bonds and Labor and Material Payments Bonds, as provided above, or refuse or be unable to furnish adequate and acceptable insurance, as provided above, he shall forfeit his bid security to the extent of (Recipient's) damages occasioned by such withdrawal, or refusal, or inability to enter into an agreement, or provide adequate security therefor. It is further understood and agreed that to the extent the defaulting bidder's Bid Bond, Certified Check, Cashier's Check, Treasurer's Check, and/or Official Bank Check (excluding any income generated thereby which has been retained by (Recipient) as provided in [Item x "Bid Security" of the Instructions to Bidders]) shall prove inadequate to fully recompense (Recipient) for the damages occasioned by default, then the undersigned bidder agrees to indemnify (Recipient) and pay over to (Recipient) the difference between the bid security and (Recipient's) total damages, so as to make (Recipient) whole. The undersigned understands that any material alteration of any of the above or any of the material contained on this form, other than that requested, will render the bid unresponsive. Performance and Payment Bonding Requirements (Construction) The Contractor shall be required to obtain performance and payment bonds as follows: (a) Performance bonds 1. The penal amount of performance bonds shall be 100 percent of the original contract price, unless the (Recipient) determines that a lesser amount would be adequate for the protection of the (Recipient). 2. The (Recipient) may require additional performance bond protection when a contract price is increased. The increase in protection shall generally equal 100 percent of the increase in contract price. The (Recipient) may secure additional protection by directing the Contractor to increase the penal amount of the existing bond or to obtain an additional bond. (b) Payment bonds 1. The penal amount of the payment bonds shall equal: (i) Fifty percent of the contract price if the contract price is not more than $1 million. (ii) Forty percent of the contract price if the contract price is more than $1 million but not more than $5 million; or (iii) Two and one half million if the contract price is more than $5 million. 2. If the original contract price is $5 million or less, the (Recipient) may require additional protection as required by subparagraph 1 if the contract price is increased. Performance and Payment Bonding Requirements (Non -Construction) The Contractor may be required to obtain performance and payment bonds when necessary to protect the (Recipient's) interest. (a) The following situations may warrant a performance bond: 1. (Recipient) property or funds are to be provided to the contractor for use in performing the contract or as partial compensation (as in retention of salvaged material). 2. A contractor sells assets to or merges with another concern, and the (Recipient), after recognizing the latter concern as the successor in interest, desires assurance that it is financially capable. 3. Substantial progress payments are made before delivery of end items starts. 4. Contracts are for dismantling, demolition, or removal of improvements. (b) When it is determined that a performance bond is required, the Contractor shall be required to obtain performance bonds as follows: 1. The penal amount of performance bonds shall be 100 percent of the original contract price, unless the (Recipient) determines that a lesser amount would be adequate for the protection of the (Recipient). 2. The (Recipient) may require additional performance bond protection when a contract price is increased. The increase in protection shall generally equal 100 percent of the increase in contract price. The (Recipient) may secure additional protection by directing the Contractor to increase the penal amount of the existing bond or to obtain an additional bond. (c) A payment bond is required only when a performance bond is required, and if the use of payment bond is in the (Recipient's) interest. (d) When it is determined that a payment bond is required, the Contractor shall be required to obtain payment bonds as follows: 1. The penal amount of payment bonds shall equal: (i) Fifty percent of the contract price if the contract price is not more than $1 million; (ii) Forty percent of the contract price if the contract price is more than $1 million but not more than $S million; or (iii) Two and one half million if the contract price is increased. Advance Payment Bonding Requirements The Contractor may be required to obtain an advance payment bond if the contract contains an advance payment provision and a performance bond is not furnished. The (recipient) shall determine the amount of the advance payment bond necessary to protect the (Recipient). Patent Infringement Bonding Requirements (Patent Indemnity) The Contractor may be required to obtain a patent indemnity bond if a performance bond is not furnished and the financial responsibility of the Contractor is unknown or doubtful. The (recipient) shall determine the amount of the patent indemnity to protect the (Recipient). Warranty of the Work and Maintenance Bonds 1. The Contractor warrants to (Recipient), the Architect and/or Engineer that all materials and equipment furnished under this Contract will be of highest quality and new unless otherwise specified by (Recipient), free from faults and defects and in conformance with the Contract Documents. All work not so conforming to these standards shall be considered defective. If required by the [Project Manager], the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment. 2. The Work furnished must be of first quality and the workmanship must be the best obtainable in the various trades. The Work must be of safe, substantial and durable construction in all respects. The Contractor hereby guarantees the Work against defective materials or faulty workmanship for a minimum period of one (1) year after Final Payment by (Recipient) and shall replace or repair any defective materials or equipment or faulty workmanship during the period of the guarantee at no cost to (Recipient). As additional security for these guarantees, the Contractor shall, prior to the release of Final Payment [as provided in Item X below], fiunish separate Maintenance (or Guarantee) Bonds in form acceptable to (Recipient) written by the same corporate surety that provides the Performance Bond and Labor and Material Payment Bond for this Contract. These bonds shall secure the Contractor's obligation to replace or repair defective materials and faulty workmanship for a minimum period of one (1) year after Final Payment and shall be written in an amount equal to ONE HUNDRED PERCENT (100%) of the CONTRACT SUM, as adjusted (if at all). Signature Company Name r SEISMIC SAFETY REQUIREMENTS 42 U.S.C. 7701 et seq. 49 CFR Part 41 Applicability to Contracts The Seismic Safety requirements apply only to contracts for the construction of new buildings or additions to existing buildings. Flow Down The Seismic Safety requirements flow down from FTA recipients and subrecipients to first tier contractors to assure compliance, with the applicable building standards for Seismic Safety, including the work performed by all subcontractors. Model Clauses/Language The regulations do not provide suggested language for third -party contract clauses. The following language has been developed by FTA. Seismic Safety - The contractor agrees that any new building or addition to an existing building will be designed and constructed in accordance with the standards for Seismic Safety required in Department of Transportation Seismic Safety Regulations 49 CFR Part 41 and will certify to compliance to the extent required by the regulation. The contractor also agrees to ensure that all work performed under this contract including work performed by a subcontractor is in compliance with the standards required by the Seismic Safety Regulations and the,certification of compliance issued on the project. Signature Company Name Title ENERGY CONSERVATION REQUIREMENTS 42 U.S.C. 6321 et seq. 49 CFR Part 18 Applicability to Contracts The Energy Conservation requirements are applicable to all contracts. Flow Down The Energy Conservation requirements extend to all third party contractors and their contracts at every tier and subrecipients and their subagreements at every tier. Model Clause/Languuag_e No specific clause is recommended in the regulations because the Energy Conservation requirements are so dependent on the state energy conservation plan. The following language has been developed by FTA: Energy Conservation - The contractor agrees to comply with mandatory standards and policies relating to energy efficiency which are contained in the state energy conservation plan issued in compliance with the Energy Policy and Conservation Act. Date Signature Company Name Title RECYCLED PRODUCTS 42 U.S.C. 6962 40 CFR Part 247 Executive Order 12873 Applicability to Contracts The Recycled Products requirements apply to all contracts for items designated by the EPA, when the purchaser or contractor procures $10,000 or more of one of these items during the fiscal year, or has procured $10,000 or more of such items in the previous fiscal year, using Federal funds. New requirements for "recovered materials" will become effective May 1, 1996. These new regulations apply to all procurement actions involving items designated by the EPA, where the procuring agency purchases $10,000 or more of one of these items in a fiscal year, or when the cost of such items purchased during the previous fiscal year was $10,000. Flow Down These requirements flow down to all to all contractor and subcontractor tiers. Model Clause/Language No specific clause is mandated, but FTA has developed the following language. Recovered Materials - The contractor agrees to comply with all the requirements of Section 6002 of the Resource Conservation and Recovery Act (RCRA), as amended (42 U.S.C. 6962), including but not limited to the regulatory provisions of 40 CFR Part 247, and Executive Order 12873, as they apply to the procurement of the items designated in Subpart B of 40 CFR Part 247. Date Signature Company Name 9 r, Conformance with Intelligent Transportation Systems (ITS) National Architecture The ITS Architecture regulations, as identified in the January 2, 2001 Federal Register (Vol. 66, No. 5, pp. 1455-1459), 23 USC Section 502, and TEA-21, PL 105-178, Section 5206(e), require notification of ITS Architecture requirements in FTA-funded contracts. A bidder or offeror must submit to the FTA recipient the appropriate ITS National Architecture certification with all bids or offers on FTA funded contracts, except those subject to a general waiver. Bids or offers that are not accompanied by a completed ITS Architecture certification must be rejected as non -responsive. The City will ensure that all offerors/bidders agree to conform, to the extent applicable, to the Intelligent Transportation System Architecture and Standards under the FHWA final rule (as identified in 23 CFR 940), and with FTA Notice, "FTA National ITS Architecture Policy on Transit Projects" and other subsequent Federal directives that may be issued. Date Signature Company Name Title Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Access The Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) regulations, specifically identified in 49 CFR Part 27, "Nondiscrimination on the Basis of Disability in Programs and Activities Receiving or Benefitting from Federal Financial Assistance", require adherence to and notification of ADA Access requirements in FTA-funded contracts. Titles II and III of the ADA provide that no entity shall discriminate against an individual with a disability in connection with the provision of transportation services. Also identified are specific requirements for vehicle and facility accessibility. Specific to this bid document, this conformance would apply to any construction activities, or the activities of construction personnel that would a worker's civil rights under EEOC or Title VI. A bidder or offeror must submit to the FTA recipient the appropriate ADA certification with all bids or offers on FTA funded contracts, except those subject to a general waiver. Bids or offers that are not accompanied by a completed ADA certification must be rejected as non -responsive. The bidder or offeror hereby certifies that it will meet the requirements and applicable regulations in 49 CFR Part 27. Date Signature Company Name Title 11. ACCESS TO RECORDS AND REPORTS 49 U.S.C. 5325 18 CFR 18.36 (1) 49 CFR 633.17 Applicability to Contracts Reference Chart "Requirements for Access to Records and Reports by Type of Contracts" Applicability to Micro -Purchases Micro -purchases are defined as those purchases under $2,500. These requirements do not apply to micro -purchases. Flow Down FTA does not require the inclusion of these requirements in subcontracts. Model Clause/Language The specified language is not mandated by the statutes or regulations referenced, but the F language provided paraphrases the statutory or regulatory language. Access to Records - The following access to records requirements apply to this Contract: 1. Where the Purchaser is not a State but a local government and is the FTA Recipient or a ,- subgrantee of the FTA Recipient in accordance with 49 C. F. R. 18.36(i), the Contractor agrees to provide the Purchaser, the FTA Administrator, the Comptroller General of the United States or any of their authorized representatives access to any books, documents, papers and records of the Contractor whic h are directly pertinent to this contract for the purposes of m aking audits, examinations, excerpts and transcriptions. Contractor also agrees, pursuant to 49 C. F. R. 633.17 to provide the FTA Administrator or his authorized representatives including any PMO Contractor acces s to Contractor's records and construction sites pertaining to a major capital project, defined at 49 U.S.C. 5302(a)1, which is receiving federal financial assistance through j the programs described at 49 U.S.C. 5307, 5309 or 5311. 2. Where the Purchaser is a State and is the FTA Recipient or a subgrantee of the FTA Recipient in accordance with 49 C.F.R. 633.17, Contractor agrees to provide the Purchaser, the FTA Administrator or his authorized representatives, including any PMO Contractor, access to the Contractor's records and construction sites pertaining to a major capital project, defined at t 49 U.S.C. 5302(a)1, which is receiving federal financial assistance through the programs described at 49 U.S.C. 5307, 5309 or 5311. By definition, a major capital project excludes contracts of less than the simplified acquisition threshold currently set at $100,000. 3. Where the Purchaser enters into a negotiated contract for other than a small purchase or under the simplified acquisition threshold and is an institution of higher education, a hospital or other non-profit organization and is the FTA Recipient or a subgrantee of the FTA Recipient in accordance with 49 C.F.R. 19.48, Contractor agrees to provide the Purchaser, FTA Administrator, the Comptroller General of the United States or any of their duly authorized representatives with access to any books, documents, papers and record of the Contractor which are directly pertinent to this contract for the purposes of making audits, examinations, excerpts and transcriptions. 4. Where any Purchaser which is the FTA Recipient or a subgrantee of the FTA Recipient in accordance with 49 U.S.C. 5325(a) enters into a contract for a capital project or improvement (defined at 49 U.S.C. 5302(a)1) through other than competitive bidding, the Contractor shall [1 make available records related to the contract to the Purchaser, the Sec retary of Transportation and the Comptroller General or any authorized officer or employee of any of them for the f purposes of conducting an audit and inspection. ` 5. The Contractor agrees to permit any of the foregoing parties to reproduce by any means whatsoever or to copy excerpts and transcriptions as reasonab ly needed. 6. The Contractor agrees to maintain all books, records, accounts and reports required under this contract for a period of not less than three years after the date of termination or expiration of this contract, except in the event of litigation or settlement of claims arising from the performance of this contract, in which case Contractor agrees to maintain same until the Purchaser, the FTA Administrator, the Comptroller General, or any of their duly authorized representatives, have disposed of al I such litigation, appeals, claims or exceptions related thereto. Reference 49 CIF R 18.39(i)(11). 7. FTA does not require the inclusion of these req uirements in subcontracts. Requirements for Access to Records and Reports by Types of Contract Contract 1 I IM"I"I M _Characteristics E IState Grantees i N None Those imposed None None None None on state pass thru I to Contractor a. Contracts None unless' Yes, If non- t None unless None unless None unless below SAT non- competitive non-competitivec non-competitive non- ($100,000)', competitive award or if award award competitive t award funded thru' award 5307/5309/5311 b. Contracts above � `� i $100,000/Capkal Projects a �` II Non State Yes' Those imposed Yes I Yes Yes Yes Grantees ( on non -state s, Grantee pass thru Yes' to Contractor Yes Yes Yes Yes a. Contracts below SAT ($100,000) ; b. Contracts above i I $100,000/Capdal i Projects Sources of Authority: '49 USC 5325 (a) 2 49 CFR 633.17 318CFR18.36(i) U Date ( j Signature Company Name Title l �J February 9, 2011 CHA Project Number 0921 Citibus Transfer plaza Addendum #1 - Modify handrail in Northeast corner of landing in Corridor 109. Said handrail shall be modified to follow the inside corner of the location mentioned above. A continuous spacing of 1 % inches between the handrail and the wall shall be maintained. See illustration: NEW 1 1/2' WNTI HANDRAIL TO MAINTAIN I I/X BETWEEN WALL AND HANDRAIL \ NEW WALL— E wn,,o RAMP-1 EXI5TIN& 60'X60' MINIMUM LANDIN6 Celebrating 20 years of service. Revise the following: 3.3 SCHEDULE OFALLOWANCES A. Allowance No. 1: Contingency Allowance: Include the sum of S% Of Construction Cost L If utilized, this allowance shall also include material cost receiving, handling, and installation and Contractor overhead and profit to read: 3.3 SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCES A. Allowance No. 1: Contingency Allowance: Include the sum of $25,000.00. Celebrating 20 years ofservke. 1. NOTICE TO BIDDERS 2. GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 3. BID SUBMITTAL — (must be submitted by published due date & time) 3-1. BID LUMP SUBMITTAL FORM 3-2. CITY OF LUBBOCK INSURANCE REQUIREMENT AFFIDAVIT 3-3. SAFETY RECORD QUESTIONNAIRE 3-4. SUSPENSION AND DEBARMENT CERTIFICATION 4. CITIBUS FTA CLAUSES 5. LIST OF SUB -CONTRACTORS 6. PAYMENT BOND 7. PERFORMANCE BOND 8. CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE 9. CONTRACT 10. GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT 11. DAVIS BACON WAGE DETERMINATIONS 13. SPECIAL CONDITIONS (IF APPLICABLE) 14. SPECIFICATIONS 3 No Text NOTICE TO BIDDERS ITB l 1-9916-MA Sealed bids addressed to Marta Alvarez, Director of Purchasing & Contract Management, City of Lubbock, Texas, will be received in the office of the Purchasing and Contract Management Office, City Hall, 1625 13th Street, Room 204, Lubbock, Texas, 79401, until 3:00 p.m. on Wednesday, February 23, 2011, or as changed by the issuance of formal addenda to all planholders, to furnish all labor and materials and perform all work for the construction of the following described project: "Citibus Downtown Transfer Plaza Renovation & Addition Construction Project" After the expiration of the time and date above first written, said sealed bids will be opened in the office of the Purchasing and Contract Management Office and publicly read aloud. It is the sole responsibility of the bidder to ensure that his bid is actually in the office of the Purchasing and Contract Management Office for the City of Lubbock, before the expiration of the date above first written. Bids are due at 3:00 p.m. on Wednesday, February 23, 2011 and the City of Lubbock City Council will consider the bids Thursday, March 24, 2011, at the City Hall, 1625 13th Street, Lubbock, Texas, or as soon thereafter as may be reasonably convenient, subject to the right to reject r- any or all bids and waive any formalities. The successful bidder will be required to furnish a performance bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of f the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $100,000 and the successful bidder will be required to furnish a payment bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $50,000. Said statutory bonds should be issued by a company carrying a current Best Rating of "A" or better. THE BONDS MUST IN A FORM ACCEPTABLE TO THE CITY i ^` ATTORNEY AND MUST BE DATED THE SAME DATE THAT THE CONTRACT WAS AWARDED. Bidders are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's or certified check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a bid bond from a reliable surety company, payable without recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than 5% of the total amount of the bid submitted as a guarantee that bidder will enter into a contract and execute all necessary bonds (if required) within ten (10) business days after notice of award of the contract to him. FAILURE OF THE BIDDER TO INCLUDE BID SECURITY WITH THE BID SUBMITTAL SHALL CONSTITUTE A NONRESPONSIVE BID AND RESULT IN DISQUALIFICATION OF THE BID SUBMITTAL. It shall be each bidder's sole responsibility to inspect the site of the work and to inform himself ( regarding all local conditions under which the work is to be done. It shall be understood and agreed that all such factors have been thoroughly investigated and considered in the preparation of the bid submitted. There will be a non -mandatory pre -bid conference on February 9th at 10:00 a.m. at City Hall, 1625 13`h Street, Room ]Olin Council Chambers Lubbock, Texas. Bidders may view the plans and specifications and without charge at The Reproduction Company, 2102 Avenue Q, Lubbock, Texas 79405 or at www.tbereproductioncompany.com. ONE SET OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS MAY BE OBTAINED, AT THE CITY'S EXPENSE, FROM THE REPRODUCTION COMPANY WITH A $100 REFUNDABLE DEPOSIT, Phone: (806) 763-7770. Deposit Checks shall be made PAYABLE TO THE CITY OF LUBBOCK, and will be refunded if documents are returned in good condition within Sixty (60) days after the opening of bids. Additional sets of plans and specifications may be obtained at the bidder's expense. Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in the contract documents on file in the office of the Purchasing and Contract Management Office of the City of Lubbock, which document is specifically referred to in this Notice to Bidders. Each bidder's attention is further directed to Texas Government Code, Chapter 2258, Prevailing Wage Rates, and the requirements contained therein concerning the above wage scale and payment by the contractor of the prevailing rates of wages as heretofore established by owner in said wage scale. The City of Lubbock hereby notifies bidders that in regard to any contract entered into pursuant to this advertisement, minority and women business enterprises shall be afforded equal opportunities to submit bids in response to this invitation and will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, color, sex, disability, or national origin in consideration for an award. The City of Lubbock does not discriminate against persons with disabilities. City of Lubbock pre -bid meetings and bid openings are available to all persons regardless of disability. If you require special assistance, please contact the Purchasing and Contract Management Office at (806) 775-2572 or write to Post Office Box 2000, Lubbock, Texas 79457 at least 48 hours in advance of the meeting. CITY OF LUBBOCK 'Marta .Alvarez DIRECTOR OF PURCHASING AND CONTRACT MANAGEMENT GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS l BID DELIVERY TIME & DATE 1.1 The City of Lubbock is seeking written and sealed competitive bids to furnish Citibus Downtown Transfer Plaza Renovation & Addition Construction Project per the attached specifications and contract documents. Sealed bids will be received no later than February 23, 2011 at 3:00 p.m. at the office listed below. Any bid received after the date and hour specified will be rejected and returned unopened to the bidder. Each bid and supporting documentation must be in a sealed envelope or container plainly labeled in the lower left-hand corner: "ITB #11-9916-MA Citibus Downtown Transfer Plaza Renovation & Addition Construction Project" and the bid opening date and time. Bidders must also include their company name and address on the outside of the envelope or container. Bids must be addressed to: Marta Alvarez, Director of Purchasing & Contract Management City of Lubbock 1625 13th Street, Room 204 Lubbock, Texas 79401 1.2 Bidders are responsible for making certain bids are delivered to the Purchasing and Contract Management Office. Mailing of a bid does not ensure that the bid will be delivered on time or delivered at all. If bidder does not hand deliver bid, we suggest that he/she use some sort of delivery service that provides a receipt. 1.3 Bids will be accepted in person, by United States Mail, by United Parcel Service, or by private courier service. No bids will be accepted by oral communication, telephone, electronic mail, telegraphic transmission, or telefacsimile transmission. THE CITY WILL NOT ACCEPT FAX BIDS. 1.4 The City of Lubbock reserves the right to postpone the date and time for opening bids through an addendum. 2 PRE -BID MEETING 2.1 For the purpose of familiarizing bidders with the requirements, answering questions, and issuing addenda as needed for the clarification of the Invitation to Bid (ITB) documents, a non - mandatory pre -bid meeting will be held at Lubbock, Texas. All persons attending the meeting will be asked to identify themselves and the prospective bidder they represent. 2.2 It is the bidder's responsibility to attend the pre -bid meeting though the meeting is not mandatory. The City will not be responsible for providing information discussed at the pre -bid meeting to bidders who do not attend the pre -bid meeting. 3 ADDENDA & MODIFICATIONS 3.1 Any changes, additions, or clarifications to the ITB are made by ADDENDA information available over the Internet at www.bidsync.com. We strongly suggest that you check for any addenda a minimum of forty-eight hours in advance of the response deadline. BUSINESSES WITHOUT INTERNET ACCESS may use computers available at most up blic r - libraries. i 3.2 Any bidder in doubt as to the true meaning of any part of the specifications or other documents may request an interpretation thereof from the Purchasing and Contract Management Office. At (` the request of the bidder, or in the event the Purchasing and Contract Management Office deems w the interpretation to be substantive, the interpretation will be made by written addendum issued by the Purchasing and Contract Management Office. Such addenda issued by the Purchasing and — Contract Management Office will be available over the Internet at www.bidsync.com and will,, become part of the bid package having the same binding effect as provisions of the original ITB. - NO VERBAL EXPLANATIONS OR INTERPRETATIONS WILL BE BINDING. In order to have a request for interpretation considered, the request must be submitted in writing and must be 4 received by the City of Lubbock Purchasing and Contract Management Office no later than five (5) calendar days before the bid closing date. 3.3 All addenda, amendments, and interpretations of this solicitation shall be in writing. The City of Lubbock shall not be legally bound by any amendment or interpretation that is not in writing. Only information supplied by the City of Lubbock Purchasing and Contract Management Office in writing or in this ITB should be used in preparing bid responses. All contacts that a bidder e_ may have had before or after receipt of this ITB with any individuals, employees, or representatives of the City and any information that may have been read in any news media or seen or heard in any communication facility regarding this bid should be disregarded in preparing responses. 3.4 The City does not assume responsibility for the receipt of any addendum sent to bidders. EXAMINATION OF DOCUMENTS AND REQUIREMENTS 4.1 Each bidder shall carefully examine all ITB documents and thoroughly familiarize itself with all requirements before submitting a bid to ensure that their bid meets the intent of these specifications. 4.2 Before submitting a bid, each bidder shall be responsible for making all investigations and examinations that are necessary to ascertain conditions and requirements affecting the requirements of this Invitation to Bid. Failure to make such investigations and examinations shall not relieve the bidder from obligation to comply, in every detail, with all provisions and j requirements of the Invitation to Bid. IL 4.3 Notices of any discrepancies or omissions in these plans, specifications, or contract documents, shall be given to the Purchasing and Contract Management Office and a clarification obtained before the bids are received, and if no such notice is received by the Purchasing and Contract Management Office prior to the opening of bids, then it shall be deemed that the bidder fully understands the work to be included and has provided sufficient sums in its bid to complete the work in accordance with these plans and specifications. If bidder does not notify Purchasing and Contract Management Office before bidding of any discrepancies or omissions, then it shall be deemed for all purposes that the plans and specifications are sufficient and adequate for completion of the project. It is further agreed that any request for clarification must be submitted no later than five (5) calendar days prior to the bid closing date. BID PREPARATION COSTS 5.1 Issuance of this ITB does not commit the City of Lubbock, in any way, to pay any costs incurred in the preparation and submission of a bid. 5.2 The issuance of this ITB does not obligate the City of Lubbock to enter into contract for any services or equipment. 5.3 All costs related to the preparation and submission of a bid shall be paid by the bidder. TRADE SECRETS CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION AND THE TEXAS PUBLIC INFORMATION ACT 6.1 If you consider any portion of your bid to be privileged or confidential by statute or judicial decision, including trade secrets and commercial or financial information, clearly identify those portions. 6.2 The City of Lubbock will honor your notations of trade secrets and confidential information and decline to release such information initially, but please note that the final determination of whether a particular portion of your bid is in fact a trade secret or commercial or financial information that may be withheld from public inspection will be made by the Texas Attorney General or a court of competent jurisdiction. In the event a public information request is received for a portion of your bid that you have marked as being confidential information, you will be notified of such request and you will be required to justify your legal position in writing to the Texas Attorney General pursuant to Section 552.305 of the Government Code. In the event that it '^ is determined by opinion or order of the Texas Attorney General or a court of competent jurisdiction that such information is in fact not privileged and confidential under Section 552.110 of the Government Code and Section 252.049 of the Local Government Code, then such r- information will be made available to the requester. 6.3 Marking your entire bid CONFIDENTIAL/PROPRIETARY is not in conformance with the Texas Open Records Act. LICENSES, PERMITS, TAXES The price or prices for the work shall include full compensation for all taxes, permits, etc. that the bidder is or may be required to pay. UTILIZATION OF LOCAL BUSINESS RESOURCES Prospective bidders are strongly encouraged to explore and implement methods for the utilization of local resources, and to outline in their bid submittal how they would utilize local resources. CONFLICT OF INTEREST 9.1 The bidder shall not offer or accept gifts or anything of value nor enter into any business arrangement with any employee, official or agent of the City of Lubbock. 9.2 By signing and executing this bid, the bidder certifies and represents to the City the bidder has not offered, conferred or agreed to confer any pecuniary benefit or other thing of value for the receipt of special treatment, advantage, information, recipient's decision, opinion, recommendation, vote or any other exercise of discretion concerning this bid. 10 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 10.1 All work covered by the contract shall be done in accordance with contract documents described in the General Conditions. 10.2 All bidders shall be thoroughly familiar with all of the requirements set forth on the contract documents for the construction of this project and shall be responsible for the satisfactory completion of all work contemplated by said contract documents. 11 PLANS FOR USE BY BIDDERS It is the intent of the City of Lubbock that all parties with an interest in submitting a bid on the project covered by the contract documents be given a reasonable opportunity to examine the documents and prepare a bid without charge or forfeiture of deposit. The contract documents may be examined without ' charge as noted in the Notice to Bidders. 1._ 12 BIDDER INQUIRIES AND CLARIFICATION OF REQUIREMENTS 12.1 It° is the intent and purpose of the City of Lubbock that this request permit competitive bids. It shall be the bidder's responsibility to advise the Purchasine and Contract Management Office if any language, requirements, etc., or any combinations thereof, inadvertently restricts or limits the requirements stated in this ITB to a single source. Such notification must be submitted in writing and must be received by the City of Lubbock Purchasing and Contract Management Office no later than five (5) calendar days before the bid closing date. A review of such notifications will be made. 12.2 NO BIDDER SHALL REQUEST ANY INFORMATION VERBALLY. ALL REQUESTS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION OR CLARIFICATION CONCERNING THIS INVITATION TO BID (ITB) MUST BE SUBMITTED IN WRITING NO LATER THAN FIVE (5) CALENDAR DAYS PRIOR TO THE BID CLOSING DATE AND ADDRESSED TO: ^ 13 14 LE 16 17 Marta Alvarez, Director of Purchasing City of Lubbock Purchasing and Contract Management Office 1625 131h Street, Room 204 Lubbock, Texas 79401 Fax: 806-775-2164 Email: malvarez@mylubbock.us Bidsync: www.bidsyne.com TIME AND ORDER FOR COMPLETION 13.1 The construction covered by the contract documents shall be substantially completed within THREE HUNDRED (300) CONSECTIVE CALENDAR DAYS from the date specified in the Notice to Proceed issued by the City of Lubbock to the successful bidder. 13.2 The Contractor will be permitted to prosecute the work in the order of his own choosing, provided, however, the City reserves the right to require the Contractor to submit a progress schedule of the work contemplated by the contract documents_ In the event the City requires a progress schedule to be submitted, and it is determined by the City that the progress of the work is not in accordance with the progress schedule so submitted, the City may direct the Contractor to take such action as the City deems necessary to ensure completion of the project within the time specified. PAYMENT All payments due to Contractor shall be made in accordance with the provisions of the General Conditions of the contract documents. AFFIDAVITS OF BILLS PAID The City of Lubbock reserves the right, prior to final acceptance of this project to require the Contractor to execute an affidavit that all bills for labor, materials and incidentals incurred in the construction of the improvements contemplated by the contract documents have been paid in full and that there are no claims pending, of which the Contractor has been notified. MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP The intent of these contract documents is that only materials and workmanship of the best quality and grade will be furnished. The fact that the specifications may fail to be sufficiently complete in some detail will not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility for providing materials of high quality and for protecting them adequately until incorporated into the project. The presence or absence of a representative of the City on the site will not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility of complying with this provision. The specifications for materials and methods set forth in the contract documents provide minimum standards of quality, which the Owner believes necessary to procure a satisfactory project. GUARANTEES 17.1 All equipment and materials incorporated in the project and all construction shall be guaranteed against defective materials and workmanship. Prior to final acceptance, the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner, a written general guarantee which shall provide that the Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work, and pay for any and all damages of any nature whatsoever resulting in such defects, when such defects appear within ONE year from date of final acceptance of the work as a result of defective materials or workmanship, at no cost to the Owner (City of Lubbock). 17.2 Notwithstanding any provisions contained in the contractual agreement, the Contractor represents and warrants fault -free performance and fault -free result in the processing date and date -related data (including, but not limited to calculating, comparing and sequencing) of all hardware, software and firmware products delivered and services provided under this Contract, individually or in combination, as the case may be from the effective date of this Contract. Also, the Contractor warrants calculations will be recognized and accommodated and will not, in any way, result in hardware, software or firmware failure. The City of Lubbock, at its sole option, may require the Contractor, at any time, to demonstrate the procedures it intends to follow in order to 1 comply with all the obligations contained herein. 17.3 The obligations contained herein apply to products and services provided by the Contractor, its sub -contractor or any third party involved in the creation or development of the products and +! services to be delivered to the City of Lubbock under this Contract. Failure to comply with any of the obligations contained herein, may result in the City of Lubbock availing itself of any of its rights under the law and under this Contract including, but not limited to, its right pertaining to termination or default. 17.4 The warranties contained herein are separate and discrete from any other warranties specified in this Contract, and are not subject to any disclaimer of warranty, implied or expressed, or limitation to the Contractor's liability which may be specified in this Contract, its appendices, its schedules, its annexes or any document incorporated in this Contract by reference. 18 PLANS FOR THE CONTRACTOR The contractor will, upon written request, be furnished up to ten sets of plans and specifications and related contract documents for use during construction. Plans and specifications for use during construction will only be furnished directly to the Contractor. The Contractor shall then distribute copies of plans and specifications to suppliers, subcontractors or others, as required for proper prosecution of the work contemplated by the Contractor. (^ 19 PROTECTION OF THE WORK The Contractor shall be responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, and protection of all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, apparatus, accessories, facilities, and all means of construction, and any and all parts of the work whether the Contractor has been paid, partially paid, or not paid for such work, until the date the City issues its certificate of completion to Contractor. The City reserves the right, after the bids have been opened and before the contract has been awarded, to require of a bidder the following information: (a) The experience record of the bidder showing completed jobs of a similar nature to the one covered by the intended contract and all work in progress with bond amounts and percentage completed. (b) A sworn statement of the current financial condition of the bidder. (c) Equipment schedule. 20 TEXAS STATE SALES TAX 20.1 This contract is issued by an organization which qualifies for exemption provisions pursuant to provisions of Article 20.04 of the Texas Limited Sales, Excise and Use Tax Act. 20.2 The Contractor must obtain a limited sales, excise and use tax permit which shall enable him to buy the materials to be incorporated into the work without paying the tax at the time of purchase. 21 PROTECTION OF SUBSURFACE LINES AND STRUCTURES It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to prosecute the work contemplated by the contract documents in such a way as to exercise due care to locate and prevent damage to all underground pipelines, utility lines, conduits or other underground structures which might or could be damaged by Contractor during the construction of the project contemplated by these contract documents. The City of Lubbock agrees that it will furnish Contractor the location of all such underground lines and utilities of which it has knowledge. However, such fact shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities aforementioned. All such underground lines or structures cut or damaged by Contractor during the prosecution of the work contemplated by this contract shall be repaired immediately by Contractor to the satisfaction of the City of Lubbock, Texas, at Contractor's expense. 10 22 23 24 25 BARRICADES AND SAFETY MEASURES The contractor shall, at his own expense, furnish and erect such barricades, fences, lights and danger signals, and shall take such other precautionary measures for the protection of persons, property and the work as may be necessary. The Contractor will be held responsible for all damage to the work due to failure of barricades, signs, and lights to protect it, and when damage is incurred, the damaged portion shall be immediately removed and replaced by Contractor at his own cost and expense. The Contractor's responsibility for maintenance of barricades, signs, and lights shall not cease until the date of issuance to Contractor of City's certificate of acceptance of the project. EXPLOSIVES 23.1 The use of explosives will not be permitted unless written permission to do so is obtained by the Contractor from the City. In all cases where written permission is obtained for the use of explosives, the Contractor shall assume full responsibility for all damage, which may occur as a direct or indirect result of the blasting. In addition, in all cases where explosives are authorized to be used, the Contractor shall use utmost care so as not to endanger life or property and the Contractor shall further use only such methods as are currently utilized by persons, firms, or corporations engaged in similar type of construction activity. 23.2 Explosive materials shall not be stored or kept at the construction site by the Contractor. 23.3 In all cases where explosives are to be used during the construction of the project contemplated by this contract, it shall be the duty of the Contractor to notify each utility company having structures (above or below the ground) in proximity to the site of the work of Contractor's intention to use explosives, and such notice shall be given sufficiently in advance to enable the companies to take such steps as they may deem necessary to protect their property from injury. Such notice, however, shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for any damage resulting from his blasting operations. CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIVE The successful bidder shall be required to have a responsible local representative available at all times while the work is in progress under this contract. The successful bidder shall be required to famish the name, address and telephone number where such local representative may be reached during the time that the work contemplated by this contract is in progress. INSURANCE 25.1 The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance as required in the General Conditions of the contract documents, from an underwriter authorized to do business in the State of Texas and satisfactory to the City. Proof of coverage shall be furnished to the City and written notice of cancellation or any material change will be provided ten (10) days in advance of cancellation or change. All policies shall contain an agreement on the part of the insurer waiving the right to subrogation. The Contractor shall procure and carry at his sole cost and expense through the life of this contract, insurance protection as hereinafter specified. Coverage in excess of that specified herein also shall be acceptable. Such insurance shall be carried with an insurance company authorized to transact business in the State of Texas and shall cover all operations in connection with this contract, whether performed by the Contractor or a subcontractor, or separate policies shall be provided covering the operation of each subcontractor. A certificate of insurance specifying each and all coverages shall be submitted before contract execution. 25.2 PROOF OF COVERAGE SHALL BE FURNISHED TO THE CITY OF LUBBOCK IN THE FORM OF A CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE. THE INSURANCE CERTIFICATES FURNISHED SHALL NAME THE CITY OF LUBBOCK AND THE ENGINEER AS A PRIMARY ADDITIONAL INSURED AND PROVIDE A WAIVER OF SUBROGATION IN FAVOR OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK AS REQUIRED BELOW, OR IN THE ALTERNATIVE, SHALL BE ACCOMPANIED BY A STATEMENT FROM THE CONTRACTOR TO THE EFFECT THAT NO WORK ON THIS PARTICULAR PROJECT SHALL BE SUBCONTRACTED. IT SHALL BE THE CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO PROVIDE TO THE OWNER ALL PROOF OF COVERAGE INSURANCE DOCUMENTS INCLUDING WORKERS COMPENSATION COVERAGE FOR EACH SUBCONTRACTOR THE ADDITIONAL INSURED ENDORSEMENT SHALL INCLUDE PRODUCTS AND COMPLETE OPERATIONS. 26 LABOR AND WORKING HOURS 26.1 Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in these contract documents. The wage rate that must be paid on this project shall not be less than specified in the schedule of general prevailing rates of per diem wages as above mentioned. The bidders' attention is further directed to the requirements of Texas Government Code, Chapter 2258, Prevailing Wage Rates providing for the payment of the wage schedules above mentioned and the bidder's obligations thereunder. The inclusion of the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages in the contract documents does not release the Contractor from compliance with any wage law that may be applicable. Construction work under the contract requiring an inspector shall not be performed on weekends or holidays unless the following conditions exist: 26.1.1 The project being constructed is essential to the City of Lubbock's ability to provide the necessary service to its citizens. 26.1.2 Delays in construction are due to factors outside the control of the Contractor. The Contractor is approaching the penalty provisions of the contract and Contractor can show he has made a diligent effort to complete the contract within the allotted time. 26.2 Before construction work requiring an inspector is to be performed on Sunday or holidays, the Contractor must notify the Owner's Representative not less than three full working days prior to the weekend or holiday he desires to do work and obtain written permission from the Owner's Representative to do such work. The final decision on whether to allow construction work requiring an inspector on Sunday or holidays will be made by the Owner's Representative. 26.3 In any event, if a condition should occur or arise at the site of this project or from the work being done under this contract which is hazardous or dangerous to property or life, the Contractor shall immediately commence work, regardless of the day of the week or the time of day, to correct or alleviate such condition so that it is no longer dangerous to property or life. 27 PAYMENT OF EMPLOYEES AND FILING OF PAYROLLS The contractor and each of his subcontractors shall pay each of his employees engaged in work on the project under this contract in full (less mandatory legal deductions) in cash, or by check readily cashable without discount, not less often than once each week. The Contractor and each of his subcontractors shall keep a record showing the name and occupation of each worker employed by the Contractor or subcontractor in the construction of the public work and the actual per diem wages paid to each worker. This record shall be open at all reasonable hours to inspection by the officers and agents of the City. The Contractor must classify employees according to one of the classifications set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages, which schedule is included in the contract documents. The Contractor shall forfeit as a penalty to the City of Lubbock on whose behalf this contract is made, sixty dollars for each laborer, workman, or mechanic employed for each calendar day, or portion thereof, such laborer, workman or mechanic is paid less than the wages assigned to his particular classification as set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in these contract documents 28 PROVISIONS CONCERNING ESCALATION CLAUSES 12 29 30 31 Bids submitted containing any conditions which provide for changes in the stated bid price due to increases or decreases in the cost of materials, labor or other items required for the project will be rejected and returned to the bidder without being considered. - PREPARATION FOR BID 29.1 The bidder shall submit his bid on forms furnished by the City, and all blank spaces in the form shall be correctly filled in, stating the price in numerals for which he intends to do the work contemplated or furnish the materials required. Such prices shall be written in ink, distinctly and legibly, or typewritten. In case of discrepancy between the unit price and the extended total for a bid item, the unit price will be taken. A bid that has been opened may not be changed for the purpose of correcting an error in the bid price. 29.2 If the bid is submitted by an individual, his name must be signed by him or his duly authorized agent. If a bid is submitted by a firm, association, or partnership, the name and address of each member must be given and the bid signed by a member of the firm, association or partnership, or ` person duly authorized. If the bid is submitted by a company or corporation, the company or corporate name and business address must be given, and the bid signed by an official or duly authorized agent. Powers of attorney authorizing agents or others to sign bids must be properly certified and must be in writing and submitted with the bid. The bid shall be executed in ink. - 29.3 Each bid shall be enclosed in a sealed envelope, addressed as specified in the Notice to Bidders, 1 and endorsed on the outside of the envelope in the following manner 29.3.1 Bidder's name 29.3.2 Bid for 11-9916-MA, Cifibus Downtown Transfer Plaza Renovation & Addition Construction Project" Bid submittals may be withdrawn and resubmitted at any time before the time set for opening of the bids, but no bid may be withdrawn or altered thereafter. 29.5 Pursuant to Texas Local Government Code 252.043(g), a competitive sealed bid that has been opened may not be changed for the purpose of correcting an error in the bid price. THEREFORE, ANY CORRECTIONS TO THE BID PRICE MUST BE MADE ON THE BID SUBMITTAL FORM PRIOR TO BID OPENING. BOUND COPY OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS i Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by bidder shall be bound and will include the following: (a) Notice to Bidders. (b) General Instructions to Bidders. -- (c) Bidder's Submittal. (d) Statutory Bonds (if required). (e) Contract Agreement. (f) General Conditions. 3 (g) Special Conditions (if any). (h) Specifications. (i) Insurance Certificates for Contractor and all Sub -Contractors. 0) All other documents made available to bidder for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. If Plans and Specifications are too bulky or cumbersome to be physically bound, they are to be considered incorporated by reference into the aforementioned contract documents. QUALIFICATIONS OF BIDDERS The bidder may be required before the award of any contract to show to the complete satisfaction of the City of Lubbock that it has the necessary facilities, ability, and financial resources to provide the service specified therein in a satisfactory manner. The bidder may also be required to give a past history and 13 references in order to satisfy the City of Lubbock about the bidder's qualifications. The City of Lubbock "� may make reasonable investigations deemed necessary and proper to determine the ability of the bidder to perform the work, and the bidder shall furnish to the City of Lubbock all information for this purpose that may be requested. The bidder's bid may be deemed not to meet specifications or the bid may be rejected if the evidence submitted by, or investigation of, the bidder fails to satisfy the City of Lubbock that the e bidder is properly qualified to carry out the obligations of the contract and to complete the work described therein. Evaluation of the bidder's qualifications shall include: a The ability, capacity,skill and financial resources to perform the work or provide the service O ty, P h ! required. (b) The ability of the bidder to perform the work or provide the service promptly or within the time specified, without delay or interference. (c) The character, integrity, reputation, judgment, experience, and efficiency of the bidder. (d) The quality of performance of previous contracts or services. (e) The safety record of the Contractor and proposed Sub -Contractors Before contract award, the recommended contractor for this project may be required to show that he has experience with similar projects that require the Contractor to plan his work efforts and equipment needs with City of Lubbock specifications in mind. Demonstration of experience shall include a complete list of ALL similar municipal and similar non -municipal current and completed projects for the past three (3) years for review. This list shall include the names of supervisors and type of equipment used to perform work on these projects. In addition, the Contractor may be required to provide the name(s) of supervisor(s) that will be used to perform work on this project in compliance with City of Lubbock specifications herein. 32 BID AWARD 32.1 The City of Lubbock reserves the right to reject any or all bids, reject any particular item on a bid, and to waive immaterial formalities and to accept the offer most advantageous to the City of Lubbock in its sole discretion. Unless otherwise specified herein, the City shall award the bid based on the total bid for Lump Sum_plus the sum of any Alternate Bids or Options the City may select. 32.2 All bids are evaluated for compliance with specifications before the bid price is considered. Response to specifications is primary in determining the best low bid. Failure to comply with the specifications may result in disqualification of the bid. 32.3 In case of tie bids, preference will be given to local bidders. Consistent and continued tie bidding may be cause for rejection of bids by the City of Lubbock and/or investigation by the Attorney General to determine possible Anti -Trust violations. 32.4 Before the City may award a bid to a nonresident bidder, the nonresident bidder's bid must be lower than lowest bid submitted by a responsible Texas bidder by the same margin or amount that a Texas bidder would be required to underbid the nonresident bidder in the nonresident bidders' home state. 32.5 Any contract made, or purchase order issued, as a result of this Invitation to Bid, shall be entered into the State of Texas and under the laws of the State of Texas. In connection with the performance of work, the Bidder agrees to comply with the Fair Labor Standard Act, Equal Opportunity Employment Act, and all other applicable Federal, State, and Local laws, regulations, and executive orders to the extent that the same may be applicable. 32.6 NO INDIVIDUAL OF ANY USING DEPARTMENT HAS THE AUTHORITY TO LEGALLY AND/OR FINANCIALLY COMMIT THE CITY TO ANY CONTRACT, AGREEMENT OR PURCHASE ORDER FOR GOODS OR SERVICES, UNLESS SPECIFICALLY SANCTIONED BY THE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS INVITATION TO BID. 14 33 34 ANTI -LOBBYING PROVISION 33.1 DURING THE PERIOD BETWEEN THE BID CLOSE DATE AND THE CONTRACT AWARD, BIDDERS, INCLUDING THEIR AGENTS AND REPRESENTATIVES, SHALL NOT DIRECTLY DISCUSS OR PROMOTE THEIR BID WITH ANY MEMBER OF THE LUBBOCK CITY COUNCIL OR CITY STAFF EXCEPT IN THE COURSE OF CITY -SPONSORED INQUIRIES, BRIEFINGS, INTERVIEWS, OR PRESENTATIONS, UNLESS REQUESTED BY THE CITY. 33.2 This provision is not meant to preclude bidders from discussing other matters with City Council members or City staff. This policy is intended to create a level playing field for all potential bidders, assure that contract decisions are made in public, and to protect the integrity of the bid process. Violation of this provision may result in rejection of the bidder's bid. PREVAILING WAGE RATES 34.1 Bidders are required to comply with Texas Government Code, Chapter 2258, Prevailing Wage Rates, with respect to the payment of prevailing wage rates for the construction of a public work, including a building, highway, road, excavation, and repair work or other project development or improvement, paid for in whole or in part from public funds, without regard to whether the work is done under public supervision or direction. A worker is employed on a public work if the worker is employed by the contractor or any subcontractor in the execution of the contract for the project 34.2 A worker employed on a public work by or on behalf of the City of Lubbock shall be paid not less than the general prevailing rate of per diem wages for the work of a similar character in the locality in which the work is performed, and not less than the general prevailing rate of per diem wages for legal holiday and overtime work. 34.3 The State of Texas has adopted the Federal Davis -Bacon wage rates for use in Texas pursuant to and in accordance with the Texas Government Code, Section 2258.022. Bidders may access the U. S. Department of Labor web site at the following web address to obtain the rates, to be used in Lubbock County: htlp://www.gpo.gov/'davisbacoii/allstates.html 34.4 It shall be the responsibility of the successful bidder to obtain the proper wage rates from the web site for the type of work defined in the bid specifications. 34.5 A contractor or subcontractor who violates Texas Government Code Section 2258.023 shall pay to the City of Lubbock $60 for each worker employed for each calendar day or part of the day that the worker is paid less than the wage rates stipulated in the contract. 15 BID SUBMITTAL FORM No Text BID SUBMITTAL FORM LUMP SUM BID CONTRACT DATE: 2-23-2011 BID No. 11-9916-MA Citibus Downtown Transfer Plaza Renovation & Addition Construction Project Bid of DM Construction, LLC (hereinafter called Bidder) To the Honorable Mayor and City Council City of Lubbock, Texas (hereinafter called Owner) Ladies and Gentlemen: The Bidder, in compliance with your Invitation to Bid for the construction of Citibus Downtown Transfer Plaza Renovation & Addition Construction Project, having carefully examined the plans, specifications, instructions to bidders, notice to bidders and all other related contract documents and the site of the intended work, and being familiar with all of the conditions surrounding the construction of the intended project including the availability of materials and labor, hereby intends to furnish all labor, materials, and supplies; and to construct the project in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents, within the time set forth therein and at the price stated below. The bidder binds himself on acceptance of his bid to execute a contract and any required bonds, according to the accompanying forms, for performing and completing the said work within the time stated and for the prices stated below. )ITEM DESCRIPTION LUMP SUM COST NO. I The project consists of the addition of 2097 square feet of new space and the renovation of 3798 square feet of existing space. Said space shall be used for $ 549,900.00 assembly, business office and existing restrooms, in accordance to the Five -Hundred Forty -Nine Thousand, Nine -Hundred specifications and plans. dollars & NO Cents. $ 549,900.00 Lump Sum Total p Five -Hundred Forty -Nine Thousand, Nine -Hundred dollars & NO Cents. ALTERNATES ALT No. ADD: New vinyl composition floor the and base to rooms 104 and 105. I Provide and replace VCT and 4" vinyl base trim in rooms 104 and 105. Reinstall all removed plumbingfixtures, toilet partitions and related elements. cen _ ALT No. ADD: Polished concrete and vinyl base in rooms 104 and 105. Remove 2 existing vinyl composition floor file in rooms 104 and 105, repair and re -finish $ 4,700.00 concrete slab in order to produce a smooth, evenly polished concrete surface p Y P dollmshodNOusand, Seven Hundred dogars and NO cents. with an even gloss finish. Install new 4" vinyl base trim in rooms 104 and 105, Reinstall all removed plumbing fixtures, toilet partitions and related elements. ALT No. ADD: New lavatory units to rooms 104 and 105. Provide and install new 6,4W00 3. Bradley Express Lavatory System - MG 3., including all .necessary plumbing, . $ -Thousand, Four 1-itmdred mason and similar work related to this installation in rooms 104 and 105. _six dollars And NO cents. ALT No. OMIT: Omit one lower cabinet bay in room 109. ADD under counter $ 1,100.00 4 refrigerator and an icemaker. ADD small microwave to upper counter above One -Thousand, One Hundred sink. See 4/A4 on drawings. dollars and No cents. $562,100.00 NBidder's initials 2 •.3 0 U J I Bidder hereby agrees to commence the work on the above project on a date to be specified in a written "Notice to Proceed" of the Owner and to substantially complete the project within THREE HUNDRED (300) CONSECTIVE CALENDAR DAYS thereafter as stipulated in the specifications and other contract documents. Bidder hereby further agrees to pay to Owner as liquidated damages the sum of n 500 for each consecutive calendar day in excess of the time set forth herein above for completion of this project, all as more fully set forth in the general conditions of the contract documents. Bidder understands and agrees that this bid submittal shall be completed and submitted in accordance with instruction number 29 of the General Instructions to Bidders. Bidder understands that the Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive any formality in the bidding. The Bidder agrees that this bid shall be good and may not be withdrawn for a period of SIXTY (60) calendar days after the scheduled closing time for receiving bids. The undersigned Bidder hereby declares that he has visited the site of the work and has carefully examined the plans, specifications and contract documents pertaining to the work covered by this bid, and he further agrees to commence work on or before the date specified in the written notice to proceed, and to substantially complete the work on which he has bid; as provided in the contract documents. Bidders are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's check or certified check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a bid bond from a reliable surety company, payable without recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than five percent (5%) of the total amount of the bid submitted as a guarantee that bidder will enter into a contract, obtain all required insurance policies, and execute all necessary bonds (if required) within ten (10) business days after notice of award of the contract to him A— Bidder's Initials Enclosed with this bid is a Cashier's Check or Certified Check for Dollars (S ) or a Bid Bond in the such of Five Percent Dollars (� 5%}, which it is agreed shall be collected and retained by the Owner as liquidated damages in the event the bid is accepted by the Owner and the undersigned fails to execute the necessary contract documents, insurance certificates, and the required bond (if any) with the Owner within ten (10) business days after the date of receipt of written notification of acceptance of said bid, otherwise, said check or bond shad be returned to the undersigned upon demand. Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by Bidder shall be bound and include all contract documents made available to him for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. Pursuant to Texas Local Government Code 252.943(a), a competitive sealed bid that has been opened may not be ebangodUr the purpose of correcting an error in the bid price. Tliw:l ir-6xE, ANY CORRECTIONS TO THE BID PRICE .W:,S1' IiE MA6F ON THE BID SUBMITTAL FORM PRIOR (Sea] if Bidder is n Corporation) A ��,J./,u Secretary Bidder acknowledges receipt of the following addenda: Addenda No. I Date 2/11/11 Addenda No. Date Addenda No. Date Addenda No. Date Date: 2-23-2Oil Autho ' d ign . re Morgan Mac re (Printed or Typed Name) w DM Construction, LLC Company PO Box 93153 Address Lubbock Lubbock City, County Texas 79493 State Zip Code Telephone: 806 -6864742 Fax: 806 . 686-0956 FEDERAL TAX ID or SOCIAL SECURITY No. 27-1430990 P-MAIL:—mmackenzie@dm-llc.com MAVRE Firm; woman I I Black American I INative American Hispanic American I I Asian Pacific American I I Other (Spec ) 2 Bid Bond Surety Department K1TOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, That we, DM Construction LLC, as Principal, hereinafter called the Principal, and the Washington International Insurance Coin an , a Corporation created and existing under the laws of the State of New Dam shire, whose principal office is in Manchester. NH, as Surety, hereinafter called the Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the City of Lubbock, as Obligee, hereinafter called the Obligee, in the sum of )Five Percent 5% of the amount bid ($-------------- ), for the payment of which sum, well and truly to be made, F< the said Principal and the said Surety, bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firn-ly by these presents. Whereas, the Principal has submitted a bid for Citibus Downtown Transfer Plaza Renovation & Addition Project NOW THEREFORE, if the Obligee shall accept the bid of the Principal and the Principal shall enter into a contract with the Obligee in accordance with the terms of such bid, and give such bond or bonds as may be specified in the bidding or contract documents with good and sufficient surety for the faithful performance of such contract and for the prompt payment of labor and material furnished in the prosecution thereof, or in the event of the failure of the Principal to enter such contract and give such bond or bonds, if the Principal shall pay to the Obligee the difference not to exceed the penalty hereof between the amount specified in said bid and such larger amount for which the Obligee may in good faith contract with another party to perform the ®R work covered by said bid, then this obligation shall be null and void, otherwise to remain in full force and effect. Signed and sealed this 23rd day of ]February, 2011. Attest: DM Construction LLC (Principal) By Witness: Washington international 3�. Form S-32664 Insurance Cony_,_ �.� By Kevin J. D n; t ey-in-Fact Printed in U.S.A. I2-70 (SEAL) NAS SURETY CROUP 17 NORTH AMERICAN SPECIALTY INSURANCE COMPANY WASHINGTON INTERNATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY GENERAL POWER OF ATTORNEY r KNOW ALL MEN BY TiIESE ARESL-NTS, THAT North American Specially Insurance Company, a corporation duly organized and existing under laws of the State of New Hampshire, and having its principal office in the City of Manchester, New Hampshire, and Washington International Insurance Company, a corporation organized and existing wider the laws of the State of New Hampshire and having its principal office in the City of t Schaumburg, Illinois, each does hereby make, constitute and appoint: W. LAWRENCE BROWN, TRACY TUCKER, TOBIN TUCKER and KEVIN J. DUNN JOINTLY OR SEVER -ALLY Its true and lawful Attorneys) -in -Fact, to make, execute, seal and deliver, for and on its behalf and as its act and deed, bonds or other writings obligatory in the nature of a bond on behalf of cub of said Companies, as surety, on contracts of suretyship as are or may be required or pennitted by law, regulation, contract or otherwise, provided that no bond or undertaking or contract or suretyship executed under this authority shall exceed the ` amount of.• FIFTY MILLION ($50,000,000.00) DOLLARS Ibis Power of Attorney is granted and is signed by facsimile under and by the authority of the following Resolutions adopted by the Boards of Directors of both North American Specialty insurance Company and Washington International Insurance Company at meetings duly called and held on the 24 h of March, 2000: "RESOLVED, that any two of the Presidents, any Managing Director, any Senior Vice President, any Vice President, any Assistant Vice President, the Secretary or any Assistant Secretary be, and each or any of them hereby is authorized to execute a Power of Attorney qualifying the attorney named in the given Power of Attorney to execute on behalf of the Company bonds, undertakings and all contracts of surety, and that cacti or any of them hereby is authorized to attest to the execution of any such Power of Attorney and to attach therein the seat of the Company; and it is FURTHER RESOLVED, that the signature of such officers and the seal of the Company may be affixed to any such Power of Attorney or to any certificate relating thereto by facsimile, and any such Power of Attorney or certificate bearing such facsimile signatures or facsimile seal shall be binding upon the Company when so affixed and in the future with regard to any bond, undertaking or contract of surety to which it is attached," i f Sal. Stewo P. Andenao. President h Ch[arlaecvtive Oracer or WaahlnKtoa lateraadrnal Isunroaca company SEAL .. ss� 1G73 q & Seater Vke Prasldeel or North Amnion Specially tnsuraaca Compaar t 1 $ Teat y David M. tgyNaa, Sealer vim Preamenf9rwashingum International lnwnuee Company & Vke PreAdcnt or North Amniasa Spednity wsstraaca Compeer ' IN WITNESS WHEREOF, North American Specialty Insurance Company and Washington international Insurance Company have caused their official seats to be hereunto affixed, and these presents to be signed by their authorized officers this I Sth day of December 2010 . North American Specialty insurance Company Washington international Insurance Company State of Illinois County of Cook ss: December 15th On this day of 20 10 , before me, a Notary Public personally appeared Steven P. Ancrson ,President and CEO of Washington International Insurance Company and Senior Vice President of North American Specialty Insurance Company and David M. Layman , Senior Vice President of Washington International insurance Company and Vice President of North American Specialty Insurance Company, personally known to nie, who being by me duly sworn, acknowledged that they signed the above Power of Attorney as officers of and acknowledged said instrument to be the voluntary act and deed of their respective companies. Q t ta+►rr s n /"L'o i n. sxtartCOf Donna D. Sklens, Notary Public My tin tmarmu 1, James A,CCarenter , the duly elected Assistant Secretary of North American Specialty Insurance Company and Washington international Insurance Company, do hereby certify that the above and foregoing is a true and correct copy of a Power of Attorney given by said North American Specialty Insurance Company and Washington International Insurance Company, which is still in full forge and effect. 1N WIMv SS WIIEREOF,1 have set my hand and affixed the seals of the Companies thise?d y of 20�. s James A. Carp-kr, Vkae P—idast & Asalswm seestaary or wasbi.(son wenaswnai Jsuarxsa: Coaapuy & North Ametirm Spe6alty lnao "Company t r, CITY OF LUBBOCK INSURANCE REQUIREMENT AFFIDAVIT To Be Completed by Bidder and Agent Must be submitted with Hid 1, the undersigned Bidder, certify that the insurance requirements contained in this bid document have been reviewed by me with the below identified Insurance Agent/Broker. If I am awarded this contract by the City of Lubbock, I will be able to, within ten (10) business days after being notified of such award by the City of Lubbock, furnish a valid insurance certificate to the City meeting all of the requirements defined in this bid. Contract ((6'ginal ' ature) Contractor (Print) CONTRACTOR'S FIRM NAME: DM Construction, LLC (Print or Type) CONTRACTOR'S FIRM ADDRESS: 7204 Joliet Ave. Lubbock, TX 79423 Name of Aeent/Broker: Address of AgentBroker: 900 Summit Ave. City!State/Zip: Fort Worth, TX 76102 Agent/Broker Telephone Number. ( 817) 336-8520 T Date: 2-14-2011 NOTE TO CONTRACTOR If the time requirement specified above is not met, the City has the right to reject this bid and award the contract to another contractor. If you have any questions coucerniag these requirements, please contact the Purchasing gad_ Contract Management Office for the City of Lubbock at (806) 775-2572. BID # 11-9916-MA - Citibus Downtown Transfer Plaza Renovation & Addition Construction Project CONTRACTORS STATEMENT OF QUALIFICATIONS Individual contractors and joint ventures submitting a bid must complete the following evaluation information for the Project. Joint ventures shall be composed of not more than two firms and each firm must complete separate evaluations. Evaluation information must be submitted at time of bid submittal. Failure to submit the following Bidder Evaluation information may result in the OWNER considering the bid non -responsive and result in rejection of the bid by the OWNER. Bidders are to provide any additional information requested by the OWNER. In evaluating a fiirtim's qualifications, the following major factors will be considered: A. FINANCIAL CAPABILITY: For this project, the CONTRACTOR'S financial capability to undertake the project will be determined by the CONTRACTOR'S ability to secure bonding satisfactory to the OWNER. 13. EXPERIENCE: Do the organization and key personnel have appropriate technical experience on similar projects? C. SAFETY: Does the organization stress and support safety as an important function of the work process? D. QUALITY OF WORK: (1) Does the organization have a commitment to quality in every facet of their work - the process as well as the product? (2) Does the organization have a written quality philosophy and/or principles that exemplifies their work? If so, submit as Attachment "A". (3) Has this organization ever received an award or been recognized for doing "quality" work on a project? If so, give details under Attachment "A". E. CONFORMANCE TO CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: (1) Does the organization have a commitment and philosophy to construct projects as designed and as defined in the Contract Documents? The OWNER reserves the right to waive irregularities in determining the frrm's qualifications and reserves the right to require the submission of additional information. The qualifications of a firm shall not deprive the OWNER of the right to accept a bid, which in its judgment is the lowest and best bid, to reject any and all bids, to waive irregularities in the bids, or to reject nonconforming, non -responsive, or conditional bids. In addition, the OWNER reserves the right to reject any bid where circumstances and developments have in the opinion of the OWNER changed the qualifications or responsibility of the firm. Material misstatements on the qualifications forms may be grounds for rejection of the firm's bid on this project. Any such misstatement, if discovered after award of the contract to such firm, may be grounds for immediate termination of the contract. Additionally, the firm will be liable to the OWNER for any additional costs or damages to the OWNER resulting from such misstatements, including costs and attorney's fees for collecting such costs and damages. Complete the following information for your organization: 2 t Contractor's General Information Organization Doing Business As DM Construction, LLC Business Address of Principle Office Physical: 7204 Joliet Ave, Lubbock, TX 79423 Mailing: PO Box 93153, Lubbock, TX 79493 Telephone Numbers Main Number 806-6864742 Fax Number 806-686-0956 Web Site Address www.dm-lic.com Form of Business (Check One) Date of Incorporation X A Corporation A Partnership An Individual 12-6-2009 State of Incorporation Texas Chief Executive Officer's Name Morgan MacKenzie President's Name I Chuck Delano Vice President'sName(s) Secretary's Name Chuck Delano Treasurer's Name Morgan MacKenzie Date of Organization State whether partnership is ,general or Name Business Address Average Number of Current Full Time 2 Average Estimate of Revenue Employees the Current Year 3 Estimated - S3mil Contractor's Organizational .Experience Organization Doing Business As DM Construction, LLC Business Address of Regional Office Physical. 7204 Joliet Ave, Lubbock, TX 79423 Mailing: PO Box 93153, Lubbock, TX 79493 Name of Regional Office Manager N/A Telephone Numbers 806-686-4742 Main Number 806-686-0956 Fax Number www.dm-lic.com Web Site Address List of names that this organization currently, has or anticipates operating under over the history of the organization, including the names of related companies presently doing business: Names of Organization From Date To Date No Alternate Names List of companies, firms or organizations that own any part of the organization. Name of companies, firms or organization Percent Ownership None Years experience in projects similar to the proposed project: As a General Contractor 8 Years I As a Joint Venture Partner Has this or a predecessor organization ever defaulted on a project or failed to complete any work awarded to it? NO If yes provide full details in a separate attachment. See attachment No. Has this or a predecessor organization been released from a bid or proposal in the past ten Years? NO If yes provide full details in a separate attachment. See attachment No. Has this or a predecessor organization ever been disqualification as a bidder or proposer by any local state or federal agency within the last five ears? NO If yes provide full details in a separate attachment. See attachment No. Is this organization or your proposed surety currently in any litigation or contemplating lilt ation? NO If yes provide full details in a separate attachment. See attachment No. .Hp.this.or a.predecessor.organization ever refused to construct or refused to provide materials defined in the contract documents? NO If yes provide full details in a separate attachment. See attachment No. 4 Contractor's Proposed Key Personnel Organization Doing Business As DM Construction, LLC Provide a brief description of the managerial structure of the organization and illustrate with an organizational chart. Include the title and names of key personnel. Include this chart at an attachment to this description. See attachment No. Organization Chart is Attached. Morgan MacKenzie - 50% owner of DM Construction, LLC. Morgan is responsible for project managment, estimating, and accounts payable / receivable. Charles (Chuck) Delano - 50% owner of DM Construction, LLC. Chuck is responsible for project field supervision, quality, safety, project scheduling, & coordination between trades. Provide a brief description of the managerial structure proposed for this project and illustrate with an organizational chart. Include the title and names of proposed key personnel and alternates. Include this chart at an attachment to this description. See attachment No. Same as above. Provide information on the key personnel proposed for this project that will provide the following key functions. Provide information for candidates for each of these positions on the pages for each of these key personnel. Also provide biographical information for each primary and alternate candidate as an attachment. The biographical information must include the following as a minimum; technical experience, managerial experience, education and formal training, work history which describes project experience, including the roles and responsibilities for each assignment, and primary language. Additional information highlighting experience which makes them the best candidate for the assignment should also be included. Role Primary Candidate Alternate Candidate Project Manager Morgan MacKenzie Project Superintendent Chuck Delano Project Safety Officer Chuck Delano Quality Control Manager Chuck Delano If key personnel are to fulfill more than one of the roles listed above, provide a written narrative describing how much time will be devoted to each function, their qualifleations to fulfill each rote and the percentage of their time that will be devoted to each role. If the Individual is not to be devoted solely to this project, indicate how time it to be divided between this project and their other assignments. Chuck Delano will be handling the role of project Superintendent, Safety Officer, & Quality Control. We strongly feel that effective "superintedence" of a job encompasses the role of quality and safety as well. We feel that jobsite superintendents are most familiar with any project and should be the bottom line for safety and quality as well. During Chuck's career, he has been the field manager over many superintendents at once, and OSHA approved safety officer, and a quality control specialist. He is more than competent to complete the multiple roles. 5 Proposed Project Managers Organization Doing Business As Name of Individual DM Construction, LLC Morgan MacKenzie Years of Experience as Project Manager 6 Years Years of Experience with this organization Since Formed Number of similar projects as Project Manager More than 30 Number of similar projects in other positions More than I0 Current Project Assignments Name of Assignment Percent of Time Used for this Project Estimated Project Completion Date TBD Reference Contact Information(listing names indicates ap oval to.contactin the names individuals as a reference Name Darrell Fleming Name tc ar —Hamilton Title/ Position Architect Title/ Position Manager Organization Shiver -Me ert & Associates Organization Macerich - South Plains Mall Telephone 806-670-2W Telephone 806-792-4654 E-mail E-mail Richard. Hamilton@Macerich.com Project Shallowater ISD Project Multiple Candidate role on Pro"ect Name of Individual Project Manager Candidates role Project Manager on Project Years of Experience as Project Manager Years of Experience with this organization Number of similar projects as Project Manager Number of similar projects in other positions Current Project Assignments Name of Assignment Percent of Time Used for this Project Estimated Project Completion Date Name Name Title/ Position Titlel Position Organization Or anization Telephone Telephone E-mail E-mail Pro ect Project Candidate role on Project Candidate role on Project 6 Proposed Project Superintendent Organization Doing Business As Name of Individual DM Construction, LLC Chuck Delano Years of Experience as Project Superintendent 30+ Years of Experience with this organization Since Formed Number of similar projects as Superintendent 100+ Number of similar projects in other positions 25+ Current Project Assignments Name of Assignment Percent of Time Used for this Project Estimated Project Completion Date TB D Reference Contact Information(listing names indicates ap val to contactingthe names individuals as a reference Name Paul Fowler Name Richard Hamilton Title/ Position Administrator of Pathology Title! Position Manager Organization Texas Tech University HSC Organization Macerich - South Plains Mall Telephone 806-319-3221 Telephone 806-792-4634 E-mail aul.fowle ttuhsc.edu E-mail Richard.Hamilton Macerich.com Project Lubhock Medical Center Project Multi le Candidate role on Project Name of Individual Lead Superintendent / Quality Candidate role Superintendent/Quality/Safety on Protect Years of Experience as Project Superintendent Years of Experience with this organization Number of similar projects as Superintendent Number of similar projects in other positions Current Project Assignments Name of Assignment Percent of Time Used for this Project Estimated Project Completion Date mom Name Name Title/ Position Title( Position Organization Or anization Telephone Telephone E-mail E-mail Project Pro ect Candidate role on Project Candidate role on Project 7 Proposed Project Safety Officer Organization Doing Business As Name of Individual DM Construction, LLC Same as Superintendent Years of Experience as Project Safety Officer � Years of Experience with this organization Number of similar projects as Safety Officer Number of similar projects in other positions Current Project Assignments Name of Assignment Percent of Time Used for this Project Estimated Project Completion Date Reference Contact Information(listing names indicates ap vat to contactingthe names individuals as a reference Name Name Title/ Position Title/ Position Or anization Organization Telephone Telephone E-mail E-mail Project Project Candidate role on Project Name of Individual Candidate role on Pro.'ect Years of Experience as Project Safety Officer Years of Experience with this organization Number of similar projects as Safety Officer Number of similar projects in other positions Current Project Assignments Name of Assignment Percent of Time Used for this Project Estimated Project Completion Date Name Name Title/ Position Title/ Position Organization Organization Tele hone Telephone E-mail E-mail Project Project Candidate role on Project Candidate role on Project 8 Proposed Project Quality Control Manager l organization Doing Business As LLC Name of Individual Same as Superintendent Years of Experience as Quality Control Manager Years of Experience with this organization Number of similar projects as Quality Manager Number of similar projects in other positions Current Project Assignments Name of Assignment Percent of Time Used for Estimated Project I Name mail didate role on ect Name of Individual Candidate role on Project Years of Experience as Quality Control Manager Years of Experience with this organization Number of similar projects as Quality Manager Number of similar projects in other positions Current Project Assignments Name of Assignment Percent of Time Used for Estimated Project Position E-mail E-mail Project Project Candidate role on Candidate role Pro ect on Project 9 Contractor's Project Experience and Resources Organization Doing Business As DM Construction, LLC Provide a list of major projects that are currently underway, or have been completed within the last ten years on Attachment A Provide a completed Project Information form (Attachment B) for projects that have been completed in the last five ears which sUcificatly illustrate the organizations capability to provide best value to the Owner for this protect. Include a completed Project Information form (Attachment B) for projects which illustrate the experience of the proposed key personnel. Provide a description of your organizations approach to completing this project to provide best value for the Owner. Including a description of your approach in the following areas; l . Contract administration 2. Management of subcontractor and suppliers 3. Time management 4, Cost control S. Quality management 6. Project site safety 7. Managing changes to the project 8. Managing equipment 9. Meeting HUB / MWBE Participation Goal Provide a list of major equipment ro sed for use on this projecL Attach Additional Information if necess Equipment Item Primary Use on Project Own Buhl Lease TBD td What work will the organization complete using its own resources? What work does the organization propose to subcontract on thisproject? 10 Contractor's Subcontractors and Vendors Organization Doing Business As DM Construction, LLC Provide a list of subcontractors that will provide more than 10 agcent of the work based on contract amounts Name Work to be Provided Est. Percent 1-IUB/MWBE of Contract Firm Will Be Listed on semate form Provide information on the proposed key personnel, project experience and a description of past relationship and work experience for each subcontractor listed above usina the Project Information Forms, Provide a list of major equipment roosed for use on this project. Attach Additional Information if necessary Furnish Furnish HUB/M Vendor Name Equipment / Material Provided Only and WBE Install Firm Will Be Ltsted on severate form I Attachment A Current Projects and Project Completed within the last 10 Years Project Owner I I-ISD Project Name I (lodges Elementary Window Replacement General Description of Project: Window Replacement at I -lodges .Elementary School Project Cost $210,000 Date Project Completed Current Key Project Personnel Project Manager Project Superintendent Safety Officer Quality Control Manager Name Morgan MacKenzie Chuck Delano Chuck Delano Chuck Delano Reference Contact Information (listing names indicates approval to contacting the names individuals as a reference) Name Title/ Position Organization Telephone E-mail Owner Designer Jim Rittenberry Parkhill, Smith & Cooper Construction Manager Project Owner Macerich - South Plains Project Name I Food Court Renovations - Phase One General Description of Project: Major utility and infrastructure update at the food court. Completed Phase One of Four Phases Project Cost $425>OW. I Date Project Completed I Phase I complete -July 2010 Key Project Personnel Project Manager Project Superintendent Safety Officer Quality Control Manager Name Morgan MacKenzie Chuck Delano Chuck Delano Chuck Delano Reference Contact Information (listing names indicates approval to contacting the names individuals as a reference) Name Title/ Position Organization Telephone E-mail Owner Richard Hamilton Manager Macerich 806-792-4654 richard.hamilton@macerich. Designer Construction Manager Project Owner Other projects available on request Project Name General Description of Project:' Project Cost Date Project Completed Key Project Personnel Project Manager Project Superintendent Safety Officer Quality Control Mina er Name Reference Contact Information (listing names indicates approval to contacting the names individuals as a reference) Name Title/ Position Organization Telephone E-mail Owner Designer Construction Manager sm :t SAFETY RECORD QUESTIONNAIRE The City of Lubbock City Council desires to avail itself of the benefits of Section 252.0435 of the Local r Government Code, and consider the safety records of potential contractors prior to awarding proposals on City contracts. Pursuant to Section 252.0435 of the Local Government Code, City of Lubbock has adopted the following written definition and criteria for accurately determining the safety record of a proposer prior to awarding proposals on City, contracts. ,.a The definition and criteria for determining the safety record of a proposer for this consideration shall be: ;... The City of Lubbock shall consider the safety record of the offerors in determining the responsibility thereof. The City may consider any incidents involving worker safety or safety of the citizens of the City of Lubbock, be it related or caused by environmental, mechanical, operational, supervision or any other cause or factor. Specifically, the City may consider, among other things: a. Complaints to, or final orders entered by, the Occupational Safety and 1-Iealth Review Commission (OSHRC), against the proposer for violations of OSHA regulations within the past three (3) years. b. Citations (as defined below) from an Environmental Protection Agency (as defined below) for violations within the past five (5) years. Environmental Protection Agencies include, but are not necessarily limited to, the U.S. Army Corps of Engineers (USACOE), the U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service (USFWS), the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality (TCEQ), the Texas Natural Resource Conservation Commission (TNRCC) (predecessor to the TCEQ), the Texas Department of State Health Services (DSHS), the Texas Parks and Wildlife Department (TPWD), the Structural Pest Control Board (SPCB), agencies of local governments responsible for enforcing environmental protection or worker safety related laws or regulations, and similar regulatory agencies of other states of the United States. Citations include notices of violation, notices of enforcement, suspension/revocations of state or federal licenses or registrations, fines assessed, pending criminal complaints, indictments, or convictions, administrative orders, draft orders, final orders, and judicial final y` judgments. C. Convictions of corporate officers and employees of a criminal offense within the past ten (10) years, which resulted from bodily harm or death. zs d. Any other safety related matter deemed by the City Council to be material in determining the responsibility of the offeror and his or her ability to perform the services or goods required by the proposal documents in a safe environment, both for the workers and other employees of offeror and the citizens of the City of Lubbock. In order to obtain proper information from offerors so that City of Lubbock may consider the safety records of potential contractors prior to awarding proposals on City contracts, City of Lubbock requires that offerors answer the following three (3) questions and submit them with their proposals: QUESTION ONE Has the offeror, or the firm, corporation, partnership, or institution represented by the offeror, or anyone acting for 'v such frm, corporation, partnership or institution, received citations* for violations of OSHA within the past three � (3) years? YES NO X If the offeror has indicated YES for question number one above, the offeror must provide to City of Lubbock, with its proposal submission, the following information with respect to each such citation: Date of offense, location of establishment inspected, category of offense, final disposition of offense, if any, and penalty assessed, QUESTION TWO Has the bidder, or the firm, corporatio», partnership, or institution represented by the bidder, or anyone acting for such firm, corporation, partnership or institution, received citations for violations of environmental protection laws or regulations, of any kind or type, within the past five years? Citations include notice of violation, notice of enforcement, suspension/revocations of state or federal licenses, or registrations, fines assessed, pending criminal complaints, indictments, or convictions, administrative orders, draft orders, final orders, and judicial final judgments. YES NO X if the bidder has indicated YES for question number two above, the bidder must provide to City of Lubbock, with its bid submission, the following information %with respect to each such conviction: Date of offense or occurrence, location where offense occurred, type of offense, final disposition of offense, if any, and penalty assessed. QUESTION THREE Has the bidder, or the firm, corporation, partnership, or institution represented by bidder, or anyone acting for such firm, corporation, partnership, or institution, ever been convicted, within the past ten (10) years, of a criminal offense which resulted from serious bodily injury or death? YES NO X If the bidder has indicated YES for question number three above, the bidder must provide to City of Lubbock, with its bid submission, the following information with respect to each such conviction: Date of offense, location where offense occurred, type of offense, final disposition of offense, in any, and penalty assessed. ACKNOWLEDGEMENT THE STATE OF TEXAS COUNTY OF LUBBOCK I certify that I have made no willful misrepresentations in this Questionnaire nor have I withheld information in my statements and answers to questions. I am aware that the information given by me in this questionnaire shall be -= investigated, with my full permission, and that any misrepresentations or omissions may cause my bid to be rejected. Sign re Managing Member of LLC Title r- 2 ! SUSPENSION ANO DEBARMENT CERTIT'ICATION Federal Law (A-102 Common Rule and OMB Circular A-110) prohibits non -Federal entities from contracting with or snaking sub -awards under covered transactions to parties that are suspended or debarred or whose - principals are suspended or debarred. Covered transactions include procurement contracts for goods or services equal to or in excess of S50,000 and all non -procurement transactions (e.g., sub -awards to sub -recipients). Contractors receiving individual awards of $50,000 or more and all sub -recipients must certify that their organization and its principals are not suspended or debarred by a Federal agency. Before an award of S50,000 or more can be made to your firm, you must certify that your organization and its principals are not suspended or debarred by a Federal agency. 1, the undersigned agent for the firm named below, certify that neither this firm nor its principals are suspended or debarred by a Federal agency. COMPANY NAME: DM Construction LLC FEDERAL TAX ID or SOCIAL SECURITY No. 27-1430990 Signature of Company Official: Az�t Printed name of company official signing abo ; Morgan MacKenzie Date Signed: 2-23-11 �_ 1 Pap_e Intentionally Left Blank REVISED CITIBUS FTA CLAUSES 1. No Federal Government Obligations to Third Parties 2. False Statements or,Claims Civil and Criminal Fraud 3. Access to Third Party Contract Records) 4. Changes to Federal Requirements 5. Termination 6. Civil Rights (Title Vl, EEO, ADA) 7. Disadvantaged Business Enterprises 8. Incorporation of FTA Terms 9. Debarment and Suspension 10. Buy America 11. Resolution of Disputes, Breaches, or Other Litigation 12. Lobbying 13. Clean Air 14. Clean Water 15. Davis -Bacon Act 16. Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act 17. Copeland Anti -Kickback Act 18. Bonding 19, Seismic Safety 20. Energy Conservation 21, Recycled Products 22. Conformance with ITS National Architecture 23. ADA Access The bidder or offeror hereby certifies that it will meet the requirements of the above listed FTA Clauses: Date 2-23-11 Signature - Company Name DM- Construction, LLC Title Managing Member of LLC NO GOVERNMENT OBLIGATION TO THIRD PARTIES Applicability to Contracts ..1 Applicable to all contracts. Applicability to Micro -Purchases Micro -purchases are defined as those purchases under $2,500. These requirements do not apply to micro - purchases. _..t _Flow Down Not required by statute or regulation for either primary contractors or subcontractors, this concept should flow down to all levels to clarify, to all parties to the contract, that the Federal Government does not have contractual liability to third parties, absent specific written consent. Model Clause/Language While no specific language is required, FTA has developed the following language. No Obligation by the federal Government. (1) The Purchaser and Contractor acknowledge and agree that, notwithstanding any concurrence by the Federal Government in or approval of the solicitation or award of the underlying contract, absent the express written consent by the Federal Government, the Federal Government is not a party to this contract and shall not be subject to any obligations or liabilities to the Purchaser, Contractor, or any other party (whether or not a party to that contract) pertaining to any matter resulting from the underlying contract. (2) The Contractor agrees to include the above clause in each subcontract financed in whole or in part with Federal assistance provided by FTA. It is further agreed that the clause shall not be modified, except to identify the subcontractor who will be subject to its provisions. Date: 2.-23-11 signature _ Company Name: t Constru ion, LLC 9 Title: Managing Member f LLC J. i 3 PROGRAM FRAUD AND FALSE OR FRAUDULENT STATEMENTS AND RELATED ACTS 31 U.S.C. 3801 et seq. "+ 49 CFR Part 3118 U.S.C. 1001 49 U.S.C.5307 Ap12 icabilitxto Contracts These requirements are applicable to all contracts. Applicability to Micro -Purchases Micro -purchases are defined as those purchases under $2,500. These requirements do not apply to micro - purchases. Flow Down These requirements flow down to contractors and subcontractors who make, present, or submit covered claims and statements. Model Clause/Language These requirements have no specified language, so FTA proffers the following language. Program Fraud and False or Fraudulent Statements or Related Acts. (1) The Contractor acknowledges that the provisions of the Program Fraud Civil Remedies Act of 1986, as amended, 31 U.S.C. § § 3801 gt seg . and U.S. DOT regulations, "Program Fraud Civil Remedies," 49 C.F.R. Part 31, apply to its actions pertaining to this Project. Upon execution of the underlying contract, the Contractor certifies or affirms the truthfulness and accuracy of any statement it has made, it makes, it may make, or causes to be made, pertaining to the underlying contract or the FTA assisted project for which this f contract work is being performed. In addition to other penalties that may be applicable, the Contractor further acknowledges that if it makes, or causes to be made, a false, fictitious, or fraudulent claim, statement, submission, or certification, the Federal Government reserves the right to impose the penalties of the Program Fraud Civil Remedies Act of 1986 on the Contractor to the extent the Federal Government deems appropriate. (2) The Contractor also acknowledges that if it makes, or causes to be made, a false, fictitious, or fraudulent claim, statement, submission, or certification to the Federal Government under a contract connected with a project that is financed in whole or in part with Federal assistance originally awarded by FTA under the authority of 49 U.S.C. § 5307, the Government reserves the right to impose the penalties of 18 U.S.C. § 1001 and 49 U.S.C. § 5307(n)(1) on the Contractor, to the extent the Federal Government deems appropriate. r (3) The Contractor agrees to include the above two clauses in each subcontract financed in whole or in part with Federal assistance provided by FTA. It is further agreed that the clauses shall not be modified, except to identify the subcontractor who will be subject to the provisions. Date: 2-23-11 Ildy Signature_ Company Name: DgAorfstrucXon, LLC Title: Managing Member af LLC K-1-11" 44 f: J I CHANGES MADE TO 4220.1 F REV. 4-14-09 on 7/l/2010 FTA Circular 4220.1 F, "Third Party Contracting Guidance," November 1, 2008, Rev, April 14, 2009, is further revised to make the follow citation revisions and editorial clarifications: I _ Chapter 11. Subparagraph 2.b(1)(b) has been revised to announce the inclusion of procedures for procuring art works and the services of artists. 2. Chapter 111. A new section 5 has been added to discuss prohibitions against fraud. 3. Chapter IV. A new Paragraph 2.a(9) has been added to Chapter IV to include the requests of President Obama and Secretary LaHood to ban texting while driving. 4. Chapter IV. A new Subsection 2.g has been added to Chapter IV that includes procedures for the procurement of art. Other information pertaining to art is available on the FTA website and FTA's Best Practices Procurement Manual. Former Subsections 2.g through 2 j have been re -numbered Subsections 2.h through 21 respectively. 5. Chapter IV. Paragraph 21(6) has been amended to show that Section I of the Copeland "Anti -Kickback" Act, 18 U.S.C. § 874, applies to all construction contracts, and Section 2 of the Copeland Anti -Kickback" Act, 40 U.S.C, § 3145, and implementing U.S. Department of Labor regulations apply to construction, contracts exceeding $2,000. Appendix D to the circular has also been corrected. 6. Chapter VI. Paragraph 2.c(2) has been divided into three subparagraphs (rather than two) to emphasize better that the cost plus a percentage of cost method of contracting and the percentage of construction cost method of contracting are both prohibited, and the time and materials method of contracting is restricted. 7. Chapter Vl. Paragraph 3.a(I) has been amended for consistency with Subsection 3.a to state that a micro -purchase is valued at $3,000 or less, except for contracts covered by the Davis - Bacon Act. Appendix D has also been revised accordingly. 8. Chapter VI. Former Paragraph 6.a(2) "Establishing Indirect Cost Rates," has been deleted, and former Paragraph 6.a(3) has been re -numbered Paragraph 6.a(2). 9. Appendix D. Changes have been made to reflect the nature of the circular as guidance rather than requirements as well as for consistency with other revisions described above, and re -arranged the order of the matrices for easier use. 11. For your convenience, attached are the April 14, 2009, changes to the original FTA Circular 4220.1 F. Date; 2-23-11 - Signature Company Name: DyConstru�ption, LLC Title: managinT memberi LLC ATTACHMENT I . No changes have been made to FTA Circular 4220.IF as a result of enactment of the American Recovery and Reinvestment Act of 2009, Pub. L. 111-5, signed into law February 17, -:. 2009. 2. However, the following substantive changes and technical corrections have been made. a. Chapter IV, Subsection 2.h(8) pertaining to the use of Project Labor Agreements (PLA) has been revised to reflect the new Executive Order No. 13502 of, "Use of Project Labor Agreements for Federal Construction Projects," February 6, 2009, that removes restrictions on a OF, recipient's use of Project Labor Agreements and rescinds former Executive Order No. 13202, "Preservation of Open Competition and Government Neutrality Towards Government Contractors' Labor Relations on Federal and Federally Funded Construction Projects," February 17, 2001, as amended by Executive Order No. 13208, April 6, 2001, 41 U.S.C. Section 251 note. b. Chapter VI, Subsection 3(a)(1) has been corrected to state that micro -purchase standards may be used for contracts of $3,000 or less, except that Davis -Bacon requirements will apply to third party contracts of more than $2,000. C. In Appendix A, a reference to the new Executive Order, No. 13502 of, "Use of Project Labor Agreements for Federal Construction Projects," February 6, 2009, has been added. d. In Appendix D, "FEDERALLY REQUIRED AND OTHER MODEL CLAUSES," "A. REQUIRED THIRD PARTY CONTRACT CLAUSES," we set out separate category for Termination clauses for third party contracts exceeding $10,000 to which 49 CFR Part 18 applies. [Appendix D, Page I of 8]. e. In Appendix D, "FEDERALLY REQUIRED AND OTHER MODEL CLAUSES," "A. REQUIRED THIRD PARTY CONTRACT CLAUSES," we set out separate category for Suspension and Debarment clauses for third party contracts exceeding $25,000. F> U l of 8 [Appendix � Pa e g ] f. In Appendix D, "FEDERALLY REQUIRED AND OTHER MODEL CLAUSES," "APPLICABILITY OF THIRD PARTY CONTRACT CLAUSES," we added s' information that the requirement for a Termination clause applies to third party contracts exceeding $10,000 to which 49 CFR Part 18 applies. [Appendix D, Page 6 of 8] i g. In Appendix D, "FEDERALLY REQUIRED AND OTHER MODEL CLAUSES," "APPLICABILITY OF THIRD PARTY CONTRACT CLAUSES," we added infohnation that the requirement for a Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act clause applies to third party contracts exceeding $100,000 to which 49 CFR Part 18 applies. [Appendix D, Page 6 of 8]. Date: 2-23-11 Signature Company Name: D ongtruc on, LLC Title: Managing Kember pe LLC LJ FEDERAL CHANGES 49 CFR Part 18 Applicability to Contracts The Federal Changes requirement applies to all contracts. Flow Down The Federal Changes requirement flows down appropriately to each applicable changed requirement. Model Clause/Language No specific language is mandated. The following language has been developed by FTA. Federal Changes - Contractor shall at all times comply with all applicable FTA regulations, policies, procedures and directives, including without limitation those listed directly or by reference in the Master Agreement between Purchaser and FTA, as they may be amended or promulgated from time to time during the term of this contract. Contractor's failure to so comply shall constitute a material breach of this contract. Date: 2-23-11 Signature Company Nan Ccnstr Lion, LLC Title: Managing Member of LLC Date: 2-23-1, - - Signature Company Name: D Const +lion, PLC T_ t,e : Manag - g Membe o. LLC TERMINATION 49 U.S,C.Part I $ FTA. Circular 4220,1E Applicability to Contracts All contracts (with the exception of contracts with nonprofit organizations and institutions of higher education,) in excess of $10,000 shall contain suitable provisions for termination by the grantee including the manner by which it will be effected and the basis for settlement. (For contracts with nonprofit organizations and institutions of higher education'the threshold is $100,000.) In addition, such contracts shall describe ... conditions under which the contract may be terminated for default as well as conditions where the contract may be terminated because of circumstances beyond the control of the contractor. Flow Down The termination requirements flow down to all contracts in excess of $10,000, with the exception of contracts with nonprofit organizations and institutions of higher learning. Model Clause/Language FTA does not prescribe the form or content of such clauses. The following are suggestions of clauses to be used in different types of contracts: a. Termination for Convenience (General Provision) The (Recipient) may terminate this contract, in whole or in part, at any time by written notice to the Contractor when it is in the Government's best interest, The Contractor shall be paid its costs, including contract close-out costs, and profit on work performed up to the time of termination. The Contractor shall promptly submit its termination claim to (Recipient) to be paid the v.. Contractor. If the Contractor has any property in its possession belonging to the (Recipient), the Contractor will account for the same, and dispose of it in the manner the (Recipient) directs. b. Termination for Default [Breach or Cause] (General Provision) If the Contractor does not deliver supplies in accordance with the contract delivery schedule, or, if the contract is for services, the Contractor fails to perform in the manner called for in the contract, or if the Contractor fails to comply with any other provisions of the contract, the (Recipient) may terminate this contract for default. Termination shall be effected by 1 serving a notice of termination on the contractor setting forth the manner in which the Contractor is in default. The contractor will only be.paid the contract price for supplies delivered and accepted, or services performed in accordance with the manner of performance set forth in the contract. If it is later determined by the (Recipient) that the Contractor had an excusable reason for not performing, such as a strike, fire, or flood, events which are not the fault of or are beyond the control of the Contractor, the (Recipient), after setting up a new delivery of performance schedule, may allow the Contractor to continue work, or treat the termination as a termination for convenience. c. Opportunity to Cure (General Provision) The (Recipient) in its sole discretion may, in the case of a termination for breach or default, allow the Contractor [an appropriately short period of time] in which to cure the defect. In such case, the notice of termination will state the time period in which cure is permitted and other appropriate conditions If Contractor fails to remedy to (Recipient)'s satisfaction the breach or default of any of the terms, covenants, or conditions of this Contract within [ten (.10) days] after receipt by Contractor of written notice from (Recipient) setting forth the nature of said breach or default, (Recipient) shall have the right to terminate the Contract without any further obligation to Contractor. Any such termination for default shall not in any way operate to preclude (Recipient) from also pursuing all available remedies against Contractor and its sureties for said breach or default, a d. Waiver of Remedies for any Breach In the event that (Recipient) elects to waive its remedies for any breach by Contractor of any covenant, term or condition of this Contract, such waiver by (Recipient) shall not limit :: (Recipient)'s remedies for any succeeding breach of that or of any other term, covenant, or condition of this Contract. e. Termination for Convenience (Professional or Transit Service Contracts) The (Recipient), by written notice, may terminate this contract, in whole or in part, when it is in the Government's interest. if this contract is terminated, the Recipient shall be liable only for payment under the payment provisions of this contract for services rendered before the effective date of termination. f. Termination for Default (Supplies and Service) If the Contractor fails to deliver supplies or to perform the services within the time specified in this contract or any extension or if the Contractor fails to comply with any ;a other provisions of this contract, the (Recipient) may terminate this contract for default. The (Recipient) shall terminate by delivering to the Contractor a Notice of Termination specifying the nature of the default. The Contractor will only be paid the contract price for supplies delivered and accepted, or services performed in accordance with the manner or performance set forth in this contract. U HE Lj 11 If, after termination for failure to fulfill contract obligations, it is determined that the Contractor was not in default, the rights and obligations of the parties shall be the same as if the termination had been issued for the convenience of the Recipient. g. Termination for Default (Transportation Services) if the Contractor fails to pick up the commodities or to perform the services, including delivery services, within the time specified in this contract or any extension or if the Contractor fails to comply with any other provisions of this contract, the (Recipient) may terminate this contract for default. The (Recipient) shall terminate by delivering to the Contractor a Notice of Termination specifying the nature of default. The Contractor will only be paid the contract price for services performed in accordance with the manner of performance set forth in this contract. If this contract is terminated while the Contractor has possession of Recipient goods, the Contractor shall, upon direction of the (Recipient), protect and preserve the goods until surrendered to the Recipient or its agent. The Contractor and (Recipient) shall agree on payment for the preservation and protection of goods. Failure to agree on an amount will be resolved under the Dispute clause. If, after termination for failure to fulfill contract obligations, it is determined that the Contractor was not in default, the rights and obligations of the parties shall be the same as if the termination had been issued for the convenience of the (Recipient). h. Termination for Default (Construction) If the Contractor refuses or fails to prosecute the work or any separable part, with the diligence that will insure its completion within the time specified in this contract or any extension or fails to complete the work within this time, or if the Contractor fails to comply with any other provisions of this contract, the (Recipient) may terminate this contract for default. The (Recipient) shall terminate by delivering to the Contractor a Notice of Termination specifying the nature of the default. In this event, the Recipient may take over the wort: and compete it by contract or otherwise, and may take possession of and use any materials, appliances, and plant on the work site necessary for completing the work. The Contractor and its sureties shall be liable for any damage to the Recipient resulting from the Contractor's refusal or failure to complete the work within specified time, whether or not the Co rtractor's right to proceed with the work is terminated. This liability includes any increased costs incurred by the Recipient in completing the work. The Contractor's right to proceed shall not be terminated nor the Contractor charged with damages under this clause if- i 1. the delay in completing the work arises from unforeseeable causes beyond the control and without the fault or negligence of the Contractor. Examples of such causes include: acts of God, acts of the Recipient, acts of �j another Contractor in the performance of a contract with the Recipient, epidemics, quarantine restrictions, 1 strikes, freight embargoes; and r 2. the contractor, within [ 10] days from the beginning of any delay, notifies the (Recipient) in writing of the causes of delay. If in the judgment of the (Recipient), the delay is excusable, the time for completing the work shall be extended. The judgment of the (Recipient) shall be final and conclusive on the parties, but subject to appeal under the Disputes clauses. If, after termination of the Contractor's right to proceed, it is determined that the Contractor was not in default, or that the delay was excusable, the rights and obligations of the parties will be the same as if the termination had been issued for the convenience of the Recipient. i. Termination for Convenience or Default (Architect and Engineering) The (Recipient) may terminate this i contract in whole or in part, for the Recipient's convenience or because of the failure of the Contractor to fulfill the contract obligations. The (Recipient) shall terminate by delivering to the Contractor a Notice of .' Termination specifying the nature, extent, and effective date of the termination. Upon receipt of the notice, the Contractor shall (1) immediately discontinue all services affected (unless the notice directs otherwise), and (2) deliver to the Contracting Officer all data, drawings, specifications, reports, estimates, summaries, and other information and materials accumulated in performing this contract, whether completed or in process. If the termination is for the convenience of the Recipient, the Contracting Officer shall make an equitable adjustment in the contract price but shall allow no anticipated profit on unperformed services. If the termination is for failure of the Contractor to fulfill the contract obligations, the Recipient may complete the work by contact or otherwise and the Contractor shall be liable for any additional cost incurred by the Recipient. If, after termination for failure to fulfill contract obligations, it is determined that the Contractor was not in default, the rights and obligations of the parties shall be the same as if the termination had been issued for the convenience of the Recipient. j. Termination for Convenience of Default (Cost -Type Contracts) The (Recipient) may terminate this contract, or any. portion of it, by serving a notice or termination on the Contractor. The notice shall state whether the termination is for convenience of the (Recipient) or for the default of the Contractor. If the termination is for default, the notice shall state the manner in which the contractor has failed to perform the requirements of the contract. The Contractor shall account for any property in its possession paid for from funds received from the . (Recipient), or property supplied to the Contractor by the (Recipient). If the termination is for default, the (Recipient) may fix the fee, if the contract provides for a fee, to be paid the contractor in proportion to the value, if any, of work performed up to the time of termination. The Contractor shall promptly submit its termination claim to the (Recipient) and the parties shall negotiate the termination settlement to be paid the Contractor. If the, termination is for the convenience of the (Recipient), the Contractor shall be paid its contract close-out costs, and a fee, if the contract provided for payment of a fee, in proportion to the work performed -up to the time of termination. If, after serving a notice of termination for default, the (Recipient) determines that the Contractor has an excusable reason for not performing, such as strike, fire, flood, events which are not the fault of and are beyond the control of the contractor, the (Recipient), after setting up a new work schedule, may allow the Contractor to continue work, or treat the termination as a termination for convenience. f. 1 l t, CIVIL RIGHTS REQUIREMENTS a 29 U.S.C. § 623,42 U.S.C. § 2000 42 U.S.C. § 6102,42 U.S.C. § 12112 42 U.S.C. § 12132, 49 U.S.C. § 5332 29 CFR Part 1630, 41 CFR Parts 60 et seq. j Applicability to Contracts The Civil Rights Requirements apply to all contracts. Applicability to Micro -Purchases =w Micro -purchases are defined as those purchases under $2,500. These requirements do not apply to micro - purchases. 0 J. Flaw Down The Civil Rights requirements flow down to all third party contractors and their contracts at every tier. Model Clause/Language The following clause was predicated on language contained at 49 CFR Part 19, Appendix A, but FTA has shorten the lengthy text. Civil Rights - The following requirements apply to the underlying contract: (1) Nondiscrimination - In accordance with Title VI of the Civil Rights Act, as amended, 42 U.S.C. § 2000d, section 303 of the Age Discrimination Act of 1975, as amended, 42 U.S.C. § 6102, section 202 of the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990,42 U.S.C. § 12132, and Federal transit law at 49 U.S.C. § 5332, the Contractor agrees that it will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, color, creed, national origin, sex, age, or disability. In addition, the Contractor agrees to comply with applicable Federal implementing regulations and other implementing requirements FTA may issue. (2) Equal Employment Opportunity - The following equal employment opportunity requirements apply to the underlying contract: (a) Race, Color, Creed, National Origin, Sex - In accordance with Title VII of the Civil Rights Act, as amended, 42 U.S.C. § 2000e, and Federal transit laws at 49 U.S.C. § 5332, the Contractor agrees to comply with all applicable equal employment opportunity requirements of U.S. Department of Labor (U.S. DOL) regulations, "Office of Federal Contract Compliance Programs, Equal Employment Opportunity, Department of Labor," 41 C.F.R. Parts 60 et seg ., (which implement Executive Order No. 11246, "Equal Employment Opportunity," as amended by Executive Order No. 11375, "Amending Executive Order 11246 Relating to Equal Employment Opportunity," 42 U.S.C. § 2000e note), and with any applicable Federal statutes, executive orders, regulations, and Federal policies that may in the future affect construction activities undertaken in the course of the Project. The Contractor agrees to take affirmative action to ensure that applicants are employed, and that employees are treated during employment, without regard to their race, color, creed, national origin, sex, or. age. Such action shall include, but not be limited to, the following: employment, upgrading, demotion or transfer, recruitment or recruitment advertising, layoff or termination; rates ofpay or other forms'of" compensation, and selection for training, including apprenticeship. In addition, the Contractor agrees to comply with any implementing requirements FTA may issue. (b) Age - In accordance with section 4 of the Age Discrimination in Employment Act of 1967, as amended, 29 U.S.C. § § 623 and Federal transit law at 49 U.S.C. § 5332, the Contractor agrees to refrain from discrimination against present and prospective employees for reason of age. In addition, the Contractor agrees to comply with any implementing requirements FTA may issue. " (c) Disabilities - In accordance with section 102 of the Americans with Disabilities Act, as amended, 42 U.S.C. § 12112, the Contractor agrees that it will comply with the requirements of U.S. Equal Employment Opportunity Commission, "Regulations to Implement the Equal Employment Provisions of the Americans with Disabilities Act," 29 C:.F.R. Part 1630, pertaining to employment of persons with disabilities. In addition, the Contractor agrees to comply with any implementing requirements FTA may issue. (3) The Contractor also agrees to include these requirements in each subcontract financed in whole or in part with Federal assistance provided by FTA, modified only if necessary to identify the affected parties. ;•:� Date. 2-23-11 jQr - i ] Signature ] Company Nam : D Constru ion, LLC E, ` 'title: Managing Member LLC t. P,- itcd' 0 I J J M�� DISADVANTAGED B USINESS ENTERPRISE (DBE) 49 CFR Part 26 Background and Applicability The newest version on the Department of Transportation's Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (DBE) program became effective July 16, 2003. The rule provides guidance to grantees on the use of overall and contract goals, requirement to include DBE provisions in subcontracts, evaluating DBE participation where specific contract goals have been set, reporting requirements, and replacement of DBE subcontractors. Additionally, the DBE program dictates payment terms and conditions (including limitations on retainage) applicable to all subcontractors regardless of whether they are DBE firms or not. The DBE program applies to all DOT -assisted contracting activities. A formal clause such as that below must be included in all contracts above the micro -purchase level. The requirements of clause subsection b flow down to subcontracts. A substantial change to the payment provisions in this newest version of Part 26 concerns retainage (see section 26.29). Grantee choices concerning retainage should be reflected in the language choices in clause subsection d. Clause Lan ua e The following clause language is suggested, not mandatory. It incorporates the payment terms and conditions applicable to all subcontractors based in Part 26 as well as those related only to DBE subcontractors. The suggested language allows for the options available to grantees concerning retainage, specific contract goals, and evaluation of DBE subcontracting participation when specific contract goals have been established. Disadvantaged Business Enterprises a. This contract is subject to the requirements of Title 49, Code of Federal Regulations, Part 26, Participation by Disadvantaged Business Enterprises in Department of Transportation Financial Assistance Programs. The national goal for participation of Disadvantaged Business Enterprises (DBE.) is 10%. The agency's overall goal for DBE participation is __ %. A separate contract goal [of _ % DBE participation has] [has not] been established for this procurement. b. The contractor shall not discriminate on the basis of race, color, national origin, or sex in the performance of this contract. The contractor shall carry out applicable requirements of 49 CFR Part 26 in the award and administration of this DOT -assisted contract. Failure by the contractor to carry out these requirements is a material breach of this contract, which may result in the termination of this contract or such other remedy as (insert agency name) deems appropriate. Each subcontract the contractor signs with a subcontractor must include the assurance in this paragraph (see 49 CFR 26.13(b)). c. {If a separate contract goal has been established, use the following} Bidders/offerors are required to document sufficient DBE participation to meet these goals or, alternatively, document adequate good faith efforts to do so, as provided for in 49 CFR 26.53. Award of this contract is conditioned on submission of the following [concurrent with and accompanying sealed bid] [concurrent with and accompanying an initial proposal] [prior to award]: J The names and addresses of DBE firms that will participate in this contract; 2. A description of the work each DBE will perform; The dollar amount of the participation of each DBE .firm patlicipating; 4. Written documentation of the bidder/offeror's commitment to use a DBE subcontractor whose participation it submits to meet the contract goal; 5. Written confirmation from the DBE that it is participating in the contract as provided in the prime contractor's commitment; and 6. If the contract goal is not met, evidence of good faith efforts to do so. [Bidders] [Offerors) must present the information required above [as a matter of responsiveness] [with initial proposals] [prior to contract award] (see 49 CFR 26.53(3)). ff no separate contract goal has been established, use the following) The successful bidder/offeror will be required to report its DBE participation obtained through race -neutral means throughout the period of performance. d. The contractor is required to pay its subcontractors performing work related to this contract for satisfactory performance of that work no later than 30 days after the contractor's receipt of payment for that work from the { insert agency name). In addition, [the contractor may not hold retainage from its subcontractors.] [is required to return any retainage payments to those subcontractors within 30 days after the subcontractor's work related to this contract is satisfactorily completed.] [is required to return any retainage payments to those subcontractors within 30 days after incremental acceptance of the subcontractor's work by the (insert agency name) and contractor's receipt of the partial retainage payment related to the subcontractor's work.] e. The contractor must promptly notify {insert agency name), whenever a DBE subcontractor performing work =' related to this contract is terminated or fails to complete its work, and must make good faith efforts to engage another DBE subcontractor to perform at least the same amount of work. The contractor may not terminate any DBE subcontractor and perform that work through its own forces or those of an affiliate without prior written consent of (insert agency name). Dace: 2-23-11 Signature Company Name: onstruC on, LLC «� Title: Managing Member LLC 11 INCORPORATION OF FEDERAL TRANSIT ADMINISTRATION TA TERMS FTA Circular 4220.1 E Applicability to Contracts The incorporation of FTA terms applies to all contracts. s Flow Down The incorporation of FTA terms has unlimited flow down. Model Clause/Language FTA has developed the following incorporation of terms language: Incorporation of Federal Transit Administration (FTA) Terms - The preceding provisions include, in part, certain Standard Terms and Conditions required by DOT, whether or .not expressly set forth in the preceding contract provisions. All contractual provisions required by DOT, as set forth in .FTA Circular 4220.1 E, are hereby incorporated by reference. Anything to the contrary herein notwithstanding, all FTA mandated terms shall be deemed to control in the event of a conflict with other provisions contained in this Agreement. The Contractor shall not perform any act, fail to perform any act, or refuse to comply with any (name of grantee) requests which would cause (name of grantee) to be in violation of the FTA terms and conditions. Date: 2-23-11 Signature _ Company Name: DIf46rlr truc on. LLC Titles Managing Member19XLLC III A.. GOVERNMENT -WIDE DEBARMENT AND SUSPENSION ONPROCIJREM.E-`NT 49 CFR Part 29 Executive Order 12549 Rackground and Applicability In conjunction with the Office of Management and Budget and other affected Federal agencies, DOT published an update to 49 CFR Part 29 on November 26, 2003, This government -wide regulation implements Executive Order 12549, Debarment and Suspension, Executive Order 12689, Debarment and Suspension, and 31 U,S.C. 6101 note (Section 2455, Public Law 103-355, 108 Stat. 3327). The provisions of Part 29 apply to all grantee contracts and subcontracts at any level expected to equal or exceed $25,000 as well as any contract or subcontract (at any level) for Federally required auditing services. 49 CFR 29.220(b). This represents a change from prior practice in that the dollar threshold for application of these rules has been lowered from $100,000 to $25,000. These are contracts and subcontracts referred to in the regulation as "covered transactions." Grantees, contractors, and subcontractors (at any level) that enter into covered transactions are required to verify that the entity (as well as its principals and affiliates) they propose to contract or subcontract with is not excluded or disqualified. They do this by (a) Checking the Excluded Parties List System, (b) Collecting a certification from that person, or (c) Adding a clause or condition to the contract or subcontract, This represents a change from prior practice in that certification is still acceptable but is no longer required. 49 CFR 29.300. Grantees, contractors, and subcontractors who enter into covered transactions also must require the entities they contract with to comply with 49 CFR 29, subpart C and include this requirement in their own subsequent covered transactions (i.e., the requirement flows down to subcontracts at all levels). Clause Lanauaae The following clause language is suggested, not mandatory. It incorporates the optional method of verifying that contractors are not excluded or disqualified by certification, Suspension and Debarment This contract is a covered transaction for purposes of 49 CFR Part 29. As such, the contractor is required to verify that none of the contractor, its principals, as defined at 49 CFR 29.995, or affiliates, as defined at 49 CFR 29.905, are excluded or disqualified as defined at 49 CFR 29.940 and 29.945. The contractor is required to comply with 49 CFR 29, Subpart C and must include the requirement to comply with 49 CFR 29, Subpart C in any lower tier covered transaction it enters into. r. By signing and submitting its bid or proposal, the bidder or proposer certifies as follows: The certification in this clause is a material representation of fact relied upon by {insert agency name). if it is later determined that the bidder "or proposer knowingly rendered an erroneous certification, in addition to t remedies available to (insert agency name), the Federal Government may pursue available remedies, including but not limited to suspension and/or debarment. The bidder or proposer agrees to comply with the requirements of 49 CFR 29, Subpart C while this offer is valid and throughout the period of any contract that may arise from 1 this offer. The bidder or proposer further agrees to include a provision requiring such compliance in its lower tier covered transactions. U17 BUY AMERICA REQUIREMENTS 49 U.S.G. 53230) 49 CFR Part 661 ApRilcability to Contracts The Buy America requirements apply to the following types of contracts; Construction Contracts and F.t Acquisition of Goods or Rolling Stock (valued at more than $100,000). Flow Down The Buy America requirements flow down from FTA recipients and subrecipients to first tier contractors, who are responsible for ensuring that lower tier contractors and subcontractors are in compliance. The S100,000 threshold applies only to the grantee contract, subcontracts under that amount are subject to Buy America. Mandatory Clause/Language The Buy America regulation, at 49 CFR 661.13, requires notification of the Buy America requirements in ETA -funded contracts, but does not specify the language to be used. The following language has been developed by FTA. Buy America - The contractor agrees to comply with 49 U.S.C. 53230) and 49 C.F.R. Part 661, which provide that Federal funds may not be obligated unless steel, iron, and manufactured products used in FTA-funded projects are produced in the United States, unless a waiver has been granted by FTA or the product is subject to a general waiver. General waivers are listed in 49 C.F.R. 661.7, and include final assembly in the United States for 15 passenger vans and I passenger wagons produced by Chrysler Corporation, and microcomputer equipment and software. Separate requirements for rolling stock are set out at 49 U.S.C. 53236)(2)(C) and 49 C.F.R. 661.11. Rolling stock must be assembled in the United States and have a 60 percent dornestic content. A bidder or offeror must submit to the FTA recipient the appropriate Buy America certification (below) with al bids or offers on FTA-funded contracts, except those subject to a general waiver. Bids or offers that are not accompanied by a completed Buy America certification must be rejected as nonresponsive. This requirement does not apply to lower tier subcontractors. Certification requirement for procurement of steel, iron, or manufactured products. Certificate of Compliance with 49 U.S.C. 53236)(1) The bidder or offeror hereby certifies that it will meet the requirements of 49 U.S.C. 53230)(1) and the applicable regulations in 49 CFR Part 661.5. Date 2 23-2011 Signature Company Name DM Co uction, LLC Title Managing Member of LLC Certificate ofNon-Compliance with 49 U.S.C. 5323()(1) I ' -.. The bidder or offeror hereby certifies that it cannot comply with the requirements of 49 U.S.C. 53230)(1) and 49 C.P.R. 661.5, but it may qualify for an exception pursuant to 49 U.S.C. 53230)(2)(A), 53230)(2)(B), or 53230)(2)(D), and 49 C.F.R. 661.7. Date Signature Company Name :.3 Title Certification requirement for procurement of buses, other rolling stock and associated equipment. Cert�icate of Compliance with 49 U.S.C. 53236)(2)(C). The bidder or offeror hereby certifies that it will comply with the requirements of 49 U.S.C. 53230)(2)(C) and the regulations at 49 C.F.R. Part 661.11. Date Signature 1: Company Name Title Cerlyicate gfNon-Compliance with 49 U.S.C. 53230)(2)(C) The bidder or offeror hereby certifies that it cannot comply with the requirements of 49 U.S.C. 53230)(2)(C) and 49 C.F.R. 661.11, but may qualify for an exception pursuant to 49 U.S.C. 53230)(2)(A), 53230)(2)(B), or 53230)(2)(D), and 49 C.F.R. 661.7. ..µ. Date Signature Company Name Title y. . [g ' O _i 11, J. BREACHES AND DISPUTE RESOLUTION 49 CFR fart 18 FTA Circular 4220.1E AApiicabilift to Contracts All contracts in excess of $100,000 shall contain provisions or conditions which will allow for administrative, contractual, or legal remedies in instances where contractors violate or breach contract terms, and provide for such sanctions and penalties as may be appropriate. This may include provisions for bonding, penalties for late or inadequate performance, retained earnings, liquidated damages or other appropriate measures. Flow Down The Breaches and Dispute Resolutions requirements flow down to all tiers. Model Clauses/Language FTA does not prescribe the form or content of such provisions. What provisions are developed will depend on the circumstances and the type of contract. Recipients should consult legal counsel in developing appropriate clauses. The following clauses are examples of provisions from various FTA third party contracts. Disputes - Disputes arising -in the performance of this Contract which are not resolved by agreement of the parties shall be decided in writing by the authorized representative of (Recipient)'s [title of employee]. This decision shall be final and conclusive unless within [ten (10)] days from the date of receipt of its copy, the Contractor mails or otherwise furnishes a written appeal to the [title of employee]. In connection with any such appeal, the Contractor shall be afforded an opportunity to be heard and to offer evidence in support of its position. The decision of the [title of employee] shall be binding upon the Contractor and the Contractor shall abide be the decision. Performance During Dispute - Unless otherwise directed by (Recipient), Contractor shall continue performance under this Contract while matters in dispute are being resolved. Claims for Damages - Should either party to the Contract suffer injury or damage to person or property because of any act or omission of the party or of any of his employees, agents or others for whose acts he is legally liable, a claim for damages therefor shall be made in writing to such other party within a reasonable time after the first observance of such injury of damage. Remedies - Unless this contract provides otherwise, all claims, counterclaims, disputes and other matters in question between the (Recipient) and the Contractor arising out of or relating to this agreement or its breach will be decided by arbitration if the parties mutually agree, or in a court of competent jurisdiction within the State in which the (Recipient) is located. Rights and Remedies - The duties and obligations imposed by the Contract Documents and the rights and remedies available thereunder shall be in addition to and not a limitation of any duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise imposed or available by law. No action or failure to act by the (Recipient), (Architect) or Contractor shall constitute a waiver of any right or duty afforded any of them under the Contract, nor shall any such action or failure to act constitute an approval of or acquiescence in any breach thereunder, except as inay be specifically agreed in writing. Date: 2-23-11 .signature L Company Name: D. Constr ion, LLC Title: Managin Member £ LLC LOBBYING 31 U.S.C. 1352 49 CFR Part 19 49 CFR Part 20 Applicability to Contracts f The Lobbying requirements apply to Construction/Architectural and Engineering/Acquisition of Rolling Stock/Professional Service Contract/Operational Service Contract/Turnkey contracts, FT i Flow Down The Lobbying requirements mandate the maximum flow down, pursuant to Byrd Anti -Lobbying Amendment, 31 U.S.C. § 1352(b)(5) and 49 C.F.R. Part 19, Appendix A, Section 7. Mandatoa Clause/Language Clause and specific language therein are mandated by 49 CFR Part 19, Appendix A. Modifications have been made to the Clause pursuant to Section 10 of the Lobbying Disclosure Act of 1995, P.L. 104-65 [to be codified at 2 U.S.C. § 1601, et seq.] - Lobbying Certification and Disclosure of Lobbying Activities for third party contractors are mandated by 31 U.S.C. 1352(b)(5), as amended by Section 10 of the Lobbying Disclosure Act of 1995, and DOT implementing regulation, "New Restrictions on Lobbying," at 49 CFR § 20.110(d) - Language in Lobbying Certification is mandated by 49 CFR Part 19, Appendix A, Section 7, which provides that contractors file the certification required by 49 CFR Part 20, Appendix A. Modifications have been made to the Lobbying Certification pursuant to Section 10 of the Lobbying Disclosure Act of 1995. - Use of "Disclosure of Lobbying Activities," Standard Form-LLL set forth in Appendix B of 49 CFR Part 20, as amended by "Government wide Guidance For New Restrictions on Lobbying," 61 Fed. Reg. 1413 (1 /19/96) is mandated by 49 CFR fart 20, Appendix A. Byrd Anti -Lobbying Amendment, 31 U.S.C. 1352, as amended by the Lobbying Disclosure Act of 1995, F.L. 104-65 [to be codified at 2 U.S.C. § 1601, et seq.] - Contractors who apply or bid for an award of $100,000 or more shall file the certification required by 49 CFR part 20, "New Restrictions on Lobbying." Each tier certifies to the tier above that it will not and has not used Federal appropriated funds to pay any person or organization for influencing or attempting to influence an officer or employee of any agency, a member of Congress, officer or.empioyee of Congress, or an_employee of a member of Congress in connection with obtaining any Federal contract, grant or any other award covered by 31 U.S.C. 1352. Each tier shall also disclose the .name of any registrant under the Lobbying Disclosure Act of 1995 who has made lobbying contacts on its behalf with non - Federal funds with respect to that Federal contract, grant or award covered by 31 U.S.C. 1352. Such disclosures are forwarded from tier to tier up to the recipient. APPENDIX A, 49 CFR PART 20--CERTIFICATION REGARDING LOBBYING Certification for Contracts, Grants, Loans, and Cooperative Agreements (To be submitted with each bid or after exceeding $]00,000) ` The undersigned [Contractor] certifies, to the best of his or her knowledge and belief, that: (1) No Federal appropriated funds have been paid or will be paid, by or on behalf of the undersigned, to any 1" person for influencing or attempting to influence an officer or employee of an agency, a Member of Congress, an officer or employee of Congress, or an employee of a Member of Congress in connection with the awarding of any Federal contract, the making of any Federal grant, the making of any Federal loan, the entering into of any cooperative agreement, and the extension, continuation, renewal, amendment, or modification of any Federal contract, grant, loan, or cooperative agreement. (2) If any funds other than Federal appropriated funds have been paid or will be paid to any person for making lobbying contacts to an officer or employee of any agency, a Member of Congress, an officer or employee of Congress, or an employee of a Member of Congress in connection with this Federal contract, grant, loan, or cooperative agreement, the undersigned shall complete and submit Standard Form--LLL, "Disclosure Form to Report Lobbying." in accordance with its instructions [as amended by "Government wide Guidance for New Restrictions on Lobbying," 61 Fed. Reg. 1413 (1/19/96). Note. Language in paragraph (2) herein has been modified in accordance with Section 10 of the Lobbying Disclosure Act of 1995 (P.L. 104-65, to be codified at 2 U.S.C. 1601, et .seq.)] <.. (3) The undersigned shall require that the language of this certification be included in the award documents for all subawards at all tiers (including subcontracts, subgrants, and contracts under grants, loans, and cooperative agreements) and that all subrecipients shall certify and disclose accordingly. This certification is a material representation of fact upon which reliance was placed when this transaction was made or entered into. Submission of this certification is a prerequisite for making or entering into this transaction imposed by 31, U.S.C. § 1352 (as amended by the Lobbying Disclosure Act of 1995). Any person who fails to file the required certification shalt be subject to a civil penalty of not less than $10,000 and not more than $100,000 for each such failure. I SNJ J [Note: Pursuant to 31 U.S.C. § 1352(c)(l)-(2)(A), any person who makes a prohibited expenditure or fails to file or amend a required certification or disclosure form shall be subject to a civil penalty of not less than $10,000 and not more than $100,000 for each such expenditure or failure.] The Contractor, DM Construction, LLC , certifies or affirms the truthfulness and accuracy of each statement of its certification and disclosure, if any. In addition, the Contractor understands and agrees that the provisions of 31 A.C. A 3 1, et seq., a I to this certification and disclosure, if any. 7 ignature of Contractor's Authorized Official Mor n MacKe e, Ivianaging MembeName and Title of Contractor's Authorized Official 2-23-11 Date 1 CLEAN AIR 42 U.S.C. 7401 et seq 40 CFR 15.61 49 CFR Part 18 Applicability to Contracts The Clean Air requirements apply to all contracts exceeding $100,000, including indefinite quantities where the amount is expected to exceed $100,000 in any year, Flow Down The Clean Air requirements flow down to all subcontracts which exceed $100,000. Model Clauses/Lanauaae No specific language is required. FTA has proposed the following language. Clean Air - (1) The Contractor agrees to comply with all applicable standards, orders or regulations issued pursuant to the Clean Air Act, as amended, 42 U.S.C. §§ 7401 et seq. The Contractor agrees to report each violation to the Purchaser and understands and agrees that the Purchaser will, in turn, report each violation as required to assure notification to FTA and the appropriate EPA Regional Office. (2) The Contractor also agrees to include these requirements in each subcontract exceeding $100,000 financed in whole or in part with Federal assistance provided by FTA. Date: 2-23-11 -»� Signature Company Name: -bVCorfs6Fu0Kon, LLC Title: i+lanagin Member LLC CLEAN WATER REQUIREMENTS 33 U.S.C. 1251 Applicability to Contracts "The Clean Water requirements apply to each contract and subcontract which exceeds $100,000. Flow Down The Clean Water requirements flow down to FTA recipients and subrecipients at every tier. Model Clause/Lanr4uage While no mandatory clause is contained in the Federal Water Pollution Control Act, as amended, the following language developed by FTA contains all the mandatory requirements: Clean Water - (1) The Contractor agrees to comply with all applicable standards, orders or regulations issued pursuant to the Federal Water Pollution Control Act, as amended, 33 U.S.C. 1251 et se_,(c . The Contractor agrees to report each violation to the Purchaser and understands and agrees that the Purchaser will, in turn, report each violation as required to assure notification to FTA and the appropriate EPA Regional Office. (2) The Contractor also agrees to include these requirements in each subcontract exceeding $100,000 financed in whole or in part with Federal assistance provided by FTA. Date: 2-23-11 Signature Company Name: DM nstruct , LLC Title: Managing ember o LC I . _i l I DAVIS-BACQIN AND CQPEI LAND ANTI-KICKB.AtCK ACTS .1 Back round and AP1211cation ._ The Davis -Bacon and Copeland Acts are codified at 40 USC 3141, et seq. and 18 USC 874, The Acts apply to grantee construction contracts and subcontracts that "at least partly are financed by a loan or grant from the Federal Government." 40 USC 3145(a), 29 CFR 5.2(h), 49 CFR 18.36(i)(5). The Acts apply to any 1:. construction contract over $2,000.40 USC 3142(a), 29 CFR 5.5(a). `Construction,' for purposes of the Acts, includes "actual construction, alteration and/or repair, including painting and decorating." 29 CFR 5.5(a). The requirements of both Acts are incorporated into a single clause (see 29 CFR 3.11) enumerated at 29 CFR 5.5(a) and reproduced below. The clause language is drawn directly from 29 CFR 5.5(a) and any deviation from the model clause below " should be coordinated with counsel to ensure the Acts' requirements are satisfied. Clause Language Davis -Bacon and Copeland Anti -Kickback Acts (1) Minimum wages - (i) All laborers and mechanicsemployed or working upon the site of the work (or under the United States Housing Act of 1937 or under the Housing Act of 1949 in the construction or development of the project), will be paid unconditionally and not less often than once a week, and without subsequent deduction or rebate on any account (except such payroll deductions as are permitted by regulations issued by the Secretary of Labor under the Copeland Act (29 CFR part 3)), the full amount of wages and bona tide fringe benefits (or cash equivalents thereof) due at time of payment computed at rates not less than those contained in the wage determination of the Secretary of Labor which is attached hereto and made a part hereof, regardless of any contractual relationship which may be alleged to exist between the contractor and such laborers and mechanics. Fr1 Contributions made or costs reasonably anticipated for bona fide fringe benefits under section i(b)(2) of the Davis -Bacon Act on behalf of laborers or mechanics are considered wages paid to such laborers or mechanics, subject to the provisions of paragraph (1)(iv) of this section; also, regular contributions made or costs incurred for more than a weekly period (but not less often than quarterly) under plans, funds, or programs which cover 011-the particular weekly period, are deemed to be constructively made or incurred during such weekly period. Such laborers and mechanics shall be paid the appropriate wage rate and fringe benefits on the wage determination for the classification of work actually performed, without regard to skill, except as provided in 29 CFR Part 5.5(a)(4). Laborers or mechanics performing work in more than one classification may be compensated at the rate specified for each classification for the time actually worked therein: Provided, That the employer's payroll records accurately set forth the time spent in each classification in which work is performed. The wage determination (including any additional classifications and wage rates conformed under paragraph (1)(ii) of this section) and the Davis -Bacon poster (WH-1321) shall be posted at all times by the contractor and its subcontractors at the site of the work in a prominent and accessible place where it can be easily seen by the workers. Oi)(A) The contracting officer shall require that any class of laborers or mechanics, including helpers, which is not listed in the wage determination and which is to be employed under the coniract'shall be classified in conformance with the wage determination. The contracting officershall approve an additional classification and wage rate and fringe benefits therefore only when the following criteria have been met: (1) Except with respect to helpers as defined as 29 CFR 5.2(n)(4), the work to be performed by the classification requested is not performed by a classification in the wage determination; and (2) The classification is utilized in the area by the construction industry; and (3) The proposed wage rate, including any bona fide fringe benefits, bears a reasonable relationship to the j wage rates contained in the wage determination; and 11 I R (4) With respect to helpers as defined in 29 CFR 5.2(n)(4), such a classification prevails in the area in which the work is performed. (B) If the contractor and the laborers and mechanics to be employed in the classification (if known), or their representatives, and the contracting officer agree on the classification and wage rate (including the amount designated for fringe benefits where appropriate), a report of the action taken shall be sent by the contracting officer to the Administrator of the Wage and Hour Division, Employment Standards Administration, U.S. Department of Labor, Washington, DC 20210. The Administrator, or an authorized representative, will approve, modify, or disapprove every additional classification action within 30 days of receipt and so advise the contracting officer or will notify the contracting officer within the 30-day period that additional time is necessary. (C) In the event the contractor, the laborers or mechanics to be employed in the classification or their representatives, and the contracting officer do not agree on the proposed classification and wage rate (including the amount designated for fringe benefits, where appropriate), the contracting officer shall refer the questions, including the views of all interested parties and the recommendation of the contracting officer, to the Administrator for determination. The Administrator, or an authorized representative, will issue a determination within 30 days of receipt and so advise the contracting officer or will notify the contracting officer within the 30-day period that additional time is necessary. (D) The wage rate (including fringe benefits where appropriate) determined pursuant to paragraphs (a)(1)(ii) (B) or (C) of this section, shall be paid to all workers performing work in the classification under this contract fi•om the first day on which work is performed in the classification. (iii) Whenever the minimum wage rate prescribed in the contract for a class of laborers or mechanics includes a fringe benefit which is not expressed as an hourly rate, the contractor shall either pay the benefit as stated in el the wage determination or shall pay another bona fide fringe benefit or an hourly cash equivalent thereof. (iv) If the contractor does not make payments to a trustee or other third person, the contractor may consider as part of the wages of any laborer or mechanic the amount of any costs reasonably anticipated in providing bona fide fringe benefits under a plan or program, Provided, That the Secretary of Labor has found, upon the written request of the contractor, that the applicable standards of the Davis -Bacon Act have been met. The Secretary of Labor may require the contractor to set aside in a separate account assets for the meeting of obligations under the plan or program. (v)(A) The contracting officer shall require that any class of laborers or mechanics which is not listed in the wage determination and which is to be employed under the contract shall be classified in conformance with the wage determination. The contracting officer shall approve an additional classification and wage rate and fringe benefits therefor only when the following criteria have been met: (1) The work to be performed by the classification requested is not performed by a classification in the wage determination; and (2) The classification is utilized in the area by the construction industry; and (3) The proposed wage rate, including any bona fide fringe benefits, bears a reasonable relationship to the wage rates contained in the wage determination. (B) If the contractor and the laborers and mechanics to be employed in the classification (if known), or their representatives, and the contracting officer agree on the classification and wage rate (including the amount designated for fringe benefits where appropriate), a report of the action taken shall be sent by the contracting ry. officer to the Administrator of the Wage and Hour Division, Employment Standards Administration, Washington, DC 20210. The Administrator, or an authorized representative, will approve, modify, or disapprove every additional classification action within 30 days of receipt and so advise the contracting officer or will notify the contracting officer within the 30-day period that additional time is necessary. (C) In the event the contractor, the laborers or mechanics to be employed in the classification or their " representatives, and the contracting officer do not agree on the proposed classification and wage rate (including the amount designated for fringe benefits, where appropriate), the contracting officer shall refer the questions, including the views of all interested parties and the recommendation of the contracting officer, to the Administrator for determination. The Administrator, or an authorized representative, will issue a determination with 30 days of receipt and so advise the contracting officer or will notify the contracting officer within the 30- day period that additional time is necessary. (D) The wage rate (including fringe benefits where appropriate) determined pursuant to paragraphs (a)(1)(v) (B) or (C) of this section, shall be paid to all workers performing work in the classification under this contract from the first day on which work is performed in the classification. (2) Withholding - The [ insert name ofgrantee ] shall upon its own action or upon written request of an authorized representative of the Department of Labor withhold or cause to be withheld from the contractor under this contract or any other Federal contract with the same prime contractor, or any other federally -assisted contract subject to Davis -Bacon prevailing wage requirements, which is held by the same prime contractor, so much of the accrued payments or advances as may be considered necessary to pay laborers and mechanics, including apprentices, trainees, and helpers, employed by the contractor or any subcontractor the full amount of wages required by the contract. In the event of failure to pay any laborer or mechanic, including any - apprentice, trainee, or helper, employed or working on the site of the work (or under the United States Housing Act of 1937 or under the Housing Act of 1949 in the construction or development of the project), all or part of the wages required by the contract, the [ insert name of grantee ] may, after written notice to the contractor, V sponsor, applicant, or owner, take such action as may be necessary to cause the suspension of any further payment, advance, or guarantee of funds until such violations have ceased. (3) Payrolls and basic records - (i) Payrolls and basic records relating thereto shall be maintained by the contractor during the course of the work and preserved fora period of three years thereafter for all laborers and $ mechanics working at the site of the work (or under the United States Housing Act of 1937, or under the Housing Act of 1949, in the construction or development of the project). Such records shall contain the name, address, and social security number of each such worker, his or her correct classification, hourly rates of wages paid (including rates of contributions or costs anticipated for bona fide fringe benefits or cash equivalents thereof of the types described in section I (b)(2)(B) of the Davis -Bacon Act), daily and weekly number of hours rworked, deductions made and actual wages paid. Whenever the Secretary of Labor has found under 29 CFR 5.5(a)(1)(iv) that the wages of any laborer or mechanic include the amount of any costs reasonably anticipated in providing benefits under a plan or program described in section I (b)(2)(B) of the Davis -Bacon Act, the contractor shall maintain records which show that the commitment to provide such benefits is enforceable, that the plan or program is financially responsible, and that the plan or program has been communicated in writing to the laborers or mechanics affected, and records which show the costs anticipated or the actual cost incurred in providing such benefits. Contractors employing apprentices or trainees under approved programs shall maintain written evidence of the registration of apprenticeship programs and certification of trainee programs, the registration of the apprentices and trainees, and the ratios and wage rates prescribed in the applicable programs. (ii)(A) The contractor shall submit weekly for each week in which any contract work is performed a copy of all payrolls to the [ insert name of grantee ] for transmission to the Federal Transit Administration. The payrolls 13 submitted shall set out accurately and completely all of the information required to be maintained under section 5.5(a)(3)(i) of Regulations, 29 CFR part 5. This information may be submitted in any form desired. Optional Form WFI-347 is available for this purpose and may be purchased from the Superintendent of Documents (Federal Stock Number 029-005-00014-1), U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, DC 20402, The prime contractor is responsible for the submission of copies of payrolls by all subcontractors. (B) Each payroll submitted shall be accompanied by a "Statement of Compliance," signed by the contractor or subcontractor or his or her agent who pays or supervises the payment of the persons employed under the contract and shall certify the following: s..: (1) That the payroll for the payroll period contains the information required to be maintained under section 5.5(a)(3)(i) of Regulations, 29 CFR part 5 and that such information is correct and complete; U`- df J. :J (2) That each laborer or mechanic (including each helper, apprentice, and trainee) employed on the contract during the payroll period has been paid the full weekly wages earned, without rebate, either directly or indirectly, and that no deductions have been made either directly or indirectly from the full wages earned, other than permissible deductions as set forth in Regulations, 29 CFR part 3; (3) That each laborer or mechanic has been paid not less than the applicable wage rates and fringe benefits or cash equivalents for the classification of work performed, as specified in the applicable wage determination incorporated into the contract. (C:) The weekly submission of a properly executed certification set forth on the reverse side of Optional Form WH-347 shall satisfy the requirement for submission of the "Statement of Compliance" required by paragraph (a)(3)(ii)(B) of this section. (D) The falsification of any of the above certifications may subject the contractor or subcontractor to civil or criminal prosecution under section 1001 of title 18 and section 231 of title 31 of the United States Code. (iii) The contractor or subcontractor shall make the records required under paragraph (a)(3)(i) o.fthis section available for inspection, copying, or transcription by authorized representatives of the Federal Transit Administration or the Department of Labor, and shall permit such representatives to interview employees during working hours on the job. if the contractor or subcontractor fails to submit the required records or to make them available, the Federal agency may, after written notice to the contractor, sponsor, applicant; or owner, take such action as may be necessary to cause the suspension of any further payment, advance, or guarantee of funds. Furthermore, failure to submit the required records upon request or to make such records available may be grounds for debarment action pursuant to 29 CFR 5.12, (4) Apprentices and trainees - (i) Apprentices - Apprentices will be permitted to work at less than the predetermined rate for the work they performed when they are employed pursuant to and individually registered in a bona fide apprenticeship program registered with the U.S. Department of Labor, Employment and Training Administration, Bureau- of Apprenticeship and Training, or with a State Apprenticeship Agency recognized by the Bureau, or if a person is employed in his or her first 90 days of probationary employment as an apprentice in such an apprenticeship program, who is not individually registered in the program, but who has been certified by the Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training or a State Apprenticeship Agency (where appropriate) to be eligible for probationary employment as an apprentice. The allowable ratio of -apprentices to journeymen on the job site in any craft classification shall not be greater than the ratio permitted to the contractor as to the entire work force under the registered program. Any worker listed on a payroll at an apprentice wage rate, who is not registered or otherwise employed as stated above, shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the classification of work actually performed. In addition, any apprentice performing work on the job site in excess of the ratio permitted under the registered program shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the work actually performed. Where a contractor is performing construction on a project in a locality other than that in which its program is registered, the ratios and wage rates (expressed in percentages of the journeyman's hourly rate) specified in the contractor's or subcontractor's registered program shall be observed. Every apprentice must be paid at not less than the rate specified in the registered program for the apprentice's level of progress, expressed as a percentage of the journeymen hourly rate specified in the applicable wage determination. Apprentices shall be paid fringe benefits in accordance with the provisions of the apprenticeship program. If the apprenticeship program does not specify fringe benefits, apprentices must be paid the full amount of fringe benefits listed on the wage determination for the applicable classification, if the Administrator of the Wage and Hour Division of the U.S. Department of .Labor determines that a different practice prevails for the applicable apprentice classification, fringes shall be paid in accordance with that determination. In the event the Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training, or a State Apprenticeship Agency recognized by the Bureau, withdraws approval of an apprenticeship program, the contractor will no longer be permitted to utilize apprentices at less than the applicable predetermined rate for the work performed until an acceptable program is approved. (ii) Trainees - Except as provided in 29 CFR 5.16, trainees will not be pennitted to work at less than the predetermined rate for the work performed unless they are employed pursuant to and individually registered in a program which has received prior approval, evidenced by formal certification by the U.S. Department of Labor, Employment and Training Administration. The ratio of trainees to journeymen on the job site shall not be greater than permitted under the plan approved by the Employment and Training Administration. Every trainee must be paid at not less than the rate specified in the approved program for the trainee's level of progress, expressed as a percentage of the journeyman hourly rate specified in the applicable wage determination. Trainees shall be paid fringe benefits in accordance with the provisions of the trainee program. If the trainee program does not mention fringe benefits, trainees shall be paid the full amount of fringe benefits listed on the wage determination unless the Administrator of the Wage and Hour Division determines that there is an apprenticeship program associated with the corresponding journeyman wage rate on the wage determination which provides for Jess than full fringe benefits for apprentices. Any employee listed on the payroll at a trainee rate who is not registered and participating in a training plan approved by the Employment and Training Administration shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the classification of work actually performed. In addition, any trainee performing work on the job site in excess of the ratio permitted under the registered program shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the work actually performed. In the event the Employment and Training Administration withdraws approval of a training program, the contractor will no longer be permitted to utilize trainees at less than the applicable predetermined rate for the work performed until an acceptable program is approved. (iii) Equal employment opportunity - The utilization of apprentices, trainees and journeymen under this part shall be in conformity with the equal employment opportunity requirements of Executive Order 11246, as amended, and 29 CFR part 30. (5) Compliance with Copeland Act requirements - The contractor shall comply with the requirements of 29 CFR part 3, which are incorporated by reference in this contract. (6) Subcontracts - The contractor or subcontractor shall insert in any subcontracts the clauses contained in 29 CFR 5.5(a)(1) through (10) and such other clauses as the Federal Transit Administration may by appropriate instructions require, and also a clause requiring the subcontractors to include these clauses in any lower tier subcontracts. The prime contractor shall be responsible for the compliance by any subcontractor or lower tier subcontractor with all the contract clauses in 29 CFR 5.5. (7) Contract termination: debarment - A breach of the contract clauses in 29 CFR 5.5 may be grounds for termination of the contract, and for debarment as a contractor and a subcontractor as provided in 29 CFR 5.12. (8) Compliance with Davis -Bacon and Related Act requirements - All rulings and interpretations of the Davis -Bacon and Related Acts contained in 29 CFR parts 1, 3, and 5 are herein incorporated by reference in this contract. (9) Disputes concerning labor standards - Disputes arising out of the labor standards provisions of this ' contract shall not be subject to the general disputes clause of this contract. Such disputes shall be resolved in 1 4 accordance with the procedures of the Department of Labor set forth in 29 CFR parts S, 6, and 7. Disputes T 4 within the meaning of this clause include disputes between the contractor (or any of its subcontractors) and the contracting agency, the U.S. Department of Labor, or the employees or their representatives. (10) Certification of eligibility - (i) By entering into this contract, the contractor certifies that neither it (nor he or she) nor any person or firm who has an interest in the contractor's firm is a person or firm ineligible to be awarded Government contracts by virtue of section 3(a) of the Davis -Bacon Act or 29 CFR 5.12(a)(1). (ii) No part of this contract shall be subcontracted to any person or firm ineligible for award of a Government t contract by virtue of section 3(a) of the Davis -Bacon Act or 29 CFR 5.12(a)(1). (iii) The penalty for making false statements is prescribed in the U.S. Criminal Code, 18 U.S<C. 1001. Date. 2-23-11 Signature company Name: DM onstruc on, LLC Title; Managing ember LLC s CONTRACT WORK HOURS AND SAFETY STANDARDS ACT 1 Background and Application The Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act is codified at 40 USC 3701, et seq, The Act applies to = grantee contracts and subcontracts "financed at least in part by loans or grants from ... the [Federal.] Government." 40 USC 3701(b)(1)(13)(iii) and (b)(2), 29 CFR 5.2(h), 49 CFR 18.36(i)(6). Although the original Act required its application in any construction contract over $2,000 or non -construction contract to which the Act applied over $2,500 (and language to that effect is still found in 49 CFR 18.36(i)(6)), the Act no longer applies to any "contract in an amount that is not greater than $100,000." 40 USC 3701(b)(3)(A)(iii). fw The Act applies to construction contracts and, in very limited circumstances, non -construction projects that employ "laborers or mechanics on a public work." These non -construction applications do not generally apply to transit procurements because transit procurements (to include rail cars and. buses) are deemed "commercial items." 40 USC 3707, 41 USC 403 (12). A grantee that contemplates entering into a contract to procure a developmental or unique item should consult counsel to determine if the Act applies to that procurement and that additional language required by 29 CFR 5.5(c) must be added to the basic clause below. The clause language is drawn directly from 29 CFR 5.5(b) and any deviation from the model clause below should be coordinated with counsel to ensure the Act's requirements are satisfied. Clause Language Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards (1) Overtime requirements - No contractor or subcontractor contracting for any part of the contract work which may require or involve the employment of laborers or mechanics shall require or permit any such a laborer or mechanic in any workweek in which he or she is employed on such work to work in excess of forty hours in such workweek unless such laborer or mechanic receives compensation at a rate not less than one and one-half times the basic rate of pay for all hours worked in excess of forty hours in such workweek. (2) Violation; liability for unpaid wages; liquidated damages - In the event of any violation of the clause set forth in paragraph (1) of this section the contractor and any subcontractor responsible therefor shall be liable for the unpaid wages. In addition, such contractor and subcontractor shall be liable to the United States for liquidated damages. Such liquidated damages shall be computed with respect to each individual laborer or mechanic, including watchmen and guards, employed in violation of the clause set forth in paragraph (1) of this section, in the sum of $10 for each calendar day on which such individual was required or permitted to work in excess of the standard workweek of forty hours without payment of the overtime wages required by the clause set forth in paragraph (1) of this section. r. (3) Withholding for unpaid wages and liquidated damages - The (write in the name of the grantee) shall l> upon its own action or upon written request of an authorized representative of the Department of Labor withhold or cause to be withheld, from any moneys payable on account of work performed by the contractor or subcontractor under any such contract or any other Federal contract with the same prime contractor, or any other federally -assisted contract subject to the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act, which is held by the same prime contractor, such sums as may be determined to be necessary to satisfy any liabilities of such contractor or subcontractor for unpaid wages and liquidated damages as. provided in the clause set forth in paragraph (2) of this section. (4) Subcontracts - The contractor or subcontractor shall insert in any subcontracts the clauses set forth in paragraphs (1) through (4) of this section and also a clause requiring the subcontractors to include these clauses in any lower tier subcontracts. The prime contractor shall be responsible for compliance by any subcontractor 'V or lower tier subcontractor with the clauses set forth in paragraphs (1) through (4) of this section. Date: 2-23-11 Signature Company Nam_: D C str ion, LLC Titie: Managinsf Member E LLC ; IBONDING RE UIREMENTS Applicabilily to Contracts For those construction or facility improvement contracts or subcontracts exceeding $100,000, FTA may accept the bonding policy and requirements of the recipient, provided that they meet the tninimum requirements for construction contracts as follows: `1 I a. A bid guarantee from each bidder equivalent to five (5) percent of the bid price. The "bid guarantees" shall consist of a firm commitment such as a bid bond, certifies check, or other negotiable instrument accompanying a bid as assurance that the bidder will, upon acceptance of his bid, execute such contractual documents as may be required within the time specified. b. A performance bond on the part to the Contractor for 100 percent of the contract price. A "performance bond" is one executed in connection with a contract to secure fulfillment of all the contractor's obligations under such contract. c. A payment bond on the part of the contractor for 100 percent of the contract price. A "payment bond" is one executed in connection with a contract to assure payment, as required by law, of all persons supplying labor and material in the execution of the work provided for in the contract. Payment bond amounts required from Contractors are as follows: (1) 50% of the contract price if the contract price is not more than $1 million; (2) 40% of the contract price if the contract price is more than $1 million but not more than $5 million; or (3) $2.5 million if the contract price is more than $5 million. d. A cash deposit, certified check or other negotiable instrument may be accepted by a grantee in lieu of performance and payment bonds, provided the grantee has established aprocedure to assure that the interest of FTA is adequately protected. An irrevocable letter of credit would also satisfy the requirement for a bond. Flow Down Bonding requirements flow down to the first tier contractors. Model Clauses/Language FTA does not prescribe specific wording to be included in third party contracts. FTA has prepared sample clauses as follows: Bid Bond Requirements (Construction) 0'. (a) Bid Security -10 A Bid Bond must be issued by a- fully qualified surety company acceptable to (Recipient) and listed as a company currently authorized under 31 CFR, Part 223 as possessing a Certificate of Authority as described thereunder. (b) Rights Reserved In submitting this Bid, it is understood and agreed by bidder that the right is reserved by (Recipient) to reject any and all bids, or part of any bid, and it is agreed that the Bid may not be withdrawn for a period of [ninety (90)] days subsequent to the opening of bids, without the written consent of (Recipient). It is also understood and agreed that if the undersigned bidder should withdraw any part or all of his bid within [ninety (90)] days after the bid opening without the written consent of (Recipient), shall refuse or be unable to ` r.. enter into this Contract, as provided above, or refuse or be unable to furnish adequate and acceptable .Performance Bonds and Labor and Material Payments Bonds, as provided above, or refuse or be unable to w. furnish adequate and acceptable insurance, as provided above, he shall forfeit his bid security to the extent of (Recipient's) damages occasioned by such withdrawal, or refusal, or inability to enter into an agreement, or provide adequate security therefor. It is further understood and agreed that to the extent the defaulting bidder's Bid Bond, Certified Check, ` Cashier's Check, Treasurer's Check, and/or Official Bank Check (excluding any income generated thereby which has been retained by (Recipient) as provided in [Item x "Bid Security" of the Instructions to Bidders]) shall prove inadequate to fully recompense (Recipient) for the damages occasioned by default, then the undersigned bidder agrees to indemnify (Recipient) and pay over to (Recipient) the difference between the bid security and (Recipient's) total damages, so as to make (Recipient) whole. The undersigned understands that any material alteration of any of the above or any of the material contained on this form, other than that requested, will render the bid unresponsive. Performance and Payment Bonding Requirements (Construction) l- The Contractor shall be required to obtain performance and payment bonds as follows: (a) Performance bonds 1. The penal amount of performance bonds shall be 100 percent of the original contract price, unless the (Recipient) determines that a lesser amount would be adequate for the protection of the (Recipient). 2. The (Recipient) may require additional performance bond protection when a contract price is increased. The increase in protection shall generally equal 100 percent of the increase in contract price. The (Recipient) may secure additional protection by directing the Contractor to increase the penal amount of the existing bond or to obtain an additional bond. (b) Payment bonds 1. The penal amount of the payment bonds shall equal: F (1) Fifty percent of the contract price if the contract price is not more than $1 million. (ii) Forty percent of the contract price if the contract price is more than $l million but not more than $5 million; or (iii) Two and one half million if the contract price is more than $5 million. z� 2. If the original contract price is $5 million or less, the (Recipient) may require additional protection as required by subparagraph I if the contract price is increased. _, ut I N F.a r-3 _.g j:1 Performance and Payment Bonding Requirements (Mon -Construction) The Contractor may be required to obtain performance and payment bonds when necessary to protect the (Recipient's) interest. (a) The following situations may warrant a performance bond: 1. (Recipient) property or funds are to be provided to the contractor for use in performing the contract or as partial compensation (as in retention of salvaged material). 2. A contractor sells assets to or merges with another concern, and the (Recipient), after recognizing the latter concern as the successor in interest, desires assurance that it is financially capable. 3. Substantial progress payments are made before delivery of end items starts. 4. Contracts are for dismantling, demolition, or removal of improvements. (b) When it is determined that a performance bond is required, the Contractor shall be required to obtain performance bonds as follows: 1, The penal amount of performance bonds shall be 100 percent of the original contract price, unless the (Recipient) determines that a lesser amount would be adequate for the protection of the (Recipient). 2. The (Recipient) may require additional performance bond protection when a contract price is increased. The increase in protection shall generally equal 100 percent of the increase in contract price. The (Recipient) may secure additional protection by directing the Contractor to increase the penal amount of the existing bond or to obtain an additional bond. (c) A payment bond is required only when a performance bond is required, and if the use of payment bond is in the (Recipient's) interest. (d) When it is determined that a payment bond is required, the Contractor shall be required to obtain payment bonds as follows: 1. The penal amount of payment bonds shall equal: (i) Fifty percent of the contract price if the contract price is not more than $1 million; (ii) Forty percent of the contract price if the contract price is more than $1 million but not more than $5 million; or (iii) Two and one half million if the contract price is increased. Advance Payment Bonding Requirements The Contractor may be required to obtain an advance payment bond if the contract contains an advance payment provision and a performance bond is not furnished. The (recipient) shall determine the amount of the advance payment bond necessary to protect the (Recipient). Patent Infringement Bonding Requirements (Patent Indemnity) The Contractor may be required to obtain a patent indemnity bond if a performance bond is not furnished and the financial responsibility of the Contractor is unknown or doubtful. The (recipient) shall determine the amount of the patent indemnity to protect the (Recipient). Warranty of the Work and Maintenance Bonds 1. The Contractor warrants to (Recipient), the Architect and/or Engineer that all materials and equipment furnished under this Contract will be of highest quality and new unless otherwise specified by (Recipient), free from faults and defects and in conformance with the Contract Documents. All work not so conforming to these standards shalt be considered defective. If required by the [Project Manager], the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment. 2. The Work furnished must be of first quality and the workmanship must be the best obtainable in the various trades. The Work must be of safe, substantial and durable construction in all respects. The Contractor hereby guarantees the Work against defective materials or faulty workmanship for a minimum period of one (1) year after Final Payment by (Recipient) and shall replace or repair any defective materials or equipment or faulty workmanship during the period of the guarantee at no cost to (Recipient). As additional security for these guarantees, the Contractor shall, prior to the release of Final Payment [as provided in Item X below], furnish separate Maintenance (or Guarantee) Bonds in form acceptable to (Recipient) written by the same corporate surety that provides the Performance Bond and Labor and Material Payment Bond for this Contract. These bonds shall secure the Contractor's obligation to replace or repair defective materials and faulty workmanship for a minimum period of one (1) year after Final Payment and shall be written in an amount equal to ONE HUNDRED PERCENT (100%) of the CONTRACT SUM, as adjusted (if at all). Date: 2-23-11 Signature Company Name: D str ion, LLC Title: Managi Membe f LLC 1 SEISMIC SAFETY REQUIREMENTS ....I 42 U.S.C. 7701 et seq. 49 CFR Part 41 Applicability to Contracts The Seismic Safety requirements apply only to contracts for the construction of new buildings or additions to existing buildings. Flow Down The Seismic Safety requirements flow down from FTA recipients and subrecipients to first tier contractors to assure compliance, with the applicable building standards for Seismic Safety, including the work performed by all subcontractors. Model Clauses/LanauaOe The regulations do not provide suggested language for third -party contract clauses. The following language has been developed by FTA. Seismic Safety - The contractor agrees that any new building or addition to an existing building will be designed and constructed in accordance with the standards for Seismic Safety required in Department of Transportation Seismic Safety Regulations 49 CFR Part 41 and will certify to compliance to the extent required by the regulation. The contractor also agrees to ensure that all work performed under this contract including work performed by a subcontractor is in compliance with the standards required by the Seismic Safety Regulations and the certification of compliance issued on the project. d Date: 2-23-11 Signature Company Nam : D oiv§trtrtctiWr -LLC Title: Managin Member of C a 1.11 f� ENERGY CONSERVATION REQUIREMENTS 42 U.S.C. 6321 et seq. 49 CFR Part 18 Applicability to Contracts The Energy Conservation requirements are applicable to all contracts. Flow Down The Energy Conservation requirements extend to all third party contractors and their contracts at every tier and subrecipients and their subagreements at every tier. Model Clause/Language No specific clause is recommended in the regulations because the Energy Conservation requirements are so dependent on the state energy conservation plan. The following Language has been developed by FTA: Energy Conservation - The contractor agrees to comply with mandatory standards and policies relating to energy efficiency which are contained in the state energy conservation plan issued in compliance with the Energy Policy and Conservation Act. Date: 2-23-11 Signature Company Name: A o truc'tK6n, LLC Title: Man gin Member o LLC RECYCLED PRODUCTS 42 U.S.C.6962 40 CFR Part 247 Executive Order 12873 Applicability to Contracts The Recycled Products requirements apply to all contracts for items designated by the EPA, when the purchaser or contractor procures $10,000 or more of one of these items during the fiscal year, or has procured $10,000 or more of such items in the previous fiscal year, using Federal funds. New requirements for "recovered materials" will become effective May 1, 1996. These new regulations apply to all procurement actions involving items designated by the EPA, where the procuring agency purchases $10,000 or more of one of these items in a fiscal year, or when the cost of such items purchased during the previous fiscal year was $10,000. Flow Down These requirements flow down to all to all contractor and subcontractor tiers. Model Clause/Language No specific clause is mandated, but FTA has developed the following language. Recovered Materials - The contractor agrees to comply with all the requirements of Section 6002 of the Resource Conservation and Recovery Act (RCRA), as amended (42 U.S.C. 6962). including but not limited to the regulatory provisions of 40 CFR Part 247, and Executive Order 12873, as they apply to the procurement of the items designated in Subpart B of 40 CFR Part 247. Date. 2-23-11 Signature Company NJ m D on ructi LLC Title: Managing ember of C J J 8.� f Conformance with Intelligent Transportation Systems (ITS) National Architecture The ITS Architecture regulations, as identified in the January 2, 2001 Federal Register (Vol. 66, No. 5, pp. 1455-1459), 23 USC Section 502, and TEA-21, PL 105-178, Section 5206(e), require notification of ITS Architecture requirements in FTA-funded contracts. ems. A bidder or offeror must submit to the FTA recipient the appropriate ITS National Architecture r -, certification with all bids or offers on FTA funded contracts, except those subject to a general waiver. Bids or offers that are not accompanied by a completed ITS Architecture certification must be rejected as non -responsive, The City will ensure that all offerors/bidders agree to conform, to the extent applicable, to the Intelligent Transportation System Architecture and Standards under the FHWA final rule (as identified in 23 CFR 940), and with FTA Notice, "FTA National ITS Architecture Policy on Transit Projects" and other subsequent Federal directives that may be issued. Date 2-23-2011 Signature u: N DM Constru on, LLC Company Name ,} Title Managing Member of LLC � Ej _. PIS.....: b/aa/ .A I Americans with Disabilities Act (_ADA) Access The Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) regulations, specifically identified in 49 CFR Part 27, "Nondiscrimination on the Basis of Disability in Programs and Activities Receiving or Benefitting from Federal Financial Assistance", require adherence to and notification of ADA Access requirements in FTA-funded contracts. Titles If and 1-11 of the ADA provide that no entity shall discriminate against an individual with a disability in connection with the provision of transportation services. Also identified are specific requirements for vehicle and facility accessibility. Specific to this bid document, this conformance would apply to any construction activities, or the activities of construction personnel that would a worker's civil rights under EEOC or Title VI. A bidder or offeror must submit to the FTA recipient the appropriate ADA certification with all bids or offers on FTA funded contracts, except those subject to a general waiver. Bids or offers that are not accompanied by a completed ADA certification must be rejected as non -responsive. The bidder or offeror hereby certifies that it will meet the requirements and applicable regulations in 49 CFR Part 27. Date 2-23-2011 Signature —Z Company Name DM Cons action, LLC Title Managing Member of LLC 11, ACCESS TO RECORDS AND REPORTS 49 U.S.C. 5325 18 CFR 18.36 (1) 49 CFR 633.17 Applicability to Contracts Reference Chart "Requirements for Access to Records and Reports by Type of Contracts" Applicability to Micro -Purchases Micro -purchases are defined as those purchases under $2,500. These requirements do not apply to micro -purchases. Flow Down FTA does not require the inclusion of these requirements in subcontracts. Model Clause/LanpuaQe The specified language is not mandated by the statutes or regulations referenced, but the language provided paraphrases the statutory or regulatory language. Access to Records - The following access to records requirements apply to this Contract: 1. Where the Purchaser is not a State but a local government and is the FTA Recipient or a subgrantee of the FTA Recipient in accordance with 49 C. F. R. 18.36(i), the Contractor agrees to provide the Purchaser, the FTA Administrator, the Comptroller General of the United States or any of their authorized representatives access to any books, documents, papers and records of the Contractor which are directly pertinent to this contract for the purposes of making audits, examinations, excerpts and transcriptions. Contractor also agrees, pursuant to 49 C, F. R. 633.17 to provide the FTA Administrator or his authorized representatives including any PMO Contractor access to Contractor's records and construction sites pertaining to a major capital project, defined at 49 U.S.C. 5302(a)1, which is receiving federal financial assistance through the programs described at 49 U.S.C. 5307, 5309 or 5311. ,.,. 2. Where the Purchaser is a State and is the FTA Recipient or a subgrantee of the FTA s.: Recipient in accordance with 49 C.F.R. 633,17, Contractor agrees to provide the Purchaser, the FTA Administrator or his authorized representatives, including any PMO Contractor, access to the Contractor's records and construction sites pertaining to a major capital project, defined at 49 U.S.C. 5302(a)1, which is receiving federal financial assistance through the programs described at 49 U.S.C. 5307, 5309 or 5311. By definition, a major capital project excludes contracts of less than the simplified acquisition threshold currently set at $100,000. 3. Where the Purchaser enters into a negotiated contract for other than a small purchase or under the simplified acquisition threshold and is an institution of higher education, a hospital or other non-profit organization and is the FTA Recipient or a subgrantee of the FTA Recipient in accordance with 49 C.F.R, 19.48, Contractor agrees to provide the Purchaser, FTA Administrator, the Comptroller General of the United States or any of their duly authorized representatives with access to any books, documents, papers and record of the Contractor which are directly pertinent to this contract for the purposes of making audits, examinations, excerpts and transcriptions. 4. Where any Purchaser which is the FTA Recipient or a subgrantee of the FTA Recipient in accordance with 49 U.S.C. 5325(a) enters into a contract for a capital project or improvement (defined at 49 U.S.C. 5302(a)1) through other than competitive bidding, the Contractor shall make available records related to the contract to the Purchaser, the Secretary of Transportation and the Comptroller General or any authorized officer or employee of any of them for the purposes of conducting an audit and inspection. 5. The Contractor agrees to permit any of the foregoing parties to reproduce by any means whatsoever or to copy excerpts and transcriptions as reasonably needed. . 6. The Contractor agrees to maintain all books, records, accounts and reports required under this contract for a period of not less than three years after the date of termination or expiration of this contract, except in the event of litigation or settlement of claims arising from the performance of this contract, in which case Contractor agrees to maintain same until the Purchaser, the FTA Administrator, the Comptroller General, or any of their duly authorized representatives, have disposed of all such litigation, appeals-, claims or exceptions related thereto. Reference 49 CFR 18.39(i)(11). 7. FTA does not require the inclusion of these requirements in subcontracts. Requirements for Access to Records and Reports by Types of Contract i Contract Characteristics 's v? { i~r�� i State Grantees ,, None .off„ '_;: � �':r�. ;� Those lmposedNone �.'_ Nona '^•_ �t Nana ..�:. =';`�' None ;� on state pass thru , to Contractor contracts a. Cont None None unless' Yes, if non- None unless None unless None unless below SAT non- competitive non-competitive non-competitive non- competitive award or If award award competitive t " y award funded thru' award 53071530915311 b. Contracts above x S100.000/capital Protecta ! 11 HQq Yes1 �non Imposed Yes Yee Yes Yee Oran state ti a. Contracts FThose nteepeasfhNYea' Conlrector Yes Yea Yes Yes below SAT s i ($100,000) t E b. Contracts above $100,0001capital Proiects10 t i WE :w Sources of Authority: 149 USC 5325 (a) z 49 CFR 633.17 318 CFR 18,36 (1) Date: 2-23-11 Signature Company PIa D Constr tion, LLC Title: Managing memberof LLC Paize Intentionally Left Blank LIST OF SUB -CONTRACTORS No Text BID # 11-9916-MA - Citibus Downtown Transfer Plaza Renovation & Addition Construction Project LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS - - - -- - - - - ---------- - - - - - -- - --- - -- - - Minority - - -- Owned Company Name Location Services Provided Yes No 1 R&R Ditching Lubbock Dirt 2 M&US Concrete Lubbock Concrete ❑x ❑ 3 Lubbock Masonry Inc Lubbock Masonry ❑x ❑ 4 Hamilton Acoustical Lubbock Framing/Sheetrock ❑ ❑x 5 WSC Lubbock Mechanical ❑ ❑x 6 Mountain Plumbing Lubbock Plumbing ❑ ❑x 7 SPS Electric Lubbock Electrical ❑ ❑ 8 ❑ ❑ 9 El❑ 10 ❑ ❑ 11 ❑ ❑ 12 ❑ ❑ 13 ❑ ❑ 14 ❑ ❑ 15 ❑ ❑ ' 16 ❑ ❑ DM Construction, LLC Company PO Box 93153 Address Lubbock Lubbock City County Texas 79493 State Zip Code Telephone: 806-686-4742 Fax:806-686-0956 THIS FORM SHALL BE COMPLETED AND RETURNED ALONG WITH YOUR PROPOSAL IF NO SUB -CONTRACTORS WILL BE USED PLEASE INDICATE SO a W 0 PAYMENT BOND Bond No. S913-6503 STATUTORY PAYMENT BOND PURSUANT TO SECTION 2253.021(a) OF THE TEXAS GOVERNMENT CODE (CONTRACTS MORE THAN $50,000) KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that EM Construction, LLC (hereinafter called the Principal(s), as Principal(s), and Washington International Insurance Canpany (hereinafter called the Surety(s), as Surety(s), are held and firmly bound unto the City of Lubbock (hereinafter called the Obligee), in the amount of Five hundred sixty two thousand one hundred and no/100 - Dollars ($ 562,100.00 ) lawful money of the United States for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee, dated the 22"d day of March, 2011, to Bid 11-9916-MA- Citibus Downtown Transfer Plaza Renovation & Addition Construction Project and said Principal under the law is required before commencing the work provided for in said contract to execute a bond in the amount of said contract which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall pay all claimants supplying labor and material to him or a subcontractor in the prosecution of the work provided for in said contract, then, this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect; PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Section 2253.021(a) of the Texas Government Code, and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Article to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal (s) and Surety (s) have signed and sealed this instrument this 22nd day of March 2011. Washington International Insurance Canpany Su: EM Construction, LLC (Company Name) By: AQMAu /h44ygle (Printed Name) (Xnature) PAA) ►41PP Mfm t-W - LV- (Title) The undersigned surety company represents that it is duly qualified to do business in Texas, and hereby designates Kevin J. Dun an agent resident in Lubbock County to whom any requisite notices may be delivered and on whom service of process may be had in matters arising out of such suretyship. Washington Inter -national In ance Company Surety * By: Title) K; Atto —Fact Approved as to form: City of ck By: Assistant City Attorney * Note: If signed by an Office of the Surety Company there must be on file a certified extract from the by-laws showing that this person has authority to sign such obligation. If signed by an Attorney in Fact, we must have copy of power of attorney for our files. 3 [ . \ � [ � � \ \ PERFORMANCE BOND / / � : \ < \ \ ( / � . E ( L (� ! ( Bond No. S913-6503 STATUTORY PERFORMANCE BOND PURSUANT TO SECTION 2253.021(a) OF THE TEXAS GOVERNMENT CODE (CONTRACTS MORE THAN $100,000) KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that DM Construction LLC (hereinafter called the Principal(s), as Principal(s), and Washington International Insurance Company (hereinafter called the Surety(s), as Surety(s), are held and firmly bound unto the City of Lubbock (hereinafter called the Obligee), in the amount of Five hundred sixty two thousand one hundred and no JI M - - - Dollars ($ 562,100.00 ) lawful money of the United States for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee, dated the 22"d day of March 2011, to Bid 11-9164R- Citibus Downtown Transfer Plaza Renovation & Addition Construction Proiect and said principal under the law is required before commencing the work provided for in said contract to execute a bond in the amount of said contract which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall faithfully perform the work in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect. PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Section 2253.021(a) of the Texas Government Code, and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said article to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal (s) and Surety (s) have signed and sealed this instrument this 22nd day of Db rh 12011. LM Construction (Company Name) By: .- P�t1Zr (Printed'Name) (Si ture) NAAMAIA-4 bqA4kZr - GLL (Title) 2 The undersigned surety company represents that it is duly qualified to do business in Texas, and hereby designates Kevin J. Dunn an agent resident in Lubbock County to whom any requisite notices may be delivered and on whom service of process may be had in matters arising out of such suretyship. Washington International Insurance Company Cn rPty Approved as to Form City of L By: 'mil Assistant City Attorney * Note: If signed by an Office of the Surety Company, there must be on file a certified extract from the by-laws showing that this person has authority to sign such obligation. If signed by an Attorney in Fact, we must have copy of power of attorney for our files. 3 NAS SURETY GROUP NORTH AMERICAN SPECIALTY INSURANCE COMPANY WASHINGTON INTERNATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY GENERAL POWER OF ATTORNEY KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, THAT North American Specialty Insurance Company, a corporation duly organized and existing under laws of the State of New Hampshire, and having its principal office in the City of Manchester, New Hampshire, and Washington International Insurance Company, a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of New Hampshire and having its principal office in the City of Schaumburg, Illinois, each does hereby make, constitute and appoint: W. LAWRENCE BROWN, TRACY TUCKER, TOBIN TUCKER and KEVIN J. DUNN JOINTLY OR SEVERALLY Its true and lawful Attomey(s)-in-Fact, to make, execute, seal and deliver, for and on its behalf and as its act and deed, bonds or other writings obligatory in the nature of a bond on behalf of each of said Companies, as surety, on contracts of suretyship as are or may be required or permitted by law, regulation, contract or otherwise, provided that no bond or undertaking or contract or suretyship executed under this authority shall exceed the amount of: FIFTY MILLION ($50,000,000.00) DOLLARS This Power of Attorney is granted and is signed by facsimile under and by the authority of the following Resolutions adopted by the Boards of Directors of both North American Specialty Insurance Company and Washington International Insurance Company at meetings duly called and held on the 241h of March, 2000: "RESOLVED, that any two of the Presidents, any Managing Director, any Senior Vice President, any Vice President, any Assistant Vice President, the Secretary or any Assistant Secretary be, and each or any of them hereby is authorized to execute a Power of Attorney qualifying the attorney named in the given Power of Attorney to execute on behalf of the Company bonds, undertakings and all contracts of surety, and that each or any of them hereby is authorized to attest to the execution of any such Power of Attorney and to attach therein the seal of the Company; and it is FURTHER RESOLVED, that the signature of such officers and the seal of the Company may be affixed to any such Power of Attorney or to any certificate relating thereto by facsimile, and any such Power of Attorney or certificate bearing such facsimile signatures or facsimile seal shall be binding upon the Company when so affixed and in the future with regard to any bond, undertaking or contract of surety to which it is attached." `�0��� ,Np ury j ij/��/' nunweWpy,b �� 6Q. QiPOHiAG ._ �pTIONAC/Y4� _gg�+ cP rF.: s B �c�"4OtiPoiy.Ts rt _"!• SEAL Steven P. Anderson, President & Chief Executive Officer ofWashington International Insurance Company 2fo • � F ' 1973 ty � &Senior Vice President oCNort6 American Specialty insurance Company O= M 6 �1.. By.^- ........*e David M. Layman, Senior Vice Presiden oC Washington International Insurance Company & Vice President of North American Specialty Insurance Company IN WITNESS WHEREOF, North American Specialty Insurance Company and Washington International Insurance Company have caused their official seals to be hereunto affixed, and these presents to be signed by their authorized officers this I Sth day of December 2010 North American Specialty Insurance Company Washington International Insurance Company State of Illinois County of Cook Ss: December 20 0 before me, a Notary Public personally appeared Steven P. Anderson , President and CEO of Onthis ISth day of Washington International Insurance Company and Senior Vice President of North American Specialty Insurance Company and David M. Layman , Senior Vice President of Washington International Insurance Company and Vice President of North American Specialty Insurance Company, personally known to me, who being by me duly sworn, acknowledged that they signed the above Power of Attorney as officers of and acknowledged said instrument to be the voluntary act and deed of their respective companies. "OFFICIAL SEAV DONNAD.SK ENS Notary Public, State of Minoiii My Commission Expires 10100,W1I Donna D. Sklens, Notary Public I, James A. Carpenter , the duly elected Assistant Secretary of North American Specialty Insurance Company and Washington International Insurance Company, do hereby certify that the above and foregoing is a true and correct copy of a Power of Attomey given by said North American Specialty Insurance Company and Washington International Insurance Company, which is still in full force and effect. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have set my hand and affixed the seals of the Companies this 22 day of March 2011 James A. Carpenter, Vice President & Assistant Secretary oC Washington international insurance Company & Nonh American Specialty insurance Company IMPORTANT NOTICE In order to obtain information or make a complaint: You may contact Jim Carpenter, Vice President - Claims, at 1-800-338-0753. You may call Washington International Insurance Company and/or North American Specialty Insurance Company's toll -free number for information or to make a complaint at: 1-800-338-0753 You may also write to Washington International Insurance Company and/or North American Specialty Insurance Company at the following address: 1200 Arlington Heights Road #400 Itasca, IL 60143 You may contact the Texas Department of Insurance to obtain information on companies, coverages, rights or complaints at: 1- 800-252-3439 You may write the Texas Department of Insurance: P.O. Box 149104 Austin, TX 78714-9104 Fax: (512) 475-1771 Web: http:/hvww.tdi.state.tx.us E-mail: ConsumerProtection@tdi.state.tx.us PREMIUM OR CLAIM DISPUTES: Should you have a dispute concerning your premium or about a claim you should first contact the Washington International Insurance Company and/or North American Specialty Insurance Company. If the dispute is not resolved, you may contact the Texas Department of Insurance. ATTACH THIS NOTICE TO YOUR POLICY: E... This notice is for information only and does not become a part or condition of the attached document. AVISO IMPORTANTE Para obtener informacion o para someter un queja: Puede comunicarse con Jim Carpenter, Vice President - Claims, al 1-800-338-0753. Usted puede llamr al numero de telefono gratis de Washington International Insurance Company and/or North American Specialty Insurance Company's para informacion o para someter una queja al: 1-800-338-0753 Usted tambien puede escribir a Washington International Insurance Company and/or North American Specialty Insurance Company al: 1200 Arlington Heights Road #400 Itasca, IL 60143 Puede escribir al Departmento de Seguros de Texas para obtener informacion acerca de companias, coberturas, derechos o quejas al: 1- 800-252-3439 Puede escribir al Departmento de Seguros de Texas: P.O. Box 149104 Austin, TX 78714-9104 Fax: (512) 475-1771 Web: http://www.tdi.state.tx.us E-mail: ConsuiiierProtection@tdi.state.tx.us DISPUTAS SOBRE PRIMAS O RECLAMOS: Si tiene una disputa concerniente a su prima o a un reclamo, debe comunicarse con el Washington International Insurance Company and/or North American Specialty Insurance Company primero. Si no se resuelve la disputa, puede entonces comunicarse con el Departmento de Seguros de Texas. UNA ESTE AVISO A SU POLIZA: Este aviso es solo para proposito de infromacion y no se converte en parte o condicion del documento adjunto. CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE TO: CITY OF LUBBOCK DATE: P.O. BOX 2000, Room 204 LUBBOCK, TX 79457 TYPE OF PROJECT: THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT (Name and Address of Insured) is, at the date of this certificate, insured by this Company with respect to the business operations hereinafter described, for the typed of insurance and in accordance with the provisions of the standard policies used by this company, the further hereinafter described. Exceptions to standard policy noted hereon. TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER EFFECTIVE EFFECTIVE LIMITS DATE DATE GENERAL LIABILITY ❑ Commercial General Liability General Aggregate $ ❑ Claims Made Products-Comp/Op AGG $ ❑ Occurrence Personal & Adv. Injury $ ❑ Owner's & Contractors Protective Each Occurrence $ ❑ Fire Damage (Any one Fire) $ $ Med Exp (Any one Person) AUTOMOTIVE LIABILITY ❑ Any Auto Combined Single Limit $ ❑ All Owned Autos Bodily Injury (Per Person) $ ❑ Scheduled Autos Bodily Injury (Per Accident) $ ❑ Hired Autos Property Damage $ ❑ Non -Owned Autos GARAGE LIABILITY ❑ Any Auto Auto Only - Each Accident $ ❑ Other than Auto Only: Each Accident $ Aggregate $ ❑ BUILDERS RISK ❑ 100% of the Total Contract Price $ ❑ INSTALLATIONFLOATER $ EXCESS LIABILITY ❑ Umbrella Form Each Occurrence $ Aggregate $ ❑ Other Than Umbrella Form $ WORKERS COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY The Proprietor/ ❑ hrcluded Statutory Limits Partners/Executive ❑ Excluded Each Accident $ Offices are: Disease Policy Limit $ Disease -Each Employee $ OTHER The above policies either in the body thereof or by appropriate endorsement provide that they may not be changed or canceled by the insurer in less than the legal time required after the insured has received written notice of such change or cancellation, or in case there is no legal requirement, in less than five days in advance of cancellation. FIVE COPIES OF THE CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE MUST BE SENT TO THE CITY OF LUBBOCK (Name of Insurer) By: Title: - The Insurance Certificates Furnished shall name the City of Lubbock as a Primary Additional Insured on General Liability and provide a Waiver of Subrogation in favor of the City of Lubbock. IT SHALL BE THE CONTRACTOR'S. THE ADDITIONAL INSURED ENDORSEMENT SHALL INCLUDE PRODUCTS AND COMPLETE OPERATIONS. Aco CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE DA/31/201DD/YY 331/1 �...r� 1 PRODUCER (817) 336-8520 FAX: (817) 336-6501 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION Tucker Agency, Ltd. ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE P O Box 2285 HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. i 1 Ft. Worth TX 76113 INSURERS AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC # INSURED j INSURERA Essex Insurance Company j DM Construction, LLC INSURERBUnion Standard Insurance Co— 7204 Joliet Ave. !INSURERcAssociated International Ins j Lubbock, TX 79423 I INSURER D Texas Mutual Insurance Co. INSURER E: 3 COVERAGES THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OISUCH POLICIES. AGGREGATE LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. INSR� DD'u POLICY EFFECTIVE POLICYEXPIRATION) LTR NSR TYP NC POLICYNUMBER ATE MM DD i DATE MM DD YYY LIMITS A X GENERAL LIABILITY ;3DE2696 12/9/2011 2/9/2012 1 EACH OCCURRENCE _ Is _ -_ 1,000,00.0 COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY (j 1 X COM —� FDAMAGE TO RENTED [PREMISES occurrence) $ __. 100,000 CLAIMS MADE LI OCCUR MED EXP (Any one person) $ 5 , 000 PERSONAL-& ADV INJURY $ _ 1 L000 , 000 I [GENERAL AGGREGATE_ $ 2, 000, 000- GEN L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: i j - COMP/OP AGG I $ 2,000,000 _ POLICY X PRO- IF—] LOC -PRODUCTS --- j- - B I AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY CNA4508811 12 i 2/10/2011 1 2/10/2012 COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT is 1,000,000 X ANY AUTO i (Ea accident) ALL OWNED AUTOS BODILY INJURY is SCHEDULED AUTOS � � � (Per person) X HIRED AUTOS 1 BODILY INJURY (Per accident) j X NON -OWNED AUTOS �j i — ---- --------- i PROPERTY DAMAGE $ (Per accident) I j GARAGE LIABILITY AUTO ONLY_- EA ACCIDENT 1 $ --- _--_ ANY AUTO I OTHER EAACC_ $ N _- _--- I ;AUTO ONLYAGG-$ C �EXCESS /UMBRELLA LIABILITY `CUBW3351011 i 2/9/2011 2/9/2012 EACH OCCURRENCE $ 5 000 000 X] OCCUR F—ICLAIMS MADE !_AGGREGATE $ 5,000,000 DEDUCTIBLE $ X RETENTION $ 10,000t is j WORKERS COMPENSATION D AND EMPLOYERS'LIABILITY ; €€ WCSTATU- BOTH-1 X ITORYLIMITS I_ER ! �-- - Y / N ----� t---- ANY PROPRIETOR/PARTNER/EXECUTIVE PBP0001212042 5/11/2010 i 5/11/2011 � E.L. EACH ACCIDENT � $ 1- 000,000 - I OFFICER/MEMBER EXCLUDED? (Mandatory in NH) t E.L. DISEASE EA EMPLOYE $ 1,000,000 If Syes,describeunder SPECIAL PROVISIONS below � E.L�E-POLICYLIMI7 $--- 1,000,000 OTHER DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS / LOCATIONS / VEHICLES / EXCLUSIONS ADDED BY ENDORSEMENT/ SPECIAL PROVISIONS Re: Citibus Downtown Transfer Plaza Renovation & Addition City of Lubbock is primary additional insured including completed operations on general liability policy. Waiver of subrogation in favor of City of Lubbock. CERTIFICATE HOI ❑ER CANCFI 1 ATION SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION City of Lubbock DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING INSURER WILL ENDEAVOR TO MAIL 10 DAYS WRITTEN P O BOX 2000 NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT, BUT FAILURE TO DO SO SHALL Lubbock, TX 79457 IMPOSE NO OBLIGATION OR LIABILITY OF ANY KIND UPON THE INSURER, ITS AGENTS OR REPRESENTATIVES. AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE Tracy Tucker/CINDY r �. ACORD 25 (2009/01) ©1988-2009 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. INS025(200901) The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD IMPORTANT If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must be endorsed. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). DISCLAIMER This Certificate of Insurance does not constitute a contract between the issuing insurer(s), authorized representative or producer, and the certificate holder, nor does it affirmatively or negatively amend, extend or alter the coverage afforded by the policies listed thereon. ACORD 25 (2009/01) I NS025 (200901) CONTRACTOR CHECKLIST A CONTRACTOR SHALL: (1) provide coverage for its employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filling of any coverage agreements; (2) provide a certificate of coverage showing workers' compensation coverage to the governmental entity prior to beginning work on the project; (3) provide the governmental entity, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (4) obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental entity: (A) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and (B) no later than seven days after receipt by the contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (5) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (6) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within ten (10) days after the contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; (7) post a notice on each project site informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify current coverage and report failure to provide coverage. This notice does not satisfy other posting requirements imposed by the Act or other commission rules. This notice must be printed in at least 19-point normal type, and shall be in both English and Spanish and any other language common to the worker population. The text for the notices shall be the following text provided by the commission on the sample notice, without any additional words or changes: PROOF OF COVERAGE SHALL BE FURNISHED TO THE CITY OF LUBBOCK IN THE FORM OF A CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE. THE INSURANCE CERTIFICATES FURNISHED SHALL NAME THE CITY OF LUBBOCK AS A PRIMARY ADDITIONAL INSURED AND PROVIDE A WAIVER OF SUBROGATION IN FAVOR OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK, OR IN THE ALTERNATIVE, SHALL BE ACCOMPANIED BY A STATEMENT FROM THE CONTRACTOR TO THE EFFECT THAT NO WORK ON THIS PARTICULAR PROJECT SHALL BE SUBCONTRACTED. IT SHALL BE THE CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO PROVIDE TO THE OWNER ALL PROOF OF COVERAGE INSURANCE DOCUMENTS INCLUDING WORKERS COMPENSATION COVERAGE FOR EACH SUBCONTRACTOR. 1.1,11 .REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPENSATION COVERAGE [-,I "The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services related to this construction project must (see j reverse) be covered by workers' compensation insurance. This includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering equipment and materials, or providing labor or transportation or other service related to the project, regardless of the identity of their employer or status as an employee." "Call the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission at 512-305-7238 to receive information on the legal requirement for coverage, to verify whether your employer has provided the required coverage, or to report an employer's failure to provide coverage." and J (8) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, to: (A) provide coverage based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (B) provide a certificate of coverage to the contractor prior to that person beginning work on the project; (C) include in all contracts to provide services on the project the language in subsection (e) (3) of this rule; 1-1 (D) provide the contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (E) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the contractor: (i) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and (ii) prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (F) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (G) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within (ten) 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and 1] (H) contractually require each other person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by paragraphs (A) - (H), with the certificate of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. p g No Text CONTRACT No. 9916 STATE OF TEXAS t. J COUNTY OF LUBBOCK THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into this 22 day of March, 2011, by and between the City of Lubbock, County of Lubbock, State of Texas, acting by and through the Mayor, City of Lubbock, thereunto authorized to do so, hereinafter referred to as OWNER, and DM Construction LLC of the City of Lubbock, County of Lubbock and the State of Texas hereinafter termed CONTRACTOR. WITNESSETH: That for and in consideration of the payments and agreements hereinafter mentioned, to be made and performed by the OWNER and under the conditions expressed in the bond bearing even date herewith (if any) the CONTRACTOR hereby agrees with OWNER to commence and complete the construction of certain improvements described as follows: BID 11-9916-MA - Citibus Downtown Transfer Plaza Renovation & Addition Construction Project and all extra work in connection therewith, under the terms as stated in the contract documents and at his (or their) own proper cost and expense to furnish all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance and other accessories and services necessary to complete the said construction in accordance with the contract documents as defined in the General Conditions of Agreement. DM Construction, LLC's bid dated February 23. 2011 is incorporated into and made a part of this agreement. The CONTRACTOR hereby agrees to commence work within ten days after the date written notice to do so shall have been given to him and to substantially complete same within the time specified in the contract documents. The OWNER agrees to pay the CONTRACTOR in current funds for the performance of the contract in accordance with the bid submitted therefore, subject to additions and deductions, as provided in the contract documents and to make payment on account thereof as provided therein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to these presents have executed this agreement in Lubbock, Lubbock County, Texas in the year and day first above written. I CONTRACTOR: COMPLETE ADDRESS: Company QM C�n�n l.Ld. Address QO QoX g3t53 City, State, Zip I-g6( oct c , TX 76?4 R 3 ATTEST: u Corporate Secretary CITY OF LUBBOCK, TEXAS (OWNER): By:� MAYOR ATTEST: City Seltretary APPRO,V�ED AS TO CO TENT: s Representative Quincy Whit Ukssistant City Manager APP AS O FORM: Assistant CityAttorney Y 1 I GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT Whenever the word Owner, or First Party, are used in this contract, it shall be understood as referring to the City of Lubbock, Texas. 2. CONTRACTOR Whenever the word Contractor, or Second Party, is used, it shall be understood to mean the person, persons, co- partnership or corporation, to wit DM Construction LLC's who has agreed to perform the work embraced in this contract, or their legal representative. - 3. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE Whenever the word Owner's Representative or representative is used in this contract, it shall be understood as referring to, City of Lubbock, or its representative, so designated who shall inspect constructions; or to such other representatives, supervisors, architects, engineers, or inspectors as may be authorized by said Owner to act in any particular under this agreement. Engineers, supervisors or inspectors shall act for the Owner under the direction of Owner's Representative, but shall not directly supervise the Contractor or persons acting on behalf of the Contractor. 4. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The contract's documents shall consist of the Notice to Bidders, General Instructions to Bidders, biu, Signed Agreement, Statutory Bonds (if required), General Conditions of the Agreement, Special Conditions of the Agreement (if any), Specifications, Plans, Insurance Certificates, and all other documents made available to Bidder for inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. The above described materials are sometimes referred to herein as the "contract" or "contract documents". 5. INTERPRETATION OF PHRASES Whenever the words "Directed," "Permitted," "Designated," "Required," "Considered Necessary," "Prescribed," or words of like import are used, it shall be understood that the direction, requirement, permission, order, designation or prescription of the Owner's Representative is intended; and similarly, the words "Approved," "Acceptable," "Satisfactory," or words of like import shall mean approved by or acceptable or satisfactory to the Owner's Representative. SUBCONTRACTOR The term Subcontractor, as employed herein, includes only those having a direct contract with the Contractor for performance of work on the project contemplated by these contract documents. Owner shall have no responsibility to any Subcontractor employed by Contractor for performance of work on the project contemplated by these contract documents, but said Subcontractors shall look exclusively to Contractor for any payments due Subcontractor. The City reserves the right to approve or disapprove the selection of any subcontractor(s). 7. WRITTEN NOTICE Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an Office of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered at or sent certified mail to the last business address known to the party who gives the notice. t 8. CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES Unless otherwise stipulated, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, .insurance, and all water, light, power, fuel, transportation and all other facilities, necessary for the execution and completion of the work covered by the contract documents. Unless otherwise specified, all materials shall be new and both workmanship and materials shall be of a.good quality. The Contractor shall, if required, furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials. Materials or work described in words which so applied have well known, technical or trade meaning shall be held to refer such recognized standards. All work shall be done and all materials furnished in strict conformity with the contract documents. 9. SUBSTANTIALLY COMPLETED The term "Substantially Completed" is meant that the structure or project contemplated by the contract documents has been made suitable for use or occupancy or the facility is in a condition to serve its intended purpose, but still may require minor miscellaneous work and adjustment. 10. LAYOUT Except as specifically provided herein, the Contractor shall be responsible for laying out all work and shall accomplish this work in a manner acceptable to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's Representative shall check the Contractor's layout of all major structures and any other layout work done by the Contractor at Contractor's request, but this check does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of correctly locating all work in accordance with the Plans and Specifications. 11. KEEPING OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ACCESSIBLE The Contractor shall be furnished copies of all Plans and Specifications without expense to Contractor and Contractor shall keep one copy of same consistently accessible on the job site. 12. RIGHT OF ENTRY The Owner's Representative may make periodic visits to the site to observe the progress or quality of the executed work and to determine, in general, if the work is proceeding in accordance with the contract documents. Owner's Representative shall not be required to make exhaustive or continuous onsite inspections to check the quality or quantity of the work, nor shall Owner's Representative be responsible for the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or the safety precautions incident thereto. Notwithstanding the Owner's Representative's rights of entry hereunder, the Owner's Representative shall not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 13. LINES AND GRADES All lines and grades shall be furnished whenever Owner's Representative deems said lines and grades are necessary for the commencement of the work contemplated by these contract documents or the completion of the work contemplated by these contract documents. Whenever necessary, Contractor shall suspend its work in order to permit Owner's Representative to comply with this requirement, but such suspension shall be as brief as practical and Contractor shall be allowed no extra compensation therefore. The Contractor shall give the Owner's Representative ample notice of the time and place where lines and grades are needed. All stakes, marks, etc., shall be carefully preserved by the Contractor, and in case of careless destruction or removal by Contractor, its Subcontractors, or its employees, such stakes, marks, etc., shall be replaced by the Owner's Representative at Contractor's expense. 14. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE'S AUTHORITY AND DUTY 17 t__ Unless otherwise specified, it is mutually agreed between the parties to this Agreement that the Owner's Representative has the authority to review all work included herein. The Owner's Representative has the authority to stop the work whenever such stoppage may be necessary to ensure the proper execution of the contract. The Owner's Representative shall, in all cases, determine the amounts and quantities of the several kinds of work which are to be paid for under the contract documents, and shall determine all questions in relation to said work and the construction thereof, and shall, in all cases, decide every question which may arise relative to the execution of this contract on the part of said Contractor. The decision of the Owner's Representative shall be conclusive in the absence of written objection to same delivered to Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) calendar days of any decision or direction by Owner's Representative. In the absence of timely written objection by Contractor, as provided herein, any and all objection or objections shall be deemed waived. 15. SUPERINTENDENCE AND INSPECTION It is agreed by the Contractor that the Owner's Representative shall be and is hereby authorized to appoint from time to time such subordinate engineers, supervisors, or inspectors as the said Owner's Representative may deem proper to inspect the materials furnished and the work done under this Agreement, and to see that said material is furnished and said work is done in accordance with the specifications therefore. The Contractor shall furnish all reasonable aid and assistance required by the subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors for the proper inspection and examination of the work. The Contractor shall regard and obey the directions and instructions of any subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors so appointed, when such directions and instructions are consistent with the obligations of this Agreement and accompanying plans and specifications provided, however, should the Contractor object to any orders by any subordinate engineer, supervisor or inspector, the Contractor may within fifteen (15) calendar days make written appeal to the Owner's Representative for its decision. In the absence of timely written objection by Contractor, as provided herein, any and all objection or objections shall be deemed waived. 16. CONTRACTOR'S DUTY AND SUPERINTENDENCE The Contractor shall give personal attention to the faithful prosecution and completion of this contract and shall keep on the work, during its progress, a competent superintendent and any necessary assistants, all satisfactory to Owner's Representative. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor in its absence and all directions given to superintendent shall be binding as if given to the Contractor. It is expressly agreed that adequate supervision by competent and reasonable representatives of the Contractor is essential to the proper performance of the work and lack of such supervision shall be grounds for suspending operations of the Contractor. The work, from its commencement to completion, shall be under the exclusive charge and control of the Contractor and all risk in connection therewith shall be borne by the Contractor. The Owner or Owner's Representatives shall not be responsible for the acts or omissions of the Contractor, or any subcontractors, or any of Contractor's agents or employees, or any other persons performing any of the work. 17. CONTRACTOR'S UNDERSTANDING It is understood and agreed that the Contractor has, by careful examination, satisfied itself as to the nature and location of the work, the confirmation of the ground, the character, quality and quantity of materials to be encountered, the character of equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during the prosecution of the work, and the general and local conditions, and all other matters which in any way affect the work under the contract documents. No oral agreement or conversation with any Office, agent, or employee of the Owner, or I J Owner's Representative either before or after the execution of this contract, shall affect or modify any of the terms or obligations herein contained. Subject to the rights of Owner as set forth in Paragraph 23 hereof, all modifications and/or amendments to the contract documents, shall be in writing, and executed by Owner's Representative and Contractor. Unless otherwise specified herein, all loss, expense or damage to Contractor arising out of the nature of the work to be done, or from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen circumstance and the prosecution of the work, shall be sustained and borne by the Contractor at its own cost and expense. 18. CHARACTER OF WORKERS The Contractor agrees to employ only orderly and competent workers, skillful in the performance in the type of work required under this contract, to do the work; and agrees that whenever the Owner's Representative shall inform Contractor in writing that any man or men on the work, are, in Owner's Representative's sole opinion, incompetent, unfaithful, disorderly, or otherwise unacceptable to Owner or Owner's Representative, such man or men shall be discharged from the work and shall not again be employed on the work without the Owner's Representative's written consent. 19. CONSTRUCTION PLANT The Contractor shall provide all labor, tools, equipment, machinery and materials necessary in the prosecution and completion of this contract where it is not otherwise specifically provided that Owner shall furnish same, and it is also understood that Owner shall not be held responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, or protection of any materials, tools, equipment or machinery or any part of the work until it is finally completed and accepted. The building of structures for the housing of men or equipment are permitted only at such places as the Owner's Representative shall consent or direct, and the sanitary conditions of the grounds in or about such structure shall at all times be maintained in a manner satisfactory to the Owner's Representative. 20. SANITATION Necessary sanitary conveniences for the use of laborers on the work site, properly secluded from public observation, shall be constructed and maintained by the Contractor in such manner and at such points as shall be approved by the Owner's Representative and their use shall be strictly enforced. 21. OBSERVATION AND TESTING The Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right at all times to observe and test the work. Contractor 3 shall make necessary arrangements and provide proper facilities and access for such observation and testing at any location wherever such work is in preparation or progress. Contractor shall ascertain the scope of any observation that may be contemplated by Owner or Owner's Representative and shall give ample notice as to the time each part of the work shall be ready for such observation. Owner or Owner's Representative may reject any such work found to be defective or not in accordance with the contract documents, regardless of the stage of its completion or the time or place of discovery of such errors and regardless of whether Owner's Representative has previously accepted the work through oversight or otherwise. If any such work should be covered without approval or consent of the Owner, it must, if requested by Owner or Owner's Representative, be uncovered for examination at Contractor's expense. In the event that any part of the work is being fabricated or manufactured at a location where it is not convenient for Owner or Owner's Representative to make observations of such work or require testing of said work, then in such event Owner or Owner's Representative may require Contractor to furnish Owner or Owner's Representative certificates of inspection, testing or approval made by persons competent to perform such tasks at the location where that part of the work is being manufactured or fabricated. All such tests shall be in accordance with the methods prescribed by the American Society for Testing and Materials or such other applicable organization as may be required by law or the contract documents. If any such work which is required to be inspected, tested, or approved is covered up without written approval or ' consent of the Owner or Owner's Representative, it must, if requested by the Owner or Owner's Representative, be uncovered for observation and testing at the Contractor's expense. The cost of all such inspections, tests and approvals shall be borne by the Contractor unless otherwise provided herein. Any work which fails to meet the requirements of any such tests, inspections or approvals, and any work which meets the requirements of any such 4 22 23. 24. tests or approvals but does not meet the requirements of the contract documents shall be considered defective, and shall be corrected at the Contractor's expense. 1 l Neither observations by the Owner or Owner's Representative, nor inspections, tests, or approvals made by Owner, Owner's Representative, or other persons authorized under the contract documents to make such inspections, tests, or approvals shall relieve the Contractor from its obligation to perform the work in accordance with the requirements of the contract documents. DEFECTS AND THEIR REMEDIES It is expressly agreed that if the work or any part thereof, or any material brought on the site of the work for use in the work or selected for the same, shall be deemed by the Owner or Owner's Representative as unsuitable or not in conformity with plans, specifications and/or contract documents, the Contractor shall, after receipt of written notice thereof from the Owner's Representative, forthwith remove such material and rebuild or otherwise remedy such work so that it shall be in full accordance with the contract documents. It is further agreed that any remedial action contemplated as hereinabove set forth shall be at Contractor's expense. CHANGES AND ALTERATIONS The Contractor further agrees that the Owner may make such changes and alterations as the Owner may see fit, in the line, grade, form dimensions, plans or materials for the work herein contemplated, or any part thereof, either before or after the beginning of the construction, without affecting the validity of this contract and the accompanying bond. If such changes or alterations diminish the quantity of the work to be done, they shall not constitute the basis for a claim for damages, or anticipated profits on the work that may be dispensed with. If they increase the amount of work, and the increased work can fairly be classified under the specifications, such increase shall be paid according to the quantity actually done and at the unit price established for such work under this contract; otherwise such additional work shall be paid for as provided under Extra Work. In case the Owner shall make such changes or alterations as shall make useless any work already done or material already furnished or used in said work, then the Owner shall recompense the Contractor for any material or labor so used, and for actual expenses incurred in preparation for the work as originally planned. (. EXTRA WORK The term "extra work" as used in this contract shall be understood to mean and include all work that may be required by the Owner or Owner's Representative to be done by the Contractor to accomplish any change, alteration or addition to the work as shown on the plans and specifications or contract documents and not covered by Contractor's bid, except as provided under Changes and Alterations herein. It is agreed that the Contractor shall perform all extra work under the direction of the Owner's Representative when presented with a written work order signed by the Owner's Representative; subject, however, to the right of the Contractor to require written confirmation of such extra work order by the Owner. It is also agreed that the compensation to be paid to the Contractor for performing said extra work shall be determined by the following methods: Method (A) - By agreed unit prices; or Method (B) - By agreed lump sum; or Method (C) - If neither Method (A) or Method (B) be agreed upon before the extra work is commenced, then the Contractor shall be paid the lesser of the following: (1) actual field cost of the extra work, plus fifteen (15%) percent; or (2) the amount that would have been charged by a reasonable and prudent Contractor as a reasonable and necessary cost for performance of the extra work. In the event said extra work be performed and paid for under Method (C)(1), then the provisions of this paragraph shall apply and the "actual field cost" is hereby defined to include the cost of all workmen, such as foremen, a timekeepers, mechanics and laborers, materials supplies, teams trucks rentals on machinery and equipment, for the time actually employed or used on such extra work, plus actual transportation charges necessarily incurred, together with all expenses incurred directly on account of such extra work, including Social Security, Old Age ` Benefits, Maintenance Bonds, Public Liability and Property Damage and Workers' Compensation and all other insurances as may be required by law or ordinances or directed by the Owner or Owner's Representative, or by them agreed to. Owner's Representative may direct the form in which accounts of the actual field cost shall be kept and records of these accounts shall be made available to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's Representative may also specify in writing, before the work commences, the method of doing the work and the type and kind of machinery and equipment to be used; otherwise, these matters shall be determined by the Contractor. Unless otherwise agreed upon, the prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be determined by using 100%, unless otherwise specified, of the latest Schedule of Equipment and Ownership Expenses adopted by the Associated General Contractors of America. Where practical, the terms and prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be incorporated in the written extra work order. The fifteen percent (15%) of the i actual field cost to be paid to Contractor shall cover and compensate Contractor for its profit, overhead, general superintendence and field office expense, and all other elements of cost and expense not embraced within the actual field cost as herein defined, save that where the Contractor's Camp or Field Office must be maintained primarily on account of such Extra Work, then the cost to maintain and operate the same shall be included in the "actual field cost." No claim for extra work of any kind shall be allowed unless ordered in writing by Owner's Representative. In case any orders or instructions appear to the Contractor to involve extra work for which Contractor should receive compensation or an adjustment in the construction time, Contractor shall prior to commencement of such extra work, make written request to the Owner's Representative for a written order authorizing such extra work. Should a difference of opinion arise as to what does or does not constitute extra work or as to the payment therefore, and the Owner's Representative insists upon its performance, the Contractor shall proceed with the work after making written request for written order and shall keep adequate and accurate account of the actual field cost thereof, as provided under Method (C) (1). If Contractor does not notify Owner's Representative before the commencement of any extra work, any claim for payment due to alleged extra work shall be deemed waived. 25. DISCREPANCIES AND OMISSIONS It is further agreed that it is the intent of the contract documents that all work described in the bid, the specifications, plans and other contract documents, is to be done for the prices quoted by the Contractor and that such price shall include all appurtenances necessary to complete the work in accordance with the intent of these contract documents as interpreted by Owner's Representative. Notices of any discrepancies or omissions in these plans, specifications, or contract documents, shall be given to the Owners' Representative and a clarification obtained before the bids are received, and if no such notice is received by the Owner's Representative prior to the opening of bids, then it shall be deemed that the Contractor fully understands ti the work to be included and has provided sufficient sums in its bid to complete the work in accordance with these plans and specifications. If Contractor does not notify Owner's Representative before bidding of any discrepancies or omissions, then it shall be deemed for all purposes that the plans and specifications are sufficient and adequate for completion of the project. It is further agreed that any request for clarification must be submitted no later than five (5) calendar days prior to the opening of bids. 26. RIGHT OF OWNER TO MODIFY METHODS AND EQUIPMENT If at any time the methods or equipment used by the Contractor are found to be inadequate to secure the quality of work with the rate of progress required under this contract, the Owner or Owner's Representative may order the A Contractor in writing to increase their safety or improve their character and efficiency and the Contractor shall comply with such order. If, at any time, the working force of the Contractor is inadequate for securing the progress herein specified, the Contractor shall, if so ordered in writing, increase its force or equipment, or both, to such an extent as to give reasonable assurance of compliance with the schedule of progress. 27. PROTECTION AGAINST ACCIDENT TO EMPLOYEES AND THE PUBLIC AND GENERAL INDEMNITY The Contractor shall take out and procure a policy or policies of Workers' Compensation Insurance with an insurance company licensed to transact business in the State of Texas, which policy shall comply with the Workers' Compensation laws of the State of Texas. The Contractor shall at all times exercise reasonable precaution for the safety of employees and others on or near the work and shall comply with all applicable provisions of federal, state and municipal laws and building and construction codes. All machinery and equipment and other physical hazards shall be guarded in accordance with the "Manual of Accident Prevention mi Construction" of Associated General Contractors of America, except where incompatible with federal, state or g municipal laws or regulations. The Contractor, its sureties and insurance carriers shall defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and all of its Offices, agents and employees against any all losses, costs, damages, expenses, liabilities, claims and/or causes of action, whether known or unknown, fixed, actual, accrued or contingent, liquidated or unliquidated, including, but not limited to, attorneys' fees and expenses, in connection with, incident to, related to, or arising out of, the Contractor's or any subcontractor's, agent's or employee's, mi any manner whatsoever, omission, execution and/or supervision of this contract, and the project which is the subject matter of this contract. m The safety precautions taken shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor, in its sole discretion as an Independent Contractor; inclusion of this paragraph in the Agreement, as well as any notice which may be given by the Owners or the Owner's Representative concerning omissions under this paragraph as the work progresses, are intended as reminders to the Contractor of its duty and shall not be construed as any assumption of duty to supervise safety precautions by either the Contractor or any of its subcontractors. 28. CONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance as required in the General Conditions of the contract documents, from an underwriter authorized to do business in the State of Texas and satisfactory to the City. Proof of coverage shall be furnished to the City and written notice of cancellation or any material change shall be provided ten (10) calendar days in advance of cancellation or change. All policies of insurance, required herein, including policies of insurance required to be provided by Contractor and its subcontractors, shall contain a waiver of any and all of the insurer's or payor's, in -the event of self- insurance, rights to subrogation that any such insurer or payor, in the event of self-insurance, may acquire by virtue of payment of any loss under such insurance or self-insurance. All certificates of insurance submitted to the City in conformity with the provisions hereof shall establish such waiver. The Contractor shall procure and carry at its sole cost and expense through the life of this contract, insurance protection as hereinafter specified. Coverage in excess of that specified herein also shall be acceptable. Such insurance shall be carried with an insurance company authorized to transact business in the State of Texas and shall cover all operations in connection with this contract, whether performed by the Contractor or a subcontractor, or separate policies shall be provided covering the operation of each subcontractor. A certificate of insurance specifying each and all coverages shall be submitted prior to contract execution. PROOF OF COVERAGE SHALL BE FURNISHED TO THE CITY OF LUBBOCK IN THE FORM OF A CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE ALONG WITH A COPY OF THE ADDITIONAL INSURED ENDORSEMENT. THE INSURANCE CERTIFICATES FURNISHED SHALL NAME THE CITY OF LUBBOCK AS A PRIMARY ADDITIONAL INSURED TO INCLUDE PRODUCT-COMP/OP AND PROVIDE A WAIVER OF SUBROGATION IN FAVOR OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK AS REQUIRED BELOW, OR IN THE ALTERNATIVE, SHALL BE ACCOMPANIED BY A STATEMENT FROM THE CONTRACTOR TO THE EFFECT THAT NO WORK ON THIS PARTICULAR PROJECT SHALL BE SUBCONTRACTED. IT SHALL BE THE CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO PROVIDE TO THE OWNER ALL PROOF OF COVERAGE INSURANCE DOCUMENTS INCLUDING WORKERS COMPENSATION COVERAGE FOR EACH SUBCONTRACTOR. THE ADDITIONAL INSURED , ENDORSEMENT SHALL INCLUDE PRODUCTS AND COMPLETE OPERATIONS. 7 t# I-, A. Commercial General Liability Insurance (Primary Additional Insured and Waiver of Subrogation required) The contractor shall have Comprehensive General Liability Insurance with limits of $1,000,00OCombined Single Limit in the aggregate and per occurrence to include: Products & Completed Operations Hazard Contractual Liability Personal Injury & Advertising Injury WITH HEAVY EQUIPMENT ENDORSEMENT B. Owner's and Contractor's Protective Liability Insurance. For bodily injuries, including accidental death and or property damage, - NOT REQUIRED. C. Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance (Waiver of Subrogation Required) The Contractor shall have Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance with limits of not less than; Bodily Injury/Property Damage, $500,000 Combined Single Limit, to include all owned and non -owned cars including: Employers Non -ownership Liability Hired and Non -owned Vehicles. D. Builder's Risk Insurance/Installation Floater Insurance - NOT REQUIRED. E. Umbrella Liability Insurance - NOT REQUIRED. F. Worker's Compensation and Employers Liability Insurance (Waiver of Subrogation required) Worker's Compensation Insurance covering all employees whether employed by the Contractor or any Subcontractor on the job with Employers Liability of at least $500,000 1. Definitions: Certificate of coverage ("certificate") - A copy of a certificate of insurance, a certificate of authority to self -insure issued by the commission, or a coverage agreement (TWCC-81, TWCC- 82, TWCC-83, or TWCC-84), showing statutory workers' compensation insurance coverage for the person's or entity's employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project. Duration of the project - includes the time from the beginning of the work on the project until the Contractor's/person's work on the project has been completed and accepted by the governmental entity. Persons providing services on the project ("subcontractor" in Section 406.096, Texas Labor Code) - includes all persons or entities performing all or part of the services the Contractor has undertaken to perform on the project, regardless of whether that person contracted directly with the Contractor and regardless of whether that person has employees. This includes, without limitation, independent contractors, subcontractors, leasing companies, motor carriers, owner - operators, employees of any such entity, or employees of any entity which fin-nishes persons to provide services on the project. "Services" include, without limitation, providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor, transportation, or other service related to a project. "Services" does not include activities unrelated to the project, such as food/beverage vendors, office supply deliveries, and delivery of portable toilets. 2. The Contractor shall provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all employees of the contractor providing services on the project, for the duration of the project. 3. The Contractor must provide a certificate of coverage to the governmental entity prior to being awarded the contract. C; 4. If the coverage period shown on the Contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project, the Contractor must, prior to the end of the coverage period, file a new certificate of coverage with the governmental entity showing that coverage has been extended. 5. The Contractor shall obtain from each person providing services on the project, and provide to the governmental entity: (a) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity shall have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and (b) no later than seven days after receipt by the Contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project. 6 The Contractor shall retain all required certificates of coverage for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter. 7. The Contractor shall notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the Contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project. The Contractor shall post on each project site a notice, in the text, form and manner prescribed by the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission, informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify coverage and report lack of coverage. 9. The Contractor shall contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on the project, to: (a) provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (b) provide to the Contractor, prior to that person beginning work on the project, a certificate of coverage showing that coverage is being provided for all employees of the person providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (c) provide the Contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (d) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the Contractor: (1) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and 9 (2) a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, prior to the end of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (e) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (f) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and (g) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to perform as required by paragraphs (a) - (g), with the certificates of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. 10. By signing this contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the Contractor is representing to the governmental entity that all employees of the Contractor who shall provide services on the project shall be covered by worker's compensation coverage for the duration of the project, that the coverage will be based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self -insured, with the commission's Division of Self -Insurance Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the Contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions. 11. The Contractor's failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach of contract by the Contractor which entitles the governmental entity to declare the contract void if the Contractor does not remedy the breach within ten days after receipt of notice of breach from the governmental entity. G. Proof of Coverage Before work on this contract is commenced, each Contractor and subcontractor shall submit to the Owner for approval five Certificates of Insurance covering each insurance policy carried and offered as evidence of compliance with the above insurance requirements, signed by an authorized representative of the insurance company setting forth: (1) The name and address of the insured. (2) The location of the operations to which the insurance applies. (3) The name of the policy and type or types of insurance in force thereunder on the date borne by such certificate. (4) The expiration date of the policy and the limit or limits of liability thereunder on the date borne by such certificate. (5) A provision that the policy may be canceled only by mailing written notice to the named insured at the address shown in the bid specifications. (6) A provision that written notice shall be given to the City ten days prior to any change in or cancellation of the policies shown on the certificate. (7) The certificate or certificates shall be on the form (or identical copies thereof) contained in the job specifications. No substitute of nor amendment thereto will be acceptable. (8) If policy limits are paid, new policy must be secured for new coverage to complete project. (9) A Contractor shall: 10 f_ (a) provide coverage for its employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filling of any coverage agreements; (b) provide a certificate of coverage showing workers' compensation coverage to the governmental entity prior to beginning work on the project; (c) provide the governmental entity, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the I Contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (d) obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental entity: i a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so () g, p p gl�g p J, the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and (ii) no later than seven days after receipt by the Contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (e) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; notify the governmental entity in writing b certified mail or personal delivery, i_. (f) fy g ty � g y p ry, within 10 days after the Contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; (g) post a notice on each project site informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify current coverage and report failure to provide coverage. This notice does not satisfy otherII posting requirements imposed by the Texas Worker's Compensation Act or other `' commission rules. This notice must be printed with a title in at least 30 point bold type and text in at least 19 point normal type, and shall be in both English and Spanish and any other language common to the worker population. The text for the notices shall be the following text provided by the commission on the sample notice, without any additional words or changes: REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPENSATIONCOVERAGE "The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services related to this construction project must be covered by workers' compensation insurance. This includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor or transportation or other service related to the project, regardless of the identity of their employer or status as an employee. " "Call the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission at 800-372-7713 or 512-804- 4000 (www.tdi.state.tx.us) to receive information of the legal requirements for coverage, to verify whether your employer has provided the required coverage, or to report an employer's failure to provide coverage, " and (h) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, to: (i) provide coverage based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll 1__I amounts and filing of any coverage agreements for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (ii) provide a certificate of coverage to the Contractor prior to that person beginning -' work on the project; 11 x (iii) include in all contracts to provide services on the project the following language: { "By signing this contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the person signing this contract is representing to the governmental entity that all employees of the person signing this contract who will provide services on the project will be covered by workers' compensation coverage for the duration of the project, that the coverage will be based on proper reprinting of classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self -insured, with the commission's Division of Self -Insurance Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the Contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions.' (iv) provide the Contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate 4....' of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the ..'. current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project;. (v) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the Contractor: (1) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and (2) prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (vi) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (vii) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and (viii) contractually require each other person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by paragraphs (i)-(viii), with the certificate of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. 29. DISABLED EMPLOYEES Contractors having more than fifteen (15) employees agree to comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990, and agree not to discriminate against a qualified individual with a disability because of the disability of such individual in regard to job application procedures, the hiring, advancement, or discharge of employees, employee compensation, job training, and other terms, conditions, and privileges of employment. 30. PROTECTION AGAINST CLAIMS OF SUBCONTRACTORS LABORERS MATERIALMEN AND FURNISHERS OF MACHINERY, EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIES . - Without limiting, in any way, manner or form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the Contractor agrees that it will indemnify and save the Owner and all of its Offices, agents and employees, harmless against any and all claims, liabilities, losses, damages, expenses and causes of action arising out of, in any way, manner or form, the demands of subcontractors, laborers, workmen, mechanics, material men and fiunishers of machinery and parts thereof, equipment, power tools, and supplies, incurred in the performance of this contract __, 12 and the project which is the subject matter of this contract. When Owner so desires, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory. evidence that all obligations of the nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged or r s waived. 31. PROTECTION AGAINST ROYALTIES OR PATENT INVENTION The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees, and shall provide for the use of any design, device, material or process covered by letters patent or copyright by suitable legal agreement with the Patentee or owner thereof. Without limiting, in any way, manner or form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the Contractor shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent or copyrights and shall indemnify and save the Owner, and all of its Offices, agents and employees harmless from any loss on account thereof, except that Owner shall defend all such suits and claims and shall be responsible for all such loss when a particular design, device, material or process or the product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is specified or required in these contract documents by Owner, provided, however, if choice of alternate design, device, material or process is allowed to the Contractor, then Contractor shall indemnify and save Owner, and all of its Offices, agents and employees harmless from any loss on account thereof. Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, if the material or process specified or required by Owner and/or this contract is an infringement, the Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless it gives written notice of such infringement to the Owner's Representative prior to bidding. 32. LAWS AND ORDINANCES The Contractor shall at all times observe and comply with all federal, state and local laws, ordinances and regulations, which in any manner affect the contract or the work, and without limiting, in any way, manner or form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, Contractor shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner, and all of its Offices, agents, and employees against any claims arising from the violation of any such laws, ordinances, and regulations, whether by the Contractor, its employees, or subcontractors. If the Contractor observes that the plans and specifications are at variance therewith, he shall notify the Owner's Representative in writing prior to bidding and any necessary changes shall be adjusted as provided in the contract for changes in the work. In the absence of timely written notification to Owner's Representative of such variance or variances within said time, any objection and/or assertion that the plans and specifications are at variance with any federal, state or local laws, ordinances or regulations shall be deemed waived. If the Contractor, its employees or subcontractors perform any work contrary to such laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, and without such notice to the Owner's Representative, Contractor shall bear all costs arising therefrom. The Owner is a municipal corporation of the State of Texas and the law from which it derives its powers, insofar as the same regulates the objects for which, or the manner in which, or the conditions under which the Owner may enter into contracts, shall be controlling, and shall be considered as part of this contract to the same effect as though embodied herein. 33. SUBCONTRACTING The Contractor agrees that it will retain personal control and will give its personal attention to the fulfillment of this contract. The Contractor further agrees that subletting of any portion or feature of the work, or materials required in the performance of this contract, shall not relieve the Contractor from its full obligations to the Owner, as provided by the contract documents. 34. TIME FOR SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES It is hereby understood and mutually agreed by and between the Contractor and the Owner, that the date of beginning and time for completion as specified in the contract documents, of work to be done hereunder are_, essential conditions of this contract; and it is further mutually understood and agreed that the work embraced in this contract shall be commenced as provided in the contract documents. 13 If the Contractor should neglect, fail, or refuse to substantially complete the work within the time herein specified, 1 ' then the Contractor does hereby agree as part of the consideration for the awarding of this contract, the Owner may withhold permanently from Contractor's total compensation, the sum of $500 PER DAY, not as a penalty, but as liquidated damages for the breach of the contract as herein set forth for each and every working day that the Contractor shall be in default after the time stipulated for substantially completing the work. It is expressly understood and agreed, by and between Contractor and the Owner, that the time for the substantial completion of the work described herein is reasonable time for the completion of the same, taking into consideration the average climatic range and conditions and usual industrial conditions prevailing in this locality. The amount is fixed and agreed upon by and between the Contractor and the Owner because the actual damages the Owner would sustain in such event would be difficult and/or impossible to estimate, however, the amount agreed upon herein is a reasonable forecast of the amount necessary to render just compensation to Owner, and is expressly agreed to be not disproportionate to actual damages as measured at time of breach. IT IS FURTHER AGREED AND UNDERSTOOD BETWEEN THE CONTRACTOR AND OWNER THAT TIME IS OF THE ESSENCE OF THIS CONTRACT. 35. TIME AND ORDER OF COMPLETION It is the meaning and intent of this contract, unless otherwise herein specifically provided, that the Contractor shall be allowed to prosecute its work at such time and sessions, in such order of precedence, and in such manner as shall be most conductive to economy of construction; provided, however, that the order and time of prosecution shall be such that the work shall be substantially completed as a whole and in part, in accordance with this contract, the plans and specifications, and within the time of completion designated in the bid; provided, also, that when the Owner is having other work done, either by contract or by its own force, the Owner's Representative may direct the time and manner of constructing work done under this contract so that conflicts will be avoided and the construction of the various works being done for the Owner shall be harmonized. The Contractor shall submit, at such times as may reasonably be requested by the Owner's Representative, schedules which shall show the order in which the Contractor intends to carry on the work, with dates. at which the Contractor will start the several parts of the work and estimated dates of completion of the several parts. 36. TIME OF PERFORMANCE The Contractor agrees that it has submitted its bid in full recognition of the time required for the completion of this project, taking into consideration the average climatic range and industrial conditions prevailing in this locality, and has considered the liquidated damage provisions of paragraph 34 hereinabove set forth and expressly agrees that it shall not beentitled to, nor will it request, an extension of time on this contract, except when its work has been delayed by an act or neglect of the Owner, Owner's Representative, employees of the Owner or other contractors employed by the Owner, or by changes ordered in the work, or by strike, walkouts, acts of God or the public enemy, fire or flood. Any request for extension shall be in writing with the written request for same setting forth all justifications, in detail, for the request, and submitted to Owner's Representative within twenty (20) calendar days of the occurrence of the event causing said delay. A failure by Owner's Representative to affirmatively grant the extension no later than twenty (20) calendar days of written submission by Contractor shall be deemed a denial, and final. Further, in the absence of timely written notification of such delay and request for extension, as provided herein, any request for extension by Contractor shall be deemed waived. 37. HINDRANCE AND DELAYS In executing the contract, the Contractor agrees that in undertaking to complete the work within the time herein fixed, Contractor has taken into consideration and made allowances for all hindrances and delays incident to such work, whether growing out of delays due to unusual and unanticipated circumstances, difficulties or delays in securing material or workmen, or any other cause or occurrence. No charge shall be made by the Contractor for hindrance or delays from any cause during the progress of any part of the work embraced in this contract except where the work is stopped by order of the Owner or Owner's Representative for the Owner's convenience, in 14 which event, such expense as in the sole judgment of the Owner's Representative that is caused by such stoppage shall be paid by Owner to Contractor. 38. QUANTITIES AND MEASUREMENTS No extra or customary measurements of any kind will be allowed, but the actual measured or computed length,,,A area, solid contents, number and weight only shall be considered, unless otherwise specifically provided. In the event this contract is let on a unit price basis, then Owner and Contractor agree that this contract, including the specifications, plans and other contract documents are intended to show clearly all work to be done and material to be fiunished hereunder. Where the estimated quantities are shown, and only when same are expressly stated to be estimates, for the various classes of work to be done and material to be furnished under this contract, they are l approximate and are to be used only as a basis for estimating the probable cost of the work and for comparing their bids offered for the work. In the event the amount of work to be done and materials to be furnished are expressly stated to be estimated, and only when same are expressly stated to be estimated, it is understood and agreed that the actual amount of work to be done and the materials to be furnished under this contract may differ somewhat from these estimates, and that where the basis for payment under this contract is the unit price method, payment shall be for the actual amount of work done and materials furnished on the project. R 39. PROTECTION OF ADJOINING PROPERTY The Contractor shall take proper means to protect the adjacent or adjoining property or properties in any way encountered, which may be injured or seriously affected by any process of construction to be undertaken under this agreement, from any damage or injury by reason of said process of construction; and Contractor shall be liable for any and all claims for such damage on account of his failure to fully protect all adjacent property. Without limiting, in any way, manner and form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the Contractor agrees to indemnify, save and hold harmless the Owner, and any of its Offices, agents and employees, against any and all claims or damages due to any injury to any adjacent or adjoining property, related to, arising from or growing out of the performance of this contract. 40. PRICE FOR WORK In consideration of the furnishing of all necessary labor, equipment and material and the completion of all work by the Contractor, and on the delivery of all materials embraced in this contract in full conformity with the specifications and stipulations herein contained, the Owner agrees to pay the Contractor the price set forth in the bid proposal attached hereto, which has been made a part of this contract, and the Contractor hereby agrees to receive such price in full for fiunishing all materials and all labor required for the aforesaid work, also, for all expenses incurred by Contractor and for well and truly performing the same and the whole thereof in the manner and according to this agreement, the attached specifications, plans, contract documents and requirements of Owner's Representative. 41. PAYMENTS No payments made or certificates given shall be considered as conclusive evidence of the performance of the contract, either wholly or in part, nor shall any certificate or payment be considered as acceptance of defective work. Contractor shall at any time requested during the progress of the work furnish the Owner or Owner's Representative with a verifying certificate showing the Contractor's total outstanding indebtedness in connection with the work. Before final payment is made, Contractor shall satisfy Owner, by affidavit or otherwise, that there are no outstanding liens against Owner's premises by reason of any work under the contract. Acceptance by Contractor of final payment of the contract price shall constitute a waiver of all claims against Owner, Owner's agents and employees, which have not theretofore been timely filed as provided in this contract. 42. PARTIAL PAYMENTS On or before the tenth day of each month, the Contractor shall submit to Owner's Representative an application for partial payment or, if the Contractor does not submit such application, the Owner's Representative shall 15 determine the amount to be partially paid. Owner's Representative shall review said application for partial payment if submitted, and the progress of the work made by the Contractor and if found to be in order, shall prepare a certificate for partial payment showing as completely as practical the total value of the work done by the Contractor up to and including the last day of the preceding month. The determination of the partial payment by the Owner's Representative shall be in accordance with Paragraph 14 hereof. The Owner shall then pay the Contractor on or before the fifteenth day of the current month the total amount of the Owner's Representative's Certificate of Partial Payment, less 5% of the amount thereof, which 5% shall be retained until final payment, and further, less all previous payments and all further sums that may be retained by Owner under the terms of the contract documents. Any partial payment made hereunder shall not constitute a waiver by the Owner of any and all other rights to enforce the express terms of the contract documents, and all remedies provided therein, as to any and all work performed, to be performed and/or materials delivered hereunder, including, but limited to, work to which said partial payment is attributable. 43. SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION Contractor shall give Owner's Representative written notice of substantial completion. Within thirty-one (31) working days after the Contractor has given the Owner's Representative written notice that the work has been substantially completed, the Owner's Representative and/or the Owner shall inspect the work and within said time, if the work be found to be substantially completed in accordance with the contract documents, the Owner's Representative shall issue to the Owner and Contractor a certificate of substantial completion. Notwithstanding the issuance of a certificate of substantial completion, Contractor shall proceed with diligence to finally complete the work within the time provided in this contract. 44. FINAL COMPLETION AND PAYMENT The Contractor shall give written notice to Owner's Representative of final completion. Upon written notice of final completion, the Owner's Representative shall proceed to make final measurement to determine whether final completion has occurred. If the Owner's Representative determines final completion has occurred, Owner's Representative shall so certify to the Owner. Upon certification by Owner's Representative of final completion, Owner shall pay to the Contractor on or before the 31 st working day after the date of certification of final completion, the balance due Contractor under the terms of this agreement. Neither the certification of final completion nor the final payment, nor any provisions in the contract documents shall relieve the Contractor of the obligation for fulfillment of any warranty which may be required in the contract documents and/or any warranty or warranties implied by law or otherwise. 45. CORRECTION OF WORK Contractor shall promptly remove from Owner's premises all materials condemned by the Owner's Representative on account of failure to conform to the contract documents, whether actually incorporated in the work or not, and Contractor shall at its own expense promptly replace such condemned materials with other materials conforming to the requirements of the contract documents. Contractor shall also bear the expense of restoring all work of other contractors damaged by any such removal or replacement. If Contractor does not remove and replace any such condemned work within a reasonable time after a written notice by the Owner or the Owner's Representative, Owner may remove and replace it at Contractor's expense. Neither the final payment, nor certification of final completion or substantial completion, nor any provision in the contract documents shall relieve the Contractor of responsibility for faulty materials or workmanship, and Contractor shall remedy any defects due thereto and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom, which shall appear within a period of one (1) year from the date of certification of final completion by Owner's Representative. '- 46. PAYMENT WITHHELD 16 The Owner or Owner's Representative may, on account of subsequently discovered evidence, withhold or nullify the whole or part of any certification to such extent as may be necessary to protect itself from loss on account of: (a) Defective work not remedied and/or work not performed. i d (b) Claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating possible filing of claims. (c) Damage to another contractor. When the above grounds are removed, or the Contractor provides a surety bond satisfactory to the Owner, in the amount withheld, payment shall be made for amounts withheld because of them. 47. CLAIM OR DISPUTE It is further agreed by both parties hereto that all questions of dispute or adjustment presented by the Contractor shall be in writing and filed with the Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) calendar days after the Owner's Representative has given any direction, order or instruction to which the Contractor desires to take exception. Timely written notice of dispute as provided in this contract of any decision by Owner's Representative or Owner shall be a condition precedent to the bringing and/or assertion of any action or claim by Contractor of any right under this Contract. If the matters set forth in the notice of dispute are not granted or otherwise responded to by Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) calendar days of receipt of notice of dispute by Owner's Representative, said objections shall be deemed denied. Any decision by the Owner's Representative, or deemed denial by the Owner's Representative, shall be final and conclusive in the absence of fraud. It is further agreed that the acceptance by the Contractor of the final payment shall be a bar to any and all claims of the Contractor, and constitute a waiver of the right to assert any claim against Owner, Owner's agents and employees and Owner's Representative, by Contractor. 48. NON-COMPLIANCE AND/OR ABANDONMENT BY CONTRACTOR In case the Contractor should (1) abandon and fail or refuse to resume work within fifteen (15) calendar days after written notification from the Owner or the Owner's Representative, or (2) if the Contractor fails to comply with the written orders of the Owner's Representative, when such orders are consistent with this contract, then the Surety on the bond shall be notified in writing and directed to complete the work and a copy of said notice shall be delivered to the Contractor. In the event a bond is not required by law, or otherwise obtained by the Contractor, no further notice of such non-compliance to Contractor shall be required. After receiving said notice of abandonment or non-compliance , the Contractor shall not remove from the work any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies then on the job, but the same, together with any materials and equipment under the contract for work, may be held for use on the work by the Owner or the Surety of the Contractor, or another contractor, in completion of the work; and the Contractor shall not receive any rental or credit therefore (except when used in connection with Extra Work, where credit shall be allowed as provided for under paragraph 24 of this contract); it being understood that the use of such equipment and materials will ultimately reduce the cost to complete the work and be reflected in the final settlement. In the event the Contractor, or Surety, whichever is applicable, should fail to commence compliance with the notice hereinbefore provided within ten (10) calendar days after service of such notice, and/or shall fail to proceed with diligence to complete the project as contemplated and in compliance with all terms and provisions of the contract documents, then the Owner may exercise any and all remedies available to it pursuant to law, contract, equity or otherwise, including, but not limited to, providing for completion of the work in either of the following elective manners: (a) The Owner may employ such force of men and use of machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies as said Owner may deem necessary to complete the work and charge the expense of such labor, machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies to said Contractor, and the expense so charged shall be deducted and paid by the Owner out of such moneys as may be due, or that may thereafter at any time become due to the Contractor under and by virtue of this Agreement. In case such expense is less than =. the sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been completed by the 17 1- Contractor, then said Contractor shall receive the difference. In case such expense is greater than the sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been completed by said Contractor, then the Contractor and/or its Surety shall pay the amount of such excess to the Owner; or (b) The Owner, under sealed bids, after notice published as required by law, at least twice in a newspaper having a general circulation in the County of location of the work, may let the contract for the completion of the work under substantially the same terms and conditions which are provided in this contract. In case of any increase in cost to the Owner under the new contract as compared to what would have been the cost under this contract, such increase shall be charged to the Contractor and the Surety shall be and remain bound therefore. Should the cost to complete any such new contract prove to be less than that which would have been the cost to complete the work under this contract, the Contractor or his Surety shall be credited therewith. In the event the Owner's Representative elects to complete the work, as described above, when the work shall have been finally completed, the Contractor and his Surety shall be so notified and certification of completion as provided in paragraph 44 hereinabove set forth, shall be issued. A complete itemized statement of the contract accounts, certified to by Owner's Representative as being correct shall then be prepared and delivered to Contractor and his Surety, if applicable, whereon the Contractor or his Surety, or the Owner as the case may be, shall pay the balance due as reflected by said statement within 30 days after the date of certification of completion. In the event the statement of accounts shows that the cost to complete the work is less than that which would have been the cost to the Owner had the work been completed by the Contractor under the terms of this contract, or when the Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable, shall pay the balance shown to be due by them to the Owner, then all machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies left on the site of the work shall be turned over to the Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable. Should the cost to complete the work exceed the contract price, and the Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable, fail to pay the amount due the Owner within the time designated hereinabove, and there remains any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies on the site of the work, notice thereof, together with an itemized list of such equipment and materials shall be mailed to the Contractor and his Surety, if applicable, at the respective addresses designated in this contract; provided, however, that actual written notice given in any manner will satisfy this condition. After mailing, or other giving of such notice, such property shall be held at the risk of the Contractor and his Surety, if applicable, subject only to the duty of the Owner to exercise ordinary care to protect such property. After fifteen (15) calendar days from the date of said notice the Owner may sell such machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies and apply the net sum derived from such sale to the credit of the Contractor and his Surety, if applicable. Such sale may be made at either public or' private sale, with or without notice, as the Owner may elect. The Owner shall release any machinery, equipment, tools, materials, or supplies that remain on the jobsite and belong to persons other than the Contractor or his Surety, if applicable, to their proper owners. The remedies provided to Owner by law, equity, contract, or otherwise, shall be cumulative, to the extent permitted by law. It is expressly agreed and understood that the exercise by Owner of the remedies provided in this paragraph shall not constitute an election of remedies on the part of Owner, and Owner, irrespective of its exercise of remedies hereunder, shall be entitled to exercise concurrently or otherwise, any and all other remedies available to it, by law, equity, contract or otherwise, including but not limited to, liquidated damages, as provided in paragraph 34, hereinabove set forth. 49. LIMITATION ON CONTRACTOR'S REMEDY The remedies of Contractor hereunder shall be limited to, and Owner shall be liable only for, work actually performed by Contractor and/or its subcontractors as set forth in the contract documents, and Owner shall not be liable for any consequential, punitive or indirect loss or damage that Contractor may suffer in connection with the project which is the subject matter of this contract. a 50. BONDS 18 The Contractor is required to furnish a performance bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $100,000 and the Contractor is required to furnish a payment bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the .. amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $50,000. All bonds shall be submitted on forms supplied by the Owner, and executed by an approved Surety Company authorized to do business in the State of Texas. It is further agreed that this contract shall not be in effect until such bonds are so r furnished. 51. SPECIAL CONDITIONS In the event special conditions are contained herein as part of the contract documents and said special conditions conflict with any of the general conditions contained in this contract, then in such event the special conditions shall control. 52. LOSS OR EXPENSE DUE TO UNUSUAL OR UNANTICIPATED CIRCUMSTANCES Unless otherwise specified herein, all loss, expense or damage to the Contractor arising out of the nature of the work to be done, or from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen circumstance or from unusual obstructions or difficulties, naturally occurring, man made or otherwise, which may be encountered in the prosecution of the work, shall be sustained and borne by the Contractor at his own cost and expense. 53. INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR Contractor is, and shall remain, an independent contractor with full, complete and exclusive power and authority to direct, supervise, and control its own employees and to determine the method of the performance of the work covered hereby. The fact that the Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right to observe Contractor's work during Contractor's performance and to carry out the other prerogatives which are expressly reserved to and vested in the Owner or Owner's Representative hereunder, is not intended to and shall not at any time change or effect the status of the Contractor as an independent contractor with respect to either the Owner or Owner's Representative or to the Contractor's own employees or to any other person, firm, or corporation. 54. CLEANING UP The Contractor shall at all times keep the premises free from accumulation of debris caused by the work, and at the completion of the work Contractor shall remove all such debris and also its tools, scaffolding, and surplus materials and shall leave the work room clean or its equivalent. The work shall be left in good order and condition. In case of dispute Owner may remove the debris and charge the cost to the Contractor. 55. HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES AND ASBESTOS Hazardous Substances (herein so called), as defined in the Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation, and Liability Act (42 U.S.C.S. §9601(14)) and the regulations promulgated thereunder, as same may be amended from time to time, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos, in any form, shall not (i) be utilized, in any way, manner or form, in the construction of, or incorporation into, the Project; or (ii) be brought upon, placed, or located, by any party, on the Project site, or any other property of ---- City, without the written consent of the Owner's Representative. If Contractor believes that the utilization of a Hazardous Substance, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos is necessary in the construction of the Project, or that it is necessary to place and/or otherwise locate upon the site of the Project or other property of the City, a Hazardous Substance, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products, or byproducts and/or asbestos, Contractor shall notify the Owner's Representative, and request consent therefrom, at least twenty (20) days prior to such action. Owner's Representative may grant or deny the request of Contractor and provide whatever requirements such consent, if granted, is conditioned upon, in its sole and absolute discretion. If the request of Contractor is not granted, or otherwise not responded to, by Owner's Representative within five (5) days of the receipt of said request, said request shall be deemed to be denied. 19 In the event Owner's Representative shall consent to the request of Contractor, Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that all personnel involved in the Project are (i) trained for the level of expertise required for proper performance of the actions contemplated by this Contract and, in particular, in all aspects of handling, storage, disposal and exposure of Hazardous Substances, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos; and (ii) are provided and utilize all protective equipment, including without limitation, personal protective gear, necessary to provide protection from exposure to Hazardous Substances, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos. 56. NONAPPROPRIATION All funds for payment by the City under this contract are subject to the availability of an annual appropriation for this purpose by the City. In the event of non -appropriation of funds by the City Council of the City of Lubbock for the goods or services provided under the contract, the City will terminate the contract, without termination charge or other liability, on the last day of the then -current fiscal year or when the appropriation made for the then -current year for the goods or services covered by this contract is spent, whichever event occurs first. If at any time funds are not appropriated for the continuance of this contract, cancellation shall be accepted by the Seller on thirty (30) days prior written notice, but failure to give such notice shall be of no effect and the City shall not be obligated under this contract beyond the date of termination. 57. THE CITY RIGHT TO AUDIT At any time during the term of this Contract and for a period of four (4) years thereafter the City or a duly authorized audit representative of the City, or the State of Texas, at its expense and at reasonable times, reserves the right to audit Contractor's records and books relevant to all services provided under this Contract. In the event such an audit by the City reveals any errors/overpayments by the City, Contractor shall refund the City the full amount of such overpayments within thirty (30) days of such audit findings, or the City, at its option, reserves the right to deduct such amounts owing the City from any payments due Contractor. 20 DAVIS BACON WAGE DETERMINATIONS P GENERAL DECISION: TX20100296 10/01/2010 TX296 Date: October 1, 2010 General Decision Number: TX20100296 10/01/2010 Superseded General Decision Number: TX20080296 State: Texas Construction Type: Building "! County: Lubbock County in Texas. BUILDING CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS (does not include single family homes or apartments up to and including 4 stories). Modification Number Publication Date 0 03/12/2010 1 03/19/2010 2 06/25/2010 3 10/01/2010 BOIL0531-001 07/01 /2008 Rates Fringes Boilermaker .................... $ 26.02 13.66 ---------------------------------------------------------------- BRTX0005-004 06/01/2009 Rates Fringes ( Bricklayer ..................... $ 24.16 8.31 - -------------------------------------------------------------- CARP0665-002 05/01/2010 Rates Fringes Carpenter ...................... $ 20.18 5.56 ---------------------------------------------------------------- ENG10178-004 12/01 /2009 - Rates Fringes OPERATOR: Forklift .............. $ 21.20 9.35 ---------------------------------------------------------------- IRON0263-017 06/01/2008 Rates Fringes Ironworker, reinforcing ........ $ 20.90 4.60 - -------------------------------------------------------------- PAIN0053-003 04/01/2008 Rates Fringes Painter - Brush, Roller & Spray ............................$ 15.81 4.56 * PLL M0629-019 09/24/2010 Rates Fringes PLUMBER/PIPEFTITER............... $ 21.00 6.25 ---------------------------------------------------------------- SHEE0049-007 06/16/2010 Rates Fringes SHEETMETAL WORKER (HVAC Duct and System Installation Only) .... $ 21.20 8.95 ---------------------------------------------------------------- SUTX2009-168 06/03/2009 Rates Fringes CEMENT MASON/CONCRETE FINISHER ... $ 18.58 0.00 ELECTRICIAN ......................$ 18.09 2.36 IRONWORKER, STRUCTURAL ........... $ 10.38 0.00 LABORER: Common or General ...... $ 8.86 0.00 LABORER: Mason Tender - Brick ... $ 11.00 0.00 OPERATOR: Backhoe/Excavator..... $ 13.81 0.00 OPERATOR: Blade/Grader .......... $ 12.97 0.00 OPERATOR: Front End Loader ...... $ 12.23 0.00 ROOFER ........................... $ 12.06 0.00 TILE SETTER ......................$ 8.50 0.00 TRUCK DRIVER .....................$ 10.15 0.00 WELDERS - Receive rate prescribed for craft performing operation to which welding is incidental. SPECIFICATIONS December 2010 Addition & Renovation to the Citibus Transfer Station 801 Broadway !w; Lubbock,Texas Citibus PO Box 2000 Lubbock, Texas 79457 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 612 Broadway Lubbock, Texas 79401 806-749-1153 CHA, Inc. Project #0921 No Text TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 00 - PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENT Bidding Requirements and Conditions of the Contract Provided by the City of Lubbock DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 1000 Summary of Work 011015 Energy Compliance Certificates 012100 Allowances 012300 Alternates 01 2500 Substitution Procedures 01 2600 Contract Modification Procedures 012900 Payment Procedures. 013100 Project Management and Coordination 01 3300 Submittal Procedures 014000 Quality Requirements 014200 References 01 5000 Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 5639 Temporary Tree and Plant Protection 01 6000 Product Requirements 017300 Execution 01. 7700 Closeout Procedures 017823 Operation and Maintenance Data 017839 Project Record Documents DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS 022200 Earth Work 024120 Selective Structure Demolition DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE 033000 Concrete Work 034816 Precast Concrete Splash Blocks DIVISION 04 - MASONRY 042113 Brick Masonry 044230 Reinforced Concrete Masonry DIVISION 05 - METALS 055120 Structural Steel 055210 Steel Joists 055213 Pipe and Tube Railings 055300 Metal Roof Decking 055400 Cold -Formed Metal Framing 055500 Metal Fabrications fir TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES 061053 Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry 064113 Wood Veneer Faced Architectural Cabinets 064600 Wood Trim DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 072200 Roof Insulation 075423 Thermoplastic Polyolefin (TPO) Roofing 076200 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 079200 Joint Sealants DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS 081113 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 085113 Aluminum Windows 087100 Hardware 088000 Glazing DIVISION 09 - FINISHES 092216 Non -Structural Metal Framing 09 2900 - Gypsum Board 093000 Tiling 095113 Acoustical Panel Ceilings 096513 ' Resilient Base and Accessories 096519 Resilient Tile Flooring 099113 Exterior Painting 099123 Interior Painting 099300 Staining and Transparent Finishing DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 102600 Wall and Door Protection 104413 Fire Extinguisher Cabinets 104416 Fire Extinguishers DIVISION 11 -EQUIPMENT -not used - DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS 122113 Horizontal Louver Blinds 12 3623.13 Plastic Laminate Clad Countertops DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION -not used - DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT -not used- TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 15 — PLUMBING, HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 150100 150200 150600 152500 154000 156500 158040 158400 158700 DIVISION 16 — ELECTRICAL 160510 160600 160730 160750 161200 161300 161400 164100 16 4200 165110 DIVISION 28 — ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY -not used - DIVISION 31 — EARTHWORK 313116 Termite Control DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS -not used - DIVISION 33 — UTILITIES -not used - END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS �7-- -7--- -,--- ----� ---'` -7--1 -T-�l Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Dec-2010 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY PART I - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Project information. 2. Work covered by Contract Documents. 3. Phased construction. 4. Access to site. 5. Coordination with occupants. 6. Work restrictions. 7. Specification and drawing conventions. 8. Miscellaneous provisions. B. Related Requirements: l . Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures governing temporary use of Owner's facilities. 1.2 PROJECT INFORMATION A. Project Identification: Citibus Transfer Plaza; CHA Project No. 0921. 1. Project Location: 801 Broadway, Lubbock, Texas. B. Owner: Citibus. C. Architect: Chapman Harvey Architects 1.3 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following: 1. The project consists of the addition of 2097 square feet of new space and the renovation of 3798 square feet of existing space. Said spaces shall be used for assembly, business office and existing restrooms. 2. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract. 1.4 PHASED CONSTRUCTION rA. The Work shall be conducted in multiple phases, with each phase substantially complete as indicated: SUMMARY 011000 - l Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. Dec-2010 i Initial Phase: Construct the Vending Addition. Work of this phase shall commence upon Notice to Proceed and shall be temporarily occupiable by the Owner, prior to beginning Final Phase. 2. Final Phase: The remaining Work shall be substantially complete and ready for occupancy at time of Substantial Completion for the entire Work. B. Before commencing Work of each phase, submit an updated copy of Contractor's construction schedule showing the sequencing and temporary move -out and -in dates of Owner's personnel for all phases of the Work. 1.5 ACCESS TO SITE A. General: Contractor shall have limited use of Project site for construction operations as indicated by requirements of this Section. B. Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to work in areas indicated on plans. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated. 1. Driveways, Walkways and Entrances: Keep driveways, bus parking spaces, passenger and freight loading areas, and entrances serving premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, Passengers and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials. a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances by construction operations. b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on -site. C. Condition of Existing Building: Maintain portions of existing building affected by construction operations in a weathertight condition throughout construction period. Repair any damage caused by construction operations. 1.6 COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy site and existing building during entire construction period. Owner will reposition employees as feasible to his operation in order to assist with the timely progress of the construction schedule for all areas under construction. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner's day-to-day operations. Maintain existing exits. 1. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways, lobby or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from Owner. 2. Notify Architect not less than 72 hours in advance of activities that will affect Owner's operations. SUMMARY 011000 - 2 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. Dec-2010 B. Owner Limited Occupancy of Completed Areas of Construction: Owner reserves the right to occupy and to place and install equipment in near -completed portions of the Work, prior to full Substantial Completion of the Work, provided such occupancy does not interfere with completion of the Work. Such placement of equipment and limited occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work. 1.7 WORK RESTRICTIONS A. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations. Comply with limitations on use of adjacent public streets, site and existing facility. B. On -Site Work Hours: Limit work in the existing building to business hours of 8-5, Monday through Friday, unless otherwise arranged with Owner. C. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after providing temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: I . Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with utility interruptions. D. Noise, Vibration, and Odors: Coordinate operations that may result in high levels of noise and vibration, odors, or other disruption to Owner occupancy with Owner. I . Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed disruptive operations. 2. Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with disruptive operations. 1.8 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS A. Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work of all Sections in the Specifications. B. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are described in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on Drawings to identify materials and products: I. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic teens used in the individual Specifications Sections. 2. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 011000 ` SUMMARY 0I 1000 - 3 v§ (� COMcheck Software Version 3.8.0 Interior Lighting Compliance C Certificate 2006 IECC Section 1: Project Information Project Type: Addition Project Title Constriction She: Owner/Agent: Designer/Contractor: Mark Hathaway BSA Engineering I TX Section 2: Interior Lighting and Power Calculation A I B C D Area Category Floor Area Allowed Allowed Watts (f12) Watts / ft2 (B x C) Bus Terminal (Transportation) ; 5146 1 5146 j Total Allowed Watts 5146 Section 3: Interior Lighting Fixture Schedule I A i B C D E Fixture ID: Description / Lamp / Wattage Per Lamp / Ballast Lamps/ 0 of Fixture (C X D) j Fixture Fixtures Watt. .�:.w,=y,,:J ;trxl . a y. , ..a p... �+.;s• :. �,;� . � r aEri'a''�I� }E' ttN9nty�,•' g} !u +tl:.i !1 Uii! Ifg9 •i:.`'I ��-�" Fit;! Ytk� `f ' IITtIIIE{ t�! t l�pl� i Ziffi fp}Ifl�dllg,N)` � i � tnger, n'ti'-H iei.tli!': i -j �' �h1Fp51-����¢�$_�Mt:���r�y'�•5.j.�"i-f�i_L-y�_::��NSyiNByflN=Ili.b:{l��a,�9J �.. �IE,I• l! ii,i,�,f:@=:�:�:,B-s�i ftir4JiF�Tq+111 Yf F� r.,,.,�.�.a,=ul,.=.,.,.,r.:..»l}..R!_.I_1.t...,..:-. ..}.,� t�r.=:, Lec?e_=�:aNNNeNUNN.N. ;Ip Linear Fluorescent 1: A & Al: 2x4 RECESSED LENSDED FIXTURE 148' T8 32W 1 ;�:3;1:�::isp-:::_-�-_ 2 s�.:j- <:�f41hrs"ss4 24 58 1392 Electronic Linear Fluorescent 2: B 3 81: 2X4 RECESSED INDIRECT / 48' T8 32W / Electronic 3 20 85 1700 Compact Fluorescent 1: D: 6' DOWNLIGHT / Triple 4-pin 42W / Electronic 1 10 48 480 Linear Fluorescent 3: CS Cl: 2X4 RECESSED LENSED / 48' T8 32W I Electronic 2 10 60 800 Linear Fluorescent 4: F: PENDANT FIXTURE / 48' T8 32W I Electronic 3 9 95 855 Total Proposed Watts = 5027 Section 4: Requirements Checklist Lighting Wattage: L] 1. Total proposed watts must be lass than or equal to total allowed watts. Allowed Watts Proposed Watts Complies 5146 5027 YES Controls, Switching, and Wiring: ' 02. Independent controls for each space (swltchloocuparwy sensor). I ( Exceptions: I� 0 Areas designated as security or emergency areas that must be continuously illuminated. L] Lighting in stairways or corridors that are elements of the means of eg Illness. L] 3. Master switch at entry to hotel/motel guest morn. 0 4. Individual dwelling units separately metered. [ 5. Each space required to have a manual control also allows for reducing theconnected lighting load by at least 50 percent by either controlling all luminaires, dual switching of alternate rows of luminaires, alternate luminaires, or alternate lamps, switching the middle lamp luminaires independently of other lamps, or switching each luminalre or each lamp. Project Title: Report date: 11/03/10 Data filename: F:\BSA Consulting Engineers, PLLC\2010 Jobs\10-015 Cltlbus Transit Stafion\CITIBUS.cck Page 1 of 6 [ . I Exceptions: 0 Only one luminaire in space. An occupant -sensing device controls the area. The area is a corridor, storeroom, reshoom, public lobby or sleeping unit. 0 Areas that use less than 0.6 Wetts/sq.fl. 0 6. Automatic lighting shutoff control In buildings larger than 5,000 sq_fL Exceptions: Sleeping units, patient care areas; and spaces where automatic shutoff would endanger safety or security. 7. Photooelllestronomical time switch on exterior lights. i Exceptions: I 0 Lighting intended for 24 hour use. Lj i 8. Tandem wired one -lamp and three -lamp ballasted luminaires (No single -lamp ballasts). Exceptions: 0 Electronic high -frequency ballasts; Luminaires on emergency circuits orjwith no available pair. Section 5: Compliance Statement Compliance Statement: The proposed lighting design represented In this documeInt is consistent with the building plans, specifications and other calculations submitted with this permit application. The proposed lighting system has been designed to meet the 2006 IECC requirements In COMcheck Version 3.8.0 and to comply with the mandatory requirements In the Requirements Checidist. 4,04 Name -Title jT— Signature Date Project Title: -- Report date: 11/03/10 Data Alename: F:1BSA Consulting Engineers, PLLCX2010 Jobs110-015 Citibus Trin3i StagonlCITIBUS.c ck Page 2 of 6 �� COMcheck Software Version 3.8.0 Mechanical Compliance Certificate 2006 IECC Section 1: Project Information Project Type: Addition Project Title : Construction Site: Owner/Agent: ! Designer/Contractor. Mark Hathaway BSA Engineering TX Section 2: General Information Building Location (for weather data): Lubbock, Texas C41mate Zone: 3b Section 3: Mechanical Systems List QuanUty S"m Typo 4f, Dsscrbtlon 1 HVAC System 1: Heating: Heating equipment (Central Furnace), Gas, Capacity 150 kBtu/h / Cooling: Cooling equipment (Rooftop Package Unit), Capacity 72 kBbdh, Efficiency: 12.00 EER, Air -Coded Condenser / Single Zone 1 HVAC System 2: Heating: Heating equipment (Central Furnace), Gas, Capacity 115 kBtulh / Cooling: Cooling equipment (Rooftop Package Unit), Capacity 36 kBtu/h, Efficiency: 13 00 SEER, Ain -Cooled Condenser / Single Zone 1 HVAC System 3: Heating: Heating equipment (Central Furnace), Gas,ICapadty 150 kBtwb / Cooling: Cooling equipment (Rooftop Package Unit), Capacity 48 kBtu/h, Efficiency: 1 Z. 80 SEER, A4r-Cooled Condenser / Single Zone 1 Water Heater 1: Electric Storage Water Hester, Capacity: 15 gallons Section 4: Requirements Checklist T . Requirements Specific To: HVAC System 1 O 1. Equipment minimum efficiency: Rooftop Package Unit: 10.1 EER 2. Newly purchased heating equipment meets the heating efficiency requirements 0 3. Coding system provides a means to relieve excess outdoor air during economizer operation. 4. Integrated air economizer required [J i Requirements Specific To: HVAC System 2: 1. Equipment minimum eificlency: Rooftop Package Unit: 9.7 SEER fCj 2. Newly purchased hearing equipment meets the heating efficiency requirements Requirements Specific To: HVAC System 3 : q p� Y i 77 0 1. Equipment minimum efficiency: Rooftop Package Unit: 9.7 SEER 0 2. Newly purchased heating equipment meets the heating efficiency require i nts C. Requirements Specific To: Water Heater 1 1. No effic4ency requirements for water heater with storage capacity less thin 20 gallons. 0 2. Hot water system sized per manufacturers sizing guide f 3. First 8 ft of cutlet piping is Insulated 0 4. Hot water storage temperature adjustable down to 120OF or lower i Cj 5- Heat traps provided on inlet and outlet of storage tanks Project Title; Report date: 11l03l10 Data filename: F:1BSA Consulting Engineers, PLLM010 Jobs110-015 Cttibus TrBnsk StadonlCITIBUS.cdk Page 3 of 6 c�� i Generic Requirements: Must be met by all systems to which the requirement Is applicable: 0 1. Load calculations per ASHRAE Fundamentals 0 2. Plant equipment and system capacity no greater than needed to meet loads ❑ Exception: Standby equipment automatically off when primary system is operating ❑ Exception: Multiple units controlled to sequence operation as a function of load (] 3. Minimum one temperature control device per system I Q 4. Minimum one humidity control device per installed humidification/dehumidification system Q 5. Automatic Controls: Setback to 55'F (heat) and 85°F (cool); 7-day clock, 2-hour occupant override, 10-hour backup ! Q Exception: Continuously operating zones i ❑ Exception: 2 kW demand or less, submit calculations ❑ 6. Outskfe-alr source for ventilation; system capable of reducing OSA to required minimum 0 7. R-5 supply and return air duct insulation in unconditioned spaces i R-8 supply and return air duct Insulation outside the building R-8 Insulation between ducts and the building exterior When ducts are partlof a building assembly ❑ Exception: Ducts located within equipment i ❑ Exception: Ducts with Interior and exterior temperature difference not exceeding 15°F. ❑ 8. Mechanical fasteners and sealants used to connect ducts and air distributi Ion equipment Ell9. Ducts sealed - longitudinal seams on rigid ducts; transverse seams on all ducts; UL 181A or 181E tapes and mastics I ❑ 10.Operation and maintenance manual provided to building owner ❑ 11. Piping, insulated to 1/2 in. If nominal diameter of pipe is <1.5 in.; i Larger pipe Insulated to 1 in. thickness i Q 12.Lavatory faucet outlet temperatures in public restrooms limited to 110°F (43°C) ❑ 13.Thermostatic controls have ST deadband ❑ Exception: Thermostats requiring manual changeover between heatingland cooling ❑ Exception: Special occupancy or special applications where wide temperature ranges are not acceptable and are approved by the authority having jurisdiction. ❑ 14. Balancing devices provided in accordance with IMC (2006) 603.17 I Q 15. Motorized, automatic shutoff dampers required on exhaust and outdoor eir!supply openings ❑ Exception: Gravity dampers acceptable in buildings <3 stories I ❑ Exception: Gravity dampers acceptable In systems with outside or exhaust air flow rates less than 300 cfm where dampers are interlocked with fan ❑ 16. Exhaust air heat recovery included for systems 5.000 cfm or greater with more than 70% outside air fraction or specifically exempted Q Exception: Systems serving spaces that are not cooled and heated to <60°F. I Q Exception: Commercial kitchen hoods (grease) classified as Type 1 by FPA 96. ❑ Exception: Systems exhausting toxic, flammable, paint, or corrosive fumes or dust. ❑ Exceptlon: Where the largest exhaust source is less than 75°,6 of the design outdoor airflow. ❑ Exception: Systems requiring dehumidification fhat employ energy re�+ery in series with the cooling colt. i Section 5: Compliance Statement Compliance Statement. The proposed mechanical design represented in this document is consistent with the building plans, specifications and other celculations submitted with this permit application. The proposed me"nical systems have been designed to meet the 2006 tECC requirements in COMchedr Version 3.8.0 and to comply with the mandatory requirements in the Requirements Checklist. 3f f S�hlutltr — jles-yhrt- Name - Title / T" Date !!/7/2 oio Project Title: Report date: 11103/10 Data filename: F:1BSA Consulting Engineers, PLLC12010 Jobs110-015 Citibus TreruH Station%CITiBUS.cck Page 4 of 6 COMcheck Software Version 3.8.0 Mechanical Requihements Description 2006 IECC The following list provides more detailed descriptions of the Certificate. requirements in Section 4 of the Mechanical Compliance Requirements Specific To: HVAC System 1 1- The specified heating and/or cooling equipment is covered by the ASHRAEI90.1 Code and must meet the following minimum efficiency: Rooftop Package Unit: 10.1 EER 2. The specified heating equipment Is covered by Federal minimum efficiency iaquirements_ New equipment of this type can be assumed to r meet or exceed ASHRAE 90.1 Code requirements for equipment efticiency� 3. Cooling system provides a means to relieve excess outdoor air during economizer operation to prevent overpressurizing the building. 4. An integrated air economizer Is required for individual cooling systems over154 kBttr/h in the selected project location and allows simultaneous operation of outdoor -air and mechanical cooling.. i Requirements SpecHic To: HVAC System 2: 1. The specified healing and/or tooting equipment Is covered by the ASHRAE i90.1 Code and must meet the following minimum efficiency: Rooftop Package Unit: 9.7 SEER 2. The specified heating equipment Is covered by Federal minimum efficiency jequimments. New equipment of this type can be assumed to meet or exceed ASHRAE 90.1 Code requirements for equipment efficiency, Requirements Specific To: HVAC System 3: 1. The specified heating and/or cooling equipment is covered by the ASHRAE IP0.1 Code and must meet the following minimum effclency. Rooftop Package Unit: 9.7 SEER II 2. The specified heating equipment is covered by Federal minimum efficiency requlrements. New equipment of this type can be assumed to meet or exceed ASHRAE 90.1 Code requirements for equipment of lclency' ^: Requirements Specific To: Water Heater 1 : I I 1. Service water heating equipment used solely for heeling potable water, poo' heaters, and hot water storage tanks must meet the c ' following miniumum effency: No efficiency requirements for water heater with storage capacity less than 20 gallons. 2. Service water heating system design bads for the purpose of sizing systems and equipment must be determined in accordance with manufacturers' pubAshed sI7Jng guidelines, j 3. Insulation must be provided for the first 8 ft of outlet piping for a constant ter6persture nonrecircutating storage system and for the Inlet pipe between the storage tank and a heat trap In a storage system. 4. Temperature controls must be provided that allow for storage temperature ajustment from 120'F or lower to a maximum temperature compatible with the intended use except when the manufacturers Installation Instructions specify a higher minimum thermostat setting [ to minimize condensation and resulting corrosion. Documentation of the installation Instructions must be provided to be exempted from this requirement. 5. Heat traps must be provided on inlet and outlet vertical pipe risers serving s"ge water heaters and storage tanks not having integral �. heat traps and serving a nonredreulating system. Heat traps must be Installed as dose as practical to the storage tank. Acceptable heat traps are either a) a device specifically designed for the purpose or b) an arrangement of tubing that forms a loop of 360'F, or c) piping that from the point of connection to the water heater (inlet or outlet) Includes a length of piping directed downwards before connection to the vertical piping of the supply water or hot water distri system. Generic Requirements: Must be met by all systems to whibh the requirement is applicable: 1. Design heating and cooling bads for the building must be determined using procedures In the ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals or L_ an approved equivalent calculation procedure. 2. All equipment end systems must be sized to be no greater then needed to meet calculated loads. A single piece of equipment providing both heating and tooting must satisfy this provision for one function with thi capacity for the other function as smallas possible, wlthin available equipment options. - Exception: The equipment and/or system capacity may be greater then Calculated bads for -standby purposes. Standby equipment must be automatically controlled to be off when the primary equipment and/or system is operating. Exception: Multiple units of the same equipment type whose combined clapaddes exceed the calculated bad are allowed if they are provided with controls to sequence operation of the units as the bad Increases or decreases. 3. Each heating or cooling system serving a single zone must have its own temperature control device. 4. Each humidification system must have Its own humidity control device. 5. The system or zone control must be a programmable thermostat or other aultomatic control meeting the following criteria: L � Project Title: Report date: 11/03/10 Data filename: F:\BSA Consulting Engineers, PLLC\2010 Jobs\10-015 Cidbus Transit StatlonlCITIBUS.cck Page 5 of 6 L ' I a) capable of setting back temperature to 55"F during heating and setting up to 85"F during cooling, b) capable of automatically setting back or shutting down systems during unoccupied hours using 7 different day schedules, c) have an accessible 2-hour occupant override, d) have a battery back-up capable of maintaining programmed settings for at least 10 hours without power. Exception: A setback or shutoff control is not required on thermostats that control systems serving areas that operate continuously. Exception: A setback or shutoff control is not required on systems with total energy demand of 2 kW (6,826 Btu/h) or less. 6. The system must supply outside ventilation air as required by Chapter 4 of the International Mechanical Code. If the ventilation system Is designed to supply outdoor -air quantities exceeding minimum required levels, the system must be capable of reducing outdoor -air flow to the minimum required levels. 7. Air ducts must be insulated to the following levels: a) Supply and return air ducts for conditioned air located in unconditioned spaces (spaces neither heated nor cooled) must be Insulated with a minimum of R-5. Unconditioned spaces include attics, crawl spaces,lunheated basements, and unheated garages. b) Supply and return air ducts and plenums rust be Insulated to a minimum of R-8 when located outside the building. c) When ducts are located within exterior components (e.g., floors or roofs),minimum R-8 insulation is required only between the duct and the building exterior. - Exception: Duct insulation is not required on ducts located within equipment. - Exception: Duct insulation is not required when the design temperature dl ference between the Interior and exterior of the duct or plenum does not exceed 15°F. j 8. Mechanical fasteners and seals, mastics, or gaskets must be used when connecting ducts to fans and other air distribution equipment, including multiple -zone terminal units. j 9. All joints, longitudinal and transverse seams, and connections in ductwork must be securely sealed using weldments; mechanical fasteners with seals, gaskets, or mastics; mesh and mastic seating systems; or tapes. Tapes and mastics must be listed and labeled in accordance with UL 181A and shall be marked'181A-P' for pressure sensitive tape, '181A-M' for mastic or'181A-H' for heat -sensitive tape. Tapes and mastics used to seal flexible air ducts and flexible air connectors shall comply with UL 181 B and shall be marked '181B-FX' for pressure-sensitive tape or '181B-W for mastic. Unlisted duct tape Is not permitted as a sealant on any! metal ducts. 10. Operation and maintenance documentation must be provided to the owner ftt includes at least the following information: a) equipment capacity (input and output) and required maintenance actions b) equipment operation and maintenance manuals i c) HVAC system control maintenance and calibration Information, Including1wiring diagrams, schematics, and control sequence descriptions; desired or field -determined sot points must be permanently recorded on control drawings, at control devices, or, for digital control systems, In programming comments d) complete narrative of crow each system is intended to operate. 11. Service hot water piping, where required, must be Insulated to 112 In. if pipe less than 1.5 in. nominal diameter. Larger pipe must be insulated to 1 in.. Pipe insulation will have a conductivity of less than 0.28 Btu.1n/(h-ft2-°F). 12. Temperature controlling means must be provided to limit the maximum temperature of water delivered from lavatory faucets in public facility restrooms to 110'F. 13_ Thermostats controlling both heating and cooling must be capable of nnainteining a 5`F deadband (a range of temperature where no heating or cooling is provided). - Exception: Deadband capability is not required if the thermostat does not have automatic changeover capability between healing and coding. - Exception: Special occupancy or special applications where wide temperature ranges are not acceptable and are approved by the authority having jurisdiction. 14. Balancing devices provided in accordance with IMC (2006) 603.17. 15. Outdoor air supply and exhaust systems must have motorized dampers that automatically shut when the systems or spaces served are not in use. Dampers must be capable of automatically shutting off during preoccupancy building warm-up, coot -down, and setback, except when ventilation reduces energy costs (e.g., night purge) or when ventilation must be supplied to meet code requirements. Both outdoor air supply and exhaust air dampers must have a maximum leakage rate of 3 cfm/ft2 at 1.0 In w.g. when tested in accordance with AMCA Standard 500. i Exception: Gravity (non{notorized) dampers are acceptable in buildings less than three stories in height. Exception- Systems with a design outside alr intake or exhaust capacity of 300 cfrn (140 Us) or less that are equipped with motor operated dampers that open and dose when the unit is energized and de -energized, respectively. 16. Individual fan systems with a design supply air capacity W 5000 cfm or greater and minimum outside air supply of 70% or greater of the supply air capacity must have an energy recovery system with at least a 561A effectiveness. if an air economizer Is also required, heat recovery must be bypassed or controlled to permit air economizer operatic. - Exception: Systems serving spaces that are not cooled and heated to <60-F_ - Exception: Commercial kitchen hoods (grease) classified as Type 1 by NIFPA 96. - Exception: Systems exhausting toxic, flammable, paint, or corrosive fum8s or dust - Exception: here the largest exhaust source Is less than 75% of the des Wign outdoor airflow. - Exception: Systems requiring dehumidificatlon that employ energy recovery in series with the cooling toll. i Project Title: Report date: 11/03/10 Data fliename: F:1BSA Consulting Engineers, PLLCX2010 Jobs\10-015 Citibus Transit Ste0onlCMBUS.cdc Page 6 of 6 r-; COMcheck Software Version 3.8.0 Envelope_ Compliance Certificate ell 2009 IECC Section 1: Project Information Project Type: Addition Project Title : Citibus Transfer Plaza Construction Site: Owner/Agent: Designer/Contractor: 801 Broadway ClUbus Marc Chapman Lubbock, TX 79401 City of Lubbock Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Lubbock, TX 79401 612 Broadway Lubbock, TX 79401 806-749-1153 mchapman@chapmanharvey.com Section 2: General Information Building Location (for weather data): Lubbock, Texas Climate Zone: 3b Vertical Glazing / Wall Area Pct.: 10% Activity Type(s) Floor Area Transportation 5146 Section 3: Requirements Checklist better tha h code. - Climate -Specific Requirements: - Component NamelDescription Gross Cavity Cont. Proposed Budget Area or R-Value R-Value U-Factor U-Factor(a) Perimeter Roof 1: Insulation Entirely Above Deck 2088 — 30.0 0.032 0.048 Exterior Wall 1: Concrete Block:8", Partially Grouted, Cells 2067 — 19.0 0.047 0.123 Insulated,Normal Density, Furring: None Window 1: Metal Frame with Thermal Break:Double Pane with 200 — — 0.260 0.650 Low-E, Clear, SHGC 0.05, PF 0.05 Door 1: Uninsulated Single -Layer Metal, Swinging 48 — --- 0.130 0.700 Floor 1: Slab-On-Grade:Unheated 2088 — — — — (a) Budget U-factors are used for software baseline calculations ONLY, and are not code requirements. �i Air Leakage, Component Certification, and Vapor Retarder Requirements: 0 1, All joints and penetrations are caulked, gasketed or covered with a moisture vapor -permeable wrapping material installed in accordance with the manufacturer's Installation Instructions. O 2. Windows, doors, and skylights certified as meeting leakage requirements. O 3. Component R-values & U-factors labeled as certified. O 4. No roof Insulation Is Installed on a suspended ceiling with removable ceiling panels. O 5. 'Other components have supporting documentation for proposed U-Factors. 6. Insulation installed according to manufacturer's instructions, in substantial contact with the surface being insulated, and In a manner that achieves the rated R-value without compressing the Insulation. O 7. Stair, elevator shaft vents, and other outdoor air intake and exhaust openings in the building envelope are equipped with motorized dampers. 0 8. Cargo doors and loading dock doors are weather sealed. Project Title: CiUbus Transfer Plaza Report date: i 1111/10 Data filename: S:1CHA - Current Projects10921 - ClUbus - Transfer PlazalDesign AdministratlontEnvelop Compliance 11.11.10.cck Page 1 of 2 ❑ 9. Recessed lighting fixtures installed in the building envelope are Type IC rated as meeting ASTM E283, are sealed with gasket or caulk. ❑ 10.Building entrance doors have a vestibule equipped with closing devices. Exceptions: Building entrances with revolving doors. ❑ Doors that open directly from a space less than 3000 sq. ft. in area. Section 4: Compliance Statement Compliance Statement: The proposed envelope design represented in this do ent is consistent with the building plans, specifications and other calculations submitted with this permit application. The propose envelop system has been designed to meet the 2009 IECC requirements in COMcheck Version 3.8.0 and to comply with the man tory requir ents in the Requirements Checklist. Project Title: Cltlbus Transfer Plaza Report date: 11/11/10 Data filename: SACHA - Current Projects%0921- Citibus - Transfer Plaza\Design Administration\Envelop Compliance 11.11.10.cck Page 2 of 2 t. Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Dec-2010 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. a'. SECTION 012100 - ALLOWANCES PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing allowances. B. Types of allowances include the following: l . Contingency allowances. 2. Exterior Signage Allowance C. Related Requirements: l . Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" for procedures governing the use of allowances for testing and inspecting. 1.2 SELECTION AND PURCHASE A. At the earliest practical date after award of the Contract, advise Architect of the date when final selection and purchase of each product or system described by an allowance must be completed to avoid delaying the Work. B. At Architect's request, obtain proposals for each allowance for use in making final selections. Include recommendations that are relevant to performing the Work. C. Purchase products and systems selected by Architect from the designated supplier. t "`l 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Submit proposals for purchase of products or systems included in allowances, in the form E specified for Change Orders. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Submit invoices or delivery slips to show actual quantities of materials delivered to the site for use in fulfillment of each allowance. B. Submit time sheets and other documentation to show labor time and cost for installation of allowance items that include installation as part of the allowance. C. Coordinate and process submittals for allowance items in same manner as for other portions of the Work. ALLOWANCES 012100 - 1 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. 1.5 COORDINATION Dec-2010 A. Coordinate allowance items with other portions of the Work. Fumish templates as required to coordinate installation. 1.6 CONTINGENCY ALLOWANCES A. Use the contingency allowance only as directed by Architect for Owner's purposes and only by Change Orders that indicate amounts to be charged to the allowance. B. Change Orders authorizing use of funds from the contingency allowance will include Contractor's related costs and reasonable overhead and profit margins. C. At Project closeout, credit unused amounts remaining in the contingency allowance to Owner by Change Order. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine products covered by an allowance promptly on delivery for damage or defects. Return damaged or defective products to manufacturer for replacement. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Coordinate materials and their installation for each allowance with related materials and installations to ensure that each allowance item is completely integrated and interfaced with related work. 3.3 SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCES A. Allowance No. l : Contingency Allowance: Include the sum of 5% Of Construction Cost. 1. If utilized, this allowance shall also include material cost receiving, handling, and installation and Contractor overhead and profit. B. Allowance No. 2: Exterior Signage allowance: Include the sum of $3,500.00 for the two internally illuminated surface mounted building identification signs shown on plan sheet A5. 2. This allowance includes all necessary materials and installation. 3. Specifics relative to sign construction type and design are to be coordinated with and approved by the Architect prior to sign construction. ALLOWANCES 012100 - 2 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Dec-2010 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. END OF SECTION 012100 ALLOWANCES_ Ol2]00 3 No Text Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. SECTION 012300 - ALTERNATES PART I - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates. 1.2 DEFINITIONS Dec-2010 A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the bidding requirements that may be added to or deducted from the base bid amount if Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents. 1. Alternates described in this Section are part of the Work only if enumerated in the Agreement. 2. The cost for each alternate is the net addition to the Contract Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum. 1.3 PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work of the alternate into Project. I. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of alternate. B. Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated revisions to alternates. C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract. D. Schedule: A schedule of alternates is included at the end of this Section. PART 2 - EXECUTION 2.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES A. Alternate No. 1: ADD new vinyl composition floor tile and base to rooms 104 and 105. ALTERNATES 012300 - 1 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. Dec-2010 1. Provide and replace VCT and 4" vinyl base trim in rooms 104 and 105. Reinstall all removed plumbing fixtures, toilet partitions and related elements. B. Alternate No. 2: ADD polished concrete and vinyl base in rooms 104 and 105. 1. Remove existing vinyl composition floor tile in rooms 104 and 105, repair and re -finish concrete slab in order to produce a smooth, evenly polished concrete surface with an even gloss finish. Install new 4" vinyl base trim in rooms 104 and 105. Reinstall all removed plumbing fixtures, toilet partitions and related elements. C. Alternate No. 3: ADD new lavatory units to rooms 104 and 105. 1. Provide and install new Bradley Express Lavatory System — MG-3, including all necessary plumbing, masonry and similar work related to this installation in rooms 104 and 105. D. Alternate No 4: OMIT one lower cabinet bay in Rm. 109. ADD under counter refrigerator and an icemaker. ADD small microwave to upper counter above sink. See 4/A4 on drawings. END OF SECTION 0123000 ALTERNATES 012300 - 2 I Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Dec-2010 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. SECTION 012500 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 016000 "Product Requirements" for requirements for submitting comparable product submittals for products by listed manufacturers. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced_ Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or Architect's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers. SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES O12500 - l Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS Dec-2010 - A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of need for change, but not later than 15 days prior to time required for preparation and review of related submittals. 1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied: a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. b. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. C. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. d. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. e. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. f. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. g. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved. B. Substitutions for Convenience: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 60 days after the Notice to Proceed. 1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied: a. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations. b. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents. C. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. d. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. e. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. f. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. g. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. h. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. i. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved. SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012500 - 2 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 012500 Dec-2010 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012500 - 3 No Text _z. V 1 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Dec-2010 `~ 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. SECTION 012600 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES PARTI- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications. 1.2 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AIA Document G710, "Architect's Supplemental Instructions." 1.3 PROPOSAL REQUESTS A. Owner -Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications. I . Work Change Proposal Requests issued by Architect are not instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change. 2. Within 10 days, when not otherwise specified, after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change. a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. C. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. d. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. e. Quotation Form: Use forms acceptable to Architect. B. Contractor -Initiated Work Change Proposals: If latent or changed conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may initiate a claim by submitting a request for a change to the Architect. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time. CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012600 - 1 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. Dec-2010 2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. 3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. 4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. 5. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. 6. Comply with requirements in Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified. 7. Work Change Proposal Request Form: Use form acceptable to Architect. 1.4 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES A. On Owner's approval, Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701. 1.5 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE A. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on AIA Document G714. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 012600 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012600 - 2 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. SECTION 012900 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY Dec-2010 A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 012600 "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling changes to the Contract. 1.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values with preparation of Contractor's construction schedule. 1. Coordinate line items in the schedule of values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following: a. Application for Payment forms with continuation sheets. b. Submittal schedule. C. Items required to be indicated as separate activities in Contractor's constriction schedule. 2. Submit the schedule of values to Architect at earliest possible date but no later than seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment. B. Format and Content: Use Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the schedule of values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section. I . Arrange schedule of values consistent with format of AIA Document G703. 2. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with Project Manual table of contents. 3. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum. 4. Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. 5. Provide separate line items in the schedule of values for initial cost of materials, for each _ subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work. 6. Each item in the schedule of values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item. PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 1 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. Dec-2010 a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work -in -place may be shown either as separate line items in the schedule of values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option. 7. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the schedule of values with or before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum. 1.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements. B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement. C. Application for Payment Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 as form for Applications for Payment. D. Transmittal: Submit three signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application. E. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's lien from entities lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the Contract and related to the Work covered by the payment. 1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after deduction for retainage, on each item. 2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or full waivers. 3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers. 4. Waiver Forms: Submit executed waivers of lien on forms acceptable to Owner. F. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following: 1. List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of values. 3. Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final). 4. Schedule of unit prices. PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 2 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. Dec-2010 5. Submittal schedule (preliminary if not final). 6. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 7. List of Contractor's principal consultants. 8. Copies of building permits. 9. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance of the Work. 10. Initial progress report. 11. Report of preconstruction conference. 12. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. G. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After Architect issues the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for temporary Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work. H. Final Payment Application: After completing Project closeout requirements, submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following: 1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 4. AIA Document G706-1994, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims." 5. AIA Document G706A-1994, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens." 6. Evidence that claims have been settled. 7. Final meter readings for utilities if applicable and similar data as of date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work. 8. Final liquidated damages settlement statement. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 012900 PAYMENT PROCEDURES O12900 - 3 7-D Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Dec-2010 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. SECTION 0 13 100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PART l - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following: l . Coordination drawings. 2. Requests for Information (RFIs). 3. Project meetings. B. Related Requirements: I. Section 017300 "Execution" for procedures for coordinating general installation and field -engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. RFI: Request from Owner, Architect, or Contractor seeking information required by or clarifications of the Contract Documents. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Include the following information in tabular form: I. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying products. 2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract. 1.4 GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. I. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. 2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. 3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 1 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. Dec-2010 -1 B. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative I t procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Preparation of the schedule of values. 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 5. Progress meetings. 6. Preinstallation conferences. 7. Project closeout activities. 8. Startup and adjustment of systems. 1.5 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs) A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified. 1. Architect will return RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by Contractor with no response. 2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors. B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or interpretation and the following: 1. Project name. 2. Date. 3. Name of Contractor. 4. Name of Architect. 5. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 6. RFI subject. 7. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 8. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 9. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 10. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's solution(s) impacts the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. 11. Contractor's signature. 12. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation. C. RFI Forms: AIA Document G716 or Software -generated form with substantially the same content as indicated above, acceptable to Architect. D. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond. Allow seven working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received by Architect after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 2 r Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Dec-2010 ~' 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. The following RFIs will be returned without action: a. Requests for approval of submittals. b. Requests for approval of substitutions. C. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents. d. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. e. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. f. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs. 2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt of additional information. 3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Section 012600 "Contract Modification Procedures." a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 10 days of receipt of the RFI response. E. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Submit log to Architect monthly. Include the following: 1. Project name. 2. Name and address of Contractor. 3. Name and address of Architect. 4. RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted. 5. RFI description. 6. Date the RFI was submitted. 7. Date Architect's response was received. F. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFl response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven days if Contractor disagrees with response. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate. 1.6 PROJECT MEETINGS A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site unless otherwise indicated. 1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times. 2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 3 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. Dec-2010= 3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within three days of the meeting. B. Preconstruction Conference: Architect will schedule and conduct a preconstruction conference before construction begins, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement. 1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. Participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following: a. Tentative construction schedule. b. Phasing. C. Critical work sequencing and long -lead items. d. Designation of key personnel and their duties. e. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. f. Procedures for RFIs. g. Procedures for testing and inspecting. h. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. i. Submittal procedures. j. Preparation of record documents. k. Use of the premises 1. Owner's schedule. M. Work restrictions. n. Working hours. o. Owner's occupancy requirements. p. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. q. Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns. r. Construction waste management. S. Parking availability. t. Office, work, and storage areas. U. Equipment and material deliveries. V. First aid. W. Security. X. Progress cleaning. 3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes. C. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at monthly intervals. 1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 4 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. Dec-2010 Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. l) Review schedule for next period. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following: 1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Status of submittals. 4) Deliveries. 5) Off -site fabrication. 6) Access. 7) Site utilization. 8) Temporary facilities and controls. 9) Progress cleaning. 10) Quality and work standards. 11) Status of correction of deficient items. 12) Field observations. 13) Status of RFIs. 14) Status of proposal requests. 15) Pending changes. 16) Status of Change Orders. 17) Pending claims and disputes. 18) Documentation of information for payment requests. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting the meeting will record and distribute the meeting minutes to Owner, Architect and each party present and to parties requiring information. a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 0 13 100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 5 r. � J ____--1 -�- �__ ��.._.. _.�J Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. w 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY Dec-2010 A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and maintenance manuals. 2. Section 017839 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record Specifications, and record Product Data. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require Architect's responsive action. B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Architect and additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections. 1.4 SUBMITTAL ADMIMSTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 1. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of (PDF) digital data drawing files of the Contract Drawings for use in preparing Shop Drawings and Project record drawings. a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data drawing files as they relate to the Contract Drawings. b. Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of Agreement form acceptable to the Architect. B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 1 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. Dec-2010 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals. l . Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. 2. Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 days for review of each resubmittal. D. Paper Submittals: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal item for identification. 1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 2. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches on label or beside title block to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. 3. Include the following information for processing and recording action taken: a. Project name. b. Date. C. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Name of subcontractor. f. Name of supplier. g. Name of manufacturer. h. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. ]) Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then. a sequential number (e.g., 061000.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., 061000.01.A). i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. k. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. 1. Other necessary identification. 4. Transmittal for Paper Submittals: Assemble each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will return without review submittals received from sources other than Contractor. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES _e 013300 - 2 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. Dec-2010 a. Transmittal Form for Paper Submittals: Provide locations on form for the following information: l) Project name. 2) Date. 3) Destination (To:). 4) Source (From:). 5) Name of Contractor. 6) Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. 7) Specification Section number and title. 8) Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 9) Indication of full or partial submittal. 10) Transmittal number, numbered consecutively. 11) Remarks. E. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Architect. F. Deviations: Identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals. G. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal. 1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp. H. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. I. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final action submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements: I. Action Submittals: Submit three paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two copies. 2. Informational Submittals: Submit two paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise indicated. Architect will not return copies. B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. J` SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 3 L Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. Dec-2010 1. if information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. 2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. C. Standard color charts. d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards. C. Testing by recognized testing agency. f. Application of testing agency labels and seals. g. Notation of coordination requirements. b. Availability and delivery time information. 4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable: a. Wiring diagrams showing factory -installed wiring. b. Printed performance curves. C. Operational range diagrams. d. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop Drawings. 5. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples. 6. Submit Product Data in the following format: a. Three paper copies of Product Data unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two copies. C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project -specific information, drawn accurately to scale. The use of printed reproductions of the Contract Drawings may contain inaccuracies and their use is cautioned in the preparation of Shop Drawings. D. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Identification of products. b. Schedules. C. Compliance with specified standards. d. Notation of coordination requirements. e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated. g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified. 2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-12 by 1 1 inches, but no larger than 30 by 42 inches. 3. Submit Shop Drawings in the following format: a. Two opaque (bond) copies of each submittal. Architect will return one copy(ies). E. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between r submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 4 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. Dec-2010 1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package. 2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following: a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name and name of manufacturer. C. Sample source. d. Number and title of applicable Specification Section. 3. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality - control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. a. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor. 4. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. a. Number of Samples: Submit one full set(s) of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected. 5. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection. a. Number of Samples: Submit two sets of Samples. Architect will retain one Sample set; remainder will be returned. 1) if variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations. F. Application for Payment and Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Section 012900 "Payment Procedures. G. Test and Inspection Reports and Schedule of Tests and Inspections Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements." H. Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section OI7700 "Closeout Procedures." I. Maintenance Data: Comply with requirements specified in Section 017823 "Operation and v Maintenance Data." -' SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 5 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Dec-2010 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. J. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact information of architects and owners, and other information specified. K. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified. L. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project. M. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required. N. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. O. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. P. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. Q. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency. R. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. S. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Comply with requirements specified in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements." T. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents. U. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. V. Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 6 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW Dec-2010 A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect. B. Project Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: See requirements in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures." C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. 3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action. B. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or revisions required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action. C. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. D. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned for resubmittal without review. E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded. END OF SECTION 013300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 7 No Text Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY Dec-2010 A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality - assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality -assurance and -control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section. Specific test and inspection requirements are not specified in this Section. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Quality -Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements. B. Quality -Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and .t completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract � P PY q enforcement activities performed by Architect. C. Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies that are constructed on -site or off -site. Mockups are constructed to verify selections made under Sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution; to review coordination, testing, or operation; to show interface between dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate compliance with specified installation tolerances. Mockups are not Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged. D. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements. E. Source Quality -Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, e.g., plant, mill, factory, or shop. F. Field Quality -Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on -site for installation of the Work and for completed Work. - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 1 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Dec-2010 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. G. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency. H. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub -subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. ] . Use of trade -specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or that requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s). Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.3 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS A. Referenced Standards: if compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding. B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority. 1.5 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other Sections. Include the following: 1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 2 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Dec-2010 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting. B. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of representative making report. 2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 3. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 4. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. 5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections. C. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product's that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. F. Manufacturer's Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of 1_._ QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 3 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. Dec-2010 manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. G. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the following: Contractor responsibilities include the following: a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction. b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. C. Build laboratory mockups at testing facility using personnel, products, and methods of construction indicated for the completed Work. d. When testing is complete, remove test specimens, assemblies, mockups, and laboratory mockups; do not reuse products on Project. 2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality -assurance service to Architect, with copy to Contractor. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. H. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work: 1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed. 3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 4. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction. a. Allow seven days for initial review and each re -review of each mockup. 5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. 6. Demolish and remove mockups when directed unless otherwise indicated. Laboratory Mockups: Comply with requirements of preconstruction testing and those specified in individual Specification Sections. 1.7 QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality -control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 4 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. "I 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. Dec-2010 2. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor. B. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality -control activities required to verify that the Work complies with requirements, whether specified or not. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality -control services. a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner. 2. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed. 3. Where quality -control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality -control service. 4. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility. 5. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct. C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's representative's services include examination of substrates and conditions, verification of materials, inspection of completed portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports. D. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality -control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents. E. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections. 1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in -situ tests are conducted. 3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements. 4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality -control service through Contractor. 5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work. 6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor. F. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality -control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following: QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 5 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. Dec-2010 r-- [ _', 1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. 6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency. 7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting. equipment at Project site. G. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality -assurance and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG A. Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following: 1. Date test or inspection was conducted. 2. Description of the Work tested or inspected. 3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect. 4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection. B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Architect's reference during normal working hours. 3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching in Section 0 173 00 "Execution." B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality -control service activities. C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality -control services. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 6 I' Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. END OF SECTION 014000 Dec-2010 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 7 ............__ U - - J . ........ .. Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. '^ 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. I_ SECTION 014200 - REFERENCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DEFINITIONS A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract. Dec-2010 B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract. C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed." D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated." E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work. F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations. G. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations. H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. I. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built. 1.2 INDUSTRY STANDARDS A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless otherwise indicated. REFERENCES 014200 - 1 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Dec-2010 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. 1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source. 1.3 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Thomson Gale's "Encyclopedia of Associations" or in Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional Associations of the U.S." B. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. AA Aluminum Association (The) AABC Associated Air Balance Council AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials AATCC American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists ABAA Air Barrier Association of America ABMA American Bearing Manufacturers Association ACl American Concrete Institute ACPA American Concrete Pipe Association AEIC Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The) AF&PA American Forest & Paper Association AGA American Gas Association ARAM Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers AHRI Air -Conditioning, Heating, andRefrigeration Institute, The Al Asphalt Institute AIA American Institute of Architects (The) A1SC American Institute of Steel Construction REFERENCES 014200 - 2 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. Dec-20I 0 AISI American Iron and Steel Institute AITC American Institute of Timber Construction ALSC American Lumber Standard Committee, Incorporated AMCA Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. ANSI American National Standards Institute AOSA Association of Official Seed Analysts, Inc. APA APA - The Engineered Wood Association APA Architectural Precast Association API American Petroleum Institute ARI Air -Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute ARMA Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers ASCE/SEI American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering Institute (See ASCE) ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air -Conditioning Engineers ASME ASME International (American Society of Mechanical Engineers International) ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering ASTM ASTM International (American Society for Testing and Materials International) ATIS Alliance for Telecommunications Industry Solutions AWCMA American Window Covering Manufacturers Association (Now WCMA) AWCI Association of the Wall and Ceiling Industry AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute AWPA American Wood Protection Association (Formerly: American Wood Preservers' Association) AWS American Welding Society REFERENCES 014200 - 3 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. Dec-2010 AWWA American Water Works Association BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association BIA Brick Industry Association (The) BICSI BICSI, Inc. BIFMA BIFMA International (Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's Association International) BISSC Baking Industry Sanitation Standards Committee CCC Carpet Cushion Council CDA Copper Development Association CEA Canadian Electricity Association CEA Consumer Electronics Association CFFA Chemical Fabrics & Film Association, Inc. CGA Compressed Gas Association CIMA Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association CISCA Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute CPA Composite Panel Association CRI Carpet and Rug Institute (The) CRRC Cool Roof Rating Council CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute CRRC Cool Roof Rating Council CSA Canadian Standards Association CSA CSA International (Formerly: IAS - International Approval Services) CSI Construction Specifications Institute (The) REFERENCES 014200 - 4 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Dec-2010 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. CSSB Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau CTI Cooling Technology Institute (Formerly: Cooling Tower Institute) DHI Door and Hardware Institute ECA Electrical Components Association EIA Electronic Industries Alliance EIMA EIFS Industry Members Association EJCDC Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc. ESD ESD Association (Electrostatic Discharge Association) ETL SEMCO Intertek ETL SEMCO (Formerly: ITS - Intertek Testing Service NA) FIBA Federation Internationale de Basketball (The International Basketball Federation) FIVB Federation Internationale de Volleyball (The International Volleyball Federation) FM Approvals FM Approvals LLC FM Global FM Global (Formerly: FMG - FM Global) FRSA Florida Roofing, Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors Association, Inc. FSA Fluid Sealing Association FSC Forest Stewardship Council GA Gypsum Association GANA Glass Association of North America GRI (Part of GSI) GS Green Seal GSI Geosynthetic Institute HI Hydronics Institute REFERENCES 014200 - 5 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. HI/GAMA Hydronics Institute/Gas Appliance Manufacturers Association Division of Air -Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute (AHRI) HMMA Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association (Part of NAAMM) HPVA Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association HPW H. P. White Laboratory, Inc. IAPSC International Association of Professional Security Consultants ICBO International Conference of Building Officials ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc. ICRI International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc. ]CPA Intemational Cast Polymer Association IEC International Electrotechnical Commission IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The) IES Illuminating Engineering Society of North America IEST Institute of Environmental Sciences and Technology IGMA Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance ILI Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc. ISA Instrumentation, Systems, and Automation Society, The ISO International Organization for Standardization ISSFA International Solid Surface Fabricators Association ITS Intertek Testing Service NA (Now ETL SEMCO) ITU International Telecommunication Union KCMA Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association LGSEA Light Gauge Steel Engineers Association LMA Laminating Materials Association (Now part of CPA) Dec-2010 REFERENCES 014200 - 6 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Dec-2010 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. LPI Lightning Protection Institute MBMA Metal Building Manufacturers Association MCA Metal Construction Association MFMA Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association, Inc. MFMA Metal Framing Manufacturers Association, Inc. MH Material Handling (Now MHIA) MHIA Material Handling Industry of America MIA Marble Institute of America MPI Master Painters Institute MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc. NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers NACE NACE International (National Association of Corrosion Engineers International) NADCA National Air Duct Cleaners Association NAGWS National Association for Girls and Women in Sport NAIMA North American Insulation Manufacturers Association NBGQA National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc. NCAA National Collegiate Athletic Association (The) NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association NCTA National Cable & Telecommunications Association NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau NECA National Electrical Contractors Association NeLMA Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association NETA InterNational Electrical Testing Association NFHS National Federation of State High School Associations REFERENCES 014200 - 7 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. NFPA NFPA (National Fire Protection Association) NFRC National Fenestration Rating Council NGA National Glass Association NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association NLGA National Lumber Grades Authority NOFMA NOFMA: The Wood Flooring Manufacturers Association (Formerly: National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association) NOMMA National Ornamental & Miscellaneous Metals Association NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association NRMCA National Ready Mixed Concrete Association NSF NSF International (National Sanitation Foundation International) NSSGA National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association NTMA National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association, Inc. (The) NWFA National Wood Flooring Association PCI Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute PDl Plumbing & Drainage Institute PGI PVC Geomembrane Institute PTI Post -Tensioning Institute RCSC Research Council on Structural Connections RFCI Resilient Floor Covering Institute RIS Redwood Inspection Service SAE SAE International SCAQMD South Coast Air Quality Management District SCTE Society of Cable Telecommunications Engineers SDI Steel Deck Institute Dec-2010 REFERENCES 014200 - 8 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. SDI Steel Door Institute SEFA Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association SEI/ASCE Structural Engineering Institute/American Society of Civil Engineers (See ASCE) SIA Security Industry Association SJI Steel Joist Institute SMA Screen Manufacturers Association SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association SMPTE Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers SPFA Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance (Formerly: SPUSPFD - The Society of the Plastics Industry, Inc.; Spray Polyurethane Foam Division) SP1B Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (The) SPRI Single Ply Roofing Industry SSINA Specialty Steel Industry of North America SSPC SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings STl Steel Tank Institute SWI Steel Window Institute SWPA Submersible Wastewater Pump Association TCA Tilt -Up Concrete Association TCNA Tile Council of North America, Inc. TEMA Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association TIA/EIA Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance TMS The Masonry Society TPI Truss Plate Institute, Inc. TPI Turfgrass Producers International Dec-20l 0 REFERENCES 014200 - 9 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. TRI Tile Roofing Institute UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc. UNI Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association USAV USA Volleyball USGBC U.S. Green Building Council USITT United States Institute for Theatre Technology, Inc. WASTEC Waste Equipment Technology Association WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau WCMA Window Covering Manufacturers Association WDMA Window & Door Manufacturers Association (Formerly: NWWDA - National Wood Window and Door Association) WI Woodwork Institute (Formerly: WIC - Woodwork Institute of California) WMMPA Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association WSRCA Western States Roofing Contractors Association WWPA Western Wood Products Association Dec-2010 - I C. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. D. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. E. Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and regulations in the following list. ADAAG Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities Available from U.S. Access Board CFR Code of Federal Regulations Available from Government Printing Office DOD Department of Defense Military Specifications and Standards Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point REFERENCES 014200 - 10 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. DSCC Defense Supply Center Columbus (See FS) FED -STD Federal Standard (See FS) FS Federal Specification Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point Available from Defense Standardization Program Available from General Services Administration Available from National Institute of Building Sciences FTMS Federal Test Method Standard (See FS) MIL (See MILSPEC) MIL -STD (See MILSPEC) MILSPEC Military Specification and Standards Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point UFAS Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards Available from Access Board Dec-2010 F. State Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. TAS Texas Accessibility Standards PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 014200 REFERENCES 014200 - 11 No Text 'i Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. r 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS E PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY Dec-2010 A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 011000 "Summary" for work restrictions and limitations on utility interruptions. 1.2 USE CHARGES A. General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Architect, occupants of Project, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction. B. Water and Sewer Service from Existing System: Water from Owner's existing water system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations. C. Electric Power Service from Existing System: Electric power from Owner's existing system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations. D. Contractor's use of Owner's Existing Systems shall not affect the Owner's ongoing use. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Site Plan: Show desired location for any temporary facilities, staging areas, and parking areas for construction personnel. To be coordinated with Owner during Pre -construction meeting. B. Erosion- and Sedimentation -Control Plan: Show compliance with requirements of EPA Construction General Permit or authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent. C. Fire -Safety Program: Show compliance with requirements of NFPA 241 and authorities having jurisdiction. Indicate Contractor personnel responsible for management of fire prevention program. l A QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 1 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Dec-2010 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. C. Accessible Temporary Egress: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage Installer of each permanent service to assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Chain -Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch, 0.148-inch- thick, galvanized -steel, chain -link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet high with galvanized -steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3'8-111ch- OD line posts and 2-7:`8-inch- OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch- OD top rails. 2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Common -Use Field Office: Determine with Owner's approval, an area of sufficient size to accommodate needs of Owner, Architect, and construction personnel office activities and to accommodate Project meetings specified in other Division 01 Sections. Keep area clean and orderly. B. Storage and Fabrication Areas: Provide secure area sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate materials and equipment for construction operations, as approved by Owner. If not approved, maintain these areas in an acceptable off -site location. 2.3 EQUIPMENT A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures. B. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented, self-contained, liquid -propane -gas or fuel -oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control. 1. Use of gasoline -burning space heaters, open -flame heaters, or salamander -type heating units is prohibited. 2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended location and application. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 2 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Dec-2010 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. 3. Permanent HVAC System: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system for temporary use during construction, provide filter with MERV of 8 at each return -air grille j in system and remove at end of construction. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work and Owner's ongoing use of the facility. Relocate and modify facilities as required by Owner and progress of the Work. l . Locate facilities to limit disturbance as specified in Section 011000 "Summary." B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. 3.2 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with the following: 1. Maintain support facilities until Architect schedules Substantial Completion inspection. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner. B. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. l . Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities. 2. Maintain access for fire -fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants. 3. Coordinate with Owners ongoing use of the site. C. Parking: Coordinate with Owner an acceptable location of parking areas for construction personnel. D. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water. 1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining properties or endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities. 2. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations. E. Project Signs: Provide Project signs in locations as approved by the Owner. Unauthorized signs are not permitted. 1. Identification Signs: Provide Project identification signs as as approved by Owner. 2. Temporary Signs: Provide other signs as required toalert public to dangerous areas and to inform public and individuals seeking entrance to Project, in locations approved by Owner. L71 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 3 -~I Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Dec-2010 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. a. Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors. 3. Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times. F. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste -collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Comply with progress cleaning requirements in Section 017300 "Execution." G. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and equipment" and not temporary facilities. 3.3 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures, utilities, and other improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those indicated to be removed or altered. Repair damage to existing facilities. B. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects. C. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Comply with requirements of 2003 EPA Construction General Permit or authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent and requirements specified in Section 311000 "Site Clearing." D. Stormwater Control: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by runoff of LIJ stormwater from heavy rains. 3 E. Tree and Plant Protection: Comply with requirements specified in Section 015639 "Temporary Tree and Plant Protection." L' F. Pest Control: Engage pest -control service to recommend practices to minimize attraction and ` harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform extermination and control ! procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial Completion. Perform control operations lawfully, using environmentally safe materials. 1 I G. Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin, furnish and install site enclosure fence in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering site except by entrance gates. 1 1 1. Extent of Fence: As required to enclose entire Project site or portion determined _ sufficient to accommodate construction operations. j 2. Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized personnel. Furnish one set of keys to Owner. r� , i Lam% TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 4 j(_ r• Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. ^, 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. Dec-2010 H. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install temporary enclosure around partially completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security. Lock entrances at end of each work day. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting. Temporary Egress: Maintain temporary egress from existing occupied facilities as indicated and as required by authorities having jurisdiction. K. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete, insulate temporary enclosures. L. Temporary Partitions: Provide floor -to -ceiling dustproof partitions to limit dust and dirt migration and to separate areas occupied by Owner. l . Construct dustproof partitions with two layers of 6-mil polyethylene sheet on each side. Cover floor with two layers of 6-mil polyethylene sheet, extending sheets 18 inches up the sidewalls. Overlap and tape full length of joints. Cover floor with fire -retardant - treated plywood. 2. Seal joints and perimeter. Equip partitions with gasketed dustproof doors and security locks where openings are required. 3. Protect air -handling equipment. 4. Provide walk -off mats at each entrance through temporary partition. M. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire -protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241; manage fire prevention program. 1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas. 2. Supervise welding operations, combustion -type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Develop and supervise an overall fire -prevention and -protection program for personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information. 3.4 MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL A. Contractor's Moisture Protection Plan: Avoid trapping water in finished work. Document visible signs of mold that may appear during construction. B. Exposed Construction Phase: Before installation of weather barriers, when materials are subject to wetting and exposure and to airborne mold spores, protect materials from water damage and keep porous and organic materials from coming into prolonged contact with concrete. J� TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 5 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. Dec-2010 C. Partially Enclosed Construction Phase: After installation of weather barriers but before full enclosure and conditioning of building, when installed materials are still subject to infiltration of moisture and ambient mold spores, protect as follows: 1. Do not load or install drywall or other porous materials or components, or items with high organic content, into partially enclosed building. 2. Keep interior spaces reasonably clean and protected from water damage. 3. Discard or replace water -damaged and wet material. 4. Discard, replace, or clean stored or installed material that begins to grow mold. 5. Perform work in a sequence that allows any wet materials adequate time to dry before enclosing the material in drywall or other interior finishes. D. Controlled Construction Phase of Construction: After completing and sealing of the building enclosure but prior to the full operation of permanent HVAC systems, maintain as follows: Control moisture and humidity inside building by maintaining effective dry -in conditions. Remove materials that can not be completely restored to their manufactured moisture level within 48 hours. 3.5 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses. B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage. C. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, when required by Owner or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 1. Temporary materials that contribute to temporary facilities are property of Contractor, Existing facilities used by the Contractor as the area for Temporary facilities remains property of the Owner. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs. 2. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures." END OF SECTION 015000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 6 r _r_.. Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Dec-2010 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. SECTION 015639 - TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION PART I - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes general protection and pruning of existing trees and plants that are affected by execution of the Work, whether temporary or permanent construction. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees, groups of trees, shrubs, or other vegetation to be protected during construction, and indicated on Drawings. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples: For each type of protection -zone fencing and protection -zone signage. C. Tree Pruning Schedule: Written schedule detailing scope and extent of pruning of trees to remain that interfere with or are affected by construction. D. Certification: From arborist, certifying that trees indicated to remain have been protected during construction according to recognized standards and that trees were promptly and properly treated and repaired when damaged. E. Maintenance Recommendations: From arborist, for care and protection of trees affected by construction during and after completing the Work. F. Existing Conditions: Documentation of existing trees and plantings indicated to remain, which establishes preconstruction conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by construction activities. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Arborist Qualifications: Certified Arborist as certified by ISA, licensed arborist in jurisdiction where Project is located, current member of ASCA, or registered Consulting Arborist as designated by ASCA. B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. The following practices are prohibited within protection zones: TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION 015639 - 1 i Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. Dec-2010 1. Storage of construction materials, debris, or excavated material. 2. Parking vehicles or equipment. 3. Foot traffic. 4. Erection of sheds or structures. 5. Impoundment of water. 6. Excavation or other digging unless otherwise indicated. 7. Attachment of signs to or wrapping materials around trees or plants unless otherwise indicated. B. Prohibit heat sources, flames, and ignition sources within or near protection zones and organic mulch. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Topsoil: Natural or cultivated top layer of the soil profile or manufactured topsoil; containing organic matter and sand, silt, and clay particles; friable, pervious, and black or a darker shade of brown, gray, or red than underlying subsoil; reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, gravel, and other objects more than 1 inch in diameter; and free of weeds, roots, and toxic and other nonsoil materials. B. Organic Mulch: Wood and bark chips, free from deleterious materials. C. Protection -Zone Fencing: Fencing fixed in position and meeting the following requirements. Previously used materials may be used when approved by Architect. 1. Chain -Link Protection -Zone Fencing: Galvanized -steel fencing fabricated from minimum 2-inch opening, 0.148-inch - diameter wire chain -link fabric; with pipe posts, minimum 2-1/8-inch- OD line posts, and 2-7.%8-inch- OD corner and pull posts; with tie wires, hog ring ties, and other accessories for a complete fence system. 2. Height of Fencing: 6 feet. 3. Gates: Swing access gates matching material and appearance of fencing, to allow for maintenance activities within protection zones. D. Protection -Zone Signage: Shop -fabricated, rigid plastic or metal sheet with attachment holes prepunched and reinforced; legibly printed with nonfading lettering. i 1 3 3[J PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION 1; A. Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Examine the site to verify that temporary erosion- and sedimentation -control measures are in place. Verify that flows of water redirected from construction areas or generated by construction activity do not enter or cross protection zones. 1 i - u TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION 015639 - 2 � _1 _ Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Dec-2010 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. B. Protect tree root systems from damage caused by runoff or spillage of noxious materials while . mixing, placing, or storing construction materials. Protect root systems from ponding, eroding, or excessive wetting caused by dewatering operations. C. Protection Zones: Mulch areas inside protection zones and other areas indicated with 4-inch average thickness of organic mulch. Do not place mulch within 6 inches of tree trunks. 3.2 PROTECTION ZONES A. Protection -Zone Fencing: Install protection -zone fencing along edges of protection zones in a manner that will prevent people from easily entering protected area except by entrance gates. I. Chain -Link Fencing: Install to comply with ASTM F 567 and with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Posts: Set or drive posts into ground one-third the total height of the fence without concrete footings. Where a post is located on existing paving or concrete to remain, provide appropriate means of post support acceptable to Architect. 3. Access Gates: Install as needed. B. Protection -Zone Signage: Install protection -zone signage in visibly prominent locations in a manner approved by Architect. C. Repair or replace trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or be relocated that are damaged by construction operations, in a manner approved by Architect. D. Maintain protection -zone fencing and signage in good condition as acceptable to Architect and remove when construction operations are complete and equipment has been removed from the site. 3.3 EXCAVATION A. General: Carefully excavate at edge of protection zones. B. Do not allow exposed roots to dry out before placing backfill. 3.4 CROWN PRUNING A. Prune branches that are affected by temporary and permanent construction. Prune branches as follows: I. Prune trees to remain to compensate for root loss caused by damaging or cutting root system. Provide subsequent maintenance during Contract period as recommended by arborist. 2. Pruning Standards: Prune trees according to ANSI A300 (Part 1). and the following: 3. Cut branches with sharp pruning instruments; do not break or chop. 4. Do not apply pruning paint to wounds. B. Chip removed branches and dispose of off -site. `i TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION 015639 - 3 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. 3.5 REGRADING Dec-2010 A. Minor Fill within Protection Zone: Where existing grade is 2 inches or less below elevation of finish grade, fill with topsoil. Place topsoil in a single uncompacted layer and hand grade to required finish elevations. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspections: Engage a qualified arborist to direct or perform plant -protection measures in the vicinity of trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain and to prepare inspection reports. 3.7 REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT A. General: Repair or replace trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or be relocated that are damaged by construction operations, in a manner approved by Architect. 1. Have arborist perform the branch pruning, and damage repair of trees and shrubs. 2. Treat damaged trunks, limbs, and roots according to arborist's written instructions. 3. Perform repairs within 24 hours. 4. Replace vegetation that cannot be repaired and restored to full -growth status, as determined by Architect. 3.8 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS A. Disposal: Remove excess excavated material, displaced plants, trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. END OF SECTION 015639 TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION 015639 - 4 _ Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. r 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. SECTION 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY Dec-2010 A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; and comparable products. B. Related Requirements: Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for requests for substitutions. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent. 1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents. 2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products. 3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product. B. Basis -of -Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis -of -design product," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the specification. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Comparable Product Requests: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product request. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable r - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 1 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. Dec-2010 product request within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Form of Approval: As specified in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures." b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a comparable product request within time allocated. B. Basis -of -Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Options: if Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. 1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Delivery and Handling: 1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. 2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses. 3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. 4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected. C. Storage: 1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 4. Protect foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. 5. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather -protection requirements for storage. 6. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS i_ u 016000 - 2 I Li,_ Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. t 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. 1.6 PRODUCT WARRANTIES Dec-2010 A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents. 1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner. t 2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide specific rights for Owner. B. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation. 1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation. 2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that match the characteristics of the existing materials previously used on this project. 3. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection. 4. Evert effort shall be made to match the aesthetic appearance of new construction materials to existing construction. B. Product Selection Procedures: 1. Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. 2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. 3. Products: a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. b. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both available manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 3 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. Dec-2010 product, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product. 4. Manufacturers: a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. b. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of available manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or a product by an unnamed manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed manufacturer's product. Basis -of -Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named manufacturers. C. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match Architect's sample", provide a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with requirements in Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for proposal of product. D. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items. 2.2 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS A. Conditions for Consideration: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect may return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS , E L 016000 - 4 ;�I f- Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Dec-2010 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. 4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. 5. Samples, if requested. PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 016000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 5 No Text Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. SECTION 017300 - EXECUTION PART l - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY Dec-2010 A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Construction layout. 2. Field engineering and surveying. 3. Installation of the Work. 4. Cutting and patching. 5. Coordination of Owner -installed products. 6. Progress cleaning. 7. Starting and adjusting. 8. Protection of installed construction. 9. Correction of the Work. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 011000 "Summary" for limits on use of Project site. 2. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project Record Documents, recording of Owner -accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels, and final cleaning. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of construction elements. I. Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify Architect of locations and details of cutting and await directions from Architect before proceeding. Shore, brace, and support structural element during cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load -carrying capacity or increase deflection 2. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. 3. Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or components in a manner that could change their load -carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. 4. EXECUTION Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner 017300 - 1 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. Dec-2010 r , r that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections. B. In -Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in -place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in -place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and functional performance of in -place materials. Consult with Architect prior to installing such materials. EXECUTION 2.2 EXAMINATION A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities, and other construction affecting the Work. 1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water -service piping; underground electrical services, and other utilities. 2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Project site. B. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations. 1. Examine roughing -in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation. 2. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed. 3. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding c . with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. EXECUTION 017300 - 2 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. -Y^ 2.3 PREPARATION F Dec-2010 A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to Owner that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction. B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings. D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control of Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination." 2.4 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect promptly. B. General: 1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels as needed to locate each element of Project. 2. Establish limits on use of Project site. 3. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain required dimensions. 4. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply. 5. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses. 6. Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable tolerances. C. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from two or more locations. 2.5 FIELD ENGINEERING A. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control points during construction operations. EXECUTION 017300 - 3 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. Dec-2010 B. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on Project site, referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having ;.} jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark. 1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents. 2.6 INSTALLATION A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated. I . Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated. C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion. D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy. E. Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction items on site and placement in permanent locations. F. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels. G. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements. H. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for load conditions. I. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect. 2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. 3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. EXECUTION 017300 - 4 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Dec-2010 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. (1 I. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, - arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous. 2.7 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay. 1. Cut in -place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition. B. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties. C. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut. D. Protection: Protect in -place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. E. Adjacent Occupied Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas as determined in Progress Meetings. F. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to minimize interruption to occupied areas. G. Cutting: Cut in -place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. 1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond -core drill. 4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Sections where required by cutting and patching operations. 5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting. 6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete. _ EXECUTION 017300 - 5 i__; Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. Dec-2010 H. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections, where applicable. 1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate physical integrity of installation. 2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize evidence of patching and refinishing. 3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed, extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in -place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance. 4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in -place ceilings as necessary to provide an even -plane surface of uniform appearance. 5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition and ensures thermal and moisture integrity of building enclosure. I. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces. 2.8 PROGRESS CLEANING A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully. 1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris. 2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F. 3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations. B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris. C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work. 1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom -clean or vacuum the entire work area, as appropriate. D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces. E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space. EXECUTION E 017300 - 6 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Dec-2010 ,t 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure t-. freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. G. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on -site. Do not wash waste materials down sewers or into waterways. H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion. 1. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects. J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. 2.9 STARTING AND ADJUSTING A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest. B. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. D. Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" 2.10 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity. END OF SECTION 017300 ' EXECUTION 017300 - 7 No Text Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Dec-2010 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART l - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Substantial Completion procedures. 2. Final completion procedures. 3. Warranties. 4. Final cleaning. 5. Repair of the Work. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements. 2. Section 017839 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record Specifications, and record Product Data. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For cleaning agents. B. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items "Punchlist": Initial submittal at Substantial Completion. C. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at Final Completion. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction. B. Certificate of Insurance: For continuing coverage. C. Field Report: For pest control inspection. 1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items specified in other Sections. 1-7 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES O17700 - l Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Dec-2010 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. 1.5 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why the Work is incomplete. B. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request. 1. Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. 2. Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 01 Sections, including project record documents, operation and maintenance manuals, final completion construction photographic documentation, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information. 3. Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Sections, including specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. 4. Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Sections, including tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location designated by Architect. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. a. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: Prepare and submit schedule of maintenance material submittal items, including name and quantity of each item and name and number of related Specification Section. Obtain Architect's signature for receipt of submittals. 5. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 6. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. C. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request. I . Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 2. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. 3. Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment. 4. Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion. 5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. Submit demonstration and training video recordings specified in Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training." 6. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 7. Participate with Owner in conducting inspection and walkthrough with local emergency responders. 8. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. 9. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 2 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. Dec-2010 10. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects. D. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion a minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. I. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion. 1.6 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion, complete the following: I. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Section 012900 "Payment Procedures." 2. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. Certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 3. Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 4. Submit pest -control final inspection report and warranty. 5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 1.7 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST) A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. I. Organize list of spaces in sequential order,. 2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 3 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Dec-2010 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. 3. Submit list of incomplete items in the following format: a. Three paper copies unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two copies. 1.8 SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES A. Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated, or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit Owner's rights under warranty. B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual. l . Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl -covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1 !2-by-1 1-inch paper. 2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic -covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer. 3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FINAL CLEANING A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste -removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations. B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project: CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 4 ~ Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Dec-2010 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances. b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits. C. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even -textured surface. d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. e. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard -surfaced finishes to a dirt -free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. f. Remove debris sand surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, 8^ plenums, shafts, trenches and similar spaces. g. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. --. h. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision -obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish .^y=' mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. i. Remove labels that are not permanent. j. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. k. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure. .- 1. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. in. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. n. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. 3.2 REPAIR OF THE WORK A. Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for determination of Substantial Completion. B. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored, provide replacements. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. Restore damaged construction and permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition. 1. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces, and other damaged transparent materials. ....� 2. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair or restoration. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 5 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. Dec-2010 - a. Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required labels and identification. 3. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede operation or reduce longevity. 4. Replace burned -out bulbs, bulbs noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures. END OF SECTION 017700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 6 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Dec-2010 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. SECTION 017823 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following: I . Operation and maintenance documentation directory. 2. Emergency manuals. 3. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment. 4. Product maintenance manuals. 5. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals. 1.2 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Manual Content: Operations and maintenance manual content is specified in individual Specification Sections to be reviewed at the time of Section submittals. Submit reviewed manual content formatted and organized as required by this Section. 1. Architect will comment on whether content of operations and maintenance submittals are acceptable. 2. Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to revisions and field conditions. B. Format: Submit operations and maintenance manuals in the following format: I. Three paper copies. Include a complete operation and maintenance directory. Enclose title pages and directories in clear plastic sleeves. Architect will return two copies. C. Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form prior to requesting inspection for Substantial Completion and at least 15 days before commencing demonstration and training. Architect will return copy with comments. 1. Correct or revise each manual to comply with Architect's comments. Submit copies of each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Architect's comments and prior to commencing demonstration and training. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 1 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Dec-2010 f 2.1 REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Directory: Prepare a single, comprehensive directory of emergency, operation, and maintenance data and materials, listing items and their location to facilitate ready access to desired information. B. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed: l . Title page. 2. Table of contents. 3. Manual contents. C. Title Page: Include the following information: l . Subject matter included in manual. 2. Name and address of Project. 3. Name and address of Owner. 4. Date of submittal. 5. Name and contact information for Contractor. 6. Name and contact information for Construction Manager. 7. Name and contact information for Architect. 8. Name and contact information for Commissioning Authority. 9. Names and contact information for major consultants to the Architect that designed the systems contained in the manuals. 10. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals. D. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual. E. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder. F. Manuals, Paper Copy: Submit manuals in the form of hard copy, bound and labeled volumes. Binders: Heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl -covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1i2-by-ll-inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets. a. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, subject matter of contents. Indicate volume number for multiple -volume sets. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 2 f t Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. r 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. Dec-2010 2. Dividers: Heavy -paper dividers with plastic -covered tabs for each section of the manual. Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification Section number and title of Project Manual. 3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic software storage media for computerized electronic equipment. 4. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text. a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and use as foldouts. b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and drawing locations. 2.2 OPERATION MANUALS A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and the following information: 1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems and equipment indicated on Contract Documents. 2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. 3. Operating standards. 4. Operating procedures. 5. Operating logs. 6. Wiring diagrams. 7. Control diagrams. 8. Piped system diagrams. 9. Precautions against improper use. 10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates. B. Descriptions: Include the following: 1. Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on Contract Documents. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. 4. Equipment function. 5. Operating characteristics. 6. Limiting conditions. 7. Performance curves. 8. Engineering data and tests. 9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts. C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Startup procedures. 2. Equipment or system break-in procedures. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 3 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. 3. Routine and normal operating instructions. 4. Regulation and control procedures. 5. Instructions on stopping. 6. Normal shutdown instructions. 7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. 8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 9. Special operating instructions and procedures. Dec-2010 �tri D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed. E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color -coding where required for identification. 2.3 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below. B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual. C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable: I . Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Color, pattern, and texture. 4. Material and chemical composition. 5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products. D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following: I. Inspection procedures. 2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. 3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. 4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance. 5. Repair instructions. E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services. F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 4 1� Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Dec-2010 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. 2.4 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include _ source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below. B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual. C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment: 1. Standard maintenance instructions and bulletins. 2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly and component removal, replacement, and assembly. 3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components. 4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts. D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential maintenance procedures: 1. Test and inspection instructions. t 2. Troubleshooting guide. 3. Precautions against improper maintenance. 4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. 5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions. 6. Demonstration and training video recording, if available. E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment. F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services. G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and telephone number of service agent. H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. t ' OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 5 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION Dec-2010 j i t-A A. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies indicated. B. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work. C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. D. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable. E. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation. Do not use original project record documents as part of operation and maintenance manuals. E F F. Comply with Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation. j r END OF SECTION 017823 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 6 I i Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. r 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. f SECTION 017823 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART I - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY Dec-2010 A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following: 1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory. 2. Emergency manuals. 3. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment. 4. Product maintenance manuals. 5. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals. 1.2 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Manual Content: Operations and maintenance manual content is specified in individual Specification Sections to be reviewed at the time of Section submittals. Submit reviewed manual content formatted and organized as required by this Section. 1. Architect will comment on whether content of operations and maintenance submittals are acceptable. 2. Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to revisions and field conditions. B. Format: Submit operations and maintenance manuals in the following format: l . Three paper copies. Include a complete operation and maintenance directory. Enclose title pages and directories in clear plastic sleeves. Architect will return two copies. C. Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form prior to requesting inspection for Substantial Completion and at least 15 days before commencing demonstration and training. Architect will return copy with comments. ] . Correct or revise each manual to comply with Architect's comments. Submit copies of each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Architect's comments and prior to commencing demonstration and training. r t: i... OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 1 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Dec-2010 Ul 2.1 REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Directory: Prepare a single, comprehensive directory of emergency, operation, and maintenance data and materials, listing items and their location to facilitate ready access to desired information. B. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed: 1. Title page. 2. Table of contents. 3. Manual contents. C. Title Page: Include the following information: l . Subject matter included in manual. 2. Name and address of Project. 3. Name and address of Owner. 4. Date of submittal. 5. Name and contact information for Contractor. 6. Name and contact information for Construction Manager_ 7. Name and contact information for Architect. 8. Name and contact information for Commissioning Authority. 9. Names and contact information for major consultants to the Architect that designed the systems contained in the manuals. 10. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals. D. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual. E. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder. F. Manuals, Paper Copy: Submit manuals in the form of hard copy, bound and labeled volumes. Binders: Heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl -covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-1 ]-inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets. a. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, subject matter of contents. Indicate volume number for multiple -volume sets. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 2 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. Dec-2010 2. Dividers: Heavy -paper dividers with plastic -covered tabs for each section of the manual. Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification Section number and title of Project Manual. 3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic software storage media for computerized electronic equipment. 4. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text. a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and use as foldouts. b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and drawing locations. 2.2 OPERATION MANUALS A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and the following information: 1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems and equipment indicated on Contract Documents. 2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. 3. Operating standards. 4. Operating procedures. 5. Operating logs. 6. Wiring diagrams. 7. Control diagrams. 8. Piped system diagrams. 9. Precautions against improper use. 10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates. B. Descriptions: Include the following: 1. Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on Contract Documents. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. 4. Equipment function. 5. Operating characteristics. 6. Limiting conditions. 7. Performance curves. 8. Engineering data and tests. 9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts. C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: l . Startup procedures. 2. Equipment or system break-in procedures. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 3 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. 3. Routine and normal operating instructions. 4. Regulation and control procedures. 5. Instructions on stopping. 6. Normal shutdown instructions. 7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. 8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 9. Special operating instructions and procedures. Dec-2010 L D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed. E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color -coding where required for identification. 2.3 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below. B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual. C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Color, pattern, and texture. 4. Material and chemical composition. 5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products. D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following I. Inspection procedures. 2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. 3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. 4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance. 5. Repair instructions. E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services. F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 4 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. 2.4 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUALS Dec-20I0 A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below. B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual. C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment: l . Standard maintenance instructions and bulletins. 2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly and component removal, replacement, and assembly. 3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components. 4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts. D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential maintenance procedures: l . Test and inspection instructions. 2. Troubleshooting guide. 3. Precautions against improper maintenance. 4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. 5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions. 6. Demonstration and training video recording, if available. E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment. F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services. G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and telephone number of service agent. H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 5 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION Dec-2010 A. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies indicated. B. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work. C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. D. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable. E. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation. Do not use original project record documents as part of operation and maintenance manuals. F. Comply with Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation. Fit I L_1 END OF SECTION 017823 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 6 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Dec-2010 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. SECTION 017839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART l - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents, including the following: I . Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications. 3. Record Product Data. B. Related Requirements: I. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements. 1.2 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following: l . Number of Copies: Submit one set(s) of marked -up record prints. B. Record Specifications: Submit one paper copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications. C. Record Product Data: Submit one paper copy of each submittal PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked -up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings, incorporating new and revised Drawings as modifications are issued. 1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide information for preparation of corresponding marked -up record prints. a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later. b. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. C. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. ' JE T PRO C RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 - 1 t L Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. Dec-2010 - 2. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Use personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked -up record prints. 3. Mark record sets with erasable, red -colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location. 4. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable. 5. Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on record prints. Delete, redraw, and add details and notations where applicable. 6. Refer instances of uncertainty to Architect for resolution. 7. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data files of the Contract Drawings for use in recording information. B. Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location. Record Prints: Organize record prints and newly prepared record Drawings into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification _, on cover sheets. 2. Identification: As follows: a. Project name. b. Date. C. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS." d. Name of Architect. e. Name of Contractor. 2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Note related Change Orders and record Drawings where applicable. 2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation. 3. Note related Change Orders and record Drawings where applicable. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 - 2 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. Dec-2010 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project record document purposes. Post changes and revisions to project record documents as they occur; do not wait until end of Project. B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours. END OF SECTION 017839 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 - 3 No Text December I, 2010 SECTION 02200 EARTH WORK PART] GENERAL 1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2. DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The extent of earthwork is shown on drawings. B. Preparation of subgrade for building slabs, walks, and pavements is included as part of this work. C. Backfilling of trenches within building lines is included as part of this work. D. Sand leveling fill under building slabs is included as part of this work. 1.3. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: Perform excavation work in compliance with applicable requirements of governing authorities having jurisdiction. B. Testing and Inspection Service 1. Owner will engage a soil testing and inspection service for quality control testing during earthwork operations. The testing laboratory shall comply with the requirements of ASTM D3740, Evaluation of Agencies Engaged in Testing and/or Inspection of Soil or Rock Used In Engineering Design and Construction. 1.4. SUBMITTALS A. Test Reports: Submit following reports directly to Architect from the testing services, with copies to Contractor and Engineer. 1. Test reports on existing or borrow material for each type of soil encountered. a. Atterberg Limits b. Linear Shrinkage C. Optimum moisture/maximum dry density curve 2. Field density test reports of subgrades and compacted fills. Reports shall indicate soil type or change of soil if any other is used. 3. Verification of each footing subgrade. 4. Report of actual unconfined compressive strength and/or results of bearing tests of each strata tested. 1.5. JOB CONDITIONS A. Site Information l . A subsurface soils investigation at the site has been made. Logs of borings and test data are available for Contractor's information and for his interpretation as to soil and water EARTH WORK 02200 - l December 1, 2010 conditions that may be encountered at the site. Data on indicated subsurface conditions are not intended as representations or warranties of accuracy or continuity between soil borings. It is expressly understood that the Owner will not be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn therefrom by the Contractor. Data are made available for the convenience of the Contractor. Additional test borings and other exploratory operations may be made by Contractor at no cost to Owner. B. Existing Utilities: Locate existing underground utilities in areas of work. If utilities are to remain in place, provide adequate means of protection during earthwork operations. 1. Should uncharted, or incorrectly charted, piping or other utilities be encountered during excavation, consult utility owner immediately for directions. Cooperate with Owner and utility companies in keeping respective services and facilities in operation. Repair damaged utilities to satisfaction of utility owner. 2. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied and used by Owner or others, except when permitted in writing by Architect and then only after acceptable temporary utility services have been provided. C. Use of Explosives: The use of explosives is not permitted. D. Protection of Persons and Property: Barricade open excavations occurring as part of this work and post with warning lights. 1. Operate warning lights as recommended by authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout and other hazards created by earthwork operations. PART PRODUCTS 2.1. SOIL MATERIALS A. Satisfactory soil materials are defined as those complying with ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups GW, GP, GM, GC, SC, CL, SM, SW and SP. B. Unsatisfactory soil materials are defined as those complying with ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups CH, ML, MH, OL, OH, and PT. C. Subbase Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, crushed slag, natural or crushed sand. D. Drainage Fill: Washed, evenly graded mixture of crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel with l 00% passing a 1 1 /2" sieve and not more than 5% passing a No. 4 sieve. E. Sand Leveling Fill: Clean, sound, durable, mineral fill material free of organic matter, with a plasticity index (PI) less than 8. F. Topsoil shall be fertile, natural soil of loamy character, free of clay lumps, stones and debris. G. Backfill and Fill Materials: Satisfactory soil materials free of clay, rock or gravel larger than 2" in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetable and other deleterious matter. Fill materials shall have a liquid limit between 4 and 30 and the plasticity index shall be between 4 and 12. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1. EXCAVATION EARTH WORK 02200 - 2 December 1, 2010 A. Excavation consists of removal and disposal of material encountered when establishing required finish grade elevations. B. Earth excavation includes removal and disposal of pavements and other obstructions visible on ground surface, underground structures and utilities indicated to be demolished and removed, material of any classification indicated in data on subsurface conditions, and other materials encountered that are not classified as rock excavation or unauthorized excavation. C. Excavation Classifications: The following classifications of excavation will be made when unanticipated rock excavation is encountered in work. Do not perform such work until material to be excavated has been cross -sectioned and classified by Architect. Such excavation will be paid on basis on contract conditions relative to changes in work. D. Unauthorized excavation consists of removal of materials beyond indicated subgrade elevations or dimensions without specific direction of Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by Architect, shall be at Contractor's expense. E. Under footings, foundation bases, or retaining walls, fill unauthorized excavation by extending indicated bottom elevation of footing or base to excavation bottom, without altering required top elevation. Lean concrete fill may be used to bring elevations to proper position, when acceptable to Architect. F. Elsewhere, backfill and compact unauthorized excavations as specified for authorized excavations of same classification, unless otherwise directed by Architect. G. Additional Excavation: When excavation has reached required subgrade elevations, notify Architect who will make an inspection of conditions. 1. If unsuitable bearing materials are encountered at required subgrade elevations, carry excavations deeper and replace excavated material as directed by Architect. 2. Removal of unsuitable material and its replacement as directed will be paid on basis of contract conditions relative to changes in work. H. Stability of Excavations 1. Slope sides of excavations to comply with local codes and ordinances having jurisdiction. Shore and brace where sloping is.not possible because of space restrictions or stability of material excavated. 2. Maintain sides and slopes of excavations in safe condition until completion of backfilling. Shoring and Bracing l . Provide materials for shoring and bracing, such as sheet piling, uprights, stringers and cross -braces, in good serviceable condition. 2. Establish requirements for trench shoring and bracing to comply with local codes and authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Maintain shoring and bracing in excavations regardless of time period excavations will be open. Carry down shoring and bracing as excavation progresses. J. Dewatering: Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from flowing into excavations 1 and from flooding project site and surrounding area. ] . Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Remove water to prevent softening of foundation bottoms, undercutting footings, and soil changes detrimental to stability of subgrades and foundations. Provide and maintain pumps, well points, sumps, suction and discharge lines, and other dewatering system components necessary to convey water away from excavations. EARTH WORK 02200 - 3 December 1, 2010 2. Convey water removed from excavations and rain water to collecting or run-off areas. Establish and maintain temporary drainage ditches and other diversions outside excavation limits for each structure. Do not use trench excavations as temporary drainage ditches. K. Material Storage: Stockpile satisfactory excavated materials where directed, until required for backfill or fill. Place, grade and shape stockpiles for proper drainage. 1. Locate and retain soil materials away from edge of excavations. 2. Dispose of excess soil material and waste materials as herein specified. L. Excavation for Structures 1. Conform to elevations and dimensions shown within a tolerance of plus or minus 0.10 foot, and extending a sufficient distance from footings and foundations to permit placing and removal of concrete formwork, installation of services, other construction, and for inspection. 2. In excavating for footings and foundations, take care not to disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before concrete reinforcement is placed. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work. M. Excavation for Trenches 1. Dig trenches to the uniform width required for particular item to be installed, sufficiently wide to provide ample working room. 2. Excavate trenches to depth indicated or required. Carry depth of trenches for piping to establish indicated flow lines and invert elevations. Beyond building perimeter, keep bottoms of trenches sufficiently below finish grade to avoid freeze -ups. 3. Where rock is encountered, carry excavation 6" below required elevation and backfill with a 6" layer of crushed stone or gravel prior to installation of pipe. 4. Grade bottoms of trenches as indicated, notching under pipe bells to provide solid bearing for entire body of pipe. 5. Backfill trenches with lean concrete where trench excavations pass within 18" of column or wall footings and which are carried below bottom of such footings, or which pass undef wall footings. Place concrete to level of bottom of adjacent footings. 6. Concrete is specified in Division 3. 7. Do not backfill trenches until tests and inspections have been made and backfilling authorized by Architect. Use care in backfilling to avoid damage or displacement of pipe systems. N. Cold Weather Protection: Protect excavation bottoms against freezing when atmospheric temperature is less than 35 degrees F. (1 degree C.) 3.2. COMPACTION A. General: Control soil compaction during construction providing minimum percentage of density (— specified for each area classification. LJ B. Percentage of Minimum Density Requirements: Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry density for soils which exhibit a well-defined moisture -density relationship determined in accordance with ASTM D 698 (Standard Proctor). 1. Structures: Compact top 12" of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 95% maximum dry density. 2. Building Slabs and Steps: Compact top 12" of subgrade and each layer ofbackfill or fill material at 95% maximum dry density. 3. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Compact top 6" of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill r- L: EARTH WORK 02200 - 4 December 1, 2010 material at 90% maximum dry density. Walkways: Compact top 6" of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill materials at 95% maximum dry density. Pavements: Compact top 6" of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 95% maximum dry density. C. Moisture Control: Where subgrade or layer of soil material must be moisture conditioned before compaction, uniformly apply water to surface of subgrade, or layer of soil material, to prevent free water appearing on surface during or subsequent to compaction operations. 1. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, soil material that is too wet to permit compaction to specified density. 2. Soil material that has been removed because it is too wet to permit compaction may be stockpiled or spread and allowed to dry. Assist drying by discing, harrowing or pulverizing until moisture content is reduced to a satisfactory value. 3.3. BACKFILL AND FILL A. General: Place acceptable soil material in layers to required subgrade elevations, for each area classification listed below. l . In excavations, use satisfactory excavated or borrow material. 2. Under grassed areas, use satisfactory excavated or borrow material. 3. Under walks and pavements, use subbase materials, or satisfactory excavated or borrow material, or combination of both. 4. Under steps, use subbase material. 5. Under building slabs, use satisfactory borrow material plus sand leveling Till. B. Backfill excavations as promptly as work permits, but not until completion of the following: 1. Acceptance of construction below finish grade including, where applicable, dampproofing, waterproofing, and perimeter insulation. 2. Inspection, testing, approval, and recording locations of underground utilities. 3. Removal of concrete formwork. 4. Removal of trash and debris. 5. Removal of shoring and bracing, and backfilling of voids with satisfactory materials. Cut off temporary sheet piling driven below bottom of structures and remove in manner to prevent settlement of the structure or utilities, or leave in place if required. 6. Permanent or temporary horizontal bracing is in place on horizontally supported walls. C. Ground Surface Preparation 1. Remove vegetation, debris, unsatisfactory soil materials, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface prior to placement of fills. Plow, strip, or break-up so that fill material will bond with existing surface. 2. When existing ground surface has a density less than that specified under "Compaction" for particular area classification, break up ground surface, pulverize, moisture -condition to optimum moisture content, and compact to required depth and percentage of maximum density. D. Placement and Compaction 1. Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 8" in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4" in loose depth for material compacted by hand -operated tampers. 2. Before compaction, moisten or aerate each layer as necessary to provide optimum moisture content. Compact each layer to required percentage of maximum dry density or relative dry density for each area classification. Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice. EARTH WORK 02200 - 5 3.4. GRADING 3.5 3.6 December 1, 2010 Place backfill and fill materials evenly adjacent to structures, to required elevations. Take care to prevent wedging action of backfill against structures by carrying material uniformly around structure to approximately same elevation in each lift. Sand leveling fill should be damp and compacted prior to placing fresh concrete. A. General: Uniformly grade areas within limits of grading under this section, including adjacent transition areas. Smooth finished surface within specified tolerances, compact with uniform levels or slopes between points where elevations are shown, or between such points and existing grades. B. Grading Outside Building Lines: Grade areas adjacent to building lines to drain away from structures and to prevent ponding. C. Finish surfaces free from irregular surface changes, and as follows: 1. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Finish areas to receive topsoil to within not more than 0.10 foot above or below required subgrade elevations. 2. Walks: Shape surface of areas under walks to line, grade and cross-section, with finish surface not more than 0.10 foot above or below required subgrade elevation. 3. Pavements: Shape surface of areas under pavement to line, grade and cross-section, with finish surface not more than 1/2" above or below required subgrade elevation. D. Grading Surface of Fill Under Building Slabs: Grade smooth and even, free of voids, compacted as specified, and to required elevation. Provide final grades within a tolerance of 1 /2" when tested with a 10 foot straightedge. E. Compaction: After grading, compact subgrade surfaces to the depth and percentage of maximum density for each area classification. BUILDING SLAB DRAINAGE COURSE A. General: Drainage course consists of placement of drainage fill material, in layers of indicated thickness, over subgrade surface to support concrete building slabs. B. Placing: Place drainage fill material on prepared subgrade in layers of uniform thickness, conforming to indicated cross-section and thickness. Maintain optimum moisture content for compacting material during placement operations. C. When a compacted drainage course is shown to be 6" thick or less, place material in a single layer. When shown to be more than 6" thick, place material in equal layers, except no single layer more than 6" or less than 3" in thickness when compacted. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Quality Control Testing During Construction 1. Allow testing service to inspect and approve subgrades and fill layers before further construction work is performed. 2. Perform field density tests in accordance with ASTM D 1556 (Sand Cone Method) or ASTM D 2167 (Rubber Balloon Method), or ASTM D 2922, (Nuclear Gage Method) as applicable. B. Footing Subgrade: For each strata of soil on which footings will be placed, conduct at least one test to verify required design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of each footing subgrade may be based on a Subgrade 1. Make at least one field density test of subgrade for every 2000 sq. ft. of paved area or EARTH WORK 02200 - 6 December 1, 2010 building slab, but in no case less than 3 tests. In each compacted fill layer, make one field density test for every 2000 sq. ft. of overlaying building slab or paved area, but in no case less than 3 tests. Subsequent layers shall be placed only after the previous compacted layer has been tested and approved by the testing laboratory and Architect/Engineer. C. Foundation Wall Backfill: Take at least 2 field density tests per lift, at locations and elevations as directed. D. If, in opinion of Architect, based on testing service reports and inspection, subgrade or fills which have been placed are below specified density, provide additional compaction and testing at no additional expense to the Owner. 3.7. MAINTENANCE A. Protection of Graded Areas 1. Protect newly graded areas from traffic and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris. 2. Repair and re-establish grades in settled, eroded, and rutted areas to specified tolerances. B. Reconditioning Compacted Areas: Where completed compacted areas are disturbed by subsequent construction operations or adverse weather, scarify surface, re-shapevisual comparison of each subgrade with related tested strata, when acceptable to the Architect. C. Paved Areas and Building Slab D. , and compact to required density prior to further construction. 3.8. DISPOSAL OF EXCESS AND WASTE MATERIALS A. Removal from Owner's Property I . Remove waste materials, including unacceptable excavated material, trash and debris, and dispose of it off Owner's property. 2. Remove excess excavated material, trash, debris and waste materials and dispose of it off Owner's property- B. Removal to Designated Areas on Owners' Property I. Transport acceptable excess excavated material to designated soil storage areas on Owner's property. Stockpile soil or spread as directed by Architect. 2. Transport waste material, including unacceptable excavated material, trash and debris to designated spoil areas on Owner's property and dispose of as directed. END OF SECTION 02200 This section prepared by Surendran Consulting, LLC. EARTH WORK YrO OF oao oa0000000c.a0000 oa C.V.SURENDRAN ar 0000aaoocouooe000000000 ooa 33870 1 � �1zZzz z~ ; December 10, 2010 02200 - 7 No Text L y Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. rr2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. r- SECTION 024119 - SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION PART I - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: I . Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure. 2. Salvage of existing items to be reused or delivered to Owner. Dec-2010 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off -site unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled. B. Remove and Salvage: Carefully detach from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, and deliver to Owner. C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare for reuse, and reinstall where indicated. D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be permanently removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled. 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.4 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Owner and their Clients will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted. B_ Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical. I . Before selective demolition in Final Phase, Owner will remove the following items: a. Security cameras, misc electronic equipment and related in area of work. C. Notify Architect of any discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition. SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 024119 - 1 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. Dec-2010 D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. 1. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on -site is not permitted. F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PEFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that utilities at point of work, have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition operations. B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required. C. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect. 3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage. SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 024119 - 2 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. Dec-2010 B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished. l . Owner will arrange to shut off indicated services/systems when requested by Contractor. 2. if services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building. 3. Disconnect, demolish, and remove plumbing, , equipment, and components indicated to be removed. a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material. b. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material. C. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment. d. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational. e. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris -removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, driveways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls." B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to the adjacent facilities to remain. C. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished. 3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and t SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 0241 l9 - 3 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. Dec-2010 chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain. 2. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. 3. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame -cutting operations. Maintain portable fire -suppression devices during any flame -cutting operations. 4. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 5. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. B. Reuse of Building Elements: Do not demolish building elements beyond what is indicated on Drawings without Architect's approval. C. Removed and Salvaged Items: 1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner. 5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. D. Removed and Reinstalled Items: I . Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers. 3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated. E. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete. 3.5 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on -site. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them. SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 024119 - 4 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Dec-2010 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. 3.6 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. END OF SECTION 024119 SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 024119 - 5 No Text Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. SECTION 024119 - SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure. 2. Salvage of existing items to be reused or delivered to Owner. Dec-2010 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off -site unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled. B. Remove and Salvage: Carefully detach from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, and deliver to Owner. C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare for reuse, and reinstall where indicated. D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be permanently removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled. 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.4 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Owner and their Clients will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted. B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical. 1. Before selective demolition in Final Phase, Owner will remove the following items: a. Security cameras, misc electronic equipment and related in area of work. C. Notify Architect of any discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition. SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 024119 - 1 LJ Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. Dec-2010 t t d� i✓ i D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. 1. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on -site is not permitted. F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PEFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A 10.6 and NFPA 241. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that utilities at point of work, have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition operations. B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required. C. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect. 3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage. SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 024119 - 2 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. 3.3 Dec-2010 B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify, disconnect, and sea] or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished. 3.4 1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated services/systems when requested by Contractor. 2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building. 3. Disconnect, demolish, and remove plumbing, , equipment, and components indicated to be removed. a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material. b. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material. C. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment. d. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational. e. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner. PREPARATION A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris -removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, driveways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls." B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to the adjacent facilities to remain. C. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 024119 - 3 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. Dec-2010 chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain. 2. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. 3. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame -cutting operations. Maintain portable fire -suppression devices during any flame -cutting operations. 4. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 5. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. B. Reuse of Building Elements: Do not demolish building elements beyond what is indicated on Drawings without Architect's approval. C. Removed and Salvaged Items: 1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner. 5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. D. Removed and Reinstalled Items: 1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers. 3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated. E. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete. 3.5 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on -site. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them. SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 024119 - 4 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Dec-2010 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. 3.6 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. END OF SECTION 024119 ` r SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 024119-5 No Text December 1, 2010 SECTION 03300 CONCRETE WORK PART] GENERAL L L RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2. DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The extent of concrete work is shown on the Drawings. 1.3. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: Comply with the provisions of the following codes, specifications and standards, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified: 1. ACI 301 "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings". 2. ACI 304 "Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete". 3. ACI 311 "Recommended Practice for Concrete Inspection". 4. ACI 318 'Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete". 5. ACI 347 "Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork". 6. MSP-1-01 Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, "Manual of Standard Practice". B. Workmanship: The Contractor is responsible for correction of concrete work which does not conform to the specified requirements, including strength, tolerances and finishes. Correct deficient concrete as directed by the Architect. C. Design and Testing: 1. The Contractor shall bear all expenses in connection with securing proper laboratory designed mixes. Mixes proposed for use in this project shall be tested by means of actual cylinder breaks, with all information being reported to the Architect. All expense for taking and testing concrete cylinders shall be borne by the Owner. 2. Job site cylinders shall be taken when the Architect so directs. The Contractor shall notify the testing laboratory when test cylinders are to be taken. The laboratory shall come to the site and take the concrete cylinders, and be responsible for their care and handling including breaking of same at laboratory. 3. The laboratory shall be an independent testing laboratory designated by the Architect and the Owner, acceptable to the Contractor. 4. Test results shall be furnished to the Architect, Engineer and the Contractor. 5. Any concrete not meeting strength requirements shall be finther tested. If further tests indicate concrete will ultimately never meet strength requirements, the under strength concrete will be replaced with new as directed by Architect. D. Tests for Concrete Materials: 1. Test aggregate by method of sampling and testing of ASTM C 33. 2. For portland cement, sample the cement and determine the properties by the methods of test of ASTM C 150. 3. Submit written reports to the Architect, for each material sampled and tested, prior to the start of work. Provide the project identification name and number, date of report, name of contractor, name of concrete testing service, source of concrete aggregates, material manufacturer and brand name for manufactured materials, values specified in CONCRETE WORK 03300 - 1 December 1, 2010 the referenced specification for each material, and test results. Indicate whether or not material is acceptable for intended use. 1.4. SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's Data: Submit manufacturer's product data with application and installation instructions for proprietary materials and items, including reinforcement and forming accessories, admixtures, patching compounds, waterstops, joint systems, chemical floor hardeners, dry -shake finish materials, and others as requested by the Architect. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication, bending, and placement of concrete reinforcement. Comply with the AC1315 "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures" showing bar schedules, stirrup spacing, diagrams of bent bars, arrangement of concrete reinforcement. Include special reinforcement required at openings through concrete structures. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1. FORM MATERIALS A. Forms for Exposed Finish Concrete: Unless otherwise shown or specified, construct all formwork for exposed concrete surfaces with plywood, metal, metal framed plywood -faced or other acceptable panel -type materials, to provide continuous, straight, smooth, exposed surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints and to conform to joint system shown on the Drawings. Provide form material with sufficient thickness to withstand pressure of newly -placed concrete without bow or deflection. Forms used for this class of concrete shall be new or "good -as -new". B. Use plywood complying with U.S. Product Standard PS-1 "B-B (Concrete Form) Plywood" Class I, Exterior Grade or better, mill -oiled and edgesealed, with each piece bearing legible trademark of an approved inspection agency, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect. C. Forms for Unexposed Finish Concrete: Form concrete surfaces which will be unexposed in finished structure with plywood, lumber, metal or other acceptable material. Provide lumber dressed on at least 2 edges and one side for tight fit. D. Earth Trench Forms: Earth trench type forming shall only be used where continuous type or square spot footings are shown on the Drawings. All concrete grade beams shall be formed from top of pier or footing to top of beam with wood or steel forms as specified hereinbefore. 2.2. REINFORCING MATERIALS A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, except No. 3 bent ties and stirrups may be Grade 40. B. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, welded steel wire fabric. C. Dowels for load transfer in floors shall be plain steel bars conforming to ASTM A 675, Grade 80 or ASTM A 499. D. Supports for Reinforcement: 1. Use spacers for reinforcing bars adjacent to forms and in un-cased drilled pier shafts equal to shaft spacer as manufactured by Foundation Technologies, Inc. 3300 Montreal Indiana Way, Suite 8, Tucker, Georgia 30084 (1-800-773-2368). 2. Provide supports for reinforcement including bolsters, chairs, spacers and other devices for spacing, supporting and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Use wire bar type supports complying with CRSI, unless otherwise specified. Wood, brick and other devices will not be acceptable. CONCRETE WORK 03300 - 2 December 1, 2010 3. For slabs -on -grade, use supports with sand plates for horizontal runners where wetted _ base materials will not support chair legs. 4. For exposed -to -view concrete surfaces, where legs of supports are in contact with forms, provide supports with legs which are hot/dip galvanized plastic protected or stainless steel protected. E. Fibrous Concrete Reinforcement: 1. General: 100 percent virgin polypropylene fibrillated fibers specially manufactured for use as concrete reinforcement, containing no reprocessed olefin materials. Fibrous concrete reinforcement shall be as manufactured by Fibetmesh Company, 4019 Industry Drive, Chattanooga, TN 37416, or approved equal_ Use in all exterior concrete not otherwise detailed. 2. Physical Characteristics: a. Specific Gravity: 0.91 b. Tensile Strength: 70 to 110 ksi C. Fiber lengths: 1/2", 3/4", 1 1/2", 2" per manufacturer. 2.3. CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: l . ASTM C 150, Type 1, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect. 2. Use only one brand of cement throughout the project, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect. B. Fine Aggregate: 1. ASTM C 33. Clean, sharp, natural sand free from loam, clay, lumps or other deleterious substances. 2. Dune sand, bank -run sand and manufactured sand are not acceptable. C. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33. Clean, uncoated, processed aggregate containing no clay, mud, loam or foreign matter as follows: 1. Crushed stone, processed from natural rock or stone. 2. Washed gravel, either natural or crushed. Use of pit or bank -run gravel is not permitted. 3. Provide aggregate from a single source for all exposed concrete. 4. Maximum Aggregate Size: a. Not larger than one -fifth of the narrowest dimension between sides of forms, one-third of the depth of slabs, nor three -fourths of the minimum clear spacing between individual reinforcing bars or bundles or bars. b. These limitations may be waived if, in the judgment of the Architect, workability and methods of consolidation are such that concrete can be placed without honeycomb or voids. D. Fly Ash: The contractor may use ASTM C 618, Type C or Type F fly ash, replacing a maximum of 20% of the cementitious materials content. E. Water: Clean, fresh, drinkable. F. Air -Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. G. Evaporation Reducer: The contractor may use an evaporation reducer equal to "Confilm" as manufactured by Master Builders, Inc., on concrete floor slabs -on -grade. H. Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A, containing not more than 0.1% chloride ions. Set -Control Admixtures: ASTM C 494, as follows: 1. Type B, Retarding. CONCRETE WORK 03300 - 3 2.4. 2.5 1714 December 1, 2010 1 i 2. Type C, Accelerating. 3. Type D, Water -reducing and Retarding. 4. Type E, Water -reducing and Accelerating. Calcium chloride will not be permitted in concrete. High -Range Water -Reducing Admixture (Super Plasticizer): ASTM C 494, Type F or G containing not more than 0.1 % chloride ions. RELATED MATERIALS A. Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers: Pre -molded cane fiber saturated with asphalt. Unless indicated otherwise, 1 /2" thickness by depth of slab. B. Joint Sealing Compound: See Division 7 sections. C. Vapor Barrier: Provide vapor barrier that is resistant to deterioration when tested according to ASTM E 154. Vapor barrier shall be polyethylene sheet not less than 8 mils thick. D. Floor Dampproofing Materials: Vapor Barrier: "Moistop 395" underslab moisture -vapor barrier as manufactured by Fortifiber Corporation. E. Tape: Moistop tape by the same manufacturer. F. Chemical Hardener: Colorless aqueous solution containing a blend of magnesium fluosilicate and zinc fluosilicate combined with a wetting agent, containing not less than 2 lbs. of fluosilicate per gal. G. Non -Slip Aggregate Finish: Provide fused aluminum oxide grits, or crushed emery, as abrasive aggregate for non -slip finish with emery aggregate containing not less than 40% aluminum oxide and not less than 25% ferric oxide. Use material that is factory -graded, packaged, rust -proof and non -glazing, and is unaffected by freezing, moisture and cleaning materials. H. Absorptive Cover: Burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz. per sq. yd., complying with AASHTO M 182, Class 2. Moisture -Retaining Cover: One of the following, complying with ASTM C 171. 1. Waterproof paper. 2. Polyethylene film. 3. Polyethylene -coated burlap. J. Membrane -Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B unless other type acceptable to the Architect. (For applications where the concrete slab is to be covered.) K. Concrete Sealer: Acrylic co -polymer sealer equal to SealTite Tiah as manufactured by W.R. Meadows, Inc. or Sealcure #1315 by Conspec. The sealer shall not after -yellow or change the natural color of the concrete per ASTM C1315, Type I, Class A, and shall provide a highly weatherproof, stain -resistant and dust -proof sealer. (For applications where the concrete slab is to be left exposed.) L. Concrete Sealer/Hardener: Equal to SealTite Dust -Gard as manufactured by W.R. Meadows, Inc. or Intraseal by Conspec. The sealer/hardener shall harden and dust -proof in one easy operation. PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN OF MIXES A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete in accordance with applicable CONCRETE WORK 03300 - 4 December 1, 2010 provisions of ASTM C 94. Use an independent testing facility acceptable to the Architect for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs. The testing facility shall not be the same as used j for field quality control testing unless otherwise acceptable to the Architect. B. Prepare design mixes by either laboratory trial batch or field experience methods, using materials to be employed on the project for each class of concrete required, complying with ACI 211.1, ACI 301, and ACI 318. 1. Laboratory Trial Batches: When laboratory trial batches are used to select concrete proportions, prepare test specimens in accordance with ASTM C 192 and conduct strength tests in accordance with ASTM C 39, specified in ACI 301. Establish a curve showing relationship between water -cement ratio (or cement content) and compressive strength, with at least 3 points representing batches which produce strengths above and below that required. Use not less than 3 specimens tested at 28 days, or an earlier age when acceptable to the Architect, to establish each point on the curve. 2. Field Experience Method: When field experience methods are used to select concrete proportions, establish proportions as specified in ACI 301. Strength data for establishing standard deviation will be considered suitable if the concrete production facility has certified records consisting of at least 30 consecutive tests in one group or the statistical average for 2 groups totaling 30 or more tests, representing similar materials and project conditions. 3. If standard deviation exceeds 600 psi or if no suitable records are available, select proportions to produce an average strength of at least 1200 psi greater than the required compressive strength of concrete. 4. After sufficient experience and test data become available from the job, using ACI 214 methods of evaluation, the standard deviation may be reduced when the probable frequency of an average of 3 consecutive tests below required compressive strength will not exceed 1 in 100. C. Submit written reports to the Architect of each proposed mix for each class of concrete at least 15 days prior to start of work. Do not begin concrete production until mixes have been reviewed by the Architect. D. Design mixes to provide normal weight concrete with the following properties, as indicated on the Drawings and schedules: 1. 3000 psi 28-day compressive strength; W/C ratio, 0.58 maximum (non -air -entrained), 0.46 maximum (air -entrained). 2. See Section 02514 for additional requirements for concrete mix design for site work concrete. E. Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested by the Contractor when characteristics of materials, job conditions, weather, tests results, or other circumstances warrant; at no additional cost to the Owner and as accepted by the Architect. Laboratory test data for revised mix design and strength results must be submitted to and accepted by the Architect before using in the work. 2.6. ADMIXTURES A. Use water -reducing admixture or high range water -reducing admixture (super plasticizer) in concrete as required for placement and workability. B. Use non -chloride accelerating admixture in concrete slabs placed at ambient temperatures below 50 degrees F. C. Use air -entrained admixture in exterior exposed concrete, unless otherwise indicated. Add air -entraining admixture at the manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at the point of placement having air content within the following limits: CONCRETE WORK 03300 - 5 2.7 2.8 PART 3 3.1. December 1, 2010 1. 5.5% with 1 1/2" maximum aggregate 2. 6.0% with 1" maximum aggregate 3_ 6.0% with 3/4" maximum aggregate 4. 7.0% with 1/2" maximum aggregate D. Other Concrete: 2% to 4% air. L i E. Use admixtures for water -reducing and set -control in strict compliance with the manufacturer's directions. F. Use amounts of admixtures as recommended by the manufacturer for climatic conditions prevailing at the time of placing. Adjust quantities and types of admixtures as required to maintain quality control. r SLUMP LIMITS A. Proportion and design mixes to result in concrete slump at the point of placement as follows: 1. Ramps and Sloping Surfaces: Not more than 3". 2. Reinforced Foundation Systems: Not less than 1 " and not more than 3". 3. Concrete containing HRWR admixture (super plasticizer): Not more than 8" after addition ofHRWR to verified 2"-3" slump concrete. 4. All Other Concrete: Not more than 4". 5. Slumps greater than those specified above must be approved by the Architect/Engineer prior to any concrete pour. CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready -Mix Concrete: Comply with the requirements of ANSI/ASTM C 94, and as herein specified. B. Control ofMixing Water: When concrete arrives at the project with slump below that suitable for placing, water may be added only if neither the maximum permissible water -cement ratio nor the 3 maximum permissible slump is exceeded. The drum shall be turned an additional 30 revolutions, or more if necessary, until the added water is uniformly mixed into the concrete. C. During hot weather, or under conditions contributing to rapid setting of concrete, a shorter mixing time than specified in ANSI/ASTM C 94 may be required. D. When the air temperature is between 85 degrees F. and 90 degrees F., reduce the mixing and delivery time from 1 1/2 hours to 75 minutes, and when the air temperature is above 90 degrees F., reduce the mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. EXECUTION FORMS A. Design, erect, support, brace and maintain formwork to support vertical and lateral loads that might be applied until such loads can be supported by the concrete structure. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of correct size, shape, alignment, elevation and position. B. Design formwork to be readily removable without impact, shock or damage to cast -in -place concrete surfaces and adjacent materials. C. Forms shall not leak cement paste. D. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against the concrete surfaces. Provide crush plates or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces_ CONCRETE WORK 03300 - 6 December 1, 2010 Provide top forms for inclined surfaces where slope is too steep to place concrete with bottom forms only. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, to prevent swelling and for easy removal. E. Provide temporary openings where interior area of formwork is inaccessible for clean out, for inspection before concrete placement, and for placement of concrete. Securely brace temporary openings and set tightly to form to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings .,' on forms at inconspicuous locations. F. Chamfer exposed corners and edges as shown, using wood, metal, PVC or rubber chamfer strips fabricated to produce uniform smooth lines and tight edge joints. G. Placing Carton Forms: Forms shall be placed on a smooth firm bed of suitable material so as not to be displaced vertically, and be set tight with no buckled cartons, in order that horizontal displacement cannot take place. if forms are destroyed or damaged for any reason and are not capable of supporting the design load, they shall be replaced with new forms prior to placing of concrete. H. Form Ties: Factory -fabricated, adjustable -length, removable or snap -off metal form ties, designated to prevent form deflection, and to prevent spalling concrete surfaces upon removal. Unless otherwise shown, provide ties so portion remaining within concrete after removal is at least 1 1/2" inside concrete. Unless otherwise shown, provide form ties which will not leave holes larger than 1" diameter in concrete surface. Provisions for Other Trades: Provide openings in concrete formwork to accommodate work for other trades. Determine size and location of openings, recesses and chases from trades providing such items. Accurately place and securely support items built into forms. K. Cleaning and Tightening: Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt or other debris just before concrete is placed. Re -tighten forms after concrete placement if required to eliminate mortar leaks. 3.2. VAPOR BARRIER INSTALLATION A. Preparation: Do not proceed until plumbing and electrical rough -ins are complete and subgrade compaction and fill is completed. B. Install in accordance with ASTM E-1643-94 Standard Practice for Installation of Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs. C. Installation: Apply continuously directly over compacted earth fill and immediately below sand fill. Install with width of sheet parallel with direction pour, joints lapped 6". Secure all seams with tape. D. Lap vapor retarder over footings or sea] to foundation wall, or both, and sea] around penetrations such as utilities and columns in order to create a monolithic membrane between the surface of the slab and moisture sources below the slab and at the perimeter. E. Protection: Protect completed membrane from damage. Prior to pouring concrete, inspect membrane for punctures or damage and repair all tears with tape. F. General: Place vapor barrier sheeting in position with longest dimension parallel with direction of pour. Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's recommended mastic or pressure -sensitive tape. Cover vapor barrier with sand cushion and compact to depth indicated. CONCRETE WORK 03300 - 7 3.3. 3.4 December 1, 2010 s PLACING REINFORCING A. Comply with the specified codes and standards, and Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute's recommended practice for "Placing Reinforcing Bars", for details and methods of reinforcement placement and supports, and as herein specified. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other materials which reduce or destroy bond with concrete. C. Accurately position, support and secure reinforcement against displacement by formwork, construction, or concrete placement operations. Locate and support reinforcing by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers and hangers, as required. D. Place reinforcement to obtain at least the minimum coverages for concrete protection. Arrange, space and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement operations. Set wire ties so ends are directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. E. Do not place reinforcing bars more than 2" beyond the last leg of continuous bar supports. Do not use supports as bases for runways for concrete conveying equipment and similar construction loads. Install welded wire fabric in as long of lengths as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh and lace splices with wire. Offset end laps in adjacent widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. 118112MI A. Construction Joints: l . Locate and install construction joints, which are not shown on the Drawings, so as not to impair the strength and appearance of the structure, as acceptable to the Architect. 2. Provide key -ways at least 1 1/2" deep in all construction joints in walls, slabs and between walls and footings; acceptable bulkheads designed for this purpose may be used for slabs. 3. Place construction joints perpendicular to the main reinforcement. Continue all reinforcement across construction joints. B. Waterstops: Provide waterstops in construction joints as shown on the Drawings. Install waterstops to form a continuous diaphragm in each joint. Make provisions to support and protect waterstops during the progress of the work. Fabricate field joints in waterstops in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. Protect water stop material from damage where it protrudes from any point. C. Control Joints in Slabs -on -Ground: 1. Construct control joints in slabs -on -ground to form panels or patterns as shown or directed. Use screed type joints equal to those manufactured by Superior Concrete Accessories, Inc. Screed Key joints are of24 gage galvanized steel with 1 1/8" dowel knockouts at 6" on centers. Install with a minimum of five special 16 gage by V stakes per ten feet of length of material. If saw cut control joints are used, they shall be made with a power saw fitted with an abrasive or diamond blade. Saw cuts must be one-fourth the slab thickness. Sawing shall begin as soon as the concrete surface is firm enough so that it will not be torn or damaged by the blade. This will be within 4 to 12 hours after the concrete finishing operations. 2. Construct control joints in slabs -on -ground to form panels or patterns as shown or directed. Form edge of pours with wood forms having keyway as detailed on the Drawings. CONCRETE WORK 03300 - 8 December 1, 2010 Construct control joints in slabs -on -ground to form panels or patterns as shown or directed. Form edge of pours with wood forms having keyway as detailed on the Drawings. If optional saw cut control joints are used, they shall be made with a power saw fitted with an abrasive or diamond blade. Saw cuts must be one-fourth the slab thickness. Sawing shall begin as soon as the concrete surface is firm enough so that it will not be torn or damaged by the blade. This will be within 4 to 12 hours after the concrete hardens. D. Isolation Joints in Slabs -on -Ground: Construct isolation joints in slabs on ground at all points of contact between slabs on ground and vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams and elsewhere as indicated. 3.5. INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS A. General: Set and build into the work anchorage devices and other embedded items required for other work that is attached to, or supported by, cast -in -place concrete. Use setting drawings, diagrams, instructions and directions provided by suppliers of the items to be attached thereto. B. Edge Forms and Screed Strips for Slabs: Set edge forms or bulkheads and intermediate screed strips for slabs to obtain the required elevations and contours in the finished slab surface. Provide and secure units sufficiently strong to support the types of screed required. Align the concrete surface to the elevation of the screed strips by the use of strike -off templates or accepted compacting type screeds. 3.6. PREPARATION OF FORM SURFACES A. Coat the contact surfaces of forms with a form -coating compound before reinforcement is placed. Provide commercial formulation form -coating compounds that will not bond with, stain nor adversely affect concrete surfaces, and will not impair subsequent treatment of concrete surfaces requiring bond or adhesion, nor impede wetting of surfaces to be cured with water or curing compounds. B. Thin form -coating compounds only with thinning agent of type, and in amount, and under conditions of the form -coating compound manufacturer's directions. Do not allow excess form -coating material to accumulate in the forms or to come into contact with concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed. Apply in compliance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.7. CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. General: I . Comply with ACI 304, and as herein specified. 2. Add fibrous concrete reinforcement to concrete materials at the time concrete is batched in amounts in accordance with approved submittals for this type of concrete. Mix batcbed concrete in strict accordance with the fibrous concrete reinforcement manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for uniform and complete dispersion. 3. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no concrete will be placed on concrete which has hardened sufficiently to cause the formation of seams or planes of weakness within the section. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as herein specified. 4. Deposit concrete as nearly as practicable to its final location to avoid segregation due to re -handling or flowing. B. Pre -Placement Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete the formwork installation, reinforcing steel, and items to be embedded or cast -in. Notify other crafts to permit the installation of their work; cooperate with other trades in setting such work, as required. CONCRETE WORK 03300 - 9 3.8. December I, 2010 Thoroughly wet wood forms immediately before placing concrete, as required where form coatings are not used. C. Placing Concrete in Forms: Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers not deeper than 18" and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. 1. Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand -spading, rodding or tamping. Use vibrators designed to operate with vibratory element submerged in concrete, maintaining a speed of not less than 6000 impulses per minute. 2. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside of forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations not farther than the visible effectiveness of the machine. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to set. At each insertion, limit the duration of vibration to the time necessary to consolidate the concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing segregation of the mix. D. Placing Concrete Slabs: 1. Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous operation, within the limits of construction joints, until the placing of a panel or section is completed. Consolidate concrete during placing operations so that concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into comers. 2. Bring slab surfaces to the correct level with a straightedge and strike off. Use bull floats or darbies to smooth the surface, leaving it free of humps or hollows. Do not sprinkle water on the plastic surface. Do not disturb the slab surfaces prior to beginning finishing operations. 3. Maintain reinforcing in the proper position during concrete placement operations. E. Cold Weather Placing: 1. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength which could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures, in compliance with ACI 306 and as herein specified. 2. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 degrees F., uniformly heat all water and aggregate before mixing as required to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 degrees F., and not more than 80 degrees F., at point of placement. 3. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. 4. Do not use calcium chloride, salt and other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators, unless otherwise accepted in mix designs. F. Hot Weather Placing: 1. When hot weather conditions exist that could seriously impair the quality and strength of concrete, place concrete in compliance with ACI 305 and as herein specified. 2. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement below 90 degrees F. Mixing water may be chilled, or chopped ice may be used to control the concrete temperature provided the water equivalent of the ice is calculated to the total amount of mixing. 3. Cover reinforcing steel with water -soaked burlap if it becomes too hot, so that the steel temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before embedment in concrete. Wet form thoroughly before placing concrete. 4. Do not use retarding admixtures unless otherwise accepted in mix designs. FINISH OF FORMED SURFACES A. Standard Rough Form Finish: For formed concrete surfaces not exposed -to -view in the finish work or by other construction, unless otherwise shown or specified. This is the concrete surface CONCRETE WORK 03300- 10 December 1, 2010 having the texture imparted by the form facing material used, with defective areas repaired and patched as specified, and fins and other projections exceeding 1/4" in height rubbed down with wood blocks. B. Standard Smooth Finish: For formed concrete surfaces exposed -to -view, or that are to be covered with a coating material applied directly to the concrete or a covering material bonded to the concrete, such as waterproofing, dampproofing, painting or other similar system. This is the as -cast concrete surface as obtained with the form facing material, with defective areas repaired and patched as specified, and fins and other projections on the surface completely removed and smoothed. C. Smooth Rubbed Finish: Provide smooth rubbed finish to scheduled concrete surfaces, which have received smooth form finish treatment, not later than the day after form removal. 1. Moisten concrete surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or other abrasive until a uniform color and texture is produced. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing process. D. Grout Cleaned Finish: Provide grout cleaned finish to scheduled concrete surfaces which have received smooth form finish treatment. 1. Combine one part portland cement to 1-1/2 parts fine sand by volume, and mix with water to the consistency of thick paint. Blend standard portland cement and white portland cement, amounts determined by trial patches, so that the final color of dry grout will closely match adjacent surfaces. 2. Thoroughly wet concrete surfaces and apply grout immediately to coat surfaces and fill small holes. Remove excess grout by scraping and rubbing with clean burlap. Keep damp by fog spray for at least 36 hours after rubbing. E. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets and similar unformed surfaces occurring adjacent to formed surfaces, strike -off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise shown. 3.9. CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION A. General: 1. Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperature, and maintain without drying at a relatively constant temperature for a period of time necessary for hydration of cement and proper hardening. 2. Start initial curing application as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete surface after placing and finishing. Weather permitting, keep continuously moist for not less than 72 hours. 3. Begin final curing procedures immediately following initial curing and before concrete has dried. Continue final curing for at least 168 cumulative hours (not necessarily consecutive) during which concrete has been exposed to air temperatures above 50 degrees F. Avoid rapid drying at end of final curing period. B. Curing Methods: Perform curing of concrete by moist curing or by moisture retaining cover curing or by membrane -forming curing compound and by combinations thereof, as herein specified. 1. Provide moisture curing by following methods: a. Keep concrete surface continuously wet by covering with water. Continuous water -fog spray. b. Covering concrete surface with specified absorptive cover, thoroughly saturating cover with water and keeping continuously wet. Place absorptive cover to provide coverage of concrete surfaces and edges, with 4" lap over adjacent absorptive covers. CONCRETE WORK 03300 - 11 December 1, 2010 Provide moisture -cover curing as follows: a. Cover concrete surfaces with moisture -retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width with sides and ends lapped at least 3" and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. Provide curing compound for slabs as follows: a. Apply specified curing and sealing compound to concrete slabs as soon as final finishing operations are complete (within 2 hours). b. Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power -spray or roller in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repairing damage during curing period. C. Do not apply membrane curing compounds on surfaces which are to be covered with coating material applied directly to concrete, liquid floor hardener, waterproofing, dampproofmg, membrane roofing, flooring, painting, and other coatings and finish materials, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect. C. Curing Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including undersides of beams, supported slabs and other similar surfaces by moist curing with forms in place for full curing period or until forms are removed. If forms are removed, continue curing by methods specified above, as applicable. 1. Curing Unformed Surfaces: Initially cure unformed surfaces, such as slabs, floor topping, and other flat surfaces by moist curing. 2. Final cure unformed surfaces, unless otherwise specified, by methods specified above, as applicable. 3. Final cure concrete surfaces to receive liquid floor hardener or finish flooring by use of moisture -retaining cover, unless otherwise directed. D. Applying Concrete Sealer: Apply on all concrete slab floors scheduled to be left exposed in strict compliance with the manufacturer's instructions. I . Concrete shall have cured for a least 7 days. 2. Concrete shall be clean and dry prior to application, with oil stains, grease, etc. removed. 3. Apply by spray, brush, or lamb's wool applicator to approximate coverage of 500 square feet per gallon. 4. Do not apply if the temperature is less than 40 degrees F. E. Applying Concrete Sealer/Hardener: Apply on all concrete slab floors scheduled to be left exposed in strict compliance with the manufacturer's instructions. 1. Concrete shall have cured for at a least 14 days. 2. Concrete shall be clean and dry prior to application, with oil stain, grease, etc. removed. 3. Apply by spray or brush applicator to approximate coverage of 500 square feet per gallon. 4. Do not apply if the temperature is less than 40 degrees F. 3.10. REMOVAL OF FORMS A. Formwork not supporting weight of concrete, such as sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the work, maybe removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 degrees F. for 24 hours after placing concrete, provided concrete is sufficiently hard to not be damaged by form removal operations, and provided curing and protection operations are maintained. B. Formwork supporting weight of concrete, such as beam soffits, joists, slabs and other structural elements, may not be removed in less than 14 days and until concrete has attained design CONCRETE WORK 03300 - 12 December 1, 2010 minimum compressive strength at 28-days. Determine potential compressive strength of in -place concrete by testing field -cured specimens representative of concrete location or members. C. Form facing material may be removed 4 days after placement, only if shores and other vertical supports have been arranged to permit removal of form facing material without loosening or disturbing shores and supports. 3.11. RE -USE OF FORMS A. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be re -used in the work. Split, frayed, delaminated or otherwise damaged form facing material will not be acceptable. Apply new form coating compound material to concrete contact form surfaces as specified for new formwork. B. When forms are intended for successive concrete placement, thoroughly clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten forms to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use "patched" forms for exposed concrete surfaces, except as acceptable to Architect. 3.12. MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS A. Filling -In: Fill-in holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of work by other trades, unless otherwise shown or directed, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place and cure concrete as herein specified, to blend with in -place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling shown or required to complete work. B. Reinforced Masonry: Provide masonry grout for reinforced masonry lintels and bond beams where indicated on the Drawings and as scheduled. Masonry grout shall comply with ASTM C476. Maintain accurate location of reinforcing steel during grout placement. 3.13. CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS A. Patching Defective Areas: 1. Repair and patch defective areas with cement mortar immediately after removal of forms, but only when acceptable to Architect. 2. Cut out honeycomb, rock pockets, voids over 1/4" in any dimension, and holes left by tie rods and bolts, down to solid concrete, but in no case to a depth of less than 1 ". Make edges of cuts perpendicular to the concrete surface. Before placing cement mortar or proprietary patching compound, thoroughly clean, dampen with water and brush -coat the area to be patched with neat cement grout, or proprietary bonding agent. 3. For exposed -to -view surfaces, blend white portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match color surrounding. Provide test areas at inconspicuous location to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike -off slightly higher than surrounding surface. B. Repair of Formed Surfaces: 1. Remove and replace concrete having defective surfaces if defects cannot be repaired to satisfaction of Architect. Surface defects, as such, include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycomb, rock pockets, fins and other projections on surface; and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. Flush out form tie holes, fill with dry pack mortar, or precast cement cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent. 2. Repair concealed formed surfaces, where possible, that contain defects that adversely affect the durability of the concrete. If defects cannot be repaired, remove and replace the concrete. C. Repair of Unformed Surfaces: CONCRETE WORK 03300 - 13 3.14. December 1.2010 1. Test unformed surfaces, such as monolithic slabs, for smoothness and to verify surface plane to tolerances specified for each surface and finish. Correct low and high areas as herein specified. Test unformed surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope, in addition to smoothness, using a template having required slope. 2. Repair finished unformed surfaces that contain defects which adversely affect durability of concrete. Surface defects, as such, include crazing, cracks in excess of 0.01 " wide or which penetrate to reinforcement or completely through non -reinforced sections regardless of width, spalling, pop -outs, honeycomb, rock pockets, and other objectionable conditions. 3. Correct high areas in unformed surfaces by grinding, after concrete has cured at least 14 days. 4. Correct low areas in unformed surfaces during, or immediately after completion of surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with fresh concrete. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. Proprietary patching compounds may be used when acceptable to Architects. 5. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes not exceeding 1" diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas to sound concrete with clean, square cuts and expose reinforcing steel with at least 3/4" clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete, and brush with a neat cement grout coating or concrete bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials to provide concrete of the same type or class as original concrete. Place, compact and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in the same manner as adjacent concrete. 6. Repair isolated random cracks and single holes not over 1" in diameter by dry -pack method. Groove top of cracks and cut-out holes to sound concrete and clean of dust, dirt and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and brush with neat cement grout coating or concrete bonding agent. Mix dry -pack, consisting of one part portland cement to 2 1/2 parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 mesh sieve, using only enough water as required for handling and placing. Compact dry -pack mixture in place and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for not less than 72 hours. D. Use epoxy -based mortar for structural repairs, where directed by Architect. E. Repair methods not specified above may be used, subject to acceptance of Architect. QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION A. The Owner will employ a testing laboratory to perform all other tests and to submit test reports. B. Sampling and testing for quality control during the placement of concrete may include the following, as directed by the Architect. 1. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to comply with ASTM C 94. 2. Slump: One test for each set of compressive strength test specimens taken at point of discharge_ 3. Air Content: ASTM C 231 pressure for normal weight concrete; one for each set of compressive strength test specimens. 4. Concrete Temperature: Test hourly when air temperature is 40 degrees F. and below, and when 80 degrees F. and above; and each time a set of compression test specimens made. 5. Compression Test Specimen: ASTM C 31; one set of 4 standard cylinders for each compressive strength test, unless otherwise directed. Mold and store cylinders for laboratory cured test specimens except when field -cure test specimens are required. 6. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; one set for each 100 cu. yds. or fraction thereof, of each concrete class placed in any one day or for each 5000 sq. ft. of surface CONCRETE WORK 03300 - 14 December 1, 2010 area placed; 1 specimen tested at 7 days for information only, 2 specimens tested at 28 days, and I specimen retained in reserve for later testing if required. The acceptance test results shall be the average of the strengths of the two specimens tested at 28 days. a. When the frequency of testing will provide less than 5 strength tests for a given class of concrete, conduct testing from at least 5 randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than 5 are used. b. When the total quantity of a given class of concrete is less than 50 cu. yds., the strength test may be waived by the Architect if, in his judgment, adequate evidence of satisfactory strength is provided. C. When the strength of field -cured cylinders is less than 85% of companion laboratory -cured cylinders, evaluate current operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing the in -place concrete. C. Test results will be reported in writing to the Architect, Engineer and the Contractor on the same day that tests are made. Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain the project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing service, concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in the structure, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials; compressive breaking strength and type of break for both 7-day tests and 28-day tests. D. Additional Tests: The testing service will make additional tests of in -place concrete when test results indicate the specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been attained in the structure, as directed by the Architect. The testing service may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as directed. Contractor shall pay for such tests conducted, and any other additional testing as may be required, when unacceptable concrete is verified. END OF SECTION 03300 This section prepared by Surendran Consulting, LLC. OF �Po�P060PPPOP00000PD00000 C C C.V.SURENDRAN r J PGCPPP CPPP 3387p POGGOC PPC�,J (%J N IS7��`�� � r r f December 10, 2010 CONCRETE WORK 03300 - 15 ........ ... . LD I 1_ Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. SECTION 033536 POLISHED CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHING GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY Dec-2010 A. Section Includes: Products and procedures for placement, finishing, and polishing cast -in -place concrete floors. , 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's technical literature for each product indicated, specified, or re- quired. Include manufacturer's technical data, application instructions, and recommendations. B. Samples for Initial Selections: 1. Aggregates: Labeled, sealed plastic bags with one pound of each aggregate in concrete mix. 2. Integral Color Pigment: Full range of available standard manufacturers samples of actual products showing colors. C. Samples for Verification: Submit 12 inch square samples of polished finish in each color, tex- ture, and pattern specified; include not less than 3 in each sample set showing limits of varia- tions expected for each color, texture, and pattern specified. Resubmit samples until approved. D. Maintenance Data: For inclusion in operation and maintenance manual required by Division 01. Include manufacturer's instructions for maintenance of installed work, including methods and frequency recommended for maintaining optimum condition under anticipated use. Include precautions against cleaning products and methods which may be detrimental to polished fi- nishes and performance. 11 — 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Concrete Producer Qualifications: Firm experienced in manufacturing ready -mixed concrete products and that complies with following requirements for production facilities and equipment: 1. ASTM C 94. 2. NRMCA's Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities. B. Polisher Qualifications: 1. Experience: Company with not less than 5 years experience in performing specified work similar in design, products, and extent to scope of this Project; with a record of successful in-service performance; and with sufficient production capability, facilities, and person- nel to produce required Work. 2. Supervision: Maintain competent supervisor who is at Project during times specified Work is in progress, and, who is experienced in installing systems similar to type and scope required for Project. POLISHED CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHING 033536 - 1 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Nov-10 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. 3. Trade Association: Member in good standing of IPCI. C. Static Coefficient of Friction: Products and polishing operations shall achieve following as de- termined by quality control testing according to NFSI 101-A: 1. Level Floor Surfaces: Minimum 0.6. 2. Sloping Floor Surfaces: Minimum 0.8. D. Field Mock-up for Aesthetic Purposes: Before performing work of this Section, provide as many field samples as required to verify selections made under submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects of polished finish. Approval does not constitute approval of deviations from Contract Documents, unless such deviations are specifically approved by Architect in writing. 1. Polish 10 ft square floor area for each polished finish type. 2. Use same personnel, including supervisors, which will perform work. 3. Install products and materials according to specified requirements. 4. Work shall be representative of those to be expected for work. 5. Show maximum variation that will exist in work. 6. Approval is for following aesthetic qualities: a. Compliance with approved submittals. b. Uniformity of exposed aggregate. C. Uniformity of sheen. 7. Obtain Architect's approval before starting work on Project. 8. Protect approved field mock-ups from elements with weather resistant covering. 9. Maintain field mock-ups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging completed Work. 10. Do not demolish, alter, or remove field mock-ups until acceptable to Owner and Archi- tect. 11. When directed, demolish and remove field mock-ups from Project. E. Pre -Installation Conference: Prior to placing concrete for areas scheduled for polished concrete floor finish, conduct conference at Project to comply with requirements of applicable Division 01 Sections. Required Attendees: a. Owner. b. Architect. C. Contractor. d. Polisher, including supervisor. e. Concrete finisher, including supervisor. 2. Minimum Agenda: Polisher shall demonstrate understanding of work required by re- viewing and discussing procedures for, but not limited to, following: a. Tour mock-up and representative areas of required work, discuss and evaluate for compliance with Contract Documents, including substrate conditions, surface preparations, sequence of installation and other preparatory Work performed by other installers. POLISHED CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHING 033536 - 2 r- { Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Nov-I0 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. ' b. Review Contract Document requirements. c. Review approved submittals. M d. Review installation procedures, including, but not limited to: l) Concrete placement, finishing, and preparation for polished finish. 2) Concrete curing. �p 3) Application of polishing products. 4) Grinding and polishing operations. 3. Reports: Record discussions, including decisions and agreements reached, and furnish copy of record to each artYattendin . 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Damage and Stain Prevention: Take precautions to prevent damage and staining of concrete surfaces to be polished. l . Prohibit following over concrete surfaces to be polished: a. Vehicle parking. b. Pipe cutting operations. C. Ferrous metals storage. 2. Protect concrete surfaces to be polished from following: a. Petroleum, oil, hydraulic fluid, or other liquid dripping from equipment. b. Acids and acidic detergents. C. Painting activities. B. Environmental Limitations: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for substrate tem- perature, ambient temperature, moisture, ventilation, and other conditions affecting polishing operations. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER AND PRODUCTS A. Available Manufacturers and Products: Subject to compliance with requirements of Contract Documents, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into Work include, but are not limited to, those listed alphabetically below. B. Basis of Design: Contract Documents are based on products by American Concrete Technolo- gies, Inc. (2242 Forest Park Blvd., Fort Worth, Texas 76110, 817-927-1980, fax 817-926-5024, www.diamondpolish.com) to establish a standard of quality. Other available products having equivalent characteristics may be considered, provided deviations are minor and does not change concept expressed in Contract Documents as judged by Architect. 2.2 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cementitious Materials: As specified in appropriate Division 03 Section. POLISHED CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHING 033536 - 3 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. Normal -Weight Aggregates: Nov-10 s }� r 1. Description: ASTM C 33, Class 2N. a. Selected, hard, and durable gravel or crushed stone; free of material that reacts with cement or causes staining. b. Uniformly or gap graded to match approved sample. C. From single source with documented service record data of at least 10 years' satisfactory service in similar applications and service conditions using similar aggregates and cementitious materials. Large Aggregate: 3/4 inch nominal. 3_ Pea Gravel Aggregate: 3/8 inch nominal. 4. Fine Aggregate: Type: sand. C. Decorative Aggregate: Crushed materials matching approved mock-up. D. Water: ASTM C 94 and potable. E. Admixtures: As specified in appropriate Division 03 Section. Integral Color Pigment: Color Selection: Match approved mock-up. 2. Description: ASTM C 979, synthetic mineral -oxide pigments or colored water -reducing admixtures; color stable, non -fading, and resistant to lime and other alkalis. 3. Available Manufacturers. a. Bayer Corporation. b. ChemMasters. C. Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co., Inc.; a Dayton Superior Company. d. Davis Colors. C. Elementis Pigments, Inc. f. Hoover Color Corporation. g. Lambert Corporation. h. L. M. Scofield Company. i. Solomon Colors. 2.3 CURING MATERIALS A. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz. per sq. yd. 2.4 APPLIED PRODUCTS Liquid Densifier: POLISHED CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHING 033536 - 4 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. Nov-10 1. Description: Odorless, non -hazardous, potassium silicate that penetrates concrete to react with free lime and calcium hydroxoide to produce permanent chemical reaction that har- dens, densifies and tightens concrete surface. 2. Basis of Design: American Concrete Technologies, Inc.; Everhard©. Dyes: As necessary to achieve desired color. 1. Description: Extremely fine molecules of color solvent or dye for mixing with water or acetone that is designed to penetrate and color concrete surface. 2. Basis of Design: American Concrete Technologies, Inc.; ChromacreteTm Dye. Patching Compound: l . Description: Compound composed of 40 percent portland cement, 45 percent limestone, and 15 percent vinyl acetate copolymer, when mixed with dust salvaged from grinding process forms a paste that hardens when surface imperfections are filled. 2. Basis of Design: American Concrete Technologies, Inc.; DurafilTM. Grout Material: 1. Description: Clear modified silicate sealant, containing no pore clogging latex, when mixed with dust salvaged from grinding process forms a paste that reacts with calcium hydroxide in concrete that hardens when surface imperfections are filled. 2. Basis of Design: American Concrete Technologies, Inc.; Filzit-Im Surfacing System. Polish Guard: 1. Description: Non -film forming, stain resistant, food resistant, chemical stain resistant, impregnating sealant designed to be used on concrete surfaces previously densified. 2. Basis of Design: American Concrete Technologies, Inc.; Resistall©. POLISHING EQUIPMENT A. Field Grinding and Polishing Equipment: 1. Variable speed, 3 or 4 head counter -rotating, walk -behind machine with not less than 600 lbs of down pressure on grinding or polishing pads. 2. Dust extraction equipment with flow rate suitable for dust generated, with pre -separator and squeegee attachments. B. Edge Grinding and Polishing Equipment: Hand-held or single head walk -behind machines which produces same results, without noticeable differences, as field grinding and polishing equipment. C. Burnishing Equipment: Single head high speed walk -behind machines. D. Grinding Pads: Metal bonded pads with embedded industrial grade diamonds of varying grits fabricated for mounting on equipment. E. Polishing Pads: Resin bonded pads with embedded industrial grade diamonds of varying grits fabricated for mounting on equipment. POLISHED CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHING 033536 - 5 t 1 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Nov-10 s 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. F. Burnishing Pads: Maintenance pads coated with embedded industrial grade diamonds for use with burnishing equipment. 2.6 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN A. Material Quality Standards: Mix designs for each type and strength of concrete used for floors s will be prepared as specified in appropriate Division 03 Section, with following qualifications: t a I . Slump Limit: 4 inches, plus or minus 1 inch. 2. Maximum Water -Cement Ration: 0.45. 3. Air Content: No permitted. 4. Admixtures: Calcium chloride based compounds not permitted. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 ACCEPTABLE POLISHERS A. Basis of Design: Contract Documents are based on polishing operations by American Concrete Technologies, Inc. (2242 Forest Park Blvd., Fort Worth, Texas 76110, 817-927-1980, fax 817- 926-5024, www.diamondpolish.com) to establish a standard of quality. Other polishers with products and polishing capabilities having equivalent characteristics may be considered, pro- vided deviations are minor and does not change concept expressed in Contract Documents as judged by Architect. 3.2 EXAMINATION A. Acceptance of Surfaces and Conditions: Examine substrates to be polished for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed only when unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner complying with Contract Documents. Starting Work within a particular area will be construed as acceptance of surface conditions. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Cleaning Concrete Surfaces: Prepare and clean concrete surfaces. Provide sound concrete sur- faces free of laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, form -release agents, dust, dirt, grease, oil, paint splatter, and other contaminants incompatible with polished concrete floor finish. 3.4 PLACING AND FINISHING CONCRETE FOR FLOORS A. General: Comply with appropriate Division 03 Section. B. Hot and Cold Weather Placement: As specified in appropriate Division 03 Section. C. Placement: Deposit and consolidate concrete in continuous operation, within limits of construc- tion joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete. I. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. 2. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. POLISHED CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHING 033536 - 6 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Nov-10 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. 3. After screedin consolidating and leveling, do not work surface until read for floating. g� g g, Y g D. Float Finishing: I. Begin floating operations when water sheen has disappeared, and/or when concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit proper operation of power -driven equipment. 2. Consolidate surface with power -driven troweling using steel float pans. 3. Hand float with wood or cork faced floats in locations inaccessible to power -driven machine. 4. Level surface using 10 foot highway straightedge. 5. Cut down high spots and fill low spots to produce planes checking true under straightedge in any direction. 6. Bring surface to uniform, smooth, granular texture with power -driven troweling using steel float pans. E. Decorative Aggregate: Uniformly broadcast by hand to match approved mock-up. F. Floor Flatness: F(F) 18 according to ASTM E 1155. G. Joints: Saw cut or tool joints to match approved mock-up. H. Moisture Curing: I . Immediately begin after floating. 2. Keep concrete surface continuously wet by covering with absorptive cover or by using continuous water -fog spray. 3. Cover concrete surface with absorptive cover with 4 inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers. 4. Thoroughly saturate cover with water and keep continuously wet. 3.5 CONCRETE POLISHING A. Initial Grinding: 1. Use grinding equipment and low grit grinding pads. 2. Grind concrete to specified aggregate exposure imparting uniform scratch pattern in con- crete. 3. Vacuum floor using squeegee vacuum attachment. B. Level of Grinding: I . Description: Fine aggregate intentionally exposed to create a salt and pepper appearance matching approved mock-up. 2. Basis of Design: American Concrete Technologies, Inc.; Luxcrete. C. Treating Surface Imperfections: I. Mix patching compound and grout material with dust created by grinding operations to match color of adjacent concrete surface. 2. Fill surface imperfections including, but not limited to, holes, surface damage, small and micro cracks, air holes, pop -outs, and voids. POLISHED CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHING 033536 - 7 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Nov-10 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. 3. Work compound and treatment until color differences between concrete surface and filled surface imperfections are not noticeable. D. Applying Liquid Densifier: Apply undiluted to point of rejection, remove excess liquid, and al- low to cure. E. Applying Dyes and Colorants: Uniformly apply at appropriate time, if necessary, to match ap- proved mock-up. F. Grout Grinding: 1. Use grinding equipment and appropriate grit grinding pads. 2. While applying fresh grout material prior to, grind concrete in direction perpendicular to initial grinding to remove scratches. 3. Vacuum floor using squeegee vacuum attachment. G. Additional Grinding: 1. Use grinding equipment and increasing finer grit grinding pads. 2. Grind concrete in as many passes necessary with each pass perpendicular to previous pass to remove scratches. 3. Vacuum floor using squeegee vacuum attachment. H. Polishing: 1. Use polishing equipment and increasing finer grit polishing pads. 2. Polish concrete in as many passes necessary with each pass perpendicular to previous pass to remove scratches. 3. Vacuum floor using squeegee vacuum attachment. I. Applying Polish Guard: Uniformly apply and remove excessive liquid. J. Applying Final Polish: Using burnishing equipment and finest grit burnishing pads, burnish to uniform sheen matching approved mock-up. K. Final Polished Sheen: Uniform gloss sheen using 3000 grit polishing heads. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Static Coefficient of Friction Testing: Retain Walkway Auditor to test polished finishes accord- ing to NFSI 101-A to confinn compliance with specified static coefficient of friction. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Covering: Protect polished finish work from subsequent construction with protective covering. END OF SECTION POLISHED CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHING 033536 - 8 t; Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. �—, SECTION 042113 - BRICK MASONRY ((_ PART ] - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: l . Face brick. _ 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples: For each type and color of brick and colored mortar. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Material Certificates: For each type and size of product indicated. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE Dec-2010 A. Masonry Standard: Comply with ACI 530. ] /ASCE 6/TMS 602 unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents. 1. Build sample panels for each type of exposed unit masonry construction in sizes approximately 48 inches long by 48 inches high. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Cold -Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold -weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. 1. Cold -Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F and higher and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than seven days after completing cleaning. B. Hot -Weather Requirements: Comply with hot -weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. BRICK MASONRY 0421 ] 3 - 1 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL Dec-2010 �C A. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do not use units where such defects will be exposed in the completed Work. 2.2 BRICK A. General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows. ] . For ends of sills and caps and for similar applications that would otherwise expose unfinished brick surfaces, provide units without cores or frogs and with exposed surfaces finished. 2. Provide special shapes for applications where shapes produced by sawing would result in sawed surfaces being exposed to view. B. Face Brick: Facing brick complying with ASTM C 216. l . Product, Grade and Type - match existing. 2. Efflorescence: Provide brick that has been tested according to ASTM C 67 and is rated "not effloresced." 3. Surface Coating: Brick with colors or textures produced by application of coatings shall withstand 50 cycles of freezing and thawing per ASTM C 67 with no observable difference in the applied finish when viewed from 10 feet. 4. Size (Actual Dimensions): Match existing. 2.3 MORTAR MATERIALS A. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91. B. Mortar Pigments: Use only if needed to match existing. Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes and complying with ASTM C 979. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortar. 1. lln cfuc -- Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. ; ; True Tone Mortar Colors. b. ;-t=;,; Bayferrox Iron Oxide Pigments. c. _ '= l nu,.; SGS Mortar Colors. C. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144. 1. White -Mortar Aggregates: Natural white sand or crushed white stone. 2. Colored -Mortar Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone of color necessary to produce required mortar color. BRICK MASONRY 042113 - 2 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. 2.4 REINFORCEMENT A. Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 95l/A 951M. 2.5 TIES AND ANCHORS Dec-2010 A. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made from materials that comply with the following unless otherwise indicated: 1. Hot -Dip Galvanized, Carbon -Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M; with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2 coating. B. Wire Ties, General: Unless otherwise indicated, size wire ties to extend at least halfway through veneer but with at least 5/8-inch cover on outside face. Outer ends of wires are bent 90 degrees and extend 2 inches parallel to face of veneer. C. Adjustable Masonry -Veneer Anchors: 1. General: Provide anchors that allow vertical adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall, for attachment over sheathing to wood or metal studs, and as follows: 2. Contractor's Option: Unless otherwise indicated, provide any of the following types of anchors: 3. Screw -Attached, Masonry -Veneer Anchors: Units consisting of a wire tie and a metal anchor section. 2.6 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS A. Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing complying with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and as follows: 1. Metal Drip Edge: Fabricate from stainless steel. Extend at least 3 inches into wall and 112 inch out from wall, with outer edge bent down 30 degrees and hemmed. 2. Metal Sealant Stop: Fabricate from stainless steel. Extend at least 3 inches into wall and out to exterior face of wall. At exterior face of wall, bend metal back on itself for 3.4 inch and down into joint 1/'4 inch to form a stop for retaining sealant backer rod. B. Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard products or products recommended by flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to each other and to substrates. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1; compressible up to 35 percent; formulated from neoprene. B. Bond -Breaker Strips: Asphalt -saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt). BRICK MASONRY 042113 - 3 N Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. C. WeepNent Products: Use the following unless otherwise indicated: Dec-2010 j Cellular Plastic WeepNent: One-piece, flexible extrusion made from UV -resistant polypropylene copolymer, full height and width of head joint and depth 1 /8 inch less than depth of outer wythe, in color selected from manufacturer's standard. D. Cavity Drainage Material: Free -draining mesh, made from polymer strands that will not degrade within the wall cavity. Provide one of the following configurations: a. Strips, full -depth of cavity and 10 inches high, with dovetail shaped notches 7 inches deep. b. Strips, not less than 3/4 inch thick and 10 inches high, with dimpled surface designed to catch mortar droppings and prevent weep holes from clogging with mortar. 2.8 MASONRY CLEANERS A. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard -strength cleaner designed for removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned. 2.9 MORTAR MIXES A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air -entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar. 2. Use masonry cement mortar unless otherwise indicated. 3. Add cold -weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be exposed to view, regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent. B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients before delivering to Project site. C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. Provide Type N unless another type is indicated. D. Colored -Aggregate Mortar: Produce required mortar color by using colored aggregates and natural color or white cement as necessary to produce required mortar color. 1. Mix to match existing. 2. Application: Use colored aggregate mortar for exposed mortar joints. BRICK MASONRY 042113 - 4 ram, Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Dec-2010 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. PART 3 - EXECUTION �. 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor -driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed. B. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures. 3.2 TOLERANCES A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements: I. For dimensions in cross section or elevation do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inch or minus 1/4 inch. 2. For location of elements in plan do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/2 inch. 3. For location of elements in elevation do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus Ii4 inch in a story height or 1/2 inch total. B. Lines and Levels: 1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls do not vary from level by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, or 1 /2 inch maximum. 2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1 /8 inch in 10 feet, 1,14 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. 3. For vertical lines and surfaces do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feel, or 1/2 inch maximum. 4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. 5. For lines and surfaces do not vary from straight by more than 1.4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8 inch. in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. C. Joints: 1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus l i8 inch, with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch; do not vary from bed joint thickness of adjacent courses by more than 1/8 inch. 2. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1 /8 inch. Do not vary from adjacent bed joint and head -joint thicknesses by more than 1 8 inch. BRICK MASONRY 042113 - 5 pli " Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Dec-2010 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited.V1 3.3 LAYING MASONRY WALLS A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement -type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less -than -half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations. r 3 B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Match existing. C. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items. D. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar unless otherwise indicated. 3.4 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING A. Lay hollow brick as follows: 1. With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed joints. 2. With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting course on , footings. F~ B. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient L mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints. C. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness unless otherwise indicated. j 3.5 ANCHORING MASONRY VENEERS f 1 A. Anchor masonry veneers to concrete masonry unit backup with masonry -veneer anchors to + } comply with the following requirements:. 1. Fasten anchors to CMU backup with metal fasteners of type indicated. Use two fasteners - unless anchor design only uses one fastener. 2. Embed tie sections in masonry joints. Provide not less than 2 inches of air space between back of masonry veneer and face of backing. 3. Locate anchor sections to allow maximum vertical differential movement of ties up and down. 4. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 16 inches o.c. vertically and 24 inches o.c. horizontally with not less than l anchor for each 3.5 sq. ft. of wall area. Install additional anchors within 12 inches of openings and at intervals, not exceeding 36 inches, around perimeter. s 3.6 FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, CAVITY DRAINAGE, AND VENTS 5 A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated.- 1 j d [ BRICK MASONRY 042113 - 6 i Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Dec-2010 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. B. Install flashing as follows unless otherwise indicated: 1. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could t puncture flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through -wall flashing on _ sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer. 2. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 6 inches into masonry at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 6 inches at ends and turn up not less than 2 inches to form end dams. 3. Install metal drip edges beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible flashing 1 /2 inch back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal drip edge. 4. Install metal flashing termination beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible flashing 12 inch back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal flashing termination. C. Install weep holes in head joints in exterior wythes of first course of masonry immediately above embedded flashing and as follows: l . Use specified weep/vent products to form weep holes. 2. Space weep holes 24 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. 3. Close cavities off vertically and horizontally with blocking in manner indicated. Install through -wall flashing and weep holes above horizontal blocking. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspections: Level l special inspections according to the "International Building Code." Begin masonry construction only after inspectors have verified proportions of site - prepared mortar. B. Mortar Aggregate Ratio Test (Proportion Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 780. 3.8 CLEANING A. In -Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. B. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: I. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes 2. Protect adjacent surfaces from contact with cleaner. _ 3. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by t rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water. " BRICK MASONRY 042113 - 7 �i Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Dec-2010 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. 4. Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.9 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL A. Waste Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including excess or soil - contaminated sand, waste mortar, and broken masonry units, by crushing and mixing with fill material as fill is placed. 1. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches of finished grade. B. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as described above, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property. END OF SECTION 042113 BRICK MASONRY 042113 - 8 December 1. 2010 SECTION 04230 REINFORCED CONCRETE MASONRY PART] GENERAL L L RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2. DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of each type of reinforced unit masonry work is indicated on Drawings and in schedules. Requirements of Section 04200, Unit Masonry, apply to work of this section. 1.3. JOB CONDITIONS A. Protect partially completed masonry against weather, when work is not in progress, by covering top of walls with strong, waterproof, nonstaining membrane. Extend membrane at least 2 feet down both sides of walls and anchor securely in place. B. Protect masonry against freezing when the temperature of the surrounding air is 40 degrees F. and falling. Heat materials and provide temporary protection of completed portions ofmasonry work. Comply with the requirements of the governing code and with the "Construction and Protection Recommendations for Cold Weather Masonry Construction" of the Technical Notes on Brick and Tile Construction by the Structural Clay Products Institute. C. Frozen Materials and Work: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. For masonry which is specified to be wetted, comply with the SCPI recommendations. Do not build on frozen work. Remove and replace masonry work damaged by frost or freezing. D. Do not lower the freezing point of mortar by use of admixtures or antifreeze agents. E. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or masonry grout. 1.4. WORKMANSHIP A. It is the express intent of the contract documents to require a first-class masonry job throughout the entire project. Appearance shall be consideration as well as soundness in judging overall quality and workmanship. B. The Contractor shall engage, and keep on project at all times during masonry operations, an experienced and qualified masonry Foreman or Superintendent, satisfactory to the Architect. C. It shall be the duty of the aforementioned individual to layout all masonry work, expedite, and keep all masonry operations under continuous surveillance to ensure the required class of workmanship herein specified. D. Should defects become apparent, same shall be immediately noted, corrected and if necessary, halt masonry operations until corrective measures can be agreed upon. 1. Defects are defined as, but not necessarily limited to, unequal joints (horizontal and vertical); surfaces in and out of plane; striation of highlights and shadows with parallel lighting; excessive chips; use of distorted units; bunching of blends; jumping bond; displacement of units after initial setting; surfaces out of plumb; staining; use of off color REINFORCED CONCRETE MASONRY 04230 - 1 L� December 1, 2010 Ll. or off texture units; use of units with manufacturers defects; change of mortar color; toothing; excessive racking; lean or unsound mortar; improper bonding and anchoring; and improper pointing and cleaning. 2. If one or more of the aforementioned defects become apparent and corrective measures cannot remedy said defect, the Contractor shall replace any area or areas of defective masonry without any additional cost to the Owner. Any replaced areas shall be made in even units of surface such as vertical joint to a corner, whole wall or otherwise to _ prevent a "patched" appearance in any one surface area. 1.5. SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications and other data for each type of masonry unit, accessory, and other manufactured products, including certifications that each type complies with specified requirements. Include instructions for handling, storage, installations and protection.. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication, bending, and placement of reinforcing bars. Comply with the ACI 315 "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures". Show bar schedules, diagrams of bent bars, stirrup spacing, lateral ties and other arrangements and assemblies as required for fabrication and placement of reinforcement for unit masonry work. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1. MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL 2.2 2.3 A. Manufacturer: Obtain masonry units from one manufacturer, of uniform texture and color for each kind required, for each continuous area and visually related areas. B. Masonry Unit Characteristics: Provide units complying with standards referenced and requirements indicated. CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS (CMU) A. Size: Manufacturer's standard units with nominal face dimensions of 16" long x 8" wide x 8" high (15 5/8" x 7 5/8" x 7 5/8" actual), and 16" long x 12" wide x 8" high (15 5/8" x 11 5/8" x 7 5/8" actual), unless otherwise indicated. B. Special Shapes: Provide where required for lintels, comers, jambs, sash, control joints, headers, bonding and other special conditions. C. Hollow Load -Bearing CMU: ASTM C 90 where shown as "CMU" and as follows: l . Weight Classification: Lightweight units unless otherwise indicated. (Less than 105 lbs. per cu. ft., oven dry weight of concrete). D. Cure units in a moisture -controlled atmosphere or in an autoclave at normal pressure and temperature to comply with ASTM C 90, Type I. E. Limit moisture absorption during delivery and until time of installation to the maximum percentage specified for Type 1 units for the average annual relative humidity as reported by the U.S. Weather Bureau Station nearest the project site. F. Exposed Faces: Provide manufacturer's standard color and texture, unless otherwise indicated. { r I J MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS Li REINFORCED CONCRETE MASONRY 04230 - 2 E, December 1, 2010 A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type 1, except Type III may be used for cold weather construction. Provide natural color. B. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91, Type S. C. Aggregate for Masonry Mortar: ASTM C 144, except for joints less than 1/4" use aggregate graded with 100% passing the No. 16 sieve. D. Aggregate for Masonry Grout: ASTM C 404. E. Water: Clean and potable. 2.4. REINFORCING MATERIALS A. Reinforcing Bars: Provide deformed bars of following grades complying with ASTM A 615 and as follows: 1. Provide Grade 60, except that No. 3 bent ties may be Grade 40. 2. Where No. 2 bars are shown, provide plain, round, carbon steel bars, ASTM A 675, Grade 80. 3. Shop -fabricate reinforcing bars which are shown to be bent or hooked. B. Horizontal Joint Reinforcing and Ties for Masonry: 1. Provide welded wire units prefabricated in straight lengths of not less than 10 feet, with matching comer ("L") units. Fabricate from cold -drawn steel wire complying with ASTM A 82, with deformed continuous side rods and plain cross rods, into units with widths of approximately 2" less than nominal width of walls as required to position side rods for full embedment in mortar coverage of not less than 1/2" elsewhere. Joint reinforcing to meet the following requirements: a. Truss type with diagonal cross rods spaced not more than 16" o.c. b. Number of Side Rods: Single pair for single wythe masonry and as indicated for multi-wythe masonry, or if not otherwise indicated, one side rod for each brick wythe and one side rod for each face shell of each concrete masonry wythe. C. Wire Sizes: Fabricate with 9-gauge side and cross rods, unless otherwise indicated. d. Joint reinforcing to be hot -dip galvanized after fabrication to comply with ASTM A 153, Class B-2 coating (1.5 oz. per sq. ft). 2.5. MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES A. Metal Expansion Joint Strips: Specified under a Division 7 Section, "Flashing and Sheet Metal". 2.6. MORTAR AND MASONRY GROUT MIXES A. General: Do not lower the freezing point of mortar or masonry grout by use of admixtures or anti -freezing agents. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or masonry grout. B. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification, for types of mortar required, unless otherwise indicated. I. Use Type S, ready -mixed masonry cement for all masonry. 2. Limit cementitious materials in mortar to masonry cement. C. Masonry Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476 for masonry grout for use in construction of reinforced and nonreinforced unit masonry. Use masonry grout of consistency indicated or if not otherwise indicated, of consistency (fine or coarse) at time of placement which REINFORCED CONCRETE MASONRY 04230 - 3 December 1, 2010 will completely fill all spaces intended to receive masonry grout. 1. Fine Aggregates complying with ASTM C404, Size No. 1. 2. Coarse Aggregates complying with ASTM C404, Size No. 8 or Size No. 89. 3. Air -Entraining Admixtures will not be permitted in masonry grout. 4. Water -Reducing Admixtures will not be permitted in masonry grout. 5. Grout slump shall be between 10 and 11 inches. 6. Mortar or concrete shall not be substituted for masonry gout. 7. Grout samples shall be taken and tested as per ASTM C1019 for each 5000 sq. ft. of masonry. A grout sample shall be taken and tested whenever there is any change in mix proportions, methods of mixing, or materials used. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1. INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Build masonry construction to the full thickness shown, except, build single-wythe walls (if any) to the actual thickness of the masonry units, using units of nominal thickness shown or specified. B. Cut masonry units with motor -driven saw designed to cut masonry with clean, sharp, un-chipped edges. Cut units as required to provide pattern shown and to fit adjoining work neatly. Use full units without cutting wherever possible. Use dry cutting saws to cut concrete masonry units. C. Do not wet concrete masonry units. D. Lay CMU units with full -face shell mortar beds. Fill vertical head joints (end joints between units) solidly with mortar from face of unit to a distance behind face equal to not less than the thickness of longitudinal face shells. Solidly bed cross -webs of starting courses in mortar. Maintain head and bed joint widths shown, or if not shown, provide 3/8" joints. E. Where solid CMU units are shown, lay with full mortar head and bed joints. 1 F. Stopping and Resuming Work: Rack back 1/2-masonry unit length in each course; do not tooth. Clean exposed surfaces of set masonry, wet units lightly (if specified to be wetted), and remove loose masonry units and mortar prior to laying fresh masonry. G. Built -In Work: As the work progresses, build -in items specified under this and other sections of l - these specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items. H. Fill space between hollow metal frames and masonry solidly with mortar. I. Fill CMU cores with masonry grout under bearing plates, beams, posts, lintels and similar conditions unless otherwise indicated. J. Temporary Formwork: Provide formwork and shores as required for temporary support of reinforced masonry elements. Design, erect, support, brace and maintain formwork._ K. Construct formwork to conform to shape, line and dimensions shown. Make sufficiently tight to i prevent leakage of mortar gout, or concrete (if any). Brace, tie and support as required to IJ maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry. L. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry member has hardened sufficiently to - { carry its own weight and all other reasonable temporary loads that may be placed on it during_ construction. T i= L u s i__ REINFORCED CONCRETE MASONRY 04230 - 4 1 L December 1, 2010 M. Allow not less than 10 days to elapse after completion of masonry beams and lintels before removing shores or forms, provided suitable curing conditions have been obtained during the curing period. 3.2. WALLS AND GROUTING A. Pattern Bond: Lay exposed masonry in the bond pattern shown, or if not shown, lay in running bond with vertical joint in each course centered on units in courses above and below. Bond and interlock each course at comers, unless otherwise shown. Use special -shaped units where shown, and as required for corners, jambs, sash, control joints, lintels, bond beams and other special conditions. Match coursing, bonding, color and texture of new masonry work with existing work, where indicated. B. Layout walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns, with uniform joint widths and to properly locate openings, movement -type joints, returns and offsets. Avoid the use of less -than -half size units at comers, jambs and wherever possible at other locations. C. Lay-up walls plumb and with courses level, accurately spaced and coordinated with other work. D. Intersecting Load -Bearing Walls: if carried up separately, block vertical joint with 8" maximum offsets and provide rigid steel anchors spaced not more than 4'-0" on center vertically, or omit blocking and provide rigid steel anchors at not more than 2'-0" on center vertically. Form anchors of galvanized steel not less than l '/z" x 1/4" x 2'-0" long with ends turned up not less than 2" or with cross -pins. If used with hollow masonry units, embed ends in mortar filled cores. E. Non -load -bearing Interior Partition Walls: Build full height of story to underside of solid structure above, unless otherwise indicated. F. Maintain vertical continuity of core or cell cavities, which are to be reinforced and grouted, to provide minimum clear dimensions indicated and to provide minimum clearance and grout coverage for vertical reinforcing bars. Keep cavities free of mortar. Solidly bed webs in mortar where adjacent to reinforced cores or cells. G. Where horizontal reinforced beams (bond beams) are shown, use special units or modify units to allow for placement of continuous horizontal reinforcing bars. Place small mesh expanded metal lath or wire screening in mortar joints under bond beam courses over cores or cells of non -reinforced vertical cells, or provide units with solid bottoms. H. Use "Fine Grout" for filling spaces less than 4" in both horizontal directions. Use "Coarse Grout" for filling 4" spaces or larger in both horizontal directions. Grouting Technique: At the Contractor's option, use either low -lift or high -lift. K. Use low -lift grouting techniques subject to the requirements which follow: 1. Provide minimum clear dimension of 2" and clear area of 8 sq. in. in vertical cores to be grouted. 2. Place vertical reinforcement prior to laying of CMU. Extend above elevation of maximum pour height as required to allow for splicing. Support in position at vertical intervals not exceeding 192 bar diameters nor 10 feet. 3. Lay CMU to maximum pour height. Do not exceed 4 feet height, or if bond beam occurs below 4 feet height, stop pour at course below bond beam. REINFORCED CONCRETE MASONRY 04230 - 5 December 1.2010 Pour grout using container with spout or by chute. Rod or vibrate grout during placing. Place grout continuously; do not interrupt pouring of grout for more than one hour. Terminate grout pours 1 1/2" below top course of pour. Bond Beams: Stop grout in vertical cells 1 1/2" below bond beam course. Place horizontal reinforcing in bond beams; lap at corners and intersections as shown. Place grout in bond beam course before filling vertical cores above bond beam. L_ Use high -lift grouting techniques subject to the requirements which follow: 1. Do not use high -lift grouting technique for grouting of CMU unless minimum cavity dimension and area is 3" and 10 Sq. in., respectively. 2. Provide cleanout holes in first course at all vertical cells which contain dowels or vertical reinforcing bars. Cleanout openings should be at least 3" by 4". 3. Use units with one face shell removed and provide temporary supports for units above, or use header units with concrete brick supports, or cut openings in one face shell. 4. Construct masonry to full height of maximum grout pour specified, prior to placing grout. 5. Limit grout lifts to a maximum height of 5 feet and grout pour to a maximum height of 24 feet, for single wythe hollow concrete masonry walls, unless otherwise indicated. 6. Place vertical reinforcement before grouting. Place before or after laying masonry units, as required by job conditions. Tie vertical reinforcement to dowels at base of masonry where shown and thread CMU over or around reinforcement. Support vertical reinforcement at intervals not exceeding 192 bar diameters nor 10 feet. 7. Where individual bars are placed after laying masonry, support and fasten reforcement together to prevent displacement by construction loads or by placement of grout or mortar. 8. Where reinforcement is prefabricated into case units before placing, fabricate units with vertical reinforcement bars and lateral ties of the size and spacing shown. 9. Place horizontal reinforcement as the masonry units are laid. 10. Embed lateral tie reinforcement in mortar joints where shown. Place as masonry units are laid, at the vertical spacing shown. M. Preparation of Grout Spaces: Prior to grouting, inspect and clean grout spaces. Remove dust, dirt, mortar droppings, loose pieces of masonry and other foreign materials from grout spaces. Clean reinforcing and adjust to proper position. Clean top surfaces of structural members supporting masonry to ensure bond. After final cleaning and inspection, close cleanout holes and brace closures to resist grout pressures. N. Grout Placing: I . Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained sufficient strength to resist displacement of masonry units and breaking of mortar bond. Install shores and bracing, if required, before starting grouting operations. 2. Place grout by pumping into grout spaces unless alternate methods are acceptable to the Architect. 3. Limit grout pours to sections which can be completed in one working day with not more than one hour interruption of pouring operation. Place grout in lifts which do not exceed 4 feet. Allow not less than 30 minutes, nor more than one hour between lifts of a given pour. Rod or vibrate each grout lift during pouring operation. 4. Where bond beam occurs more than one course below top of pour, fill bond beam course to within I " of vertically reinforced cavities, during construction of masonry. 5. When more than one pour is required to complete a given section of masonry, extend reinforcement beyond masonry as required for splicing. Pour grout to within 1 1/2" of top course of first pour. After grouted masonry is cured, lay masonry units and place reinforcement for second pour section before grouting. Repeat sequence if more pours are required. REINFORCED CONCRETE MASONRY 04230 - 6 1 December 1, 2010 O. Columns, Piers and Pilasters: 1. Use CMU units of the size, shape and number of vertical core spaces shown. If not shown, use units which provide minimum clearances and grout coverage for number and size of vertical reinforcing bars shown. 2. Provide pattern bond shown, or if not shown, alternate head joints in vertical alignment. 3. Where bonded pilaster construction is shown, lay wall and pilaster units together to maximum pour height specified. 3.3. JOINTING A. Joints: Maintain joint widths shown, except for minor variations required to maintain bond alignment. If not otherwise indicated, lay walls with 3/8" joints. Cut joints flush for masonry wall which are to be concealed or to be covered by other materials. Tool exposed joints slightly concave using a jointer larger than joint thickness. Rake out mortar in preparation for application of caulking or sealants where shown. B. Remove masonry units disturbed after laying; clean and relay in fresh mortar. Do not pound corners at jambs to fit stretcher units which have been set in position. If adjustments are required, remove units, clean off mortar, and reset in fresh mortar. 3.4. PLACING REINFORCING A. General: Clean reinforcement of loose rust, mill scale, earth, ice or other materials which will reduce bond to mortar or grout. Do not use reinforcement bars with kinks or bends not shown on the Drawings or final shop drawings, or bars with reduced cross-section due to excessive rusting or other causes. B. Position reinforcement accurately at the spacing shown. Support and secure vertical bars against displacement. Horizontal reinforcement may be placed as the masonry work progresses. Where vertical bars are shown in close proximity, provide a clear distance between bars of not less than the nominal bar diameter or 1 " (whichever is greater). C. For columns, piers and pilasters, provide a clear distance between vertical bars as shown, but not less than 1 % times the nominal bar diameter or 1 ''/7", whichever is greater. Provide lateral ties as shown. D. Splice reinforcement bars where shown; do not splice at other points unless acceptable to the Architect. Provide lapped splices with the minimum lap shown. In splicing vertical bars or attaching to dowels, lap ends, place in contact and wire tie. E. Embed metal ties in mortar joints as work progresses, with a minimum mortar cover of 5/8" on exterior face of walls and 1/2" at other locations. F. Provide continuous horizontal joint reinforcing as shown and specified. Fully embed longitudinal side rods in mortar for their entire length with a minimum cover of 5/8" on exterior side of walls and 1 /2" at other locations. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6". Provide continuity at comers by use of prefabricated "L" sections. Cut and bend units as directed by manufacturer for continuity. Space continuous horizontal reinforcing at 16" o.c. vertically unless otherwise indicated. G. Anchoring: Anchor reinforced masonry work to supporting structures as indicated. 3.5. LINTELS A. Install loose lintels of steel and other materials where shown. Provide minimum bearing of 8" at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. REINFORCED CONCRETE MASONRY 04230 - 7 December 1, 2010 3.6. CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS A. Provide vertical control, expansion, and isolation joints in masonry where shown. Build -in related masonry accessory items as the masonry work progresses. B. See Division 7 sections for "Joint Sealers". C. Build -in joint filler where shown, specified in a Division 7 section "Joint Sealers". Joint width for sealants: 3/8" unless otherwise indicated. 3.7. REPAIR, POINTING AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace masonry units which are loose, chipped, broken, stained or otherwise damaged, or if units do not match adjoining units as intended. Provide new units to match adjoining units and install in fresh mortar or grout, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge any voids or holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point -up all joints at comers, openings and adjacent work to provide a neat, uniform appearance, properly prepared for application of caulking or sealant compounds. C. Clean exposed CMU masonry by dry brushing at the end of each day's work and after final pointing to remove mortar spots and droppings. Comply with recommendations in NCMA TEK Bulletin No. 28. END OF SECTION 04230 This section prepared by Surendran Consulting, LLC. OF tr r ¢¢¢000coc000e0000000¢o ooc C.V.SURENDRAN FS�GISTS )l) `SION4L E f i-`- �1ZZZZZ�1 December 10, 2010 REINFORCED CONCRETE MASONRY 04230 - 8 December 1, 2010 SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL PART] GENERAL LL RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2. DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The extent of structural steel work is shown on the Drawings, including schedules, notes and details to show size and location of members, typical connections and type of steel required. B. Structural steel is that work defined in the AISC "Code of Standard Practice" and as otherwise shown on the Drawings. 1.3. RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Reinforcing Steel and Corrugated Steel Forms - Section 03300 B. Steel Joists - Section 05210 C. Metal Roof Decking - Section 05300 D. Composite Decking - Section 05310 E. Miscellaneous Metal Fabrications - Section 05500 F. Steel Stairs - Section 05710 1.4. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: Comply with the provisions of the following except as otherwise indicated: 1. AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges". Paragraph 4.2.1 of the above code is hereby modified by deletion of the following sentence: "This approval constitutes the Owner's acceptance of all responsibility for the design adequacy of any detail configuration of connections developed by the fabricator as a part of his preparation of these shop drawings." 2. AISC "Specifications for Structural Steel Buildings - Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design", Ninth Edition, and including the "Commentary" and supplements thereto as issued. 3. AISC "Specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" approved by the Research Council on Riveted and Bolted Structural Joints of the Engineering Foundation. 4. AWS DLL - "Structural Welding Code - Steel". 5. ASTM A 6 "General Requirements for Delivery of Rolled Steel Plates, Shapes, Sheet Piling and Bars for Structural Use". B. Qualifications for Welding Work: I. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with the AWS "Standard Qualification Procedure". 2. Provide certification that welders to be employed in the work have satisfactorily passed STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 1 1.5 1.6. December 1, 2010 AWS qualification tests within the previous 12 months. If re -certification of welders is required, retesting will be the Contractor's responsibility. C. Source Quality Control: 1. Materials and fabrication procedures are subject to inspection and tests in the mill, shop, and field, conducted by a qualified inspection agency. Such inspections and tests will not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for providing materials and fabrication procedures in compliance with specified requirements. 2. Promptly remove and replace materials or fabricated components which do not comply. D. Design of Members and Connections: 1. All details shown are typical; similar details apply to similar conditions, unless otherwise indicated. Verify dimensions at the site whenever possible without causing delay in the work. 2. Promptly notify the Architect whenever design of members and connections for any portion of the structure are not clearly indicated. SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's Data, Structural Steel: 1. For information only, submit 2 copies of producer's or manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for the following products. Include laboratory test reports and other data as required to show compliance with these specifications (including specified standards). Indicate by transmittal form that copy of each applicable instruction has been distributed to fabricators, installers and erectors. a. Structural steel (each type), including certified copies of mill reports covering the chemical and physical properties. b. High -strength bolts (each type), including nuts and washers. C. Unfinished bolts and nuts. d. Structural steel primer paint. e. Shrinkage -resistant grout. B. Shop Drawings, Structural Steel: 1. Submit shop drawings prepared under the supervision of a registered professional engineer including complete details and schedules for fabrication and shop assembly of members, and details, schedules, procedures and diagrams showing the sequence of erection. 2. Architect's review of shop drawings will be for general considerations only. Compliance with requirements for materials fabrication and erection of structural steel is the Contractor's responsibility. 3. Include details of cuts, connections, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, and show size, length, and type of each weld. 4. Provide setting drawings, templates, and directions for the installation of anchor bolts and other anchorages to be installed by others. C. All structural steel sball be domestically manufactured and fabricated unless approved in accordance with Section 01640, Substitutions. ......(JSA) DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the site at such intervals to insure uninterrupted progress of the work. B. Deliver anchor bolts and anchorage devices, which are to be embedded in cast -in -place concrete or masonry, in ample time to not delay that work. STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 2 December 1, 2010 i C. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off the ground, using pallets, platforms, or other supports. Protect steel members and packaged �^ materials from erosion and deterioration. D. Do not store materials on the structure in a manner that might cause distortion or damage to the members or the supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1. MATERIALS A. Structural Steel Plates, Shapes: ASTM A 992 or A36. B. Structural Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B, Fy = 46 ksi. C. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E or S, Grade B or ASTM A 501. D. Steel Castings: ASTM A 27, Grade 65-35, medium -strength carbon steel. E. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A 307, Grade C, or A36, nonheaded type unless otherwise indicated. Headed Stud Type Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grade 1015 or 1020, cold finished carbon steel; with dimensions complying with AISC Specifications. G. Unfinished Threaded Fasteners: ASTM A 307, Grade A, regular low -carbon steel bolts and nuts. I . Provide either hexagonal, or square, heads and nuts, except use only hexagonal units for exposed connections. H. High -Strength Threaded Fasteners: Heavy hexagon structural bolts, heavy hexagon nuts, and hardened washers, as follows: I . Quenched and tempered medium -carbon steel bolts, nuts and washers, complying with ASTM A 325. 2. Quenched and tempered alloy steel bolts, nuts and washers, complying with ASTM A 490. Concrete Expansion Anchors: Wedge type anchors meeting Federal Specification FF-S-3251NT AMD 3, Group 11, Type 4, Class 1 or sleeve type anchors meeting Federal Specification FF-S-325 INT AMD 3, Group 11, Type 3, Class 3. Chemical Anchors: Consisting of a threaded rod of zinc -plated AISI 1018 steel, a nut, washer, and sealed glass capsule containing a polyester resin and quartz sand aggregate filler. Rods 3/8 inch through 3/4 inch shall have a minimum yield stress of 60 KSI and tensile strength of 74 KSI. K. Renovation Anchors: Consisting of a threaded rod of zinc -plated AISI 1018 steel, a nut, washer and a galvanized wire mesh screen tube. The two-part adhesive shall be contained in one tube of a plastic cartridge with a hardening agent in the other tube. The two components are to be mixed as they are dispensed. Rods 3/8 through 3/4 inch shall have a minimum yield stress of 60 ksi and a tensile strength of 74 ksi. L. Electrodes for Welding: Comply with AWS Code. M. Structural Steel Primer Paint: Manufacturer's or Fabricator's standard, fast -curing, lead-free, "Universal" primer; selected for good resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, for compatibility with finish paint systems indicated and for capability to provide a sound foundation STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 3 2.2. December 1. 2010 for field -applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure; equal to Tnemec 10-99 (Red) or UE705 Fleet Line Red Oxide Metal Primer by Adams Paint Company. complying with performance requirements for FS TT-P-636 (red oxide). N. Non -Metallic Non -Shrink Grout: Pre -mixed, non-metallic, non -corrosive, non -staining product containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage compensating agents, plasticizing and water reducing agents, complying with CE CRD-C 621. 1. Provide non-metallic, non -shrink grout as manufactured by one of the following: a. Masterflow 713; Master Builders. b. Upcon; Upco Chem. Div., USM Corp. C. Sealtite 588; W.R. Meadows, Inc. d. Enduro 50; Conspec O. Metallic Non -Shrink Grout: Corps of Engineers CRD-C 588, Type M, pre -mixed factory -packaged ferrous aggregate grouting compound. l . Provide metallic non -shrink grout as manufactured by one of the following: a. Embeco 153; Master Builders. b. Ferrolith G; Sonnebom/Contech. C. Kemox C; Sitka Chemical. d. Conspec 100; Conspec FABRICATION A. Shop Fabrication and Assembly: I . Fabricate and assemble structural assemblies in the shop to the greatest extent possible. Fabricate items of structural steel in accordance with AISC Specifications and as indicated on the final shop drawings. Provide camber in structural members as shown. 2. Properly mark and match -mark materials for field assembly. Fabricate for delivery sequence which will expedite erection and minimize field handling of materials. 3. Where finishing is required, complete the assembly, including welding of units, before start of finishing operations. Provide finish surfaces on members exposed in the final structure free of markings, burrs, and other defects. B. Connections: l . Weld or bolt shop connections, as indicated. 2. Bolt field connections, except where welded connections or other connections are indicated. 3. Provide high -strength threaded fasteners for all principal bolted connections, except where unfinished bolts are shown. C. Provide unfinished threaded fasteners for only the bolted connections of secondary framing members to primary members (including purlins, girls and other framing members taking only nominal stress) and for temporary bracing to facilitate erection. D. High -Strength Bolted Construction: Install high -strength threaded fasteners in accordance with AISC "Specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts". Install flat hardened washers over slotted holes occurring in the outer ply of connections. E. Welded Construction: I . Comply with AWS Code for procedures, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. 2. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods which will produce true alignment of axes without warp. F. Stud Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by the manufacturer of the stud STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 4 December 1. 2010 i connectors. Shop weld stud connectors, as shown, to bearing or embedded plates. Use automatic end welding of headed stud connectors in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions. Shear connectors for steel beams in composite construction shall be field welded, see t _ • Section 05310. G. Steel Wall Framing: Select members which are true and straight for the fabrication of steel wall framing. Straighten as required to provide uniform, square and true members in the completed wall framing. H. Build up welded door frames attached to structural steel framing. Weld exposed joints continuously and grind smooth. Plus weld steelbar stops to frames, except where shown removable. Secure removable stops to frames with countersunk, cross -recessed head machine screws, uniformly spaced not more than 10" o.c., unless otherwise shown. Holes for Other Work: 1. Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel framing, and for the passage of other work through steel framing members, as shown on the final shop drawings. Provide threaded nuts welded to framing, and other specialty items as shown to receive other work. 2. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. Do not flame cut holes or enlarge holes by burning. Drill holes in bearing plates. Splicing: Splicing of beams shall be as shown on the Drawings. All other splicing shall be made only with the written consent of the Architect and/or Engineer. When approved, copies of weld tests shall be furnished to the Architect and Engineer. 2.3. SHOP PAINTING A. General: 1. Shop paint all structural steel work, except those members or portions of members to be embedded in concrete or mortar. Paint embedded steel which is partially exposed on the exposed portions and the initial 2" of embedded areas only. 2. Do not paint surfaces which are to be welded or high -strength bolted with friction -type connections. 3. Do not paint surfaces, which are scheduled to receive sprayed -on fireproofing. 4. Apply 2 coats of paint to surfaces which are inaccessible after assembly or erection. Change color of second coat to distinguish it from the first. B. Surface Preparation: After inspection and before shipping, clean steel work to be painted. Remove loose rust, loose mill scale, and splatter, slag or flux deposits. Solvent clean steel to remove all soluble contaminates followed by power tool cleaning to remove all insoluble contaminates in accordance with Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) as follows: 1. SSPC-SP 1 "Solvent Cleaning", or 2. SSPC-SP 2 "Hand Tool Cleaning", or 3. SSPC-SP 3 "Power Tool Cleaning", or 4. SSPC-SP 7 "Brush -Off Blast Cleaning". C. Painting: Immediately after surface preparation, apply structural steel primer paint in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and at a rate to provide a uniform dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. Use painting methods which will result in full coverage of joints, comers, edges and all exposed surfaces. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1. INSPECTION STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 5 3.2 L} . December 1. 2010 A. Erector must examine the areas and conditions under which structural steel work is to be installed, f and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion I of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Erector. ERECTION A. General: Comply with the AISC Specifications and Code of Standard Practice, and as herein ;( specified. B. Surveys: The Owner will employ a registered professional engineer, experienced in survey work, to establish permanent bench marks as shown and as necessary for the accurate erection of structural steel. Check elevations of concrete and masonry bearing surfaces, and locations of anchor bolts and similar devices, before erection work proceeds, and report discrepancies to the Architect. Do not proceed with erection until corrections have been made, or until compensating adjustments to the structural steel work have been agreed upon with the Architect. , C. Surveys: Employ a registered professional engineer, experienced in survey work, to establish permanent bench marks as shown and as necessary for the accurate erection of structural steel. Check elevations of concrete and masonry bearing surfaces, and locations of anchor bolts and similar devices, before erection work proceeds, and report discrepancies to the Architect. Do not proceed with erection until corrections have been made, or until compensating adjustments to the structural steel work have been agreed upon with the Architect. { D. Temporary Shoring and Bracing: Provide temporary shoring and bracing members with connections of sufficient strength to bear imposed loads. Remove temporary members and connections when permanent members are in place and final connections are made. Provide temporary guy lines to achieve proper alignment of the structures as erection proceeds. E. Temporary Planking: Provide temporary planking and working platforms as necessary to effectively complete the work. J,- F. Anchor Bolts: Furnish anchor bolts and other connectors required for securing structural steel to foundations and other in -place work. 1. Furnish templates and other devices as necessary for presetting bolts and other anchors to accurate locations. 2. Refer to Division 3 of these specifications for anchor bolt installation requirements in concrete, and Division 4 for masonry installation. G. Setting Bases and Bearing Plates: I . Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond -reducing materials and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean the bottom surface of base and bearing plates. 2. Set loose and attached base plates and bearing plates for structural members on wedges or other adjusting devices. 3. Tighten the anchor bolts after the supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims, but if protruding, cut off flush with the edge of the base or bearing plate prior to packing with grout. 4. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and bases or plates to ensure that no voids remain. Finish exposed surfaces, protect installed materials, and allow to cure in strict compliance with the manufacturer's instructions, or as otherwise required. H. Field Assembly: 1. Set structural frames accurately to the lines and elevations indicated. Align and adjust the various members forming a part of a complete frame or structure before permanently STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 6 December 1, 2010 fastening. Clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces which will be in permanent contact ,77 before assembly. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment. 2. Level and plumb individual members of the structure within specified AISC tolerances. 3. Establish required leveling and plumbing measurements on the mean operating temperature of the structure. Make allowances for the difference between temperature at time of erection and the mean temperature at which the structure will be when completed and in service. 4. Splice members only where shown or specified. 1. Erection Bolts: On exposed welded construction, remove erection bolts, fill holes with plug welds and grind smooth at exposed surfaces. J. Comply with A1SC Specifications: For bearing, adequacy of temporary connections, alignment, and the removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds. K. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or by the use of drift pins, except in secondary bracing members. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts. L. Gas -Cutting: Do not use gas cutting torches in the field for correcting fabrication errors in the structural framing. Cutting will be permitted only on secondary members which are not under stress, as acceptable to the Architect. Finish gas -cut sections equal to a sheared appearance when permitted. M. Touch -Up Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of the shop paint. Apply paint to exposed areas with the same material as used for shop painting. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. N. Shear Connectors: All areas to which studs are to be attached must be free of all foreign material, such as rust, oil, grease, paint, etc. When the mill scale is sufficiently thick to cause difficulty in obtaining proper welds, it must be removed by grinding or blasting. O. Stud connectors shall be installed on all bearing or embedded plates. Number of shear connectors required is shown on the plans. Use automatic end welding of headed stud connectors in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions. 3.3. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Engage an independent testing and inspection agency to inspect high -strength bolted connections and welded connections and to perform tests and prepare test reports. B. The Owner will engage an independent testing and inspection agency to inspect high -strength bolted connections and welded connections and to perform tests and prepare test reports. C. The testing agency shall conduct and interpret the tests and state in each report whether the test specimens comply with the requirements, and specifically state any deviations therefrom. D. Provide access for the testing agency to places where structural steel work is being fabricated or produced so that required inspection and testing can be accomplished. E. The testing agency may inspect structural steel at the plant before shipment; however, the Architect reserves the right, at any time before final acceptance, to reject material not complying with specified requirements. F. Correct deficiencies in structural steel work which inspections and laboratory test reports have STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 7 December 1.2010 indicated to be not in compliance with requirements. Perform additional tests, at Contractor's expense, as may be necessary to reconfirm any noncompliance of the original work, and as may be necessary to show compliance of corrected work. G. Shop Bolted Connections: Inspect in accordance with AISC specifications. H. Shop Welding: Inspect and test during fabrication of structural steel assemblies, as follows: I. Certify welders and conduct inspections and tests as required. Record types and locations of all defects found in the work. Record work required and performed to correct deficiencies. 2. Perform visual inspection of all welds. 3. Perform tests of welds as follows: a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 109; performed on the root pass and on the finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration not acceptable. C. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94 and ASTM E 142; minimum quality level "2-2T". d. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. Field Bolted Connections: Inspect in accordance with A1SC specifications. Field Welding: Inspect and test during erection of structural steel as follows: 1. Certify welders and conduct inspections and tests as required. Record types and locations of defects found in the work. Record work required and performed to correct deficiencies. 2. Perform visual inspection of all welds. 3. Perform tests of welds as follows: a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 109; performed on the root pass and on the finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration not acceptable. C. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94 and ASTM E 142; minimum quality level "2-2T". d. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. END OF SECTION 05120 This section prepared by Surendran Consulting, LLC. OF TEiy��� �O p000000 ............ ..O (J C.V.SURENDRAN tl oocgoee oeoeon000eoeoo oo .. 33870 ��1�1izL� December 10, 2010 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 8 December 1, 2010 SECTION 05210 STEEL JOISTS PART] GENERAL ] I. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2. DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The extent of steel joists is shown on the Drawings, including basic layout and type of joists required. 1.3. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: Provide joists fabricated in compliance with the following, and as herein specified. 1. SJI "Standard Specifications, Load Tables and Weight Tables" for: a. K-Series Open Web Steel Joists b. KCS-Series Open Web Steel Joists c. LH-Series Long Span Steel Joists d. DLH-Series Deep Longspan Steel Joists e. Joist Girders B. Qualification of Welding Work: 1. Joint connections and splices of joist members shall be made by welding and shall comply with the SH "Standard Specifications" and "Technical Digest #8 - Welding of Open Web Steel Joists". 2. Joists welded in place may be subject to inspection and testing. Expense of removing and replacing any portion of the steel joists for testing purposes will be borne by the Owner if welds are found to be satisfactory. Remove and replace any work found to be defective and provide new acceptable work. 1.4. SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's Data, Steel Joists: 1. Joist manufacturer shall be a member of the Steel Joist Institute. 2. All steel joists shall be domestically manufactured and fabricated unless approved in accordance with Section 01640, Substitutions. ..........(JSA) 3. For information only, submit 2 copies of manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each type of joist and its accessories. Include manufacturer's certification that joists comply with SJI "Standard Specifications". Indicate by transmittal form that a copy of each instruction has been distributed to the Erector. B. Shop Drawings, Steel Joists: 1. Submit detailed drawings showing layout of joist units, special connections, jointing and accessories. Include the mark, number, type, location and spacing ofjoists and bridging. 2. Shop drawings shall show the lengths of top and bottom chords, length and location of top chord extensions, bottom chord struts, deep or sloping seats and any other information required to coordinate the shop drawings with the contract documents. Submittals not having this information will not be approved. STEEL JOISTS 05210 - 1 Ll December 1.2010 r-4 1.5. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store and handle steel joists as recommended in SJI "Standard Specifications". Handle a t v excessive a ses. and store Joists m a manner to avoid deforming members and o avoidstresses. B. Joists shall be delivered to the jobsite in an upright position and shall be unloaded with a two point sling on a winch line from a crane or winch truck. Allowing joists to fall from the bed of a truck will not be permitted. C. Store joists in an upright position with blocking spaced not more than 15 feet on center_ Brace !, , joists in an upright position until hoisted onto structure. PART PRODUCTS 2.1. MATERIALS A. Steel: Comply with SJI "Standard Specifications" + 1 ,< B. Unfinished Threaded Fasteners: ASTM A 307, Grade A, regular hexagon type, low carbon steel. C. Steel Prime Paint: Comply with SJI "Standard Specifications", except asphalt type paint not permitted. 2.2. FABRICATION i IA A. General: Fabricate steel joists in accordance with SJI "Standard Specifications". B. Extended Ends: Provide extended ends on joists where shown, complying with the manufacturers `; standards and requirements of applicable SJI "Standard Specifications" and load tables. C. Ceiling Extensions: Provide ceiling extensions in areas having ceilings attached directly to joist bottom chord. Provide either an extended bottom chord element or a separate unit, to suit manufacturer's standards, of sufficient strength to support the ceiling construction. Extend ends to within 1/2" of the finished wall surface unless otherwise indicated. D. Bridging: ] . Provide horizontal or diagonal type bridging for "open web" joists, complying with SJI "Standard Specifications". 2. Provide diagonal type bridging for "longspan" joists, complying with SJI "Standard Specifications". 3. Provide bridging anchors for ends of all bridging lines terminated at walls or beams. E. End Anchorage: Provide end anchorages to secure joists to adjacent construction, complying with SJI "Standard Specifications", unless otherwise indicated. F. Shop Painting: I . Remove loose scale, heavy rust, and other foreign materials from fabricated joists and accessories before application of shop paint. 2. Apply one shop coat of steel joist primer paint to steel joists and accessories, by spray, dipping, or other method to provide a continuous dry paint film thickness of not less than 0.50 mil. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1. INSPECTION STEEL JOISTS 05210 - 2 December 1, 2010 A. Erector must examine the areas and conditions under which steel joists are to be installed and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Erector. 3.2. ERECTION A. Place and secure steel joists in accordance with SJI "Standard Specifications", final shop drawings, and as herein specified. B. Bearing Plates: 1. Furnish bearing plates to be built into the concrete and masonry construction. a. Refer to Division 3 sections for installation of bearing plates set in concrete. b. Refer to Division 4 sections for installation of bearing plates set in masonry. C. Placing Joists: 1. Do not start placement of steel joists until supporting work is in place and secured. Place joists on supporting work, adjust and align in accurate locations and spacing before permanently fastening. 2. Provide temporary bridging, connections, and anchors to ensure lateral stability during construction. Hoisting cables shall not be released until one line of bolted diagonal bridging nearest midspan for spans of 40 ft. to 60 ft., two lines of bolted diagonal bridging nearest third points of the span for spans of over 60 ft. to 100 ft., and all bolted diagonal bridging lines for spans over 100 ft. are installed. 3. Where joists are bottom bearing, the hoisting cables shall not be released until the ends are laterally restrained and bridging is installed as above. 4. For "K-Series" joists where 4 or 5 rows of bridging are required and for "Longspan" joists with spans 40 feet and longer, the row of bridging nearest the midspan of the joist shall be diagonal bridging. D. Bridging: 1. Install bridging simultaneously with joist erection, before any construction loads are applied. Anchor ends of bridging lines at top and bottom chords where terminated at walls or beams. E. Fastening Joists: I. Field weld joists to supporting steel framework in accordance with SA "Standard specifications" for the type of joists used. Coordinate welding sequence and procedure with the placing of joists. 2. Bolt joists to supporting steel framework in accordance with SJI "Standard Specifications" for the type of joists used. 3. Provide unfinished threaded fasteners for bolted connections, unless otherwise indicated. F. Touch -Up Painting: 1. After joist installation, paint all field bolt heads and nuts, and welded areas, abraded or rusty surfaces on joists and steel supporting members. Wire brush surfaces and clean with solvent before painting. Use the same type of paint as used for shop painting. END OF SECTION 05210 This section prepared by Surendran Consulting, LLC. STEEL JOI OF ej .......................... C.V.SURENDRAN .................... o....o.-/ 33870 �ecember 10, 20] 0 ate_ ONA� -.. r 1-3 No Text SECTION 05300 METAL ROOF DECKING PART] GENERAL LL RELATED DOCUMENTS December 1, 2010 A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2. DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The extent of metal roof decking is shown on the Drawings, including basic layout and type of deck units required. 1.3. RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Corrugated Steel Forms - Section 03300 B. Composite Decking - Section 05310 1.4. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: Comply with the provisions of the following codes and standards, except as otherwise shown or specified: 1. A1S1 "Specification for the Design of Cold -Formed Steel Structural Members". 2. AWS D1.3 - "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel". 3. SDI "Steel Roof Deck Design Manual". B. Qualification of Welding Work: l . Qualify welding processes and welding operators for welding sheet steel in accordance with the AWS "Standard Qualification Procedure". 2. Decking welded in place is subject to inspection and testing. Expense of removing and replacing any portion of decking for testing purposes will be borne by the Owner if welds are found to be satisfactory. Remove work found to be defective and provide new acceptable work. C. Performance Requirements: 1. Compute the properties of metal roof deck sections on the basis of the effective design width as limited by the provisions of the AISI Specifications. Provide not less than the deck section properties shown, including section modulus and moment of inertia per foot of width. 2. Allowable Deflection: Design and fabricate deck for a maximum deflection of 1 /240 of the clear span under the total uniform dead and live load. 3. Uplift Loading: Install and anchor roof deck units to resist gross uplift loading of 45 lbs. per sq. ft. at eave overhang and 30 lbs. per sq. ft. for other roof areas. 1.5. SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's Data: For information only, submit 2 copies of manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each product specified. Include manufacturer's certification as maybe required to show compliance with these specifications. Indicate by transmittal form that a copy of each instruction has been distributed to the Installer. METAL ROOF DECKING 05300 - 1 December 1. 2010 B. Shop Drawings: Submit detailed drawings showing layout of deck panels, anchorage details and every condition requiring closure panels, supplementary framing, special jointing or other accessories. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1. MATERIALS A. Steel for Painted Finish: ASTM A 611, Grades C, D or E. B. Paint for Non -Galvanized Deck: Deck unit manufacturer's baked -on, rust -inhibitive paint, for application to metal surfaces which have been chemically cleaned and phosphate chemical treated. C. Miscellaneous Steel Shapes: ASTM A 36 or ASTM A 992. D. Steel for Galvanized Finish: ASTM A 653. E. Galvanizing: ASTM A 653, coating class G60. F. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High zinc -dust content paint for repair of damaged galvanized surfaces complying with Military Specifications MIL-P-21035 (Ships). G. Flexible Closure Strips for Deck: Manufacturer's standard vulcanized, closed -cell, synthetic rubber. 2.2. FABRICATION A. General: Form deck units in lengths to span 3 or more supports with flush, telescoped or nested 2" end laps and nesting side laps, unless otherwise indicated. Provide deck configurations complying with SDI "Basic Design Specifications", and as specified herein. B. Narrow -Rib Deck: Depth approximately 1 1/2"; ribs spaced not more than 6" o.c.; width of rib opening at roof surface not more than 1 "; width of bottom rib surface not less than 3/8". C. Intermediate -Rib Deck: Depth approximately 1 1 /2"; ribs spaced approximately 6" o.c.; width of rib opening at roof surface not more than 1 3/4"; width of bottom rib surface not less than 1/2"- D. Wide -Rib Deck: Depth approximately 1 1/2"; ribs spaced approximately 6" o.c.; width of rib opening at roof surface not more than 2 1/2"; width of bottom rib surface not less that 1 3/4". E. Long -Span Deck: Depth, approximately 3", ribs spaced approximately 8" o.c.; width of rib opening at roof surface not more than 2 5/8"; unless otherwise shown. F. Acoustical Deck: Same configuration as roof deck units, unless otherwise shown, with perforated surfaces and sound absorption material to provide the NRC rating shown. 1. Provide perforations on vertical webs of open flute roof deck units. Furnish sound absorbing material as specified in Division 7. Deliver to roofing installer for installation as part of his work. G. Provide perforated bottom plate with long -span deck units. Install manufacturer's standard inorganic, mineral fibered sound absorption material as deck units are fabricated. H. Roof Sump Pans: Fabricate from a single piece of not less than 14 gage galvanized sheet steel of the same quality as the deck units; with level bottoms and sloping sides to direct water flow to the drain, unless otherwise shown_ Provide sump pans of adequate size to receive roof drains and METAL ROOF DECKING 05300 - 2 r December 1. 2010 € with bearing flanges not less than 3" wide. Recess pans not less than 1 1/2" below the roof deck - surface, unless otherwise shown or required by deck configuration. Holes for drains will be cut in the field. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1. INSPECTION A. Installer must examine the areas and conditions under which metal roof decking items are to be installed and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer. 3.2. INSTALLATION A. General: Install roof deck units and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and final shop drawings, and as specified herein. Suspended ceilings, light fixtures, ducts, or other utilities shall not be supported by the steel deck. B. Placing Roof Deck Units: 1. Place roof deck units on supporting steel framework and adjust to final position with ends bearing on supporting, members and accurately aligned end to end before being permanently fastened. Lap ends not less than 2". Do not stretch or contract the sidelap interlocks. Place deck units flat and square, secured to adjacent framing without warp or excessive deflection. 2. Do not place deck units on concrete supporting structure until concrete has cured properly and is dry. 3. Coordinate and cooperate with structural steel erector in placing and locating decking bundles to prevent overloading of structural members. 4. Do not use deck units for storage or working platform until permanently secured. C. Fastening Deck Units: 1. Permanently fasten roof deck units to steel supporting members as detailed on the drawings. 2. Use welding washers when welding steel roof deck, thinner than 22 gauge. 3. Comply with AW S requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal -arc welding, the appearance and quality of welds, and the methods used in correcting welding work. 4. Lock side laps between adjacent deck units at intervals not exceeding 36" o.c. by tack welding, button punching, or mechanical fasteners. Weld sidelaps only on decking 18 gage and heavier. D. Cutting and Fitting: 1. Cut and fit roof deck units and accessories around other work projecting through or adjacent to the roof decking, as shown on the Drawings. Provide neat, square and trim cuts. 2. Openings not shown on`the Drawings, such as those required for stacks, conduits, plumbing, vents, etc., shall be cut (and reinforced, if necessary) by the trades requiring the openings. E. Reinforcement at Openings: 1. Provide additional metal reinforcement and closure pieces as required for strength, continuity of decking and support of other work, unless otherwise shown. 2. Reinforce roof decking around openings less than 15" in any dimension by means of a flat steel sheet placed over the opening and fusion welded to the top surface of the deck. Provide steel sheet of the same quality as the deck units, not less than 20 gage, and at METAL ROOF DECKING 05300 - 3 December 1, 2010 least 12" wider and longer than the opening. Provide welds at each corner and spaced not more than 12" o.c. along each side. F. Roof Sump Pans: Place roof sump pans over openings provided in the roof decking and weld to the top decking surface. Space welds not more than 12" o.c. with at least one weld at each corner. Cut opening in the bottom of the roof sump to accommodate the drain size indicated. Provide steel angle frames to support roof sump pans. G. Ridge and Valley Plates: Weld ridge and valley plates to the top surface of the roof decking. Lap end joints not less than 3", with laps made in the direction of water flow. H. Closure Strips: Provide metal closure strips at all open uncovered ends and edges of roof decking, and in the voids between decking and other construction. Fasten into position to provide a complete decking installation. 1. Roof Insulation Support: Provide metal closure strips for the support of roof insulation where the rib openings in the top surface of roof decking occur adjacent to edges and openings. Fasten closure strips into position. 3.3. TOUCH-UP PAINTING A. After roof decking installation, wire brush, clean and paint scarred areas, welds and rust spots on the top and bottom surfaces of decking units and supporting steel members. B- Touch-up shop painted surfaces with the same paint used in the shop, as recommended by the deck manufacturer. C. In areas where touch-up painted surfaces are to be exposed, apply the paint to blend into the adjacent surfaces in a manner that will minimize visual discontinuity in the coatings. D. Touch-up galvanized surfaces with galvanizing repair paint applied in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION 05300 This section prepared by Surendran Consulting, LLC. ....................... C.V.SURENDRAN X ¢aaoaococ0000000a000v0000¢o� 33870 O �tr� 7 FOISTv .f - December 10, 2010 METAL ROOF DECKING 05300 - 4 December 1, 2010 SECTION 05400 COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING PART] GENERAL I.I. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2. DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. All axial or wind loaded light gage steel studs, track, joists, trusses, bridging and related accessories are as indicated on the Contract Drawings and specified herein. B. The types of light gage metal framing units for the project include the following: 1. "C" shaped light gage steel studs 2. "C" shaped light gage steel joists 3. Load -bearing punched channel studs 4. Light gage steel trusses. 1.3. RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Structural Steel - Section 05120 B. Non Load -Bearing Steel Studs - Plaster and Drywall sections in Division 9 1.4. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Engineer, fabricate, and erect cold -formed metal trusses to withstand design loads within limits and under condition required. 1. Design light gage steel trusses for the loads indicated on the plans. 2. Design light gage steel trusses to withstand the loads indicated on the plans without having vertical deflections greater than 1/240 of the span. B. Design trusses to provide for movement of framing trusses without damage or over stressing, sheathing failure, connection failure, or undue strain on fasteners and anchors. C. Engineering Responsibility: Engage a fabricator who assumes undivided responsibility for engineering cold -formed metal trusses by employing a qualified professional engineer to prepare design calculations, shop drawings, and other structural data. 1.5. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: Comply with the provisions of the following codes, specifications and standards, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified: 1. ASTM A 446 Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process Structural (Physical) Quality. 2. ASTM A 525 Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process, General Requirements. 3. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel". 4. ANSI Z49.1 "Safety in Welding and Cutting". 5. AISI "Specification for the Design of Cold -Formed Steel Structural Members", latest edition. COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400 1 1.6. December 1. 2010 B. Component Design: Compute structural properties of studs and joists in accordance with AISI "Specification for the Design of Cold -Formed Steel Structural Members". C. Fire -Rated Assemblies: Where framing units are components of assemblies indicated for a fire -resistance rating, including those required for compliance with governing regulations, provide units which have been approved by governing authorities having jurisdiction. D. Manufacturer: Provide light gage metal framing components of the type(s) indicated, produced by one of the following: 1. "C"-Shaped Load -bearing Studs, 1 5/8" flange: a. Dietrich Industries Inc. - 6" CSJ, 20 gage at 16" o.c. max. b. Delta Metal Products, Inc. - PCS600-20 at 16" o.c. max. C. Unimast, Inc. - 60CSJ20 at 16" o.c. max. 2. "C"-Shaped Steel Joists, 1 5/8" flange: a. Dietrich Industries Inc. - 6" CSJ, 20 gage at 16" o.c. max. b. Delta Metal Products, Inc. - PCS600-20 at 16" o.c. max. C. Unimast, Inc. - 60CSJ20 at 16" o.c. max. 3. Punched channel Load -bearing Studs, 1 3/8" flange. E. The exterior curtain wall system shall be designed to withstand both positive and negative wind pressure with a maximum deflection of L/360. F. The joists shall be designed to support 25 psf uniform live load plus all other loads, with a maximum deflection not exceeding L/240. G. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed cold -formed metal framing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. H. Welding Standards: Comply with the applicable provisions of AWS DLL "Structural Welding Code - Steel" and AWS D1.3 "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel." 1. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer legally authorized to practice in Texas and experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated that have resulted in the installation of cold -formed metal framing similar to this Project in material, design, extent and that have a record of successful in-service performance. SUBMITTALS A. For information only, submit copies of manufacturer's product information and installation instructions for each item of light gage framing and accessories. Distribute one additional copy of installation instructions to the Installer. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for special components and installations not fully dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer's product data. I. Include placing drawings for framing members showing size and gage designations, number, type, location and spacing. Indicate supplemental bracing, splices, accessories, and details as may be required for proper installation. 2. For cold -formed metal trusses, include structural analysis data sealed and signed by the qualified professional engineer who was responsible for its preparation. 1.7. DELIVERY AND STORAGE COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING 054002 December 1, 2010 4- i A. Deliver to the project site in manufacturer's unopened containers or bundles, fully identified with name, brand, type and grade. Protect metal framing units from rusting and damage. Store off the ground in a dry ventilated space or protect with suitable waterproof coverings. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1. METAL FRAMING A. System Components: With each type of metal framing required, provide manufacturers standard steel runners (tracks), blocking, lintels, clip angles, shoes, reinforcements, fasteners, and accessories as recommended by the manufacturer for the applications indicated, as needed to provide a complete metal framing system. B. Materials and Finishes: 1. For 16 gage and heavier units, fabricate metal framing components of structural quality steel sheet conforming to the minimum requirements of ASTM A446, with a minimum yield point of 40,000 psi. 2. For 18 gage and lighter units, fabricate metal framing components of commercial quality steel sheet conforming to the minimum requirements of ASTM A446, with a minimum yield point of 33,000 psi. 3. All galvanized studs, tracks, bridging, and accessories shall be formed of steel having a galvanized coating meeting the requirements of ASTM A525 with a minimum G 60 coating. 4. Provide prime coated finish with one coat of shop -applied red oxide, zinc -chromate, or other similar rust -inhibitive primer. C. "C"-Shape Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped load -bearing steel studs of size, shape, and gage indicated, with l 5/8" flange and flange return lip. D. Steel Stud Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel stud track, un-punched, of web depths indicated, with straight flanges, and gage as indicated. E. "C" Shape Joists: Manufacturers standard C-shape sections of size, shape and gage indicated, with 1 5/8" flange and flange return lip. F. Steel Joist Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel joist track, un-punched, of web depths indicated, with straight flanges, and gage matching the steel joists. G. Punched Channel Studs: Manufacturer's standard, factory punched, load -bearing steel studs of size, shape, and gage indicated, with 1 3/8" flange. 2.2. FRAMING ACCESSORIES A. Fabricate light steel -framing gage accessories of the same material and finish used for framing members, with a minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi. B. Provide supplementary framing, bracing, bridging, solid blocking, web stiffeners, gusset plates, stud kickers, joist hangers, end closures, and reinforcement plates made from the manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration. 2.3. FABRICATION A. General: All framing components shall be cut squarely for attachment to perpendicular members, or as required for an angular fit against abutting members. Members shall be held positively in COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING 054003 PART 3 3.1. December 1, 2010 place until properly fastened. Framing components may be prefabricated into panels prior to erection. Fabricate panels plumb, square, true to line and braced against racking with joints welded. Perform lifting of prefabricated panels in a manner to prevent damage or distortion in any members in the assembly. B. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. y i fifi C. Fastening of components shall be with self tapping screws or welding of sufficient size to insure the strength of the connection. Welds shall be performed by operators qualified in accordance t with Section 6.0 of the American Welding Society's "Structural Welding Code -Sheet Metal" y i (AWS D1.3). v D. Wire tying of framing components is not permitted. t E. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to cold -formed framing manufacturer's instructions with screw penetrating joined members by not less than 3 exposed screw threads. { ., F. Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framingassemblies to withstand handling, delivery, and erection g stresses. Lift fabricated assemblies by method which will prevent damage or distortion. G. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate to from i assemblies a maximum allowable tolerance variation plumb, level, and true to line of 1/8" in 10 feet and as follows: 1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1 /8" from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other 1 finish materials. 2. Fabricate each cold -formed metal framing assembly to a maximum out -of -square tolerance of 1/8". H. Insulating Material: Provide insulation equal to that specified elsewhere in all double jamb studs and double header members which will not be accessible to the insulation contractor. Manufacturer's standard cementitious mixture with a compressive strength of not less than 5000 psi. Thickness to suit required fire rating. I. Steel Shell: Manufacturer's standard to suit required fire rating, finished with one coat shop -applied primer. J ; EXECUTION 1 GENERAL A. Manufacturer's Instructions: Install metal framing systems in accordance with manufacturer's printed or written instructions and recommendations, unless otherwise indicated. B. Cold -formed metal framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation, or it may be field assembled. C. Install cold -formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, true to line, and with connections securely fastened. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. D. Fasten cold -formed metal framing members with self tapping screws or welding of sufficient size 1 to insure the strength of the connection. Wire tying of framing components is not permitted. E. Install framing members in one-piece lengths, unless splice connections are indicated for track or f tension members. 7 COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING 054004 i� Li I December 1, 2010 Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for non -plumb walls or warped surfaces and similar requirements. G. Where stud system abuts structural columns or walls, including masonry walls, anchor ends of stiffeners to supporting structure. H. Install supplementary framing, blocking and bracing in the metal framing system wherever wall or partitions are indicated to support fixtures, equipment, services, casework, heavy trim and furnishings, and similar work requiring attachment to the wall or partition. Where type of supplementary support is not otherwise indicated, comply with the stud manufacturer's recommendations and industry standards in each case, considering the weight or loading resulting from the item supported. Provide temporary bracing and leave in place until framing is permanently stabilized. Fasten reinforcement plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's standard punched openings. K. Erection Tolerances: Install cold -formed metal framing to a maximum allowable tolerance variation from plumb, level, and true to line of 1/8" in 10 feet and as follows: l . Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8" from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finish materials. 3.2. INSTALLATION OF WALL STUD SYSTEM -.� A. Runner Tracks: Install continuous tracks sized as shown. Align tracks accurately to the layout at base and tops of studs. Secure tracks as shown on the drawings for the type of construction involved, except do not exceed 24" o.c. spacing for nail or power -driven fasteners, nor 16" o.c. for other types of attachment. Provide fasteners at corners and ends of tracks. All track butt joints, abutting pieces of track, shall be securely anchored to a common structural element, or they shall be butt -welded or spliced together. B. Studs shall be plumbed, aligned and securely attached to top and bottom runner tracks by either welding or screw fastening at both inside and outside flanges. Studs shall have full bearing against inside track web, prior to stud and track attachment. C. Install headers over wall openings wider than the stud spacing. Fabricate headers of compound shapes indicated or required to transfer load to supporting studs, complete with clip -angle connectors, web stiffeners, or gusset plates. D. Frame wall openings larger than 2'-0" square with double studs at each jamb of frame except where more than 2 are either shown or indicated in manufacturer's instructions. Install runner tracks and jack studs above and below wall openings. Anchor tracks to jamb studs with stud shoes or by welding, and space jack studs same as full -height studs of the wall. Secure stud system all around to wall opening frame in the manner indicated. E. Jack studs or cripples shall be installed below window sills, above window and door heads, at free standing stair rails and elsewhere to furnish support and shall be securely attached to supporting members. F. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing in stud framing indicated to support fixtures, equipment, services, casework, heavy trim, furnishings, and similar work requiring attachment to framing. COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING 054005 December 1. 2010 G. Frame both sides of expansion and control joints, as shown for the wall system, with a separate stud and do not bridge the joint with components of the stud system. H. Splices in studs will not be permitted. 1. Studs shall have a minimum of 10" unpunched steel at both ends of each member. When field cutting reduces this minimum 10" unpunched steel, web stiffening will be required. J. Wall stud bridging shall be attached in a manner to prevent stud rotation. Provide one row of horizontal bridging at mid height of stud walls up to 10'-0" high. Stud walls over 10'-0" high shall have bridging spaced at 4'-0" o.c. maximum. Stud bridging shall be 1 1 /2" cold rolled U-channel or strapping and shall be attached to each stud by welding or attaching with clip angles and screws. K. Wall stud bridging shall be attached in a manner to prevent stud rotation. Provide two rows of horizontal bridging at stud walls up to 10'-0" high. Stud walls over 10'-0" high shall have bridging spaced at 4'-0" o.c. maximum. Stud bridging shall be 1 1/2" cold rolled U-channel or strapping and shall be attached to each stud by welding or attaching with clip angles and screws. L. Diagonal Bracing: Diagonal flat straps shall be placed over the stud flanges without interfering with facing material at a 1:1 slope. Screw attach strapping to each stud. Provide additional vertical studs at ends of strapping. M. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including supplementary framing, web stiffeners, clip angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable wall -framing system. 3.3. INSTALLATION OF JOISTS A. Install level and plumb, complete with bracing and reinforcing as indicated on the Drawings. Provide not less than 1 1 /2" end bearing. B. Install perimeter joist track sized to match joists. Align and securely anchor or fasten track to supporting structure at corners, ends, and spacings indicated. C. Joists shall be located directly over bearing studs or a load distribution member shall be provided at the top track. D. Provide web stiffeners at reaction points where shown on plans with end clips, steel hangers, steel angle clips, steel stud section, or as otherwise recommended by joist manufacturer. E. Secure joists to interior support systems to prevent lateral movement of the bottom flange. F. Joists must have a minimum of 10" un-punched steel at bearing points. G. Joist bridging shall be provided to prevent j oists from rotating or twisting. Use solid bridging and flat strapping. Use solid bridging in first two rows of joist and last two rows of joist. Attach flat strapping to top and bottom flanges of joists from third row extending for a maximum of l 0'-0". Repeat solid bridging for 1 joist space and then another 10'-0" of flat strapping. Joist bridging should be at a maximum of 8'-0" o.c. between supports. H. End blocking shall be provided where joist ends are not otherwise restrained from rotation. COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING 054006 December 1, 2010 3.4. INSTALLATION OF STEEL TRUSSES A. Install, bridge, and brace trusses according to manufacturer's recommendations. B. Space trusses at 24" on center maximum. C. Trusses shall be laterally supported at all panel points and as shown on plans. D. Do not alter, cut, or remove framing members or connections of trusses. E. Erect trusses with plane of truss webs plumb and parallel to each other, align, and accurately position at 24" on center. F. Erect trusses without damaging framing members or connections. G. Install continuous bridging and permanently brace trusses. H. Required X-bracing, shall be installed immediately after erection of the roof trusses. END OF SECTION 05400 ,0,tZz1Zi,Z This section prepared by Surendran Consulting, LLC. NP�� OF T�}�� .'Cy � �'� fit' .o.C.oV.SURENDRAN oaa O 33870 O �� ,GrsT�.R��,�w ONgL i i rj December 10, 2010 COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING 054007 ------ ----- j SECTION 05500 METAL FABRICATION PART] GENERAL LL RELATED DOCUMENTS December 1.2010 A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division I specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2. DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The extent of miscellaneous metal work is shown on the Drawings and includes items fabricated from metal shapes, plates, angles, lintels, tubes, and pipe which are not a part of structural steel or other metal systems in other sections of these specifications. 1.3. RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Concrete Work - Section 03300 B. Structural Steel - Section 05120 C. Steel Stairs - Section 05710 1.4. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication, where possible. Do not delay job progress; allow for trimming and fitting wherever taking field measurements before fabrication might delay work. B. Inserts and Anchorages: Furnish inserts and anchoring devices which must be set in concrete for installation of miscellaneous metal work. Provide setting drawings, templates, instructions and directions for installation of anchorage devices. Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay. 1. See Section 03300, Concrete Work, for installation of inserts and anchorage devices. C. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. 1.5. SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's Data, Miscellaneous Metal: For information only, submit manufacturer's specifications, anchor details and installation instructions for products to be used in the fabrication of miscellaneous metal work. Including paint products. Indicate by transmittal that copy of instructions has been distributed to Installer. B. Shop Drawings, Miscellaneous Metal: Submit shop drawings for fabrication and erection of miscellaneous metal assemblies. Include plans, elevations, details, sections and connections. Show anchorages and accessory items. PART 2 PRODUCTS METAL FABRICATION 05500 - 1 December 1.2010 , 1 , 2.1. MATERIALS A. Metal Surfaces, General: For fabrication of miscellaneous metal work which will be exposed to view, use only materials which are smooth and free of surface blemishes including pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names and roughness. B. Structural Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars: ASTM A 36. C. Steel Tubing: Hot -formed, welded or seamless, ASTM A 501. D. All galvanizing shall be hot dipped galvanizing, ASTM A 123 or ASTM A 386. E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53; type as selected; Grade A; black finish unless galvanizing is required; standard weight (Schedule 40), unless otherwise shown or specified. F. Concrete Inserts: Threaded or wedge type, galvanized ferrous casting, either malleable iron ASTM A 47 or cast steel ASTM A 27; provide bolts, washers and shims as required, hot -dip galvanized ASTM A 153. G. Concrete Expansion Anchors: Wedge type anchors meeting Federal Specification FF-S-3251NT AMD 3, Group 11, Type 4, Class 1 or sleeve type anchors meeting Federal Specification FF-S-325 INT AMD 3, Group II, Type 3, Class 3. H. Chemical Anchors: Consisting of a threaded rod of zinc -plated AISI 1018 steel, a nut, washer, and sealed glass capsule containing a polyester resin and quartz sand aggregate filler. Rods 3/8 inch through 3/4 inch shall have a minimum yield stress of 60 KSl and tensile strength of 74 KSI. 1. Renovation Anchors: Consisting of a threaded rod of zinc -plated AISI 1018 steel, a nut, washer and a galvanized wire mesh screen tube. The two-part adhesive shall be contained in one tube of a plastic cartridge with a hardening agent in the other tube. The two components are to be mixed as they are dispensed. Rods 3/8 through 3/4 inch shall have a minimum yield stress of 60 ksi and a tensile strength of 74 ksi. J. Toggle Bolts: Tumble -wing type, complying with FS FF-B-588, type, class and style as required. K. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Manufacturer's or Fabricator's standard, fast -curing, lead-free, "Universal" primer; selected for good resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, for compatibility with finish paint systems indicated and for capability to provide a sound foundation for field -applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure; equal to Tnemec 10-99 (Red) or UE705 Fleet Line Red Oxide Metal Primer by Adams Paint Company. complying with performance requirements for FS TT-P-636 (red oxide). 2.2. FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Workmanship: Use materials of size and thickness shown, or if not shown, of required size and thickness to produce strength and durability in fmished product. Work to dimensions shown or accepted on shop drawings, using proven details of fabrication and support. Use type of materials shown or specified for various components of work. B. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight sharp edges. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1 /32" unless otherwise shown. Form bent -metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. METAL FABRICATION 05500 - 2 1 E December 1.2010 C. Weld corners and seams continuously, complying with AW S Code. Grind exposed welds smooth and flush, to match and blend with adjoining surfaces. D. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners wherever possible. Use exposed fasteners of type shown, or if not shown, phillips flat -head (countersunk) screws or bolts. E. Provide for anchorage of type shown, coordinated with supporting structure. Fabricate and space anchoring devices as shown and as required to provide adequate support for intended use. F. Cut, reinforce, drill and tap miscellaneous metal work as required to receive finish hardware and similar items. G. Shop Painting: 1. Shop paint miscellaneous metal work, except members or portions of members to be embedded in concrete or masonry, surfaces and edges to be field welded, and galvanized surfaces, unless otherwise specified. 2. Remove oil, grease and similar contaminants in accordance with SSPC-SP 1 "Solvent Cleaning". 3. Remove scale, rust and other deleterious materials before applying shop coat. Clean off heavy rust and loose mill scale in accordance with SSPC-SP 2 "Hand Tool Cleaning" or SSPC-SP 3 "Power Tool Cleaning", or SSPC-SP 7 "Brush -Off Blast Cleaning". 4. Immediately after surface preparation, brush or spray on primer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, and at rate to provide uniform dry film thickness of 2.0 mils for each coat. Use painting methods which will result in full coverage of joints, comers, edges and exposed surfaces. 5. Apply one shop coat to fabricated metal items, except apply 2 coats of paint to surfaces inaccessible after assembly or erection. 2.3. MISCELLANEOUS METAL ITEMS A. Carpenter's Iron Work: Furnish bent or otherwise custom fabricated bolts, plates, anchors, hangers, dowels and other miscellaneous steel and iron shapes as required for framing and supporting woodwork, and for anchoring or securing woodwork to concrete or other structures. Straight bolts and other stock rough hardware are required under other sections. B. Manufacture or fabricate items of sizes, shapes and dimensions required. Furnish malleable iron washers for heads and nuts which bear on wood structural connections; elsewhere, furnish steel washers. C. Miscellaneous Framing and Supports: 1. Provide miscellaneous steel framing and supports which are not a part of structural steel framework, as required to complete work. 2. Fabricate miscellaneous units to sizes, shapes and profiles shown or, if not shown, of required dimensions to receive adjacent other work to be retained by framing. Except as otherwise shown, fabricate from structural steel shapes and plates and steel bars, of welded construction using mitered corners, welded brackets and splice plates and minimum joints for field connection. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware and similar items. D. Safety Nosings: At all exterior concrete steps furnish and install Wooster No. 101 or equal, aluminum (with abrasive filler) safety treads securely anchored into concrete. 1. At interior steps, furnish and install Wooster No. 431 or equal, aluminum with abrasive filled ribs and recess to receive 1/8" floor tile. METAL FABRICATION 05500 - 3 December 1.2010 E. Dock Bumpers: ] . Where detailed on the plans, provide bumpers of the horizontal type 9" to l 0" high x 12" wide spaced as indicated on the Drawings. Installation as required by the manufacturer. 2. Manufacturers offering laminated tread type bumpers for horizontal mounting to comply with the requirements include the following: a. Bumpers Inc.; Cleveland, Ohio b. Durable Mat. Co.; Norfolk, Ohio and Santa Clara, California C. Kelley Company, Inc.; Milwaukee, Wisconsin d. Pawling Rubber Corp.; East Pawling, New York and Palo Alto, California e. Rite Hite Corp.; Cudahy, Wisconsin F. Stair Handrails: Furnish and install 1 1/2" diameter standard steel pipe handrails as detailed on the Drawings. All welds shall be ground smooth. Railings supported from walls shall be fastened to brackets equal to Julius Blum No. 306 wall brackets. G. Guardrails: Furnish and install 1 1/2" diameter standard steel pipe TSl'/2xl'/:x3/16 steel guardrails as detailed on the Drawings. All Welds shall be ground smooth. H. Work Bench: Provide 22 gage galvanized steel sheet cover. Pipe legs to be as detailed. 1. Perimeter Angles: Furnish and install continuous angles at edge of gypsum deck or concrete floors and roof decks where indicated, and frame all openings in same as noted or detailed. Furnish all necessary clips or supports. Floor Edging: At the termination of floor slab under Overhead Type Doors, furnish angles as noted to provide a weatherseal. K. Skylight and Miscellaneous Bracing: Furnish all bolts, screws, anchors, wire and fasteners to fit every requirement. Where moisture conditions prevail, furnish galvanized rust -proof materials. L. Ladder: Shall comply with ANSI A14.3, Safety Code for Fixed Ladders. 1. Unless otherwise shown, provide ladder with l /2"x2 1 /2" continuous flat steel bar side rails with eased edges spaced 18" apart. Provide 3/4" diameter solid steel bar rungs spaced 12" o.c. fit into centerline of side rails, plug welded and ground smooth on outer face. 2. Support side rails at top and bottom and at intermediate points not more than 5'-0" o.c. with welded steel brackets attached to wall to hold ladder clear of wall a minimum of 7" from wall to centerline of rungs. M. Roof Hatch: Equal to a Bilco Co. Type S-12, 30"x36" with integral curb and flashing system. Use manufacturer's standard manually operated type latching system with hold open mechanism and inside locking hasp. (Use type S-20 for JSA) N. Steel Cable: Shall be 3/8 inch ASTM A 603, Class A, Zinc -Coated Steel Structural Wire Rope with clamps and tumbuckles as required to complete installation. Furnish where detailed for exterior ramp and step railing, and for suspension of the space frame. O. Floor Gratings: Gratings for catwalks and spiral stair landing shall be equal to Weldforged welded rectangular design, type W/B, as manufactured by IKG Industries, a division of Harsco Corporation. Furnish with main bearing bar sizes and spacings as detailed on the drawings. Finish to be prime painted. P. Trench Grating: Steel grating for trenches in floor shall be W-22-4 (2'/z x 3/8) STEEL. The finish for the steel trench grating shall be the manufacturer's standard galvanized coating. The top METAL FABRICATION 05500 - 4 1i December I, 2010 surface of the bearing and/or cross bars shall be plain. Provide banding in accordance with the Heavy Duty Metal Bar Grating Manual, ANSI/NAAMM MBG 532. Steel used for bearing bars, cross bars, and connecting bars of rectangular section shall conform to ASTM A569 for hot rolled carbon steel sheet and strip and ASTM A36 for structural steel bars. Cross bars made of wire rod shall conform to ASTM A510 for carbon steel wire rods and coarse round wire, except that T permissible tolerance on diameter of coarse round wire shall be + 0.005 in. Furnish trench grating in 2'-0" lengths. Q. Trench Floor Plate: Steel floor plate for floor trenches shall be 1 /4" thickness with a raised pattern on the top surface and shall be ASTM A36. Furnish trench floor plate in maximum 6'-0" lengths. R. Catwalk Expanded Metal: Provide 4.27# Catwalk l0' SWD x T-10" LWD carbon steel expanded metal grating for the walking surface of the catwalk. The expanded metal grating shall be shop prime painted and shall be welded to the supporting steel structure at 6" O.C. at all edges and supports. Downspout Boots: Where shown on the drawings, shall be Type DS 1 as manufactured McKinley Iron Works, Fort Worth, TX. Furnish 4 feet tall, 4" x 6" size Aluminum with powder blast satin finish. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1. INSTALLATION A. Anchorages: Furnish setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorages, such as concrete inserts, anchor bolts and miscellaneous items having integral anchors, which are to be embedded in concrete construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to project site. B. Fastening to In -Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing miscellaneous metal items to in -place constructions; including threaded fasteners for concrete inserts, toggle bolts, through -bolts, lag bolts, wood screws and other connectors as required. C. Cutting, Fitting and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling and fitting required for installation of miscellaneous metal items. Set work accurately in location alignment and elevation, plumb, level, true and free of rack, measured from established lines and levels. Provide temporary bracing of anchors in formwork for items which are to be built into concrete or similar construction. D. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight hairline joints. Weld connections which are not to be left as exposed joints, but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Grind joints smooth and touch-up shop paint coat. Do not weld, cut or abrade the surfaces of exterior units which have been hot -dip galvanized after fabrication, and are intended for bolted or screwed field connections. E. Field Welding: Comply with AWS Code for procedures of manual shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds made, and methods used in correcting welding work. METAL FABRICATION 05500 - 5 December 1, 2010 F. Touch -Up Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. END OF SECTION 05500 This section prepared by Surendran Consulting, LLC. ti1�E OF "'Q r' �t�4t-OC CCOCCGC Ot O600C � (' et�C.V.SURENDRAN oot 33870 r r December 10, 2010 METAL FABRICATION 05500 - 6 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. SECTION 061053 - MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Wood blocking and nailers. 2. Wood furring and grounds. 3. Plywood backing panels. Dec-2010 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory -fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules -writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. I . Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 WOOD -PRESERVATIVE -TREATED MATERIALS A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U 1; Use Category UC2. 1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. B. Kiln -dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material. C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review. D. Application: Treat all miscellaneous carpentry unless otherwise indicated. MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 061053 - 1 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. Dec-20I 0 i' I. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing. 2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. 3. Wood framing and furring attached directly to the interior of below -grade exterior masonry or concrete walls. 4. Wood framing members that are less than 18 inches above the ground in crawl spaces or unexcavated areas. 5. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs -on -grade. 2.3 DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING A. Other Framing: Construction, Stud, or No. 3 grade and any of the following species: I. Hem -fir (north); NLGA. 2. Southern pine; SPIB. 3. Douglas fir -larch; WCL1B or WWPA. 4. Spruce -pine -fir; NLGA. 5. Douglas fir -south; WWPA. 6. Hem -fir; WCL1B or WWPA. 7. Douglas fir -larch (north); NLGA. 8. Spruce -pine -fir (south); NeLMA, WCL1B, or WWPA. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following: I. Blocking. 2. Nailers. 3. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. 4. Furring. 5. Grounds. B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Standard, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber of any species. C. For concealed boards, provide lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species and grades: I . Mixed southern pine, No. 3 grade; SPIB. 2. Eastern softwoods, No. 3 Common grade; NELMA. 3. Northern species, No. 3 Common grade; NLGA. 4. Western woods, Standard or No. 3 Common grade; WCLIB or WWPA. MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 061053 - 2 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. Dec-20l 0 2.5 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS A. Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exterior, C-C Plugged, fire -retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 1/2-inch nominal thickness. 2.6 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture. 1. Where carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure -preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot -dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M. B. Power -Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272. C. Screws for Fastening to Metal Framing: ASTM C 1002, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Flexible Flashing: Self-adhesive butyl rubber compound, bonded to a high -density polyethylene film, aluminum foil, or spunbonded polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. B. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD I, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated. C. Install plywood backing panels by fastening to studs; coordinate locations with utilities requiring backing panels. D. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated. E. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative -treated lumber. F. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: l . NES NER-272 for power -driven fasteners. MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 061053 - 3 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. 2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code. END OF SECTION 061053 Dec-2010 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 061053 - 4 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Dec-2010 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. SECTION 064113 - WOOD -VENEER -FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY r _ A. Section Includes: 1. Architectural wood cabinets. 2. Wood fumng, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing architectural wood cabinets unless concealed within other construction before cabinet installation. 3. Shop finishing of architectural wood cabinets. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product, including cabinet hardware and accessories and finishing materials and processes. B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components. C. Samples: 1. Lumber for transparent finish, for each species and cut, finished on one side and one edge. 2. Exposed cabinet hardware and accessories, one unit for each type and finish. 1.3 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cabinets until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. PART2-PRODUCTS �- - 2.1 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CABINETS, GENERAL A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for grades of architectural wood cabinets indicated for construction, finishes, P� installation, and other requirements. 2.2 WOOD CABINETS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. Grade: Custom. WOOD -VENEER -FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064113 - 1 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Dec-2010 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. B. Certified Wood: Wood cabinets for transparent finish shall be produced from wood certified as "FSC Pure" according to FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship," and FSC STD-40-004, "FSC Standard for Chain of Custody Certification." C. Type of Construction: Face frame. D. Cabinet and Door and Drawer Front Interface Style: Reveal overlay. E. Reveal Dimension:'/2 inch. F. Wood for Exposed Surfaces: 1. Species: Red oak 2. Cut: Plain sliced/plain sawn 3. Grain direction: Vertical for doors and fixed panels, horizontal for drawer fronts. 4. Matching of veneer leaves: Slip match. 5. Veneer matching within panel face: Center -balance match. G. Semiexposed Surfaces: Provide surface materials indicated below: 1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: Compatible species to that indicated for exposed surfaces, stained to match. 2. Drawer Subfronts, Backs, and Sides: Solid -hardwood lumber, stained to match species indicated for exposed surfaces. 3. Drawer Bottoms: Thermoset decorative panels. H. Dust Panels: 1/4-inch plywood or tempered hardboard above compartments and drawers unless located directly under tops. 2.3 WOOD MATERIALS A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated. 1. Wood Moisture Content: 5 to 10 percent. B. Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated. 1. Veneer -Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1. 2. Thermoset Decorative Panels: Particleboard or medium -density fiberboard finished with thermally fused, melamine -impregnated decorative paper and complying with requirements of NEMA LD 3, Grade VGL, for test methods 33, 3.4, 3.6, 3.8, and 3.10. 2.4 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets. WOOD -VENEER -FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064113 - 2 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Dec-2010 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. B. Butt Hinges: 2-3/4-Inch, five -knuckle steel hinges made from 0.095-inch- thick metal, and as follows: 1. Semiconcealed Hinges for Overlay Doors: BHMA A 156.9, B01521. C. Wire Pulls: Back mounted, solid metal, 4 inches long, 5!16 inch in diameter. D. Catches: Magnetic catches, BHMA A156.9, B03141. E. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: BHMA A156.9, B04071; with shelf rests, B04081. F. Shelf Rests: BHMA A l 56.9, B04013; metal. G. Drawer Slides: BHMA A 156.9. 1. Grade 1 and Grade 2: Side mounted; full -extension type; zinc -plated steel with polymer rollers. 2. For drawers not more than 3 inches high and not more than 24 inches wide, provide Grade 2. 3. For drawers more than 3 inches high but not more than 6 inches high and not more than 24 inches wide, provide Grade 1. 4. For drawers more than 6 inches high or more than 24 inches wide, provide Grade 1HD- 100. H. Door Locks: BHMA A l 56.11, E07121. 1. Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041. J. Door and Drawer Silencers: BHMA A] 56.16, L03011. K. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A] 56.18 for BHMA finish number indicated. 1. Satin Chromium Plated: BHMA 626 for brass or bronze base; BHMA 652 for steel base. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. B. Shop -cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing -in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. 2.6 SHOP FINISHING A. General: Finish architectural wood cabinets at fabrication shop as specified in this Section. Defer only final touchup, cleaning, and polishing until after installation. WOOD -VENEER -FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064113 - 3 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. Dec-2010 1 i B. Preparation for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing architectural wood cabinets, as applicable to each unit of work. 1. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed surfaces of cabinets. C. Transparent Finish: 1. Grade: Custom. 2. Finish: System - 5, conversion varnish. 3. Staining: Match approved sample for color. 4. Filled Finish for Open -Grain Woods: After staining, apply wash -coat sealer and allow to dry. Apply paste wood filler and wipe off excess. Tint filler to match stained wood. 5. Sheen: Semigloss, 46-60 gloss units measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM D 523. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Before installation, condition cabinets to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install cabinets level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1 %8 inch in 96 inches. B. Scribe and cut cabinets to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts. C. Anchor cabinets to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing. Use fine finishing nails for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork. D. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. 1. Install cabinets with no more than 1%8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. E. Touch up finishing work specified in this Section after installation of woodwork. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed. WOOD -VENEER -FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064113 - 4 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. END OF SECTION 064113 Dec-2010 WOOD -VENEER -FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064113 - 5 tom; No Text Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Dec-2010 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. SECTION 064600 - WOOD TRIM PART l - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. l . Interior standing and running trim. .. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale -- details, attachment devices, and other components. C. Samples: 1. Lumber and panel products with shop -applied opaque finish, for each finish system and (~ color, with exposed surface finished. 1.3 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations for Interior Work: Do not deliver or install interior wood trim until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD TRIM, GENERAL A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for grades of wood trim indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. 2.2 INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM FOR OPAQUE FINISH A. Grade: Custom. B. Certified Wood: Interior trim for opaque finish shall be certified as "FSC Pure" according to FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship," and FSC STD-40-004, "FSC Standard for Chain of Custody Certification." C. Wood Species: Any closed -grain hardwood. WOOD TRIM 064600 - 1 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. 2.3 WOOD MATERIALS Dec-2010 { , A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of wood trim and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Fabricate wood trim to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following: l . Edges of Solid -Wood (Lumber) Members: 1- 16 inch unless otherwise indicated. B. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat members except for members with ends exposed in finished work. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Before installation, condition wood trim to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Grade: Install wood trim to comply with same grade as item to be installed. B. Install wood trim level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims Install level and plumb to a tolerance of l; S inch in 96 inches. C. Scribe and cut wood trim to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts. D. Anchor wood trim to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing. Use fine finishing nails for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork. 1. For shop -finished items, use filler matching finish of items being installed. E. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible. Do not use pieces less than 60 inches long except where shorter single -length pieces are necessary. I. Install standing and running trim with no more variation from a straight line than lib inch in 96 inches. END OF SECTION 064600 WOOD TRIM 064600 - 2 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. SECTION 072200 — ROOF INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Rigid Roof Insulation. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01, Administrative, procedural and temporary work requirements. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include plan and attachment details. C. Samples: For product specified. Dec-2010 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products. B. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of Rigid insulation that fail(s) in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Atlas Roofing Corporation. (www.atlas roofing.com) Hunter Panels. (www.hpanels.com) ROOF INSULATION 072200 - 1 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. Rmax. (www.rmaxinc.com) Dec-2010 t' 2.2 MATERIALS 2.3 RIGID ROOF INSULATION A. Type ASTM C1289, Type I, Class 1, rigid polyisocyanurate, reinforced core, faced with aluminum foil both sides. Square edges. B. Thermal Resistance: Minimum R value of R-30, calculated in accordance with ASTM C1303. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Hot dipped galvanized or fluoropolymer coated steel, type and length suited to project conditions, with galvanized steel plates. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine Rigid Insulation before installation. Reject any material that appears to be or has been wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Apply with long edges perpendicular to deck ribbing. B. Stagger end joints in adjacent rows. C. Locate ends over solid bearing. D. If insulation is layered to achieve slopes; apply top layer with long edges perpendicular to those of base layer. Stagger joints in adjacent rows. Offset joints from those of base layer. E. Mechanically fasten to deck in manufacturers fastening pattern. F. Fit insulation boards to each other and at perimeter and around penetrations with maximum 3/8" voids. 3.3 TOLERANCES A. Surface flatness of insulation: Plus or minus'/4" in 10 feet maximum. ROOF INSULATION 072200 - 2 r �I _ Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. END OF SECTION 072200 Dec-20I 0 ROOF INSULATION 072200 - 3 No Text Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Dec-2010 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. SECTION 075423 - THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Adhered TPO membrane roofing system. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For roofing system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. C. Samples for Verification: For the following products: l . Sheet roofing, of color specified. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance data. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by membrane roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's standard or customized form, without monetary limitation, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of membrane roofing system that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. WarrantyPeriod: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING 075423 - 1 L Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited_ PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. 2.2 A. B. C. D. E. F. TPO MEMBRANE ROOFING Dec-2010 i �i Fabric -Reinforced Thermoplastic Polyolefin Sheet: ASTM D 6878, internally fabric or scrim reinforced, uniform, flexible TPO sheet. __1, .Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: b. C. d. __ e. h. 2. Thickness: 45 mils, nominal. AUXILIARY MEMBRANE ROOFING MATERIALS General: Auxiliary membrane roofing materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use, and compatible with membrane roofing. 1. Liquid -type auxiliary materials shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction. Sheet Flashing: Manufacturer's standard unreinforced thermoplastic polyolefin sheet flashing, 55 mils thick, minimum, of same color as sheet membrane. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard, predrilled stainless -steel or aluminum bars, approximately l by 1 / 8 inch thick; with anchors. Metal Battens: Manufacturer's standard, aluminum -zinc -alloy -coated or zinc -coated steel sheet, approximately 1 inch wide by 0.05 inch thick, prepunched. Fasteners: Factory -coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion - resistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening membrane to substrate, and acceptable to membrane roofing system manufacturer. G. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet flashings, preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, T joint covers, lap sealants, termination reglets, and other accessories. THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING 075423 - 2 E Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Dec-2010 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. 2.3 WALKWAYS A. Flexible Walkways: Factory -formed, nonporous, heavy-duty, slip -resisting, surface -textured walkway pads, approximately 3/16 inch thick, and acceptable to membrane roofing system manufacturer. 1. Size: 24 by 24 inches. Manufacture pavers to dimensional tolerances of plus or minus 1 i16 inch in length, height, and thickness. 2. Weight: 18 lb/sq. ft. 3. Compressive Strength: 7500 psi, minimum. 'PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Coordinate installing membrane roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday. B. Comply with membrane roofing system and insulation manufacturer's written instructions for installing roof insulation. C. Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated. D. Install insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness. Where overall insulation thickness is 2.7 inches or greater, install two or more layers with joints of each succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 6 inches in each direction. E. Mechanically Fastened and Adhered Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and secure first layer of insulation to deck using mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified board -type roof insulation to deck type. 1. Fasten first layer of insulation to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof. 2. Set each subsequent layer of insulation in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt, applied within plus or minus 25 deg F of equiviscous temperature. 3. Set each subsequent layer of insulation in adhesive, firmly pressing and maintaining insulation in place. F. Install cover boards over insulation with long joints in continuous straight lines with end joints staggered between rows. Offset joints of insulation below a minimum of 6 inches in each direction. Loosely butt cover boards together. 1. Fasten cover boards to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof. 3.2 ADHERED MEMBRANE ROOFING INSTALLATION A. Adhere membrane roofing over area to receive roofing and install according to membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING 075423 -3 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Dec-2010 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. B. Accurately align membrane roofing and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps. C. Bonding Adhesive: Apply to substrate and underside of membrane roofing at rate required by manufacturer and allow to partially dry before installing membrane roofing. Do not apply to splice area of membrane roofing. D. In addition to adhering, mechanically fasten membrane roofing securely at terminations, penetrations, and perimeter of roofing. E. Apply membrane roofing with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible. F. Seams: Clean seam areas, overlap membrane roofing, and hot-air weld side and end laps of membrane roofing and sheet flashings according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure a watertight seam installation. 1. Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld continuity. Apply lap sealant to seal cut edges of sheet membrane. 2. Verify field strength of seams a minimum of twice daily and repair seam sample areas. 3. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing that does not comply with requirements. 3.3 BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories and adhere to substrates according to membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. B. Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate and allow to partially dry. Do not apply to seam area of flashing. C. Flash penetrations and field -formed inside and outside comers with cured or uncured sheet flashing. D. Clean seam areas, overlap, and firmly roll sheet flashings into the adhesive. Hot-air weld side and end laps to ensure a watertight seam installation. E. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings and mechanically anchor to substrate through termination bars. 3.4 WALKWAY INSTALLATION A. Flexible Walkways: Install walkway products in locations indicated. Heat weld to substrate or adhere walkway products to substrate with compatible adhesive according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect roofing installation on completion. THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING 075423 - 4 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. Dec-201 0 B. Repair or remove and replace components of membrane roofing system where inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements. END OF SECTION 075423 THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFI-N (TPO) ROOFING 075423 - 5 I W--M- : Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Dec-2010 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. SECTION 076200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: I. Formed roof drainage sheet metal fabrications. 2. Formed wall sheet metal fabrications. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show installation layouts of sheet metal flashing and trim, including plans, elevations, expansion joint locations, and keyed details. Distinguish between shop- and field - assembled work. 1. Include details for forming, joining, supporting, and securing sheet metal flashing and trim, including pattern of seams, termination points, fixed points, expansion joints, expansion joint covers, edge conditions, special conditions, and connections to adjoining work. C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each finish specified. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance data. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" unless more stringent requirements are specified or shown on Drawings. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace sheet metal flashing and trim that shows evidence of deterioration of factory -applied finishes within 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 1 I Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 2.2 2.3 I1 Vj 0 I: SHEET METALS Dec-2010 General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective film before shipping. Metallic -Coated Steel Sheet: Restricted flatness steel sheet, metallic coated by the hot -dip process and prepainted by the coil -coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M. 1. Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation; structural quality. UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS Polyethylene Sheet: 6-mil- thick polyethylene sheet complying with ASTM D 4397. Felt: ASTM D 226, Type II (No. 30), asphalt -saturated organic felt, nonperforated. C. Self -Adhering, High -Temperature Sheet: Minimum 30 to 40 mils thick, consisting of slip - resisting polyethylene -film top surface laminated to layer of bury] or SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release -paper backing; cold applied. Provide primer when recommended by underlayment manufacturer. 1. Thermal Stability: ASTM D 1970; stable after testing at 240 deg F. 2. Low -Temperature Flexibility: ASTM D 1970; passes after testing at minus 20 deg F. D. Slip Sheet: Building paper, 3-lb/l00 sq. ft. minimum, rosin sized. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item unless otherwise indicated. B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self -tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item. 1. General: Blind fasteners or self -drilling screws, gasketed, with hex -washer head. a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or factory -applied coating. b. Blind Fasteners: High -strength aluminum or stainless -steel rivets suitable for metal being fastened. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 2 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Dec-2010 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. C. Solder: l . For Stainless Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn60, with an acid flux of type recommended by stainless -steel sheet manufacturer. D. Sealant Tape: Pressure -sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release -paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1.12 inch wide and 118 inch thick. E. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polymer sealant; low modulus; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to sea] joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight. F. Epoxy Seam Sealer: Two-part, noncorrosive, aluminum seam -cementing compound, recommended by aluminum manufacturer for exterior nonmoving joints, including riveted joints. G. Bituminous Coating: Cold -applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. 2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics of item indicated. Fabricate items at the shop to greatest extent possible. 1. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication. 2. Form sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. 3. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces exposed to view. B. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant. C. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than I inch deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints. D. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal. E. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat -lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder. 2.5 ROOF DRAINAGE SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. Parapet Scuppers: Fabricate scuppers of dimensions required with closure flange trim to exterior, 4-inch- wide wall flanges to interior, and base extending 4 inches beyond cant or SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 3 i 1. Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. Dec-2010 0 tapered strip into field of roof. Fasten gravel guard angles to base of scupper. Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Aluminum: 0.032 inch thick. B. Splash Blocks: concrete 2.6 LOW -SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. Copings: Fabricate in minimum 96-bich- long, but not exceeding 10-foot- long, sections. Fabricate joint plates of same thickness as copings. Furnish with continuous cleats to support edge of external leg and interior leg. Miter corners, sea], and solder or weld watertight. Fabricate from the following materials: B. Base Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Aluminum: 0.040 inch thick. C. Counterflashing: Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Aluminum: 0.032 inch thick. D. Roof -Penetration Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials: I. Aluminum -Zinc Alloy -Coated Steel: 0.028 inch thick. E. Roof -Drain Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Stainless Steel: 0.016 inch thick. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION A. Polyethylene Sheet: Install polyethylene sheet with adhesive for anchorage. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with lapped and taped joints of not less than 2 inches. B. Felt Underlayment: Install felt underlayment with adhesive for temporary anchorage. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with lapped joints of not less than 2 inches. C. Self -Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self -adhering sheet underlayment, wrinkle free. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation; use primer rather than nails for installing underlayment at low temperatures. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with end laps of not less than 6 inches staggered 24 inches between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3-1.12 inches. Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement so that completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight. Use fasteners, SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 4 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. Dec-20l 0 solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system. 1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant. 2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal. 3. Space cleats not more than 12 inches apart. Anchor each cleat with two fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners. 4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks. 5. Install sealant tape where indicated. 6. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted. B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by SMACNA. 1. Coat back side of uncoated aluminum and stainless -steel sheet metal flashing and trim with bituminous coating where flashing and trim will contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction. 2. Underlayment: Where installing metal flashing directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet or install a course of polyethylene sheet. C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of comer or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently watertight, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with sealant concealed within joints. D. Fastener Sizes: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate sheathing not less than 1-1 /4 inches for nails and not less than 3/4 inch for wood screws. E. Sea] joints as shown and as required for watertight construction. F. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pre -tin edges of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1-1/2 inches, except reduce pre -tinning where pre -tinned surface would show in completed Work. 1. Do not solder aluminum sheet. 2. Do not use torches for soldering. Heat surfaces to receive solder and flow solder into joint. Fill joint completely. Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces. 3. Stainless -Steel Soldering: Tin edges of uncoated sheets using solder recommended for stainless steel and acid flux. Promptly remove acid flux residue from metal after tinning and soldering. Comply with solder manufacturer's recommended methods for cleaning and neutralization. 4. Copper Soldering: Tin edges of uncoated copper sheets using solder for copper. t G. Rivets: Rivet joints in uncoated aluminum where indicated and where necessary for strength. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 5 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Dec-2010 , 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. 3.3 ROOF DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION U A. General: Install sheet metal roof drainage items to produce complete roof drainage system I according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of roof �1 perimeter flashing with installation of roof drainage system. `s B. Parapet Scuppers: Install scuppers where indicated through parapet. Continuously support scupper, set to correct elevation, and seal flanges to interior wall face, over cants or tapered edge strips, and under roofing membrane. i 3.4 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, set units true to line, and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant. B. Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and as indicated. Interlock bottom edge of �. roof edge flashing with continuous cleat anchored to substrate at staggered ;-inch centers. C. Copings: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and as indicated. 1. Interlock exterior bottom edge of coping with continuous cleat anchored to substrate at 24-inch centers. 2. Anchor interior leg of coping with washers and screw fasteners through slotted holes at 24-inch centers. D. Pipe or Post Counterflashing: Install counterflashing umbrella with close -fitting collar with top edge flared for elastomeric sealant, extending a minimum of 4 inches over base flashing. Install stainless -steel draw band and tighten. E. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing. Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing. Extend counterflashing 4 inches over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints a minimum of 4 inches and bed with sealant. F. Roof -Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof -penetration flashing with installation of roofing and other items penetrating roof. Seal with elastomeric sealant and clamp flashing to pipes that penetrate roof. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering. B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder and sealants. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 6 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. Dec-2010 C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. END OF SECTION 076200 1% SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 7 r � r Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Silicone joint sealants. 2. Urethane joint sealants. 3. Latex joint sealants. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each joint -sealant product indicated. B. Joint -Sealant Schedule: Include the following information: 1. Joint -sealant application, joint location, and designation. 2. Joint -sealant manufacturer and product name. 3. Joint -sealant formulation. 4. Joint -sealant color. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product test reports. B. Field -adhesion test reports. C. Warranties. Dec-20l 0 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Special Installer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 1 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. Dec-2010 r 0 B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which joint -sealant manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS A. Neutral -Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. h.{if=., g. 2. Type: Single component (S). 3. Grade: nonsag (NS). 4. Class: 100/50. 5. Uses Related to Exposure: Nontraffic (NT). 2.2 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS A. Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. C. d. e. f. g- h. i. J• JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 2 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. 2. Type: Single component (S) or multicomponent (M). 3. Grade: nonsag (NS). 4. Class: 100/50. 5. Uses Related to Exposure: Nontraffic (NT). 2.3 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS Dec-2010 A. Latex Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. 1 C d. e. Bch nt , - , _.,4., k,t. d. 2.4 JOINT SEALANT BACKING A. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed -cell material with a surface skin) or any type, as approved in writing by joint -sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance. B. Bond -Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer: Material recommended by joint -sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint -sealant -substrate tests and field tests. B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials. C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. rr JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 3 4„ G[, Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Dec-2010 i 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. E PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to ! comply with joint -sealant manufacturer's written instructions. L ] . Remove laitance and fonn-release agents from concrete. 2. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint -sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint -sealant -substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint -sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint - sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1 ] 93 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. B. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross -sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials. C. Install bond -breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints. D. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: ] . Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross -sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. E. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 4 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. Dec-2010 smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated. F. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field -Adhesion Testing: Field test joint -sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows: 1. Extent of Testing: Test completed and cured sealant joints as follows: a. Perform 1 test for each 100 feet of joint length. 2. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field -Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in ASTM C 1521. B. Evaluation of Field -Adhesion Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory. Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated requirements. 3.4 JOINT -SEALANT SCHEDULE A. Joint -Sealant Application: Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces. 1. Joint Locations: a. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry. b. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors and windows. C. Control and expansion joints. d. Other joints as indicated. 2. Joint -Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. B. Joint -Sealant Application: Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces. Joint Locations: a. Isolation joints in cast -in -place concrete slabs. b. Control and expansion joints in tile flooring. 2. Joint Sealant: Preformed foam. 3. Joint -Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 5 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Dec-2010 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. C. Joint -Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces[ ]. 1. Joint Locations: a. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated. b. Tile control and expansion joints. C. Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of interior unit masonry walls. d. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors and windows. 2. Joint Sealant: Latex. 3. Joint -Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. D. Joint -Sealant Application: Mildew -resistant interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces[ <JS-#>]. 1. Joint Sealant Location: a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters. b. Tile control and expansion joints where indicated. 2. Joint Sealant: Silicone. END OF SECTION 079200 JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 6 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes hollow -metal work. Dec-2010 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings according to NAAMM-HMMA 803 or SDI A250.8. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: Include elevations, door edge details, frame profiles, metal thicknesses, preparations for hardware, and other details. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory -applied color finishes. D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required. E. Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product test reports. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. a;.,_; Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. (:. r ---- 3. an Assa Abloy Group company. 5. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 1 � L Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. D«G010 y 21nUnauthorized duplication prohibited. ( Lj \} 29. ....��........... .. am .�.��.... 31. 33 _ \` 1° � d .<11 1<!C = <99d>32£ w, . ay ?\2%\.= a¢ . was ... .. �..��.�... as:..3/. ak /A Ingersoll-Rand compan. � \ .m». 33 d� g«�c,J;gorDivision. a& \dd 1 y} • 39. » . .. .. . .. 4m «£. . � �} 4t (� / 2.2 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS � A. Fire-RatedAacmbles: Complying with NF &SO and listed and labeled by a qualified tes§n j \ agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction Qrfep@«§o ratings mm22¢bkd !'. on testing at positive pressure according to NF A 252 or UL IOC /jf 2.3 INTERIOR DOORS AND FRAMES A. Heavy- u@ and X tr Heavy- u» Doe and Frames: SD A25m % Level z A locations /) indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule. «! zd) .� L HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 01113-2 r> �� j Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. Dec-2010 l . Physical Performance: Level B according to SDI A250.4. 2. Doors: a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule. b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches. C. Face: Uncoated, cold -rolled steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch. d. Edge Construction: Model 1, Full Flush. e. Core: Manufacturer's standard. 3. Frames: a. Materials: Uncoated, steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch. b. Construction: Knocked down. 4. Exposed Finish: Prime. 2.4 FRAME ANCHORS A. Jamb Anchors: 1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap -and -stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not less than 0.042 inch thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches wide by 10 inches long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch thick. 2. Stud -Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042 inch thick. B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch, and as follows: 1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip -type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners. 2.5 MATERIALS A. Hot -Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled. B. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 879/A 879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 04Z coating designation; mill phosphatized. 1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot -dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B. C. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot -dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M. D. Power -Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: From corrosion -resistant materials. E. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches, as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 3 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. F. Mineral -Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing). G. Glazing: Section 088000 "Glazing." 2.6 FABRICATION Dec-2010 E A. Fabricate hollow -metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for metal thickness. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment. B. Hollow -Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames. 1. Transom Bar Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to Jambs by butt welding. 2. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval -head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. 3. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be grouted. 4. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottoms of jambs with at least four spot welds per anchor; however, for slip-on drywall frames, provide anchor clips or countersunk holes at bottoms of jambs. 5. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows: a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 16 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c., to match coursing, and as follows: 1) Five anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high. b. Stud -Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows: 1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high. 6. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, drill stops to receive door silencers. a. Single -Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers. b. Double -Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers. C. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow -metal work to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface -mounted door hardware. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 4 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. I Dec-2010 2. Comply with applicable requirements in SDI A250.6 and BHMA A156.115 for preparation of hollow -metal work for hardware. D. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with butted hairline joints. 1. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollow - metal work. 2. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that each glazed lite is capable of being removed independently. 3. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors and frames. 4. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow -metal work. 5. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with glazing and installation types indicated. 2.7 STEEL FINISHES A. Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer. I . Shop Primer: SDI A250.10. 2.8 ACCESSORIES A. Louvers: Provide louvers for interior doors, where indicated, which comply with SDI 11 l C, with blades or baffles formed of 0.020-inch- thick, cold -rolled steel sheet set into 0.032-inch- thick steel frame. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Hollow -Metal Frames: Install hollow -metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with SDI A250.11 or NAAMM-HMMA 840 as required by standards specified. I . Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. a. At fire -rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80. b. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. C. Install frames with removable stops located on secure side of opening. d. Install door silencers in frames before grouting. e. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been properly set and secured. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 5 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. Dec-2010 f. Check plumb, square, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances. 2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors. a. Floor anchors may be set with power -actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings. 3. Metal -Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral -fiber insulation inside frames. 4. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space between frames and masonry with grout. 5. In -Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. 6. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow -metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances: a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. C. Twist: Plus or minus 1!16 inch, measured at opposite face comers of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor. B. Hollow -Metal Doors: Fit hollow -metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. Shim as necessary. Non -Fire -Rated Steel Doors: a. Between Door and Frame Jambs and Head: 1 /8 inch plus or minus 1 /32 inch. b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1 /8 inch to 1 /4 inch plus or minus 1 %32 inch. c. At Bottom of Door: 5/8 inch plus or minus 11322 inch. d. Between Door Face and Stop: 1/16 inch to 1/8 inch plus or minus U 2 inch. 2. Fire -Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80. 3. Smoke -Control Doors: Install doors and gaskets according to NFPA 105. C. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing" and with hollow - metal manufacturer's written instructions. Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval -head machine screws spaced uniformly not more than 9 inches o.c. and not more than 2 inches o.c. from each corner. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 6 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Dec-2010 ~ 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow -metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable. B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow -metal work immediately after installation. C. Prime -Coat Touchu : Immediate] after erection sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of P Y � g �.- prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air -drying, rust -inhibitive primer. END OF SECTION 081113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081 l l 3 - 7 No Text Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Dec-2010 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. SECTION 085113 - ALUMINUM WINDOWS PART I - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes aluminum windows for exterior locations. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, hardware, accessories, insect screens, operational clearances, and details of installation, including anchor, flashing, and sealant installation. C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color specified, 2 by 4 inches in size. D. Product Schedule: For aluminum windows. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product test reports. B. Sample warranties. 1.4 WARRANTY A. , Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace aluminum windows that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: a. Window: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. b. Glazing Units: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Aluminum Finish: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: ALUMINUM WINDOWS 085113 - 1 R Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. Dec-2010 B. '.. ��a: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by one of the following: i is { i:: li xa i'..ik `.3, 3. 4. {.J +' r n tl inc. 5. Tf 7. 8.+113: 9. G'. _ Ili i" 1'[ELilit 12. P­,:�r 3<: l !c. 13. V 1 i'{{,dE 14. 15. ': 17. t.,,;:,, 18. ) :! Al-,: ;ric.,{ luc. 2.2 WINDOW PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Product Standard: AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101 /1.S.2/A440. 1. Minimum Performance Class: CW. 2. Minimum Performance Grade: 40. B. Thermal Transmittance: NFRC 100 maximum whole -window U-factor of 0.35 BtuJsq. ft. x h s deg F. C. Solar Heat -Gain Coefficient (SHGC): NFRC 200 maximum whole -window SHGC of 0.30 D. Condensation -Resistance Factor - (CRF): Provide aluminum windows tested for thermal performance according to AAMA 1503, showing a CRF of 45. 2.3 ALUMINUM WINDOWS A. Operating Types: Fixed. B. Frames and Sashes: Thermally broken aluminum extrusions complying with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440. C. Glass: Clear annealed glass, ASTM C 1036, Type 1, Class 1, q3. 1. Kind: Fully tempered. D. Insulating -Glass Units: ASTM E 2190. ALUMINUM WINDOWS 0851 l3 - 2 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Dec-2010 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. 1. Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type 1, Class 1, q3. a. Tint: Clear. b. Kind: Fully tempered. 2. Lites: Two. 3. Filling: Fill space between glass lites with air. E. Glazing System: Manufacturer's standard factory -glazing system that produces weathertight seal. F. Hardware, General: Manufacturer's standard corrosion -resistant hardware sized to accommodate sash weight and dimensions. 1. Exposed Hardware Color and Finish: As indicated by manufacturer's designations. G. Fasteners: Noncorrosive and compatible with window members, trim, hardware, anchors, and other components. 1. Exposed Fasteners: Do not use exposed fasteners to the greatest extent possible. For application of hardware, use fasteners that match finish hardware being fastened. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Fabricate aluminum windows in sizes indicated. Include a complete system for assembling components and anchoring windows. B. Glaze aluminum windows in the factory. C. Provide weep holes and internal passages to conduct infiltrating water to exterior. D. Provide water -shed members above side -hinged sashes and similar lines of natural water penetration. E. Provide mullions and cover plates, matching window units, complete with anchors for support to structure and installation of window units. Allow for erection tolerances and provide for movement of window units due to thermal expansion and building deflections, as indicated. Provide mullions and cover plates capable of withstanding design wind loads of window units. F. Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work in the factory to greatest extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. 2.5 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Anodic Finish: Class I complying with AAMA 611. 1. Color: Match Architect's sample. ALUMINUM WINDOWS 085113 - 3 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. PART 3 - EXECUTION �[, Dec-2010 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing windows, hardware, accessories, and other components. For installation procedures and requirements not addressed in manufacturer's written instructions, comply with installation requirements in ASTM E 2112. B. Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding thermal movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall flashing and other adjacent construction to produce weathertight construction. C. Install windows and components to drain condensation, water penetrating joints, and moisture migrating within windows to the exterior. D. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials. E. Clean exposed surfaces immediately after installing windows. Avoid damaging protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances. F. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction period. END OF SECTION 085113 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 085113 - 4 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. r-- 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. SECTION 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE �.T PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: I . Mechanical door hardware for the following: E a. Swinging doors. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified. C. Other Action Submittals: Dec-2010 1. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as installation procedures and diagrams. Coordinate final door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware. a. Format: Use same scheduling sequence and format and use same door numbers as in the Contract Documents. b. Content: Include the following information: 1) Identification number, location, hand, fire rating, size, and material of each door and frame. 2) Locations of each door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings on floor plans and to door and frame schedule. 3) Complete designations, including name and manufacturer, type, style, function, size, quantity, function, and finish of each door hardware product. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Supplier of products and an employer of workers trained and approved by product manufacturers and an Architectural Hardware Consultant who is available during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner about door hardware and keying. B. Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A person who is experienced in providing 77 consulting services for door hardware installations that are comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and who is currently certified by DHl as follows: DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 1 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Dec-2010 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. 1. For door hardware, an Architectural Hardware Consultant (ABC). C. Means of Egress Doors: Latches do not require more than 15 lbf to release the latch. Locks do not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation. D. Accessibility Requirements: For door hardware on doors in an accessible route, comply with the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and Texas Accessibility Standards. See sheet CS2 of the drawing set. 1. Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 lbf. 2. Comply with the following maximum opening -force requirements: a. Interior, Non -Fire -Rated Hinged Doors: 5 lbf applied perpendicular to door. 3. Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2. Provide thresholds not more than 1;2 inch high. 4. Adjust door closer sweep periods so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches from the latch, measured to the leading edge of the door. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver keys to manufacturer of key control system for subsequent delivery to Owner. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise indicated. a. Exit Devices: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE A. Provide door hardware for each door as scheduled in Part 3 "Door Hardware Schedule" Article to comply with requirements in this Section. 1. Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and products equivalent in function and comparable in quality to named products. 2. Sequence of Operation: Provide electrified door hardware function, sequence of operation, and interface with other building control systems indicated. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 2 f� Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. Dec-201 0 B. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Schedule" Article. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows: Named Manufacturers' Products: Manufacturer and product designation are listed for each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Schedule" Article. 2.2 HINGES A. Hinges: BHMA A156.1. Provide template -produced hinges for hinges installed on hollow - metal doors and hollow -metal frames. I Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on schedule or comparable product by one of the following: a. b. C. ii d. p e. Hardware !njc. 9. 1-Mlin,v S` A Al tJ!ouj h. oj' 111", 2.3 CONTINUOUS HINGES A. Continuous Hinges: BHMA A156.26; minimum 0.120-inch- thick, hinge leaves with minimum overall width of 4 inches; fabricated to full height of door and frame and to template screw locations; with components finished after milling and drilling are complete. B. Continuous, Gear -Type Hinges: Extruded -aluminum, pinless, geared hinge leaves joined by a continuous extruded -aluminum channel cap; with concealed, self-lubricating thrust bearings. -n Nothicl: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on schedule or comparable product by one of the following: a. In'. b. Ine. C. Commillws. d. Ilardware: an -M A ABL( ('ir(nw i:olipam e. KITO-O'ne Pri:lducls C01 9. h. DOOR HARDWARE 087100-3 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Dec-2010 - 2010 Unauthori2ed duplication prohibited. i i 2.4 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHES _y A. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike for each lock bolt or latchbolt complying with requirements indicated for applicable lock or latch and with strike box and curved lip extended to protect frame; finished to match lock or latch. B. Mortise Locks: BHMA A] 56.13; Operational Grade ]; stamped steel case with steel or brass parts; Series 1000. 3 ]. Y ,i Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on schedule or comparable product by one of the following: a. C. d. B3.; e. ,.: t ;. -------------- h. N, i t. k. A 2.5 SELF-CONTAINED ELECTRONIC LOCKS A. Self -Contained Electronic Locks: BHMA A156.25, mortise; with internal, battery -powered, self-contained electronic locks; consisting of complete lockset, motor -driven lock mechanism, and actuating device; enclosed in zinc -dichromate -plated, wrought -steel case, and strike that suits frame. Provide key override, low -battery detection and warning, LED status indicators, and ability to program at the lock. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on schedule or comparable product by one of the following: a. b. 4 C. . _......... d. ; �A. 2.6 EXIT DEVICES AND AUXILIARY ITEMS A. Exit Devices and Auxiliary Items: BHMA A]56.3. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on schedule or comparable product by one of the following: a. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 4 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. Dec-2010 b. C. ; d 1 c } e. 1): :: b. �z k. zk t, f (t n. 0. 2.7 KEYING A. Keying System: Factory registered, complying with guidelines in BHMA A ] 56.28, Appendix A. Incorporate decisions made in keying conference. 1. Existing System: a. Master key or grand master key locks to Owner's existing system. B. Keys: Brass. 1. Stamping: Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key control number and include the following notation: a. Notation: "DO NOT DUPLICATE." 2. Quantity: In addition to one extra key blank for each lock, provide the following: a. Master Keys: Five. 2.8 OPERATING TRIM A. Operating Trim: BHMA A156.6; stainless steel, unless otherwise indicated. : Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on schedule or comparable product by one of the following: a. b. C. d. C. f. g. h. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 5 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. 2.9 SURFACE CLOSERS Dec-2010 A. Surface Closers: BHMA A156.4; rack-and-pinion hydraulic type with adjustable sweep and latch speeds controlled by key -operated valves and forged -steel main arm. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for size of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Provide factory -sized closers, adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on schedule or comparable product by one of the following: g t= J 2.10 MECHANICAL STOPS AND HOLDERS A. Wall- and Floor -Mounted Stops: BHMA A]56.16; polished cast brass, bronze, or aluminum base metal. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on schedule or comparable product by one of the following: 2.11 DOOR GASKETING A. Door Gasketing: BHMA A156.22; air leakage not to exceed 0.50 cfm per foot of crack length for gasketing other than for smoke control, as tested according to ASTM E 283; with resilient or flexible seal strips that are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 6 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. Dec-2010 :, 1111od.ticl: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on schedule or comparable product by one of the following: a. b. ) ,I ia'tii1 ,..l..'iodiit- s C. d. A'_ is,8}Y et'?'LSdI Lat t}?-tiiV. e. 9. 2.12 THRESHOLDS A. Thresholds: BHMA A 156.21; fabricated to full width of opening indicated. 1. H xrl 3' f,du(i: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on schedule or comparable product by one of the following: a. _ :r (..t)ii1 )i dies. b. t, 'iiii3iil°� C. d. ?': a ".' ?g d cvur? g Ctl. AB'L-())' (?I't5t11� e g. h. 2.13 FABRICATION A. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws that comply with commercially recognized industry standards for application intended, except aluminum fasteners are not permitted. Provide Phillips flat -head screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Concealed Fasteners: For door hardware units that are exposed when door is closed, except for units already specified with concealed fasteners. Do not use through bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed unless it is the only means of securely attaching the door hardware. Where through bolts are used on hollow door and frame construction, provide sleeves for each through bolt. 2. Fire -Rated Applications: a. Wood or Machine Screws: For the following: 1) Hinges mortised to doors or frames. 2) Strike plates to frames. 3) Closers to doors and frames. b. Steel Through Bolts: For the following unless door blocking is provided: DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 7 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Dec-2010 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. 1) Surface hinges to doors. 2) Closers to doors and frames. 3) Surface -mounted exit devices. 3. Spacers or Sex Bolts: For through bolting of hollow -metal doors. 4. Fasteners for Wood Doors: Comply with requirements in DHI WDHS.2, "Recommended Fasteners for Wood Doors." 5. Gasketing Fasteners: Provide noncorrosive fasteners for exterior applications and elsewhere as indicated. 2.14 FINISHES A. Provide finishes complying with BHMA A156.18 as indicated in door hardware schedule. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Steel Doors and Frames: For surface applied door hardware, drill and tap doors and frames according to ANSI/SDI A250.6. LU B. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights to comply with the following unless otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations. 1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: ANSUSDI A250.8. C. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work. Do not install surface -mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved. 1. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation. 2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards. D. Hinges: Install types and in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule but not fewer than the number recommended by manufacturer for application indicated or one hinge for every 30 inches of door height, whichever is more stringent, unless other equivalent means of support for door, such as spring hinges or pivots, are provided. E. Lock Cylinders: Install construction cores to secure building and areas during construction period. 1. Replace construction cores with permanent cores as directed by Owner. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 8 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. Dec-2010 F. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior doors and other doors indicated in full bed of sealant. G. Stops: Provide floor stops for doors unless wall or other type stops are indicated in door hardware schedule. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. H. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame. I. Meeting Stile Gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles, forming seal when doors are closed. J. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is closed. K. Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure ry proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. 3.2 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE Qty. Item Manufacturer Product Finish HW-1 - Opg. 101, each opening to have: 04 ea hinges McKinney T4A3786 4.5x4.5 652 O1 ea locks Corbin Russwin ML2065 NSM 626 O1 ea closer Corbin Russwin DC6210 x M54 689 O1 ea kick plate Rockwood .050 4" x 34" 630 O1 ea stop Rockwood 409 630 03 ea silencers Rockwood 608 HW-2 - Opg. 102 and 103, each opening to have: 04 ea hinges McKinney T4A3786 4.5x4.5 O1 ea locks Corbin Russwin ML2059 NSM - - 01 ea stop & holder Arch Bldg Hdwr 4414 03 ea silencers Rockwood 608 HW-3 - Opg. 110, each opening to have: 03 ea hinges McKinney TA2714 4.5x4.5 O1 ea locks Corbin Russwin ML2057 NSM O1 ea stop & holder Arch Bldg Hdwr 4414 03 ea silencers Rockwood 608 HW-4 - Opg. 111 & 112, each opening to have: 03 ea hinges McKinney O1 ea push plate Rockwood O1 ea pull Rockwood O1 ea closer Corbin Russwin O1 ea kick plate Rockwood DOOR HARDWARE TA2714 4.5x4.5 70C 122 x 70C DC6210 x M54 .050 12" x 34" 652 626 626 652 626 626 652 630 630 689 630 087100 - 9 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Dec-2010 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. O1 ea stop Rockwood 409 630 03 ea silencers Rockwood 608 HW-5 - Opg. 113, each opening to have: 03 ea hinges McKinney TA2714 4.5x4.5 652 O1 ea locks Corbin Russwin ML2059 NSM 626 O1 ea stop & holder Arch Bldg Hdwr 4414 626 O1 ea kick plate Rockwood .050 12" x 34" 630 03 ea silencers Rockwood 608 HW-6 - Opg. 114, each opening to have: 03 ea hinges McKinney TA2714 4.5x4.5 652 O1 ea locks Corbin Russwin ML20834 LSZ 626 O1 ea closer Corbin Russwin DC6210 x M54 689 O1 ea kick plate Rockwood .050 12" x 34" 630 O1 ea stop Rockwood 409 630 03 ea silencers Rockwood 608 HW-7 - Opg. 115 & 116, each opening to have: 03 ea hinges McKinney TA2714 4.5x4.5 652 O1 ea locks Corbin Russwin ML2051 NSM 626 `- 01 ea kick plate Rockwood .050 12" x 34" 630 O1 ea stop Rockwood 409 630 j 03 ea silencers Rockwood 608 HW-8 - Opg. H 7, each opening to have: 03 ea hinges McKinney TA2714 4.5x4.5 652 O1 ea locks Corbin Russwin ML2059 NSM 626 O1 ea kick plate Rockwood .050 12" x 34" 630 O1 ea stop Rockwood 409 630 03 ea silencers Rockwood 608 HW-9 - Opg. 119, each opening to have: 02 ea hinges McKinney MCK-12HD — 93" CLR 02 ea exit devices Corbin Russwin ED5400 x TH957 630 02 ea closer Corbin Russwin DC6210 x M54 689 02 ea kick plate Rockwood .050 12" x 34" 630 O1 ea threshold Pemko 170A 6'-0" O1 ea w-strip Pemko 303AV 6'-0" x 7'-10" 02 ea sweeps Pemko 315CN 3'-0" 02 ea mtg. stile Pemko 1804ICNB 7'-10" w/ strip END OF SECTION 087100 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 10 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. C: SECTION 088000 - GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY Dec-2010 A. Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section: I. Windows. 2. Doors. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Design glass, including comprehensive engineering analysis according to ASTM E 1300 by a qualified professional engineer, using the following design criteria: I. Vertical Glazing: For glass surfaces sloped 15 degrees or less from vertical, design glass to resist design wind pressure based on glass type factors for short -duration load. a. Outward design wind pressure minus the weight of the glass. Base design on glass type factors for short -duration load. b. Inward design wind pressure plus the weight of the glass plus half of the design snow load. Base design on glass type factors for short -duration load. C. Half of the inward design wind pressure plus the weight of the glass plus the design snow load. Base design on glass type factors for long -duration load. 2. Differential Shading: Design glass to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading within individual glass lites. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated. B. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. 1. GANA Publications: GANA's "Laminated Glazing Reference Manual" and GANA's "Glazing Manual." 2. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use." 1.... GLAZING 088000 - 1 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Dec-2010 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. B. Insulating -Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of IGCC. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Laminated Glass: Manufacturer's standard form in which laminated -glass manufacturer agrees to replace laminated -glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of laminated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include edge separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated -glass standard. WarrantyPeriod: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Manufacturer's standard form in which insulating -glass manufacturer agrees to replace insulating -glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass lites in thicknesses as needed to comply with requirements indicated. B. Strength: Where float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, Kind HS heat -treated float glass, or Kind FT heat -treated float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where heat -strengthened glass is indicated, provide Kind HS heat - treated float glass or Kind FT heat -treated float glass. Where fully tempered glass is indicated, provide Kind FT heat -treated float glass. C. Windborne-Debris-Impact Resistance: Provide exterior glazing that passes basic -protection testing requirements in ASTM E 1996 for Wind Zone 3 when tested according to ASTM E 1886. Test specimens shall be no smaller in width and length than glazing indicated for use on the Project and shall be installed in same manner as glazing indicated for use on the Project. Large -Missile Test: For glazing located within 30 feet of grade. Small -Missile Test: For glazing located more than 30 feet above grade. Large -Missile Test: For all glazing, regardless of height above grade. GLAZING 088000 - 2 r I 77 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Dec-201 0 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. D. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated below: 1. U-Factors: Center -of -glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program, expressed as Btu; sq. ft. x h x deg F. 2. Solar Heat -Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance: Center -of -glazing values, according to NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program. 2.2 Visible Reflectance: Center -of -glazing values, according to NFRC 300. 2.3 INSULATING GLASS A. Insulating -Glass Units: Factory -assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E 2190, and complying with other requirements specified. l . Sealing System: Dual seal. 2. Spacer: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction. 2.4 GLASS PRODUCTS A. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality-Q3, Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated. 1. Thickness: '/4". B. Clear fully tempered float glass. 1. Thickness: '/4". 2. Provide safety glazing labeling. C. Glass Type: Low-e-coated, clear insulating glass. 1. Overall Unit Thickness: 5/8". 2. Thickness of Each Glass Lite: '/4". 3. Outdoor Lite: Fully tempered float glass. 4. Interspace Content: Argon. 5. Indoor Lite: Fully tempered float glass. 6. Low-E Coating: Pyrolytic on second surface. 7. Provide safety glazing labeling. 2.5 GLAZING SEALANTS A. General: 1. Compatibility: Provide glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating -glass units, GLAZING 088000 - 3 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. Dec-2010 { and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GLAZING, GENERAL A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. B. Adjust glazing channel dimensions as required by Project conditions during installation to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance. D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction testing. E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. G. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches (1270 mmj. H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications. 3.2 GASKET GLAZING (DRY) A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation. B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at comers. C. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at comers GLAZING 088000 - 4 r- Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. 3.3 3.4 Dec-2010 and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Sea] gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. D. Installation with Pressure -Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressure - glazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Sea] gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. E. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops. SEALANT GLAZING (WET) A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance. B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces. C. Too] exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass. CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces. B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period. END OF SECTION 088000 GLAZING 088000 - 5 ILL- A L-'-j Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. SECTION 092216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING PART ] - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: I . Non -load -bearing steel framing systems for interior gypsum board assemblies. . 2. Suspension systems for interior gypsum ceilings and soffits. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. PART2-PRODUCTS Dec-20] 0 2.1 FRAMING SYSTEMS A. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. Use either steel studs and runners or dimpled steel studs and runners of equivalent minimum base -metal thickness. 1. Minimum Base -Metal Thickness: 0.027 inch. 2. Depth: 3-5/8 Inches. B. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated. 1. Minimum Base -Metal Thickness: 0.027 inch. C. Hat -Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645. 1. Minimum Base -Metal Thickness: 0.018 inch (0.45 nim). 2. Depth: 1-112 inches (38.1 rani). 2.2 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 64]/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch- diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch-diameter wire. B. Flat Hangers: Steel sheet, 1 by 311"16 inch by length indicated. NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 0922 ] 6 - ] Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. 2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS Dec-2010 , i A. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and i other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754. 1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation. B. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. C. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies. D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non -load -bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently. 3.2 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types. B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall. C. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction. D. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling. I. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated. b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 12-incli clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly. C. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure. 2. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 2 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Dec-2010 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. E. Direct Furring: 1. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder -driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c. F. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 118 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing. 3.3 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Install suspension system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types. B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows: l . Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system. a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices. 3. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit. D. Fire -Resistance -Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports. E. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 18 inch in 12 feet measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes. END OF SECTION 092216 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 3 1 �„ ..� � n w., ..,., �. _._ �.._.. ._._�...., �._.__.� :, �J �� ; �--_ �.7 _ _ ' i_� :�� _ ,� �.� �___� LJ �� �_� � `�_] �J �.�� '�J�_._� `mil r-. l I 1. C I Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD PART I - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: I . Interior gypsum board. 2. Texture finishes. Dec-2010 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Samples: I . Textured Finishes: Manufacturer's standard size for each textured finish indicated and on same backing indicated for Work. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. 1:.==z3=>_= ,..; Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the .----- - following: 1. , <, 2. (3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. 1. Thickness: 1 /2 inch. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. C. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. 1, Thickness: 518 inch. GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 1 Ll Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. D. Gypsum Ceiling Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. 1. Thickness: 1/2 inch. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. Dec-2010 2.2 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum -coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper -faced galvanized steel sheet. B. Exterior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. Material: Hot -dip galvanized steel sheet, plastic, or rolled zinc. C. Aluminum Trim: ASTM B 2211, Alloy 6063-T5. 2.3 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M. B. Joint Tape: 1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper. 2. Glass -Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10-by-10 glass mesh. 3. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer. C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate. B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. C. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing). 2.5 TEXTURE FINISHES A. Primer: As recommended by textured finish manufacturer. GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 2 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. Dec-2010 B. Polystyrene Aggregate Ceiling Finish: Water -based, job -mixed, polystyrene aggregate finish with flame -spread and smoke -developed indexes of not more than 25 when tested according to ASTM E 84. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. S 7 „1"tii - is it �_fi:fj :ll f ' 1«1i - ff i a "d - `. . = _ _ .. � C)l.e-._l .�.__.l L._ 1_� .� 1:114tI:'} � t)l,Y_41�`t_ ".�i't... b tlll 7 f -'SI 1l 11 & i n' t ltcl S i C. -_ }t_ t'Or1 i 11 )ii S1,1:1 l lrrji K t.CiIi �1)_,lv ' _xittit, _tE'V. 2. Texture: Medium. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS A. Comply with ASTM C 840. B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. C. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non -load -bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 114- to 1/2-inch- wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. D. InstalI trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. E. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape. F. Texture Finish Application: Prepare and apply primer to gypsum panels and other surfaces receiving texture finishes. Mix and apply finish using powered spray equipment, to produce a uniform texture matching existing adjacent texture and free of starved spots or other evidence of thin application or of application patterns. G. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and texture finishes and promptly remove from floors and other non -drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application. H. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. END OF SECTION 092900 17 GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 3 _..._. , 1 ____) ,) ...,, __�__ _,1 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. SECTION 095113 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS PART ] - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings. 1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance data. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Dec-2010 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Surface -Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS, GENERAL A. Acoustical Panel Standard: Comply with ASTM E 1264. B. Metal Suspension System Standard: Comply with ASTM C 635. C. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements. 2.3 ACOUSTICAL PANELS -Match existing A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 1 L Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. Dec-2010 3 v_ 2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM — Match existing A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. ' 4 i Sz> PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636/C 636M and seismic design requirements indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook." B. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less -than -half -width panels at borders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans. l . Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as indicated on reflected ceiling plans. 2. Match new acoustical ceiling to existing ceiling. END OF SECTION 095113 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 0951 l3 - 2 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. SECTION 096513 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Resilient base. 2. Resilient stair accessories. Dec-2010 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples: For each type of product indicated, in manufacturer's standard -size Samples but not less than 12 inches long, of each resilient product color, texture, and pattern required. 1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer in spaces to receive resilient products. B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer. C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 RESILIENT BASE A. Resilient Base: 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. t , Q,.; Stoler Industries. b. Inc. 11 C. zJi i= d. G ? e. RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 1 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. 9- h. ........... k. In. B. Resilient Base Standard: ASTM F 1861. 1. Material Requirement: Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset). 2. Style: Cove (base with toe). C. Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch. D. Height: 4 inches. E. Lengths: Cut lengths 49 inches long or coils in manufacturer's standard length. F. Outside Comers: Job formed or preformed. G. Inside Corners: Job formed or preformed. H. Finish: Matte. 1. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors. 2.2 RESILIENT STAIR ACCESSORIES A. Resilient Stair Treads: Dec-201 0 Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. 1uol- ;,rildui /: ies 1?'kc tffl" ndus! 1:-- Inc. C. i a tzt7tl t 31tiC I llil" AI1..1f1. d. 1: e. joh-M)D)W. Inc. g. b . N-ell-�� t 11bC1" 001HIV, - ------- . ..... k. B. Resilient Stair Treads Standard: ASTM F 2169. 1. Material Requirement: Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset). RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513-2 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Dec-2010 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. 2. Surface Design: a. Class 2, Pattern: Raised -disc design. C. Nosing Style: Square. D. Nosing Height: 1-1i2 inches. E. Thickness: 114 inch and tapered to back edge. F. Size: Lengths and depths to fit each stair tread in one piece. G. Risers: Smooth, flat, coved -toe, 7 inches high by length matching treads; produced by same manufacturer as treads and recommended by manufacturer for installation with treads. 1. Thickness: 0.125 inch. H. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors. 2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex -modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic -cement -based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate conditions indicated. C. Stair -Tread -Nose Filler: Two-part epoxy compound recommended by resilient tread manufacturer to fill nosing substrates that do not conform to tread contours. D. Floor Polish: Provide protective liquid floor polish products as recommended by resilient stair tread manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products. B. Concrete Substrates for Resilient Stair Treads and Accessories: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. 1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. 3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 3 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. Dec-20I0 i -; 4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. D. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. I . Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. E. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation. 3.2 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base. B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned. D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation. 3.3 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories. B. Resilient Stair Accessories: I . Use stair -tread -nose filler to fill nosing substrates that do not conform to tread contours. 2. Tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. 3. For treads installed as separate, equal -length units, install to produce a flush joint between units. C. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of resilient floor covering that would otherwise be exposed. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of resilient products. RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 0965I 3 - 4 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Dec-2010 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. B. Floor Polish: Remove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes from resilient stair treads before applying liquid floor polisb. 1. Apply two coat(s). r-- C. Cover resilient products until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 096513 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 5 .... . ... . . .. . . 7n Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Dec-2010 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. SECTION 096519 - RESILIENT TILE FLOORING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Vinyl composition floor tile. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For each type of floor tile. Include floor tile layouts, edges, columns, doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts. C. Samples: Full-size units of each color and pattern of floor tile required. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance data. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer in spaces to receive floor tile. B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer. C. Close spaces to traffic during floor tile installation. D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor tile installation. E. Install floor tile after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 VINYL COMPOSITION FLOOR TILE A. Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 096519 - 1 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. 2. 3. 4. 5. ; 6 . B. Tile Standard: ASTM F 1066, Class 2, through -pattern tile. C. Wearing Surface: Smooth. D. Thickness: 0.125 inch. E. Size: 12 by 12 inches (305 by 305 min). F. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors. 2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS Dec-2010 A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex -modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic -cement -based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit floor tile and substrate conditions indicated. C. Floor Polish: Provide protective liquid floor polish products as recommended by manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products. B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. 1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. 3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. 4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by floor covering manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. D. Do not install floor tiles until they are same temperature as space where they are to be installed. RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 096519 - 2 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Dec-2010 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. I . Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. E. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation. 3.2 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile. B. Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter. 1. Lay tiles square with room axis. C. Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles. I . Lay tiles with grain direction alternating in adjacent tiles (basket -weave pattern). D. Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames. E. Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend floor tiles to center of door openings. F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. G. Adhere floor tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections. 3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of floor tile. B. Floor Polish: Remove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes from floor tile surfaces before applying liquid floor polish. l . Apply two coat(s). C. Cover floor tile until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 096519 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 096519 - 3 . . ........... . 41 . . ..... .... Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Dec-2010 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. SECTION 099113 - EXTERIOR PAINTING PART] -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following exterior substrates: 1. Steel. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions. B. Samples: For each type of paint system and each color and gloss of topcoat. 1.3 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal of each material and color applied. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to products listed in other Part 2 articles for the paint category indicated. 2.2 PAINT, GENERAL A. MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that are listed in its "MPI Approved Products List." B. Material Compatibility: 1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. I~ l EXTERIOR PAINTING 099 ] ] 3 - 1 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Dec-2010 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. C. VOC Content: Provide materials that comply with VOC limits of authorities having ` jurisdiction. r D. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.3 SOLVENT -BASED PAINTS A. Alkyd, Exterior. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers. C. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MP1 Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated. B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual." B. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. EXTERIOR PAINTING 099113 - 2 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Dec-2010 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. B. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 3.5 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A. Steel Substrates: 1- Alkyd System: a. Prime Coat: Shop primer specified in Section 081113. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat. C. Topcoat: Alkyd, exterior, semi -gloss (Gloss Level 5). END OF SECTION 099113 EXTERIOR PAINTING 099113 - 3 No Text r-- Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Dec-2010 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following interior substrates: 1. Concrete masonry units (CMU). 2. Steel. 3. Wood trim 4. Gypsum board. 5. Spray -textured ceilings. 6. Concrete floor sealer 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions. B. Samples: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat. Architect will make initial color selections from Manufacturers standard color samples. C. Product List: For each product indicated. Include printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted. 1.3 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each initial color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system specified in Part 3. a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 25 sq. ft. 2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups. INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - I Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. Dec-2010 a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to products listed in other Part 2 articles for the paint category indicated. 2.2 PAINT, GENERAL A. MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that are listed in its "MPI Approved Products List." B. Material Compatibility: 1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. C. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.3 BLOCK FILLERS A. Block Filler, Latex, Interior/Exterior: 2.4 PRIMERS/SEALERS A. Primer Sealer, Latex, Interior: B. Primer, Latex, for Interior Wood: 2.5 METAL PRIMERS A. Primer, Alkyd, Quick Dry, for Metal: 2.6 WATER -BASED PAINTS A. Latex, Interior, Gloss Level —match existing wall sheen INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 2 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Dec-2010 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. 2.7 SOLVENT -BASED PAINTS A. Alkyd, Quick Dry, Semi -Gloss 2.8 TEXTURED COATING A. Primer for Textured Coating, Latex, Flat: As recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer. B. Intermediate Coat for Textured Coating, Latex, Flat: As recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer. C. Textured Coating, Latex, Flat: 2.9 FLOOR COATINGS A. Sealer, Water Based, for Concrete Floors: PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 1. Masonry CMU: 12 percent. 2. Wood: 15 percent. 3. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. 4. Concrete: 12 percent. C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers. D. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MP1 Manual" applicable to substrates indicated. INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 -3 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. Dec-2010 B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. if removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, ( f provide surface -applied protection before surface preparation and painting. ? 1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface -applied protection if any. �^ C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. I 1 1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated. l 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in "MPI Manual." B. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. B. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 3.5 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A. CMU Substrates: 1. Epoxy System: a. Block Filler: interior/exterior. b. Intermediate Coat: Epoxy, interior, matching topcoat. C. Topcoat: Epoxy, interior, Gloss Level — match existing wall sheen. B. Steel Substrates: 1. Alkyd System: a. Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd, quick dry, for metal. b. Topcoat: Alkyd, interior, semi -gloss. C. Wood Substrates: Including wood trim. INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 4 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. I . Latex System: a. Prime Coat: Primer, latex, for interior wood. b. Topcoat: Latex, interior, semi -gloss. D. Gypsum Board Substrates: I . Latex System: a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, latex, interior. b. Topcoat: Latex, interior, - match existing wall sheen. E. Spray -Textured Ceiling Substrates: I . Latex (Flat) System: Spray applied. a. Prime Coat: Latex, interior, flat. b. Topcoat: Latex, interior, flat. F. Concrete Substrates: 1. Water based sealer: Spray applied. END OF SECTION 099123 INTERIOR PAINTING Dec-2010 099123 - 5 No Text Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Dec-2010 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. SECTION 099300 - STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes surface preparation and application of wood finishes. I . Interior Substrates: a. Dressed lumber (finish carpentry). 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include preparation requirements and application instructions. B. Samples: For each type of finish system and in each color and gloss of finish indicated. C. Product List: For each product indicated, include printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in Part 2, with the product proposed for use highlighted. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each finish system indicated and each color selected to verify preliminary selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. I. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each type of finish system and substrate. a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 1 sq. ft_ b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required. 2. Final approval of stain color selections will be based on mockups. a. If preliminary stain color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional stain colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner. fj STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING 099300 - 1 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Dec-20l 0 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to products listed in other Part 2 articles for the category indicated. 2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that are listed in its "MPI Approved Products List." B. Material Compatibility: 1. Provide materials for use within each finish system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a finish system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in finish system and on substrate indicated. C. Stain Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.3 WOOD FILLERS A. Wood Filler Paste: 2.4 PRIMERS AND SEALERS A. Alkyd, Sanding Sealer, Clear: 2.5 STAINS A. Stain, Semi -Transparent, for Interior Wood: 2.6 POLYURETHANE VARNISHES A. Varnish, Interior, Polyurethane, Oil -Modified, Satin (Gloss Level 4): STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING 099300 - 2 r Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Dec-2010 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. PART 3 - EXECUTION r 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Exterior Wood Substrates: 15 percent, when measured with an electronic moisture meter. C. Maximum Moisture Content of Interior Wood Substrates: 15 percent, when measured with an electronic moisture meter. D. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers. E. Proceed with finish application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. I. Beginning finish application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPl Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated. B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable. if removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface -applied protection before surface preparation and finishing. 1. After completing finishing operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface -applied protection if any. C. Clean and prepare surfaces to be finished according to manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. 1. Remove dust, dirt, oil, and grease by washing with a detergent solution; rinse thoroughly with clean water and allow to dry. Remove grade stamps and pencil marks by sanding lightly. Remove loose wood fibers by brushing. 2. Remove mildew by scrubbing with a commercial wash formulated for mildew removal and as recommended by stain manufacturer. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply finishes according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual." B. Apply finishes to produce surface films without cloudiness, holidays, lap marks, brush marks, runs, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING 099300 - 3 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Dec-2010 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect work of other trades against damage from finish application. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. B. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced finished wood surfaces. 3.5 INTERIOR WOOD -FINISH -SYSTEM SCHEDULE A. Wood substrates, nontraffic surfaces, including architectural woodwork. I . Polyurethane Varnish over Stain System: a. Stain Coat: Stain, semi -transparent, for interior wood. b. First Intermediate Coat: Polyurethane varnish matching topcoat. C. Second Intermediate Coat: Polyurethane varnish matching topcoat. d. Topcoat: Varnish, interior, polyurethane, oil -modified, satin. END OF SECTION 099300 STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING 099300 - 4 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Dec-2010 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. SECTION 102600 - WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Wall guards. 2. Corner guards. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For each impact -resistant wall protection unit. Include sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 12 inches long. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance data. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of impact -resistant wall protection units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures. b. Deterioration of plastic and other materials beyond normal use. 2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION 102600 - 1 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS Dec-2010 A. PVC Plastic: ASTM D 1784, Class 1, textured, chemical- and stain -resistant, high -impact - resistant PVC or acrylic -modified vinyl plastic with integral color throughout. 1. Impact Resistance: Minimum 25.4 ft-lbf'in. of notch when tested according to ASTM D 256, Test Method A. 2. Chemical and Stain Resistance: Tested according to ASTM D 543. 3. Self -extinguishing when tested according to ASTM D 635. 4. Flame -Spread Index: 25 or less. 5. Smoke -Developed Index: 450 or less. B. Polycarbonate Plastic Sheet: ASTM D 6098, S-PCOI, Class 1 or 2, abrasion resistant; with a minimum impact -resistance rating of 15 ft-lbVin. of notch when tested according to ASTM D 256, Test Method A. C. Aluminum Extrusions: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated, but with not less than strength and durability properties specified in ASTM B 221 for Alloy 6063-T5. D. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless -steel, or other noncorrosive metal screws, bolts, and other fasteners compatible with items being fastened. Use security -type fasteners where exposed to view. 2.2 WALL GUARDS A. Bumper Rail: Assembly consisting of continuous snap -on plastic cover installed over concealed, continuous retainer; designed to withstand impacts. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 2. Cover: Extruded rigid plastic, minimum 0.078-inch wall thickness; in dimensions and profiles indicated on Drawings. a. Color and Texture: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION 102600 - 2 r-• Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. Dec-20l 0 3. Continuous Retainer: Minimum 0.080-inch- thick, one-piece, extruded aluminum. 4. Retainer Clips: Manufacturer's standard impact -absorbing clips. 5. Bumper: Continuous rubber or vinyl bumper cushion(s). 6. End Caps and Corners: Prefabricated, injection -molded plastic; matching color cover; field adjustable for close alignment with snap -on cover. 7. Accessories: Concealed splices and mounting hardware. 8. Mounting: Surface mounted directly to wall. 2.3 CORNER GUARDS A. Surface -Mounted, Resilient, Plastic Corner Guards: Assembly consisting of snap -on plastic cover installed over continuous retainer; including mounting hardware; fabricated with 90- or 135-degree turn to match wall condition. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. C. #; ]c c1,.t,,,. d. fit1c. t e. 10 (fit 3 ind 4` ll Ili lie111i:'.t033. .3 1�'1�4 g b. t. 3 �vitft<17i 19)t is at t+ +z_i j�„ j. 2. Cover: Extruded rigid plastic of dimension to reach from base trim to ceiling panel at each corner indicated on Drawings. a. Color and Texture: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 3. Retainer: One-piece extruded plastic. 4. Retainer Clips: Manufacturer's standard impact -absorbing clips. 5. Top and Bottom Caps: Prefabricated, injection -molded plastic; color matching cover; field adjustable for close aligmnent with snap -on cover. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Install impact -resistant wall protection units level, plumb, and true to line without distortions. Do not use materials with chips, cracks, voids, stains, or other defects that might be visible in the finished Work. I. Install impact -resistant wall protection units in locations and at mounting heights indicated on Drawings. WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION 102600 - 3 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. Dec-201 0 , 2. Provide splices, mounting hardware, anchors, and other accessories required for a complete installation. a. Provide anchoring devices to withstand imposed loads. b. Where splices occur in horizontal runs of more than 20 feet, splice aluminum retainers and plastic covers at different locations along the run, but no closer than 12 inches. C. Adjust caps as required to ensure tight seams. B. Immediately after completion of installation, clean plastic covers and accessories using a standard, ammonia -based, household cleaning agent. C. Remove excess adhesive using methods and materials recommended in writing by manufacturer. END OF SECTION 102600 WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION 102600 - 4 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Dec-2010 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. SECTION 104413 - FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes fire protection cabinets for fire extinguishers. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For fire protection cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance data. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire -Rated, Fire Protection Cabinets: Listed and labeled to comply with requirements in ASTM E 814 for fire -resistance rating of walls where they are installed. B. Coordinate size of fire protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers indicated are accommodated. C. Coordinate sizes and locations of fire protection cabinets with wall depths. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cold -Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM. A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B. B. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated, and as follows: 1. Sheet: ASTM B 209 2. Extruded Shapes: ASTM B 221 C. Stainless -Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304. FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 104413 - l Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Dec-2010 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. D. Copper -Alloy Brass Sheet: ASTM B 36/13 36M, alloy UNS No. C26000 (cartridge brass, 70 percent copper). E. Copper -Alloy Bronze Sheet: ASTM B 36/13 36M, alloy UNS No. C28000 (muntz metal, 60 percent copper). F. Clear Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class I, Quality q3, [3] [6] mm thick. G. Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Quality q3, 3 mm thick, Class 1 (clear). H. Break Glass: Clear annealed float glass, ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Quality q3, 1.5 mm thick, single strength. I. Tempered Break Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Quality q3, 1.5 mm thick. J. Wire Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type II, Class I, Form 1, Quality q8, Mesh ml (diamond), 6 mm thick. K. Transparent Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D 4802, Category A-1 (cell -cast sheet), 1.5 mm thick, with Finish 1 (smooth or polished). 2.2 FIRE PROTECTION CABINET A. Cabinet Type: Suitable .for fire extinguisher. l . I,: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: B. Cabinet Construction: 1-hour fire rated. 1. Fire -Rated Cabinets: Construct fire -rated cabinets with double walls fabricated from 0.0428-inch- thick, cold -rolled steel sheet lined with minimum 5/8-inch- thick, fire - barrier material. Provide factory -drilled mounting holes. C. Cabinet Material: Steel sheet. D. Semirecessed Cabinet: Cabinet box partially recessed in walls of sufficient depth to suit style of trim indicated; with one-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend). Provide where walls are of insufficient depth for recessed cabinets but are of sufficient depth to accommodate semirecessed cabinet installation. FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 104413 - 2 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Dec-2010 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. 1. Square -Edge Trim: 1-JA- to 1-1'2-inch backbend depth. E. Cabinet Trim Material: Steel sheet. F. Door Material: Steel sheet. G. Door Style: Fully glazed panel with frame. H. Door Glazing: Clear float glass. 1. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door -operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated. 1. Accessories: 1. Mounting Bracket: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to fire protection cabinet, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or baked -enamel finish. 2. Door Lock: Cam lock that allows door to be opened during emergency by pulling sharply on door handle. 3. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as directed. a. Identify fire extinguisher in fire protection cabinet with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER." 1) Location: Applied to cabinet glazing. 2) Application Process: Decals. 3) Lettering Color: Red. 4) Orientation: Vertical. K. Finishes: 1. Manufacturer's standard baked -enamel paint for the following: a. Exterior of cabinet , door, and trim, except for those surfaces indicated to receive another finish. b. Interior of cabinet and door. 2. Steel: Baked enamel or powder coat. a. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Fire Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub), with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. Miter and weld joints and grind smooth. FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 104413 - 3 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. PART 3 - EXECUTION Dec-2010 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where semirecessed cabinets will be installed and prepare recesses as required by type and size of cabinet and trim style. B. Install fire protection cabinets in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not indicated, at heights acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Fire Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb. D. Identification: Apply decals at locations indicated. E. Adjust fire protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly. F. Replace fire protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. END OF SECTION 104413 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 104413 - 4 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. SECTION 104416 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes portable, hand -carried fire extinguishers. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and maintenance data. Dec-2010 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers." B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with fire protection cabinets to ensure fit and function. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PORTABLE, HAND -CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each fire protection cabinet indicated. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b. - - ' - c. a t FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 104416 - 1 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. Dec-2010 2. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10, Appendix B. B. Multipurpose Dry -Chemical Type: UL-rated nominal capacity, with monoammonium phosphate -based dry chemical in manufacturer's standard enameled container. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging. 1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers. B. Install fire extinguishers in locations indicated and in compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. END OF SECTION 104416 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 104416 - 2 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. SECTION 122113 - HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Horizontal louver blinds with aluminum slats. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for horizontal louver blinds. C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product certificates. B. Product test reports. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance data. PART 2-PRODUCTS Dec-2010 2.1 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. i, >t s .- Contract. s _ _ 3. 4. B. Aluminum Slats: 1. Width: 1/2 to 5.18 inch. 2. Thickness: Manufacturer's standard. HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 122113 - 1 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Dec-201 0 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. 3. Spacing: Manufacturer's standard. C. Slat Features: I. Lift -Cord Rout Holes: Minimum size required for lift cord and located near back (outside) edge of slat to maximize slat overlap and minimize light gaps between slats. D. Headrail: a. Function: Lift and tilt. 2. Manual Lift Mechanism: a. Operator: Extension of lift cord(s) through lift -cord lock mechanism to form cord pull. 3. Manual Tilt Mechanism: Enclosed worm -gear mechanism and linkage rod that adjusts ladders. a. Tilt: Full. b. Operator: Clear -plastic wand. 4. Manual Lift -Operator and Tilt -Operator Lengths: Manufacturer's standard. 5. Manual Lift -Operator and Tilt -Operator Locations: Manufacturer's standard unless otherwise indicated. E. Bottom Rail: Matching slats. I . Type: Manufacturer's standard. F. Ladders: Braided cord. G. Valance: Manufacturer's standard. H. Mounting Brackets: With spacers and shims required for blind placement and alignment indicated. I . Type: Wall. 2. Intermediate Support: Provide intermediate support brackets to produce support spacing recommended by blind manufacturer for weight and size of blind. I. Hold -Down Brackets and Hooks or Pins: Manufacturer's standard. J. Side Channels and Perimeter Light Gap Seals: Manufacturer's standard. K. Colors, Textures, Patterns, and Gloss: I . Slats: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2. Components: Provide rails, cords, ladders, and materials exposed to view matching or coordinating with slat color unless otherwise indicated. HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 122113 - 2 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Dec-2010 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. 2.2 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLIND FABRICATION A. Product Safety Standard: Fabricate horizontal louver blinds to comply with WCMA A 100.1 including requirements for corded, flexible, looped devices; lead content of components; and warning Iabels. B. Unit Sizes: Fabricate units in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows, measured at ?4 dep- F: 1. 4Outside of Jamb Installation: Width and length as indicated, with terminations between blinds of end -to -end installations at centerlines of mullion or other defined vertical separations between openings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances, and other conditions affecting performance. l . Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Install horizontal louver blinds level and plumb, aligned and centered on openings, and aligned with adjacent units according to manufacturer's written instructions. l . Locate so exterior slat edges are not closer than 1 inch from interior faces of glass and not closer than 112 inch from interior faces of glazing frames through full operating ranges of blinds. 2. Install mounting and intermediate brackets to prevent deflection of headrails. 3. Install with clearances that prevent interference with adjacent blinds, adjacent construction, and operating hardware of glazed openings, other window treatments, and similar building components and furnishings. C. Adjust horizontal louver blinds to operate free of binding or malfunction through full operating ranges. D. Clean horizontal louver blind surfaces after installation according to manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 122113 r_ HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 122113 - 3 No Text Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Dec-2010 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. SECTION 123623.13 - PLASTIC -LAMINATE -CLAD COUNTERTOPS PARTI- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes plastic -laminate countertops. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product, including high-pressure decorative laminate. B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components. C. Samples: 1. Plastic laminates, for each color, pattern, and surface finish. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS T- A. Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certificates. . 1.4 FIELD CONDITIONS 71, A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install countertops until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidityat occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. P y $ -c- - PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 PLASTIC -LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for grades indicated for construction, installation, and other requirements. B. Grade: Custom. C. Certified Wood: Plastic -laminate countertops shall be made from wood products certified as "FSC Pure" according to FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship," and FSC STD-40-004, "FSC Standard for Chain of Custody Certification." D. High -Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, Grade HGS. PLASTIC -LAMINATE -CLAD COUNTERTOPS 123623.13 - 1 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Dec-2010 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. i b. G C. d. - f e. ' Div. of Premark International, Inc. E. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: 1. As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range in the following categories: a. Solid colors, matte finish. b. Patterns, matte finish. F. Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces. G. Paper Backing: Provide paper backing on underside of countertop substrate. 2.2 WOOD MATERIALS A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard unless otherwise indicated. l . Wood Moisture Content: 5 to 10 percent. B. Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated. 1. Medium -Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Grommets for Cable Passage through Countertops: 2-inch OD, black, molded -plastic grommets and matching plastic caps with slot for wire passage. 1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide " SG series" by Doug Mockett & Company, Inc. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Adhesives: Use adhesives that meet the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small -Scale Environmental Chambers." PLASTIC -LAMINATE -CLAD COUNTERTOPS 123623.13 - 2 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. 2.5 FABRICATION Dec-2010 A. Fabricate countertops to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Provide front and end overhang of l inch over base cabinets. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following: 1. Solid -Wood (Lumber) Members: 1/16 inch unless otherwise indicated. B. Complete fabrication, including assembly, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Before installation, condition countertops to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Grade: Install countertops to comply with same grade as item to be installed. B. Assemble countertops and complete fabrication at Project site to the extent that it was not completed in the shop. I . Provide cutouts for appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. 2. Sea] edges of cutouts by saturating with varnish. C. Field Jointing: Prepare edges to be joined in shop so Project -site processing of top and edge surfaces is not required. 1. Secure field joints in plastic -laminate countertops with concealed clamping devices located within 6 inches of front and back edges and at intervals not exceeding 24 inches. Tighten according to manufacturer's written instructions to exert a constant, heavy - clamping pressure at joints. D. Install countertops level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 18 inch in 96 inches. E. Scribe and cut countertops to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts. F. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other supports into underside of countertop. 1. Install countertops with no more than 1I8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. 2. Secure backsplashes to tops with concealed metal brackets at 16 inches o.c. and to walls with adhesive. PLASTIC -LAMINATE -CLAD COUNTERTOPS 123623.13 - 3 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. Dec-2010 3. Seal junctures of tops, splashes, and walls with mildew -resistant silicone sealant or another permanently elastic sealing compound recommended by countertop material manufacturer. END OF SECTION 123623.13 PLASTIC -LAMINATE -CLAD COUNTERTOPS 123623.13 - 4 December 10, 2010 CITIBUS DOWNTOWN TRANSFER PLAZA RENOVATION/ADDITION 801 Broadway Street Lubbock, Texas CONSULTANTS' PROFESSIONAL RESPONSIBILITY The specifications sections to be authenticated by my seal and signature are limited to the following: SPECIFICATION INDEX MECHANICAL: SECTION 15010 General Mechanical Provisions SECTION 15020 Testing SECTION 15060 Piping SECTION 15250 Insulation SECTION 15400 Plumbing SECTION 15650 Air Conditioning SECTION 15804 Ventilating SECTION 15840 Ductwork SECTION 15870 Grilles, Registers and Ceiling Diffusers By: Carl W. Wampler. P.E. BSA, Consulting Engineers, PLLC 14302 Slide Road Lubbock, TX 79424 Ph:806-762-0419; Fax:806-780-0129 Texas Firm Registration No. F4415 P.E. License No. 97056 lb- !t4*' .* l..V . CARL W. WAMPLER .............................. �... IN:. 970564, z010 Clayman tlervay Archireero Ine Unenlhonxed Duplication Prohibh�d No Text D—rnher 10, 2010 f SECTION 15010 - GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The work covered by this section of the specifications includes the furnishing of all materials and labor as required for the installation of the plumbing, heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems, all as shown on the drawings, as herein specified, or both. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Refer to other applicable clauses and regulations for other requirements. 1.3 SUBMITTAL A. All submittal required by this section shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01300. B. This Contractor shall submit six (6) copies of all submittal data covering proposed equipment to the Architect for approval prior to installation. All equipment shall be submitted at one time in a bound folder with an index of submittal. 1.4 REGULATIONS A. All work shall be done in strict accordance and compliance with State and Local Laws, together with regulations of the particular Utility Companies concerned. B. Obtain permits as required by the local authorities. 1.5 CLARIFICATION A. The Engineer shall provide, with reasonable promptness, written responses to requests from the Contractor for clarification and interpretation of the requirements of the Contract Documents. However, if the Contractor's requests forinformation, clarification or interpretation are, in the Engineers professional opinion, for information readily apparent from reasonable observation of field conditions or a review of the Contract Documents, or are reasonably inferable therefrom, the Engineer shall be entitled to compensation from the Contractor for the Engineer's time spent responding to such requests. 1.6 DEFECTS A. Contractors shall promptly report to the Engineer any defects or suspected defects in the contract documents of which the Contractor becomes aware, so that the Engineer may take measures to minimize the consequences of such a defect. Failure by the Contractor to notify the Engineer shall relieve the Engineer or Owner of the costs .- . of remedying the defects above the sum such remedy would have cost had prompt notification been given when such defects were first discovered. 1.7 COMPLETION A. If the Contractor asks for a final inspection and the project is not complete enough to prepare a normal punch list as determined by the Engineer, the Engineer shall be compensated for time and travel for subsequent site visits. 1.8 DRAWINGS A. The drawings and the specifications are numbered consecutively. Each Contractor shall check these drawings - � 2010 Chapman Harvey Arc.I Unauthorized DuplicationProhibited GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS 15010-1 December 10, 2010 and specifications thoroughly and shall notify the Architect of any discrepancies or omissions of sheets or pages. Upon notification, the Architect will promptly provide the Contractor with any missing portions of the drawings and/or specifications. No discrepancies or omissions of sheets or pages of the Contract Documents will relieve the Contractor of his duty to provide all work required by the complete Contract. B. The plans accompanying these specifications are intended to show the general arrangement and the extent of the work contemplated. The Contractor shall inspect the site before bidding to verify the actual conditions involved as no allowance will be made for unforeseen conditions. The exact location and arrangement of all parts shall be determined after equipment has been approved by the Architect and as directed by the Architect. All materials or labor necessary to complete the work in accordance with the intent of these specifications shall be furnished by each Contractor without additional charge as if called for in these specifications or shown on the plans. C. Should the particular equipment which any bidder proposes to install require other space conditions, supports or clearances other than those indicated on the drawings, he shall arrange for such items with the Architect before submitting his bid. Should changes become necessary on account of failure to comply with this clause, the Contractor shall make such necessary changes at his (the Contractor's) own expense. D. This Contractor shall verify all existing conditions that may effect his work including exact location and size of all plumbing lines, direction of flow, ductwork, existing equipment and connection points. Any discrepancies from conditions shown on the drawings shall be reported to the Architect before bidding and the bid price shall include the cost to correct any discrepancies to provide a complete and workable system. E. This Contractor shall thoroughly lay out all his work and check all conditions to insure that the work as shown on the Drawings can be installed without modifications. No material shall be fabricated or delivered to the job until these conditions have been determined. F. The Owner or Owner's Representative reserves the right to make changes during construction, if required, and no allowances will be made for prefabricated material or on job materials which can not be used due to actual conditions. APPROVAL OF MATERIALS A. Where manufacturer's names are mentioned in these specifications, it has been done, in most cases, in order to establish a standard. The products of others than the particular manufacturers mentioned will be acceptable, if of suitable type and construction, but any substitution must be of quality as good as, or better than, the named article. B. If the Contractor elects to substitute other equipment or materials for that specified by name, he shall be fully responsible for all coordination with other trades involved. Any expense incurred because of modifications to accommodate larger sizes, larger electrical service, fuel piping requirements resulting from such substitution shall be borne by the Contractor substituting other equipment. C. Upon being awarded the Contract for the work under one of the following sections, the Contractor shall, within thirty (30) days, submit for approval a complete list of the materials which he proposes to use. The list shall give the manufacturer's names and designations corresponding to every item and where submitted materials are different from that specified by name, the submission shall be accompanied by a complete descriptive literature and/or any supplementary data and drawings, necessary to give full and complete details for the completed installation. D. Any item on this list which is rejected because of unsuitability or inferior quality, must be replaced by an acceptable item within two (2) weeks following notification of the Contractor of such rejection. If no satisfactory material is submitted within two (2) weeks, then the Architect reserves the right to notify the Contractor as to the type and make of materials he will be required to furnish. Six (6) copies of the material and the equipment list shall be furnished by the Contractor in neat and firmly bound brochures for approval. 1.10 PRECEDENCE A. The work covered in this section shall have precedence over each other in accordance with the following sequence: 1. Soil and waste piping 2. Duct work 3. CoId and hot water piping 4. Electric wiring au horized Duplicaii nArchitects, Chapman H—y Prohibil d U GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS 15010-2 December 10, 2010 i 1.11 COOPERATION A. Each contractor shall cooperate with the General Contractor and all other contractors to properly coordinate their work, to avoid interference and delays, and arrange all parts of the work so as to harmonize in service and appearance with all other parts. 1.12 INTERFERENCES A. The plans are generally diagrammatic and the Contractor must harmonize the work of the different trades so that interference between piping, equipment, architectural and structural work will be avoided. All necessary offsets in piping, fittings, etc., required to properly install the work must be kept as close as possible to walls, ceiling, columns, etc., so as to take up the minimum amount of space, and all offsets, fittings, etc., required to accomplish it must be furnished and installed by the contractor without additional cost to the Owner. B. Exact locations of mechanical equipment may be varied a reasonable amount by the Architect before installation j without additional cost to the Owner. C. All equipment and controls shall be so located and arranged that all parts will be available for proper maintenance. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP A. Materials shall be new, unless otherwise specified, and of the quality specified. Materials shall be free from any defects. Materials and equipment for which the Underwriters' Laboratories have established as standard, shall be listed by the Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., and shall bear their label. B. Each Contractor shall be responsible for transportation of his materials to the job and shall be responsible for the storage and protection of same. This will be provided until final acceptance of the job. C. Each Contractor shall provide protection against weather, so as to maintain all materials and equipment free from injury and damage. All new work likely to be damaged shall be covered during the day and at the end of each day. D. Each Contractor will furnish all necessary scaffolding, tackle, tools, appurtenances and all labor required for the safe and expeditious execution of this contract. E. The workmanship shall be in all respects, the highest grade and all construction in accordance with the best practice of the trade. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 VERIFICATION OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. It shall be the responsibility of all parties concerned to carefully examine the plans and specifications relating to this work for completeness, accuracy and clarity. Any conflict, errors or clarification requests shall be immediately brought to the attention of the Engineer for written interpretation or instructions. No claims for increased compensation for additions, changes or alterations will be considered unless written authority is granted by the Engineer. Otherwise, any additional materials and/or labor due to additions, alterations and changes necessary to meet existing conditions shall be furnished under this contract. 3.2 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. The Contractor for the work covered by each section of these specifications shall furnish and install all foundations and supports required by equipment included in his work. `-= B. All piping, both vertical and horizontal, shall be supported at sufficient close intervals to keep its alignment, prevent sagging and to prevent pipe from being supported by equipment or equipment connections. �` nau horiz dDuplicati �`emnm� c GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS 15010-3 December 10, 2010 C. Vertical pipes shall be supported from floor with riser clamps sized to fit the lines and adequately support their weight. Vertical copper tubing, 1-1/4" and smaller shall be supported at 3' intervals and at the base of pipe risers, where required for proper support. Hangers shall be manufactured by Kindorff, Unistrut, Elcen or equal. Where multiple pipes are indicated, they may be supported on a continuous hanger. All hangers must meet the Architect's approval. Use of perforated straps will not be permitted. D. All horizontal pipes suspended with structure above shall be supported by hanger rods of the following size: 1. Pipes up to and including 2" 3/8" rods 2. 2-1/2" and 3" pipe 1/2" rods 3. 4" and 5" pipe 5/8" rods 4. 6" pipe 3/4" rods E. Soil pipe shall be supported at all turns and at intervals not to exceed 5' on centers on straight runs. The following table gives maximum hanger spacing for copper and steel lines but hangers shall be more closely spaced where necessary: SIZE OF LINE HANGER SPACING 3/4" and smaller 5' 1" 6' 1-1/4" 7' 1-1/2" 8' 2" to 4" 10, Larger than 4" 12' F. If pipes of different Contractors can be racked on the same supporting structure, each Contractor shall cooperate with the other involved to properly locate the supporting members and shall furnish a proportionate share of the labor and materials involved in the installation. 3.3 EXPANSION AND CONTRACTION OF PIPES A. Swing joints, turns, expansion loops, or long offsets, shall be provided wherever shown on the drawings, and where necessary to allow for the expansion of piping within the building. Broken pipes or fittings due to rigid connection shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense. Anchors shall be installed where shown or required to control expansion of piping system. Anchors shall be of the clamp type securely fastened to the building structure. 3.4 UNIONS A. Unions shall not be placed in any pipe in a location which will be inaccessible after completion of the building unless shown on drawings or specified. Unions shall be installed on both sides of all valves, regulators, check valves, traps, etc., so that such equipment may be readily disconnected. Where copper pipe joins iron or steel pipe, an insulation union using a "Bakelite" insulator shall be used. 3.5 ESCUTCHEONS A. Where exposed to view, pipes insulated or bare, passing through floors, walls, or ceilings, shall be filled with near, heavy spun or stamped steel escutcheons, firmly secured to the pipes. Escutcheons shall be of sufficient outside diameter to surround both the pipe and the sleeves. The sleeve shall have a nickel plated finish, fabricated in one piece and shall be firmly anchored in space. "Snap -on" type escutcheons will not be permitted. 3.6 SOIL CONDITIONS A. This specification and drawings in no way stipulate the condition of the soil to be encountered. When excavation may be required in execution of the work, this Contractor agrees that he has informed himself regarding conditions that may appear or seem to be implied in any portion of the Contract Documents. 3.7 EXCAVATING, TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING FOR PIPING A. Trenches for all underground pipe lines shall be excavated 12" beyond required depths. The bottom of trenches shall be tamped hard and graded to secure the required fall. Bell holes shall be excavated so that pipe will rest Unauthorized Duplication `Prown� Inc. GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS 15010-4 December 10. 2010 on solid ground for its entire length. Sewer shall be laid in a separate trench, except where otherwise noted on the drawings. Before backfillin of pipe, Contractor shall provide blow -sand and/or clean river sand in bottom g g PP � of all trenches, 12" deep. B. Backfilling: After pipe lines have been tested, inspected, and approved by the Architect, and prior to backfilling, forms shall be removed, and the excavation shall be cleaned of trash and debris. Backfill shall be placed in horizontal layers not exceeding 8" in thickness, and properly moistened to approximate optimum requirements. Each layer shall be compacted by hand or machine tampers or by other suitable equipment to a density that will prevent excessive settlement or shrinkage. Backfill shall be brought to a suitable elevation above grade to provide for anticipated settlement and shrinkage thereof. Blow -sand and/or river sand shall be placed over pipe, 8" minimum, above top of pipe before backfill is begun. C. Where gravel, streets, paved streets, sidewalks, etc., are disturbed, cut and damaged in making connections to city sewer, water lines, and gas lines, the expense of repairing same in an approved manner, as required, shall be included under this contract. 3.8 UTILITY CONNECTIONS A. Utility connection locations, depths, sizes, characteristics and capacities shall be verified by each Contractor utilizing these items and any discrepancies from those shown on the plans shall be brought to the Architect's attention before bidding. Any and all utility connections shall be made by the Contractor, as required, with no increase to the Owner above the price indicated in the Contractor's proposal. 3.9 PAINTING A. No painting will be required under this section. 3.10 TESTING A. This contractor shall test all plumbing lines and equipment as described under "Testing" section of these specifications. 3.11 ELECTRICAL A. Electric motors shall be of the speed, phase and voltage as specified and shall be of type recommended by motor manufacturer for type of service involved. B. The Contractor furnishing the motor shall install it. The Contractor shall furnish such motor controls and starting equipment as specified or as required. The erection and connection of all switches, starting and control equipment, and the wiring of same, shall be done as required. Conduits from controllers to motors shall be flexible for not over three feet (3) and shall be attached to the terminal housing of the motor. All flexible conduit to motor shall be waterproof type with neoprene jacket. C. Where automatic controls are called for in the Plumbing, Heating and Air Conditioning specifications, the control instruments, such as motorized damper motors, motorized valves, etc., shall be installed by the Contractor furnishing the controls. All wiring necessary shall be done by the Electrical Contractor. The Contractor furnishing the controls shall furnish a control wiring diagram to the Electrical Contractor. D. Starters on air cooled condensing units shall be furnished by the equipment manufacturer. Starters for Heating and Ventilating units shall be furnished by the equipment manufacturer. 3.12 FLASHING A. Vent pipes shall be flashed and made watertight at the roof with 4 lb. sheet lead. Flashings shall extend not less 1 than eight inches (8") from the vent pipes in all directions, shall be extended up the vent pipes a minimum of six inches (6") at which point threaded standard cast-iron or malleable -iron recess roof couplings shall be installed to form counter -flashing or rain guards. Flashings in connection with cast-iron pipe vents shall be turned down into the pipes or hubs. Flashings on metal roofs shall be "Dektite" flashings or approved equal. Roof drains shall be flashed as detailed on the drawings. ..ti Unauthorized rDup a[� �rerohibiied ' GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS 15010-5 l December 10, 2010 4 3.13 PIPE SLEEVES A. Each contractor shall provide sleeves for service lines passing through walls, roof or floors, subject to Architect's approval and/or as shown on the Drawings. Pipes passing through interior wall sleeves shall be free to move through sleeve. Sleeves exposed to view shall be equipped with cast brass escutcheons. B. All sleeves installed in vertical position shall be constructed of standard weight galvanized steel pipe. All sleeves in horizontal position shall be constructed of standard weight steel or extra heavy cast iron pipe unless otherwise, noted, welded to steel plate in vertical position as detailed on the drawings. Pipe sleeve diameter shall be a f minimum of 2 diameters larger than the outside of pipe passing through same, and a minimum of 1 " larger than y pipe plus insulation. Insulation shall pass through sleeves. C. Where pipe extends through exterior walls below grade, oversize pipe sleeves, 2 diameters larger,made of standard weight steel pipe shall be used, and the annular space between service pipe and sleeves shall be filled " with picked oakum and cement, or lead where required, to make a waterproof joint. D. All sleeves shall be installed flush with finished surfaces and/or as detailed on the Drawings. Copper pipes passing through steel pipe sleeves shall be installed with rubber insulation between pipe and sleeves Isolator insulation shall be similar to Johns -Manville Aeratube. E. Where any pipe passes through fire walls, smoke walls, and concrete slabs between floors, the Contractor shall furnish and install fire seals, U.L. listed, type LS, link -seal, as manufactured by Thunderline Corp., or approved 4 equal. Fire and smoke seals shall be installed in steel pipe sleeve of correct size for pipe and insulation. 3.14 INSULATING COUPLINGS A. This Contractor shall furnish and install insulating couplings wherever piping material changes from galvanized steel pipe to copper, or from black steel to copper, and where shown on the drawings. 3.15 INSULATION A. Furnish and install pipe, duct, and equipment insulation as specified under "Insulation" section of these specifications. 3.16 LABELS A. Heating and air conditioning units shall have a permanent metal tag or laminated plastic (min. thickness .093 inch) attached by riveting to identify as shown on the drawings. Letters on tag shall be 1/4" to 3/8" in height. 3.17 FLOOR AND CEILING PLATES A. All exposed pipes passing through floors, ceiling, or walls shall be provided with approved nickel or chromium plated cast brass ceiling plates securely attached with set screws. 3.18 EQUAL MATERIAL CONSIDERATION A. Approval of equipment other than that specified does not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility of modifying the equipment if necessary to meet Structural, Architectural, Electrical, or Mechanical conditions as detailed and specified on the drawings. 3.19 INSTRUCTION MANUALS A. Furnish four (4) complete bound copies of Instruction Manuals on all operating equipment to Owner. Manuals: complete with repair instructions, replacement parts list, and complete operating instructions and wiring diagrams. 3.20 TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS A. After completion of the work but before final payment is made, the Contractor shall run test over a sufficient ° nund�liato``ritdueeDPciPohbieGENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS 15010-6 December10,2010 period of time to prove the proper capacity and performance of apparatus, etc., and of system as a whole to the approval of the Architect and Engineer. See Testing section of the Specifications. 3.21 GUARANTEE A. This Contractor shall guarantee the workmanship and material against defects for a period of one (1) year from the date of acceptance, unless specified otherwise in other sections of this specification. END OF SECTION 150I0 2010 Chapman Harvey Architect., Inc. Unauthorized Dup[ication Prohibited GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS 15010-7 No Text r, December 10, 2010 SECTION 15060 - PIPING �t PART ] - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. This contract shall include the furnishing and installation of all labor and material necessary to complete all plumbing and gas fitting as shown on the drawings and as herein specified. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Refer to other applicable clauses and regulations for other requirements. 1.3 SUBMITTAL A. All submittal required by this section shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01300. B. Submit manufacturer's data for approval on all materials to be furnished as part of this project. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPING GENERALLY A. Type of piping for the various systems shall be as specified under specific headings. B. Pipe ends shall be square cut. Ends of pipes shall be reamed and shall be wiped clean to remove cuttings. Before installation, pipe shall be stood on end and rapped sharply to remove cuttings and other foreign material from interior. Pipe shall be thoroughly cleaned inside and outside. C. Screwed joints shall be made with best linseed oil and graphite or "Jointite" used on male threads only. Omit compound on two (2) end starting threads. D. Pipe shall be accurately cut to fit. Bending or springing of pipe will not be permitted. E. The various service pipes, valves, fittings, etc., running parallel with each other and near together shall be in line with each other and shall be kept a sufficient distance from each other and other work, to permit not less than 1/2" between finished coverings on the different services. F. No unions are to be placed in any pipe in a location which will be inaccessible after completion of the building unless so shown on drawings or specified. Unions must be installed on each side of all special valves, regulators, etc., and one (1) side of all check valves, thermostatic traps, and at all pieces of equipment such as pumps, condensers, tanks, etc., so that such equipment may be readily disconnected. G. Each Contractor shall furnish all foundations, structural or pipe supports indicated or called for specifically, or that may be required to support his particular equipment and material, unless hangers are definitely indicated as being furnished by others. All horizontal runs of piping shall be securely supported by pipe hangers spaced not more than 10' apart, and closer when necessary to prevent sagging. Soil pipe shall be supported every 5'. H. Perforated strap hangers will not be allowed for any part of hangers_ I. Swing joints, offsets, and anchors shall be provided in piping where required to provide for and control expansion or contraction of pipe. J. All piping, except waste piping, shall be installed above finished first floor slab, unless otherwise noted on the Drawings. 2.2 EQUAL MATERIALS CONSIDERATION J' A. Approval of equipment other than that specified does not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility of modifying the equipment if necessary to meet Structural, Architectural, Electrical, or Mechanical conditions as 2010 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. PIPING 15060-1 Unauthorized Duplication prohibited December 10, 2010 detailed and specified on the drawings. 2.3 MATERIALS A. Locations for various kinds of pipe materials shall be in accordance with the schedule following: 1. Plastic DWV pipe and fittings: a. Underground sanitary drainage piping within the building line and exterior of the building line. b. Aboveground vent and drainage piping. 2. Standard weight galvanized steel water piping with screwed malleable fittings: a. Aboveground vent piping 2" and smaller where constructed in plaster pipe chases. 3. Type L hard drawn copper with brass solder fittings: a. Aboveground domestic water piping within the building 4" and smaller in size. b. Drainage pipe where shown on the drawings. 4. Type K hard drawn copper with brass solder fittings: a. Domestic water supply piping underground, inside masonry walls, and under concrete slabs within the building line and elsewhere as noted. b. Condensate piping from refrigerant cooling coil to floor drain, or waste line. 5. Standard weight black steel pipe, Schedule 40, with screwed malleable fittings: a. Gas piping within building to 3'-0" outside the building line. 6. Schedule 40 PVC pipe and fittings: a. Roof drain piping. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 COPPER WATER PIPING A. Pipe and tubing shall be cut accurately to measurements established at the building by the Contractor and shall be worked into place without springing or forcing. Care shall be taken not to weaken the structural portions of the building. Piping aboveground shall be run parallel with the lines of the building unless otherwise shown or noted on the drawings. Branches from service lines may be taken off top of main, bottom of main, or side of main, using such crossover fittings as may be required by structural or installation conditions. Service pipes, valves, and fittings shall be kept a sufficient distance from other work and not less than I/2" between finished covering on the different services. No water piping shall be buried in floors unless specifically indicated on the drawings or approved. Changes in sizes shall be made with reducing fittings. The use of long screws and bushing will not be permitted. Where contractor connects copper to galvanized steel piping or hot water heaters, furnish and install insulating couplings. B. Drains indicated on the drawings in connection with the water distribution system shall be I/2" brass plugs. Additional drains shall be installed at low points on the hot-water and cold -water piping, and all piping shall grade down to the drains. C. Allowance shall be made throughout for expansion and contraction or tubing. Horizontal runs of tubing over 50' in length shall be anchored to the wall or to the supporting construction about midway on the run to force expansion, evenly divided, toward the ends. D. Air chambers shall be provided on both hot and cold supplies near each faucet or control valve, as applicable, and where not definitely shown on the drawings shall consist of a 12" length of tubing of the same diameter as the branch supply, fitted with a cap. E. Tubing shall be cut square, and burrs shall be removed. Both inside of fittings and outside of tubing shall be well cleaned with steel wool before sweating. Care shall be taken to prevent annealing of fittings and tubing when making connections. All joints shall be made with fittings. Joints for aboveground soldered fittings shall be made with a non -corrosive paste flux and solid string silver solder, and all underground joints shall be made with silfos only. Cored solder will not be permitted. Threaded swing joints shall be provided on all branch connections to mains and risers to provide for expansion and contraction of tubing. 95-5 solder shall be used to make joints extending to fixture only. F. Underground piping shall be a minimum of 24" below finish and/or natural grades. 3.2 GAS PIPING A. Gas piping shall be installed parallel with the building and water piping. In finished rooms, piping shall be run 2010 Chapman Harvey Architeeus, Inc- PIPING ] 5060-2 Unauthorized Duplication Prohibited December 10, 20)0 concealed in a vented space. Gas piping shall be run under floor slabs, only as specifically noted, and then shall be in Orangeburg or PVC airtight vented sleeves with metal fitting in an approved manner. Joints for steel pipe shall be made with graphite and oil or an approved graphite compound applied to the male thread only. After cutting and before threading, all pipe shall be reamed and shall have burrs removed. Threads shall be full cut, and not more than three (3) threads on the pipe shall remain exposed. Caulking of threaded joints to stop or prevent leaks will not be permitted. C. Make final connection to all items of equipment, as shown and required, using unions and shut-off valves in each location. 3.3 DOMESTIC HOT AND COLD WATER AND GAS VALVES AND FITTINGS Valves and fittings for all domestic cold water and hot water services shall be as follows: Gate valves 3" and smaller shall be Crane No. 428. Gate valves larger than 3" shall be butterfly valves instead. Globe valves 3" and smaller shall be Crane No. 14-1/2P. Globe valves larger than 3" shall be butterfly valves instead. Strainers shall be 125 psi, bronze body, screwed ends, of sizes shown on the drawings. Gas service stops shall be Crane No. 1228. Swing check valves 3" and smaller shall be Crane No. 137. Swing checks larger than 3" shall be Crane No. 14493. Lift check valves 3" and smaller shall be Crane No. 366E. Butterfly valves shall be Centerline Series LT or Crane #23 designed for 200 psi differential pressure bubble tight shut off up to 12" size and 150 psi above 12" size. Valves through 6" shall have a locking lever handle and above 6" shall have a gear operator with a memory stop. Valves shall be furnished with tapped full lug iron bodies, type 316 s.s. discs, type 304 s.s. stems, EPT or EPDM seats and O'rings. Buried water valves shall be AW WA valves, same as specified above with extended valve stem extensions. Valve sizes shall be same as pipe size receiving same. Valve stem extensions shall extend up to within 1" top of valve box. Provide valve operator to Owner at completion of job. Underground gas valves shall be Figure No. 610, ductile iron, lubricated plug valves, or approved equal. Valves shall be equipped with extend stems and operating handle for purpose intended. Provide proper valve lubricant for natural gas service at 5-10 pounds pressure. Valve extension shall be for a bury depth of 30". Contractor may use polyethylene valves with polyethylene gas lines. 3.4 PIPE HANGERS AND FIXTURE SUPPORTS A. Pipe hangers and fixture supports shall be furnished and set, and the Contractor shall be responsible for their proper and permanent locations. B. Horizontal runs of copper tubing shall be supported by approved steel plastic coated hangers spaced not more than 8' o.c. Horizontal runs of drainage and vent pipes shall be supported by adjustable expansion pipe hangers having bolted hinged loops and turnbuckles, or an approved equal. Hangers on drainage and vent pipe shall be spaced not more than 10' o.c. Hanger and collars shall be of size proportionate to the weight of the pipe supported. C. Fixtures and equipment shall be supported and fastened in a satisfactory manner. Where secured to concrete or brickwork walls, they shall be fastened with brass expansion bolts. Expansion bolts shall be 1/4" brass bolts with 20 threads to the inch and of sufficient length to extend at least 3" into solid concrete or brickwork, fitted with loose tubing or sleeves of proper length to bring expansion sleeves in the solid concrete or brick wall. Where secured to tile walls or partitions, they shall be fastened with 1 /4" brass toggle or through bolts. Where through bolts are used, they shall be provided with plates or washers at back, set so that heads, nuts, and washers will be concealed by plaster. Bolts and nuts shall be hexagon, and exposed bolts, nuts, and screw heads shall be provided with chromium plated brass washers. D. Copper pipe hangers shall be similar to Grinnell No. 260 with plastic coating for non -insulated water piping and Grinnell No. 300 for insulated water piping. Drainage and vent pipe hangers shall be similar to Grinnell No. 590. END OF SECTION 15060 r- 2010 Chapman Harvey Arehhecu, Inc. PIPING 15060-3 Unauthorized Dupbcauion Prohibited No Text December 10, 2010 r-- k SECTION 15250 - INSULATION PART l - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. This contract includes furnishing and installing all insulation specified herein. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Refer to other applicable clauses and regulations for other requirements. 1.3 SUBMITTAL A. All submittal required by this section shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01300. B. Submit manufacturer's data for approval on all materials to be furnished as pan of this project. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE AND DUCT INSULATION A. All insulation required under the Plumbing contract and Heating and Air Conditioning Contract shall be equal to and as manufactured by Knauf Fiber Glass, or Johns -Manville, and shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's directions and recommendations. B. Insulation: 1. Water Piping Within Building Lines - Shall be insulated with 1" thick fiber glass pipe insulation with a factory applied all service jacket with self-sealing lap. 2. Pipe Fittings - Insulate pipe fittings with Manville Zestons according to manufacturer's recommendation. 3. Condensate Drain Lines - Shall be insulated with Johns -Manville Aerotube,1/2" thick, or approved equal. Secure joints with #57 adhesive. 4. Overhead Heating and Air Conditioning Sheet Metal Ducts Above Ceilings -Shall be insulated with 2" fiber glass duct wrap with aluminum foil Kraft vapor barrier, and shall be secured to ductwork with an approved adhesive and be sealed and stapled in place, 3/4 lb. density. 5. Contractor at his option may use interior duct liner in lieu of exterior insulation. Duct liner shall be Certainteed #150 Ultralite Duct Liner, or approved equal, ]-1/2 lb. per cubic ft. density with vinyl spray one side. All transverse joints shall be protected against air erosion by properly sealing all edges and securing with sheet metal clips. Duct liner shall be secured with mastic, 100% coverage and clips l 8" on center. All exposed rectangular ducts shall be lined. C. Where insulation is indicated to be applied inside of ducts, exterior insulation will not be required. D. Where insulation occurs inside of ducts, allowance shall be made in sheet metal ductwork to accommodate the total insulation thickness. Duct dimensions indicated represent net inside clearances. E. Condensate lines shall be insulated with 1" thick fiber glass pipe insulation with a factory applied all service jacket with self sealing lap. 2.2 EQUAL MATERIALS CONSIDERATION A. Approval of equipment other than that specified does not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility of modifying the equipment if necessary to meet Structural, Architectural, Electrical, or Mechanical conditions as detailed and specified on the drawings. 2.3 SMOKE AND FLAME SPREAD 2010 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. INSULATION l 5250-] _J Unauthorized Duplication Prohibited December 10, 2010 A. All duct and pipe insulation shall have a flame spread no greater than 25 and a smoke developed rating no greater than 50. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSULATION A. All insulation shall be applied to clean surfaces and in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. END OF SECTION 15250 2010 Chapman Harvey Archmems, Inc. Unawhori2ed Duplication Prohibited INSULATION I5250-2 t. December 10, 2010 �. SECTION 15400 - PLUMBING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. This contract will include the furnishings and installation of all labor and material necessary to complete all plumbing and gas fittings as shown on the drawings and as herein specified as follows: 1. Water supply and service. 2. System of sanitary drainage, venting and connection to all fixtures as shown on the drawings. 3. Gas supply system. 4. Furnishing and installation of all fixtures as shown on the drawings and as herein specified. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Refer to other applicable clauses and regulations for other requirements. 1.3 SUBMITTAL A. All submittals required by this section shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01300. B. Submit manufacturer's data for approval on all materials to be furnished as part of this project. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUAL MATERIAL CONSIDERATION A. Approval of equipment other than that specified does not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility of modifying the equipment if necessary to meet Structural, Architectural, Electrical, or Mechanical conditions as detailed and specified on the drawings. 2.2 TRAPS A. Each fixture and piece of equipment requiring connections at the drainage system shall be equipped with a trap. Traps installed on hub -and -spigot pipe shall be extra -heavy cast-iron. Traps installed on threaded pipe shall be recess drainage pattern. All floor drains shall be equipped with a deep seal trap. 2.3 CLEANOUTS A. Cleanouts shall be the same size as the pipe, except that cleanout plugs larger than 4" will not be required. Cleanouts and access covers at finished walls and exterior walls shall be Wade Co. 8570-R N.B. cover and at finished floors shall be Wade Co. 8550-5 with Wade No 8300-S #2, N.B. cover, or the approved equal. Omit access covers for cleanouts in other locations. All wall covers shall be cadmium plated, and all floor cleanouts shall be polished nickel bronze flush with finish floor. Cleanouts exterior to the building shall be Wade Co. 7100-X with 9" x 9" access cover set flush with finish grade in 16" x 16" concrete pad, or as detailed on the drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION y A. Utilities: This Contractor shall furnish and install, and shall pay for connections to water, gas, and sewer piping, all in accordance with requirement of the local service companies concerned. .j 2010 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. PLUMBING ] 5400-1 Unauthorized Duplication Prohibited v December 10, 2010 B. Cross Connections and Interconnections: No plumbing fixtures, device or piping shall be installed which will y < t provide a cross connection or interconnection between a distributing supply for drinking or domestic purposes and a polluted supply such as a drainage system of a soil or waste into the water supply system. Provide any and all backflow prevention devices as required by code. E C. The Contractor shall provide all necessary material and labor to connect to the Plumbing System all fixtures and equipment shown on the drawings having plumbing connections and which are furnished and installed by others or are specified in other sections of these specifications. I D. The Contractor shall carefully investigate the structural and finish conditions affecting all his work and shall arrange such work accordingly, furnishing such fittings, traps, valves, and accessories as may be required to meet ` such conditions. Where pipes extend through concrete members, this Contractor shall core all such members and slabs, unless sleeves have been provided. Chipping concrete will not be allowed, and if any coring of the 1 concrete members is necessary, this contractor shall call it to the Architect's attention before doing same. I V.� E. Pipe openings shall be closed with caps or plugs during installation. Fixtures and equipment shall be tightly covered and protected against dirt, water and chemical or mechanical injury. At the completion of the work the fixtures, materials, and equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned. END OF SECTION 15400 2010 Chapman Harvey Architew, Inc. Unauthorized Duplication Prohibited PLUMBING 15400-2 December 10, 2010 SECTION 15650 - AIR CONDITIONING PART ] - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Contractor shall furnish and install where shown on the drawings, complete Summer -Winter, indoor and outdoor 11, , ' mounted air conditioning systems as shown on the drawings and as herein specified. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Refer to other applicable clauses and regulations for other requirements. 1.3 SUBMITTAL A. All submittal required by this section shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01300. B. Submit manufacturer's data for approval on all materials to be furnished as part of this project. 1.4 REBATES AND INCENTIVES A. Any and all rebates or incentives offered by utility companies or equipment manufacturers shall go directly to the Owner. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 AIR CONDITIONING UNITS A. All units shall be of the same manufacturer and shall have capacities and efficiency ratings as scheduled. 2.2 GAS -ELECTRIC ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS A. Furnish and install where shown on the drawings, complete summer -winter rooftop mounted air conditioning units as scheduled on the drawings. All units shall be manufactured by the same manufacturer and as herein specified. B. Unit shall be a standard product of a firm regularly engaged in the manufacture of this type of Heating and Cooling Equipment and shall have factory personnel available for assistance in trouble shooting. C. Mechanical contractors bidding this work shall have service facilities of their own or make arrangements with an independent service company to handle the start up and the first years service of this installation. Cost of the first years service shall be included in this bid. Routine maintenance of this equipment such as filter changes, lubricating, tightening belts, etc. is the responsibility of the Owner after final acceptance of this job. D. The equipment offered shall be designed for rooftop mounting and be fully approved by an accredited agency for outdoor installation. E. All electrical components shall carry an Underwriters' Laboratories Listing. F. Cabinet Construction: 1. All components of each unit shall be contained in a single weatherproof casing factory fabricated and assembled, one piece construction, no field assemblies. 2. The cabinet shall be constructed of heavy gauge galvanized steel. Exterior panels shall have a durable finish coat of outdoor acrylic enamel. 3. All exterior panels of the conditioned air portion of each unit shall be lined with V thick fiberglass insulation. In addition the entire bottom of the unit shall be insulated with fiberglass or Styrofoam. 2010 Chapman Harvey Architects, lire. Unauthorized Duplication Prohibited AIR CONDITIONING 15650-1 2.3 December 10, 2010 4. Easy access of all interior components shall be provided to facilitate service and maintenance. 5. All condenser coils shall have hail screens. G. Heating Section: 1. Natural gas heating capacity as scheduled on the drawings shall be furnished in each unit. High voltage ignition and re -ignition, and all necessary operating and safety controls shall be furnished. 2. Heating exchangers shall be aluminized steel and the entire unit shall be A.G.A. approved for firing with entering air at any temperature. 3. Heat exchanger shall be warranted for a period of ten years. H. Cooling Section: 1. The cooling method shall be direct expansion coils with mechanical refrigeration. Capacity shall be as scheduled on the plans. 2. Methods of heat transfer shall be by means of aluminum fins mechanically bonded to seamless copper tubes which are tested at the factory for 500 psi working pressure. 3. Compressors shall be warranted for five (5) years. 4. Condenser coils shall have hail screens. I. Damper Section: 1. Each unit shall have a manual outside air damper which is adjustable from 0 to 30%. 2. All outside air shall be filtered. 1. Filter Section: 1. Filter media shall be one inch thick polyurethane with 20 pores per inch mounted in rugged individual galvanized frames for each handling and cleaning. 2. Both outside and return air shall be filtered. K. Blowers (Indoor Air): l . Each unit shall be equipped with forced curved blower wheels. Units shall be belt or direct drive. 2. The belt tension shall be easily adjustable. Pulleys shall remain in alignment with motor and blower shafts parallel during adjustments. 3. The motor pulley shall have an adjustable sheave so that the blower speed may be changed. 4. Blower capacity and static pressure shall be as scheduled on the plans. Blower motor H.P. shall be as scheduled on the plans. L. Vibration Isolation: 1. The refrigeration compressors and the indoor fan system shall have all rotating parts spring isolated from the unit cabinet to minimize transmission of vibration. Fan motors 1/2 H.P. and under shall be resiliently mounted. M. Basic Unit Control System: 1. Each unit shall be furnished with a Honeywell TB8220U programmable thermostat, as indicated on the drawings. 2. Each unit shall be equipped with a positive fan start device on a call for heat. 3. The condensing units shall be furnished with time off cycle devices to prevent short cycling of the compressors. They shall also have high- low pressure cutouts, 3 leg overload protection and internal thermostats in the compressor to limit winding and discharge temperature to safe limits. Provide low - ambient operation kits. 4. Refrigerant control shall be by thermostatic expansion valves. 5. In addition to the above, contactors, relays and safety devices necessary for a complete operational system shall be furnished. WARRANTIES A. All heating and air conditioning equipment shall have a five year warranty on compressors, 10 years on heat exchangers and 1 year on all other parts. 2010 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Unauthorized Duplication Prohibited AIR CONDITIONING -2 15650 1 ryr et December 10, 2010 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 ADJUSTMENT A. Upon completion of work the Contractor shall balance the system so that the quantity and proper velocity of air is delivered at each outlet uniformly as indicated on the drawings to within ten percent (10%). Necessary adjustment shall be made to the system to produce these quantities of air, and to eliminate any objectional drafts or noise which might exist. Balance adjustments shall be made upstream of the registers and diffusers, leaving the O.B.D. in each grille neck fully open. B. When balancing has been completed, the Contractor shall provide the Architect with all necessary data, readings, and velocities at each outlet to substantiate that the systems are balanced and providing the necessary quantities of air as shown on the drawings. END OF SECTION 15650 2010 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. ' Unamhorized Dupfitation ProN'bbed AIR CONDITIONING 15650-3 r No Text December 10. 2010 SECTION 15804 - VENTILATING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The work covered by this section of the specifications shall include the furnishing of all labor and materials as required for the installation of a complete ventilating system and its related work. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Refer to other applicable clauses and regulations for other requirements. 1.3 SUBMITTAL A. All submittal required by this section shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01300. B. Submit manufacturer's data for approval on all materials to be furnished as part of this project. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 EXHAUST SYSTEM A. Furnish and install an exhaust system all as shown on the drawings. B. Provide exhaust ducts, properly flashed and waterproofed as shown. C. All ceiling mounted fans shall be Cook, Greenheck, Acme, or approved equal, of size and capacity as shown op the drawings. Fan housing shall have a baked powder painted finish. All units shall be equipped with a backdraft damper, and all exhaust ducts shall extend to the outside, properly flashed and waterproofed. Fans shall be provided with an aluminum egg crate style grille, a speed controller for system balancing, and vibration isolators. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. The exhaust systems shall be installed complete with all ductwork, fans and controls as shown on the drawings. B. Exhaust fans shall be controlled by wall mounted switches, interlocked with light switches, or controlled by temperature sensing devices, all as scheduled on the drawings. END OF SECTION 15804 2010 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. VENTILATING 15804- ] ._,� Unauthorized Duplication Prohibited No Text f_ , 1 December 10, 2010 ram. ' SECTION 15840 - DUCTWORK PART l - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The work covered by this section of the specifications includes the furnishings of all material and labor as required for the installation of a complete duct system, as shown on the drawings and as herein specified. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Refer to other applicable clauses and regulations for other requirements. 1.3 SUBMITTAL A. All submittal required by this section shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01300. B. Submit manufacturer's data for approval on all materials to be furnished as part of this project. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 LOW VELOCITY - LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK A. All ductwork shall be of the sizes indicated on the drawings, shall be straight and smooth on the inside with neatly finished airtight Qints. The ducts shall be installed as to be completely free of vibration. Metal duct slip joints shall be made with an inside radius of not less than the width of the duct, except that Factory Fabricated Air Turns shall be used where a sharper turn must be made or where otherwise indicated on the drawings. All takeoffs to registers shall be made with Factory Fabricated Deflectrols, or approved equal, and all major branches where noted on the plans shall have splitters with an accessible operating handle and locking device, Young Model No. 917 right angle gear and No. 1 ceiling regulator, or approved equal. B. All ductwork shall be constructed of galvanized iron sheets fabricated and installed in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards for Low Velocity Systems. C. Air turns shall be as manufactured by Barber -Colman, or approved equal. No job -built turning vanes will be used on this job. Where insulation is applied inside of ducts, turning vanes shall be installed inside of insulation. D. After all ducts are installed, all dirt and debris shall be removed from inside of ducts. E. Ductwork for round ducts shall conform to the latest edition ASHRAE guide. F. All duct construction seam corners and connections shall be sealed with white "Permagum Slugs" as manufactured by Virginia Chemicals, Inc. G. All ductwork shall be made airtight and reinforced as required for pressures as shown on the drawings. H. All dimensions indicated shall be sheet metal dimensions. Allowance shall be made for internal insulation as it occurs, unless otherwise noted on the drawings. 2.2 ACCESS DOORS A. Access doors in ductwork shall be 2" smaller in height than duct dimensions and 12" wide and located in accessible locations on both sides of all fire and smoke dampers. Doors in vertical position shall be equal to Ventlok insulated type, complete with all hinges, hardware and air seal. Doors in horizontal position shall be job built complete with sash lock, two (2) per side, and rubber air seal, all as manufactured by Ventlok, or approved equal. 2010 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. DUCTWORK 15 840-1 Unauthorized Duplication Prohibited December 10. 2010 2.3 ZONE VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS A. Volume control dampers shall be furnished and installed where shown on the drawings for all air unit zone ducts with locking operator installed on bottom side of ducts. B. Dampers shall be the opposed blade type with corner bracing for stiffening as manufactured by Young Regulator Co., Model No. 817, or approved equal, of size shown on the drawings. 2.4 FIBER DUCTWORK A. Fiber ductwork will not be used on this job anywhere. 2.5 LOW PRESSURE FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS A. Furnish and install flexible connections of 30 ounce woven glass fabric from discharge and return openings of equipment to ductwork. The flexible connections shall be of a type that is airtight, equal to Ventfabrics "Ventglas", and shall be installed in such a manner that the air flow is not restricted nor the connection leaks air. At least 1 " slack shall be allowed in connection to insure that no vibration is transmitted from fans to ductwork. B. Fabric connections shall be UL approved. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. All duct systems shall be installed in a workmanlike manner and shall provide a complete and working system. B. Hangers for ductwork shall be galvanized steel straps and/or electro-plated zinc or hot -dipped galvanized after threading, threaded rods, minimum of 3/8" diameter. C. Hangers shall be spaced a maximum of 8'-0" on center. D. When threaded hanger rods are used, bearing plate shall be on channel and/or angle, hot -dipped galvanized after cutting, and drilling of hanger rod holes. E. Hanger rods shall be secured to channels and/or angle by galvanized washer, nut, and locket nut. Hanger rods shall be suspended from super -structure. 3.2 CLEANING A. After installation is complete, all equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned. Filters shall be cleaned and/or replaced with new. Damaged paint shall be sanded and touched -up. All damaged insulation shall be replaced. END OF SECTION 15840 2010 Chapman Harvey Architects. Inc. Unsutborized Duplication P»hibaed DUCTWORK 15840-2 rr December 10, 2010 SECTION 15870 - GRILLES, REGISTERS AND CEILING DIFFUSERS PART I - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The work covered by this section of the specification includes the furnishing of all labor and materials as required for the installation of a complete air diffusing system as shown on the drawings, and as hereinafter specified. All side wall grilles, supply and returns, shall comply with NFPA Standard No. 90A. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Refer to other applicable clauses and regulations for other requirements. 1.3 SUBMITTAL A. All submittal required by this section shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01300. B. Submit manufacturer's data for approval on all materials to be furnished as part of this project. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 SIDE WALL RETURN AIR GRILLES A. All side wall return air grilles shall be with beaded frames and removable cores. 2.2 CEILING SUPPLY DIFFUSERS A. Ceiling supply diffusers, except where shown on the drawings and/or specified, shall be as shown on the drawings. All diffusers shall be equipped with deflectrols and opposed blade volume controls operated from the face of the diffusers. B. Ceiling diffusers shall be of the removable core type for 1, 2, 3 or 4-way deflection as shown on the drawings. 2.3 CEILING RETURN AIR GRILLES A. Ceiling return air grilles shall be all as shown on the drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GUARANTEE A. This Contractor shall ensure that the grilles, registers and diffusers are recommended by the manufacturer for the installation in the surfaces as shown and the application shown. END OF SECTION 15870 10 nz�`hdut oed DupbcafPribiieGRILLES, REGISTERS AND CEILING DIFFUSERS 15870-1 ' L_..�_.i �: U [_._._11 ,_ds_�_ �._._J CONSULTANTS' PROFESSIONAL RESPONSIBILITY The specifications sections to be authenticated by my seal and signature are limited to the following: DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL 16051 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 16060 GROUNDING AND BONDING 16073 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 16075 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16120 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 16130 RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16140 WIRING DEVICES 16410 ENCLOSED SWITCHES 16442 PANELBOARDS 16511 INTERIOR LIGHTING END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS By: Michael T. Strahan, P.E. BSA Consulting Engineers, PLLC License No. 84881 0 2010 Chapman Hurry Archue" Inc. Unaudmriud Dupfice ion ProhMed TABLE OF CONTENTS December 10, 2010 DIVISION 16 3 4 4 5 3 4 4 3 4 5 LLJ December 10, 2010 SECTION 16051 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL PART] -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Sleeves for raceways and cables. 2. Sleeve seals. 3. Grout. 4. Common electrical installation requirements. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For sleeve seals. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS AND CABLES A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends. B. Cast -Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile -iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated. C. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel. ]. Minimum Metal Thickness: a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and no side more than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.052 inch. b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to, or more than, 50 inches and 1 or more sides equal to, or more than, 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.138 inch. 2.2 SLEEVE SEALS A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. Calpico, Inc. C. Metraflex Co. G 2010 Chapman H—cy Architects, Inc. Unauthorized Duplication Prohibited COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 16051 - ] December 10. 2010 d. Pipeline Sea] and Insulator, Inc. 2. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or conduit. Include type and number required for material and size of raceway or cable. 3. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel. Include two for each sealing element. 4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion -resistant coating of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element. 2.3 GROUT A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage -Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory -packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive, nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1. B. Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and to center of unit for wall -mounting items_ C. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange and install components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom consistent with these requirements. D. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components of both electrical equipment and other nearby installations. Connect in such a way as to facilitate future disconnecting with minimum interference with other items in the vicinity. E. Right of Way: Give to piping systems installed at a required slope. 3.2 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS A. Electrical penetrations occur when raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, or busways penetrate concrete slabs, concrete or masonry walls, or fire -rated floor and wall assemblies. B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core -drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls. C. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening. D. Fire -Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire -rated floor and wall assemblies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor or wall. E. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls. F. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level. 0 2010 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Unauthorized Duplication Prohibited COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 16051 -2 December 10, 2010 r G. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and raceway or cable, unless indicated ( otherwise. H. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry 1. Promptly pack grout solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth; protect grout while curing. Interior Penetrations of Non -Fire -Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." J. Fire -Rated -Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at raceway and cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal raceway and cable penetration sleeves with firestop materials. Comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Through -Penetration Firestop Systems." K. Roof -Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible boot -type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work. L. Aboveground, Exterior -Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for I -inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. M. Underground, Exterior -Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for I -inch annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. 3.3 SLEEVE -SEAL INSTALLATION A. Install to seal exterior wall penetrations. B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or cable material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal. 3.4 FIRESTOPPING A. Apply firestopping to penetrations of fire -rated floor and wall assemblies for electrical installations to restore original fire -resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 7 Section "Througb-Penetration Firestop Systems." END OF SECTION 16051 _.. _. 0 2010 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Unauthorized Duplication Prohibited COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 16051 - 3 CD r-- December 10, 2010 SECTION 16060 - GROUNDING AND BONDING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes methods and materials for grounding systems and equipment. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Field quality -control test reports. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUCTORS A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction. B. Bare Copper Conductors: 1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3. 2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8. 3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33. 4. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch in diameter. 5. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor. 6. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors, terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick. 7. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned -copper tape, braided conductors, terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick. 0 2010 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Unauthorized Duplication Prohibited GROUNDING AND BONDING 16060 - 1 December 10, 2010 2.2 CONNECTORS A. Listed and labeled by a nationally recognized testing laboratory acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used, and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected. B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, bolted pressure -type, with at least two bolts. 1. Pipe Connectors: Clamp type, sized for pipe. C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic -welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions. 2.3 GROUNDING ELECTRODES A. Ground Rods: Copper -clad steel; 3/4 inch by10 feet in diameter. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATIONS A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No. 6 AWG and larger, unless otherwise indicated. B. Isolated Grounding Conductors: Green -colored insulation with continuous yellow stripe. On feeders with isolated ground, identify grounding conductor where visible to normal inspection, with alternating bands of green and yellow tape, with at least three bands of green and two bands of yellow. C. Conductor Terminations and Connections: 1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors. 3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those required by NFPA 70: 1. Feeders and branch circuits. 2. Lighting circuits. 3. Receptacle circuits. 4. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 5. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 6. Flexible raceway runs. 7. Computer and Rack -Mounted Electronic Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor in branch -circuit runs from equipment -area power panels and power -distribution units. B. Air -Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct -mounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners, heaters, dampers, humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct and connected metallic piping. G 2010 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Unauthorized Duplication Prohibited GROUNDING AND BONDING 16060 - 2 December 10, 2010 C. Water Heater, Heat -Tracing, and Antifrost Heating Cables: Install a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater and heat -tracing cable. Bond conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components. D. Isolated Grounding Receptacle Circuits: Install an insulated equipment grounding conductor connected to the receptacle grounding terminal. Isolate conductor from raceway and from panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the applicable derived system or service, unless otherwise indicated. E. Isolated Equipment Enclosure Circuits: For designated equipment supplied by a branch circuit or feeder, isolate equipment enclosure from supply circuit raceway with a nonmetallic raceway fitting listed for the purpose. Install fitting where raceway enters enclosure, and install a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor. Isolate conductor from raceway and from panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the applicable derived system or service, unless otherwise indicated. F. Signal and Communication Equipment: For telephone, alarm, voice and data, and other communication equipment, provide No. 4 AWG minimum insulated grounding conductor in raceway from grounding electrode system to each service location, terminal cabinet, wiring closet, and central equipment location. 1. Service and Central Equipment Locations and Wiring Closets: Terminate grounding conductor on a 1/4-by-2- by- I 2-inch grounding bus. 2. Terminal Cabinets: Terminate grounding conductor on cabinet grounding terminal. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage. B. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance, except where routed through short lengths of conduit. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, takingcare not to penetrate any adjacent parts. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. Use exothermic -welded connectors for outdoor locations, but if a disconnect -type connection is required, use a bolted clamp. C. Grounding and Bonding for Piping: Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes, using a bolted clamp connector or by bolting a lug -type connector to a pipe flange, using one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end. Water Meter Piping: Use braided -type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment shutoff valve. D. Bonding Interior Metal Ducts: Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of associated fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Install bonding jumper to bond across flexible duct connections to achieve continuity. [ Ci 2010 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Unauthorized Duplication Prohibited GROUNDING AND BONDING 16060 - 3 December 10, 2010 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been energized, test for compliance with requirements. 2. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground -resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, and at ground test wells_ a. Measure ground resistance not less than two full days after last trace of precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance. b. Perform tests by fall -of -potential method according to IEEE 81. B. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values: 1. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity 500 kVA and Less: 10 ohms. 2. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity 500 to 1000 kVA: 5 ohms. 3. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity More Than 1000 kVA: 3 ohms. 4. Power Distribution Units or Panelboards Serving Electronic Equipment: 1 ohm(s). C. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Architect promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance. END OF SECTION 16060 6 2010 Chapman Hamy Architects, Inc - Unauthorized Duplication Prohibited GROUNDING AND BONDING 16060 - 4 December 10, 2010 SECTION 16073 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART] -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems. 2. Construction requirements for concrete bases. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Design supports for multiple raceways, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. B. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems and its contents. C. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components. D. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads calculated or imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five times the applied force. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For steel slotted support systems. B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following: 1. Trapeze hangers. Include Product Data for components. 2. Steel slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components. 3. Equipment supports. C. Welding certificates. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS DI XD1.1M, "Structural Welding Code -Steel." B. Comply with NFPA 70. Q 2010 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Unauthorized Duplication Prohibited HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 16073 - 1 December 10, 2010 t PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory -fabricated components for field assembly. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Allied Tube & Conduit. b. Thomas & Betts Corporation. C. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd. 2. Metallic Coatings: Hot -dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-4. 3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating applied according to MFMA-4. 4. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA-4. 5. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria. B. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101. C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported. D. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory -fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non -armored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron. E. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized. F. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following. Powder -Actuated Fasteners: Threaded -steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) Hilti Inc. i 2) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 2. Mechanical -Expansion Anchors: Insert -wedge -type, zinc -coated steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used. �i a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. t -� 2) Empire Too] and Manufacturing Co., Inc. ? 3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable -iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58. 4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached structural element. ` 0 2010 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. L= Unauthorized Duplication Prohibited HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 16073 - 2 C[ I f December 10, 2010 r-r 5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325. 6. Toggle Bolts: All -steel springhead type. 7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel. 2.2 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural -steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of supported equipment. B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for steel shapes and plates. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter. B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in diameter. C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze -type supports fabricated with steel slotted support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits. l . Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two -bolt conduit clamps. D. Spring -steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1-1/2-inch and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports. 3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA I and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this Article. B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1 EMT, IMC, and RMC may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70. C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb. D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface -Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code: L.. 1. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts. 2. To Masonry: Approved toggle -type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor fasteners on solid masonry units. G 2010 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Unauthorized Duplication Prohibited HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 16073 - 3 December 10, 2010 3. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners. 4. Instead of expansion anchors, powder -actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock washers and nuts may be used in existing standard -weight concrete 4 inches thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight - aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches thick. 5. To Steel: Welded threaded studs complying with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, with lock washers and nuts. 6. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. 7. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted - channel racks attached to substrate. E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS A. Comply with installation requirements in Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for site -fabricated metal supports. B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment. C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/DLIM. 3.4 CONCRETE BASES A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches larger in both directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from edge of the base. B. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive -strength concrete. Concrete materials, reinforcement, and placement requirements are specified in Division 3 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete." C. Anchor equipment to concrete base. I. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 3. Install anchor bolts according to anchor -bolt manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 16073 C: 20)0 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Unauthorized Duplication Prohibited HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 16073 - 4 rr 6.J December 10, 2010 SECTION 16075 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PART] -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Identification for raceways. 2. Identification of power and control cables. 3. Identification for conductors. 4. Warning labels and signs. 5. Instruction signs. 6. Equipment identification labels. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with ANSI A] 3.1. B. Comply with NFPA 70. C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145. D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels. E. Adhesive -attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 POWER RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway size. B. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: 1. Black letters on an orange field. 2. Legend: Indicate voltage. G 2010 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Unauthorized Duplication Prohibited ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16075 - 1 December 10, 2010 C. Self -Adhesive Vinyl Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical -resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label. D. Snap -Around Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color -coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action. E. Snap -Around, Color -Coding Bands for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid -colored acrylic sleeve, 2 inches long, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action. F. Write -On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.010 inch thick, with corrosion -resistant grommet and cable tie for attachment to conductor or cable. Marker for Tags: Machine -printed, permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by printer manufacturer. 2.2 POWER AND CONTROL CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway and cable size. B. Self -Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical -resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label. C. Write -On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.010 inch thick, with corrosion -resistant grommet and cable tie for attachment to conductor or cable. 1. Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag manufacturer. 2. Marker for Tags: Machine -printed, permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by printer manufacturer. D. Snap -Around Labels: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color -coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action. 2.3 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. Color -Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by I to 2 inches wide. B. Self -Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical -resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label. C. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl -cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process. D. Write -On Tags: Polyester tag, thick, with corrosion -resistant grommet and cable tie for attachment to conductor or cable. I . Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag manufacturer. 6 2010 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Unauthorized Duplication Prohibited ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16075 - 2 s r— r-- December 10, 2010 2. Marker for Tags: Machine -printed, permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by printer manufacturer. 2.4 FLOOR MARKING TAPE A. 2-inch- wide, 5-mil pressure -sensitive vinyl tape, with black and white stripes and clear vinyl overlay. 2.5 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145. B. Self -Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory -printed, multicolor, pressure -sensitive adhesive labels, configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment unless otherwise indicated. C. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends: 1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD — ARC FLASH HAZARD - EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES." 2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES." 2.6 INSTRUCTION SIGNS A. Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1/16 inch thick for signs up to 20 sq. inches and 1/8 inch thick for larger sizes. 1. Engraved legend with black letters on white face. 2. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners. 3. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable equipment. 2.7 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS A. Self -Adhesive, Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Adhesive backed, with white letters on a dark - gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS A. Paint: Comply with requirements in Division 9 painting Sections for paint materials and application requirements. Select paint system applicable for surface material and location (exterior or interior). B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self -tapping, stainless -steel screws or stainless -steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 0 2010 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Unauthorized Duplication Prohibited ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16075 - 3 December 10. 2010 2.9 INSTALLATION A. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. B. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work. C. Self -Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device. D. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners appropriate to the location and substrate. E. System Identification Color -Coding Bands for Raceways and Cables: Each color -coding band shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25- foot maximum intervals in congested areas. F. Underground -Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous underground -line warning tape directly above line at 6 to 8 inches below finished grade. Use multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope exceeds 16 inches overall. G. Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in Division 9 painting Sections for surface preparation and paint application. 2.10 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE A. Accessible Raceways and Cables within Buildings: Identify the covers of each junction and pull box of the following systems with self-adhesive vinyl labels with the wiring system legend and system voltage. System legends shall be as follows: 1 _ Power. 2. Fire Alarm B. Power -Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and bandholes, use color -coding conductor tape to identify the phase. 1. Color -Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed below for ungrounded service feeder and branch -circuit conductors. a. Color shall be factory applied or field applied for sizes larger than No. 8 AWG, if authorities having jurisdiction permit. b. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits: 1) Phase A: Black. 2) Phase B: Red. 3) Phase C: Blue. C. Field -Applied, Color -Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half -lapped turns for a minimum distance of 6 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings. 6 2010 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Unauthorized Duplication Prohibited ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16075 - 4 December 10, 2010 C. Install instructional sign including the color -code for grounded and ungrounded conductors using adhesive -film - type labels. D. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach write -on tags to conductors and list source. E. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field -installed alarm, control, and signal connections. 1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, tenminals, and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation. 2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by manufacturer for factory -installed connections. 3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. F. Workspace Indication: Install floor marking tape to show working clearances in the direction of access to live parts. Workspace shall be as required by NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1926.403 unless otherwise indicated. Do not install at flush -mounted panelboards and similar equipment in finished spaces. G. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Self-adhesive warning labels. 1. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145. 2. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background. 3. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access. 4. For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of equipment including, but not limited to, the following: H. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification. Labeling Instructions: a. Indoor Equipment: Self-adhesive, engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- high letters on 1-1/2-inch- high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high. b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. C. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for viewing from the floor. d. Unless provided with self-adhesive means of attachment, fasten labels with appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of the enclosure. END OF SECTION 16075 it C, 2010 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. ` Unauthorized Duplication Prohibited ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16075 - 5 Z:Z� -ILi December 10. 2010 SECTION 16120 - CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART] -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less. 2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Field quality -control test reports. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply with NFPA 70. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70. B. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for Types THHN. 2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 2. O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC. 3. 3M; Electrical Products Division. 4. Tyco Electronics Corp. B. Description: Factory -fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated. G 2010 Chapman Harvey Architects. Inc. Unauthorized Duplication Prohibited CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 16120 - 1 December 10. 2010 PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS A. Feeders: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger. B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger. 3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS A. Service Entrance: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway. B. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway. C. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN, single conductors in raceway. D. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs -on -Grade, and Underground: Type THHN, single conductors in raceway. E. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway. F. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN, single conductors in raceway. G. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs -on -Grade, and Underground: Type THHN, single conductors in raceway. H. Cord Drops and Portable Appliance Connections: Type SO, hard service cord with stainless -steel, wire -mesh, strain relief device at terminations to suit application. 1. Class 1 Control Circuits: Type THHN, in raceway. J. Class 2 Control Circuits: Type THHN, in raceway. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated. B. Use manufacturer -approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values. C. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket -weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway. D. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible. (D 2010 Chapman Haney Architects, Inc. Unauthorized Duplication Prohibited CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 16120 - 2 December 10, 2010 E. Identify and color -code conductors and cables according to Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification." F. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque -tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. G. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors. 1. Use oxide inhibitor in each splice and tap conductor for aluminum conductors. H. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches of slack. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements. 2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 3. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each splice in cables and conductors No. 3 AWG and larger. Remove box and equipment covers so splices are accessible to portable scanner. a. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each splice I I months after date of Substantial Completion. b. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device. C. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies splices checked and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action. C. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following: 1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve compliance with requirements. D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. END OF SECTION 16120 C, 2010 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Unauthorized Duplication Prohibited CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 16120 - 3 No Text r DecCmber 10, 2010 P_ SECTION 16130 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES : PART I - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical wiring. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged -cover enclosures, and cabinets. B. Shop Drawings. For custom enclosures and cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply with NFPA 70. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING A. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1. B. 1MC: ANSI C80.6_ C. EMT: ANSI C80.3. D. FMC: Zinc -coated steel. E. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket. F. Fittings for Conduit (Including all Types and Flexible and Liquidtight), EMT, and Cable: NEMA FB 1; listed for type and size raceway with which used, and for application and environment in which installed. 1. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886. 2. Fittings for EMT: Steel, compression type. 2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND TUBING A. ENT: NEMA TC 13. B. RNC: NEMA TC 2, Type EPC-40-PVC, unless otherwise indicated. C. LFNC: UL 1660. 0 2010 Chapman Haney Architects, Inc. _ Unauthorized Duplication Prohibited RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130 - 1 D. Fittings for ENT and RNC: NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material. E. Fittings for LFNC: UL 514B. December 10, 2010 F11 2.3 METAL WIREWAYS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: I . Cooper B-Line, Inc. 2. Hoffman. 3. Square D; Schneider Electric. C. Description: Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated, NEMA 250, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated. D. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system. E. Wireway Covers: Hinged type. F. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish. 2.4 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS A. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1. B. Cast -Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, aluminum, Type FD, with gasketed cover. C. Metal Floor Boxes: Sheet metal, fully adjustable, rectangular or as noted on drawings. D. Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1. E. Cast -Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: NEMA FB 1, cast aluminum with gasketed cover. F. Hinged -Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, with continuous -hinge cover with flush latch, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturers standard enamel. G. Cabinets: 1. NEMA 250, Type 1, galvanized -steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. 3. Key latch to match panelboards. 4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage. 5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment. 6 2010 Chapman Harvey Architects. Inc. Unauthorized Duplication Prohibited RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130 - 2 i December 10, 2010 f� PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed Conduit: Rigid steel conduit. 2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: IMC. 3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, direct buried. 4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor -Driven Equipment): LFMC. 5. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R. B. Comply with the following indoor applications, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT. 2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT. 3. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT. 4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor -Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations. 5. Damp or Wet Locations: IMC. 6. Raceways for Optical Fiber or Communications Cable: EMT. 7. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4, stainless steel in damp or wet locations. C. Minimum Raceway Size: 1/2-inch trade size. D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location. 1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless otherwise indicated. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1 for installation requirements applicable to products specified in Part 2 except where requirements on Drawings or in this Article are stricter. B. Keep raceways' at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping. C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation. D. Arrange stub -ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab. E. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for communications conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. F. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated. G. Raceways Embedded in Slabs: 1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size, parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support. 2. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings. 3. Change from ENT to RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, rigid steel conduit, or IMC before rising above the floor. Q 2010 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Unauthorized Duplication Prohibited RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130 - 3 H J I� L Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG. December 10, 2010 Use insulating bushings to protect conductors, { Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. Raceways for Optical Fiber and Communications Cable: Install as follows: 3/4-Inch Trade Size and Smaller: Install raceways in maximum lengths of 50 feet. Flexible Conduit Connections: Use maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit for recessed and semirecessed lighting fixtures, equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw -cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall. M. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT A. Direct -Buried Conduit: 1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Prepare trench bottom as specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for pipe less than 6 inches in nominal diameter. 2. Install backfill as specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork." 3. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work toward end of conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction as temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to provide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12 inches of finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete backfilling with normal compaction as specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork." 4. Install manufactured duct elbows for stub -ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through the floor, unless otherwise indicated. Encase elbows for stub -up ducts throughout the length of the elbow. 5. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub -ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through the floor. a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase coupling with 3 inches of concrete. b. For stub -ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases, extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of 60 inches from edge of equipment pad or foundation. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment. END OF SECTION 16130 0 2010 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Unauthorized Duplication Prohibited RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130 - 4 December 10, 2010 SECTION 16140 - WIRING DEVICES PART] -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates. 2. Wall -box motion sensors. 3. Snap switches and wall -box dimmers. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking wall plates. C. Samples: One for each type of device and wall plate specified, in each color specified. D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packing label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply with NFPA 70. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles: 1. Cooper Wiring Devices; a division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper). 2. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell). 3. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton). 4. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices & Accessories (Pass & Seymour). 2.2 STRAIGHT BLADE RECEPTACLES A. Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R, and UL 498. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Cooper; 5351 (single), 5352 (duplex). 0 2010 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Unauthorized Duplication Prohibited WIRING DEVICES 16140 - 1 December 10, 2010 b. Hubbell; HBL5351 (single), CR5352 (duplex). C. Leviton; 5891 (single), 5352 (duplex). d. Pass & Seymour; 5381 (single), 5352 (duplex). 2.3 GFCI RECEPTACLES A. General Description: Straight blade, non -feed -through type. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, and UL 943, Class A, and include indicator light that is lighted when device is tripped. B. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Cooper; GF20. b. Pass & Seymour; 2084. 2.4 SNAP SWITCHES A. Comply with NEMA WD 1 and UL 20. B. Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Cooper; 2221 (single pole), 2222 (two pole), 2223 (three way), 2224 (four way). b. Hubbell; CS1221 (single pole), CS1222 (two pole), CS1223 (three way), CS1224 (four way). C. Leviton; 1221-2 (single pole), 1222-2 (two pole), 1223-2 (three way), 1224-2 (four way). d. Pass & Seymour; 20AC1 (single pole), 20AC2 (two pole), 20AC3 (three way), 20AC4 (four way). 2.5 OCCUPANCY SENSORS A. Wall -Switch Sensors: Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Cooper; 6111 for 120 V, 6117 for 277 V. b. Hubbell; WS1277. C. Leviton; ODS 10-ID. d. Pass & Seymour; WS3000. e. Watt Stopper (The); WS-200. 2. Description: Passive -infrared type, 120/277 V, adjustable time delay up to 30 minutes, 180-degree field of view, with a minimum coverage area of 900 sq. ft.. 2.6 WALL PLATES A. Single and combination types to match corresponding wiring devices. 1. Plate -Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. 2. Material for Finished Spaces: Stainless Steel 3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel. 4. Material for Damp Locations: Cast aluminum with spring -loaded lift cover, and listed and labeled for use in "wet locations." 0 2010 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Unauthorized Duplication Prohibited WIRING DEVICES 16140 - 2 IT December 10, 201D B. Wet -Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with type 3R weather -resistant, die-cast aluminum with lockable cover. 2.7 FLOOR SERVICE FITTINGS A. Type: Modular, flush -type, dual -service units suitable for wiring method used. B. Compartments: Barrier separates power from voice and data communication cabling. C. Service Plate: Rectangular, with satin finish. D. Power Receptacle: NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R, gray finish, unless otherwise indicated. 2.8 FINISHES A. Color: Wiring device catalog numbers in Section Text do not designate device color. 1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: As selected by Architect, unless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA I, including the mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise noted. B. Coordination with Other Trades: 1. Take steps to insure that devices and their boxes are protected. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of the boxes. 2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables. 3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall. 4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete. C. Conductors: I . Do not strip insulation from conductors until just before they are spliced or terminated on devices. 2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire. 3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails. 4. Existing Conductors: a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors. b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter. C. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted provided the outlet box is large enough. D. Device Installation: 1. Replace all devices that have been in temporary use during construction or that show signs that they were installed before building finishing operations were complete. 0 2010 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Unauthorized Duplication Prohibited WIRING DEVICES 16140 - 3 2. December 10, 2010 Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors. �J 1 ; 3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last possible moment. 4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length. 5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding -head screw terminals. Wrap solid conductor tightly clockwise, 2/3 to 3/4 of the way around terminal screw. 6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by the manufacturer. 7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections. i 8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device. Li 9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal -to -metal contact. (t E. Receptacle Orientation: L` 1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles up, and on horizontally mounted receptacles to the right. f i 1# F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra -deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening. P g P & G. Dimmers: Install dimmers within terms of their listing. Verify that dimmers used for fan speed control are listed for that application. Install unshared neutral conductors on line and load side of dimmers according to manufacturers' device listing conditions in the written instructions. H. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436. Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital readout or illuminated LED indicators of measurement. B. Tests for Convenience Receptacles: 1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V. 2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is not acceptable. 3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable. 4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943. 5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted. 6. The tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new, and retest as specified above. END OF SECTION 16140 0 2010 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Unauthorized Duplication prohibited WIRING DEVICES 16140 - 4 December 10, 2010 SECTION 16410 -ENCLOSED SWITCHES PART] -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Nonfusible switches. 2. Enclosures. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, accessory, and component indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For enclosed switches. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, C. Field quality -control reports. D. Operation and maintenance data. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Comply with NFPA 70. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler -Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. B. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 240-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position. C. Accessories: t4 2010 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Unauthorized Duplication Prohibited ENCLOSED SWITCHES 16410 - 1 December 10. 2010 1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors. 2. Lugs: Suitable for number, size, and conductor material. 2.2 ENCLOSURES A. Enclosed Switches: NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location. 1. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1. 2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R. 3. Kitchen Areas: NEMA 250. 4. Other Wet or Damp, Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4. 5. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids: NEMA 250, Type 12. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install individual wall -mounted switches with tops at uniform height unless otherwise indicated. B. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components. C. Install fuses in fusible devices. D. Comply with NECA 1. 3.2 IDENTIFICATION A. Comply with requirements in Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification." 1. Identify field -installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs. 2. Label each enclosure with engraved laminated -plastic nameplate. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. B. Acceptance Testing Preparation: 1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch and circuit breaker, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit. 2. Test continuity of each circuit. C. Tests and Inspections: 02010 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Unauthorized Duplication Prohibited ENCLOSED SWITCHES 16410 - 2 December 10, 2010 1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 2. Correct malfunctioning units on -site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. D. Enclosed switches will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies enclosed switches and circuit breakers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action. END OF SECTION 16410 G 2010 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Unauthorized Duplication Prohibited ENCLOSED SWITCHES 16410 - 3 No Text December 10, 2010 SECTION 16442 - PANELBOARDS PARTI- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes distribution panelboards and lighting and appliance branch -circuit panelboards. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment. 1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings. 2. Detail enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings. 4. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices. C. Field quality -control reports. D. Panelboard schedules for installation in panelboards. E. Operation and maintenance data. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Comply with NEMA PB 1. C. Comply with NFPA 70. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS A. Enclosures: Surface and recessed mounted cabinets. 1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location. a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1. 0 2010 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Unauthorized Duplication Prohibited PANELBOARDS 16442 - 1 December 10. 2010 b. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R. 2. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface -mounted fronts, match box dimensions; for flush -mounted fronts, overlap box. 3. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within hinged trim cover. 4. Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in transparent card holder. B. Incoming Mains Location: Bottom. C. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses: Hard -drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. D. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes. 1. Material: Hard -drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. 2. Main and Neutral Lugs: Compression type. 3. Ground Lugs and Bus Configured Terminators: Compression type. 4. Feed -Through Lugs: Compression type, suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device. 5. Subfeed (Double) Lugs: Compression type suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device. E. Service Equipment Label: NRTL labeled for use as service equipment for panelboards with one or more main service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices. F. Panelboard Short -Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit current available at terminals. 2.2 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: I . Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler -Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, power and feeder distribution type. C. Doors: Secured with vault -type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike. D. Mains: Circuit breaker. E. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: For Circuit -Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and Smaller: Bolt -on circuit breakers. F. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: For Circuit -Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125 A: Bolt -on circuit breakers.. G. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Fused switches. C, 2010 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Unauthorized Duplication Prohibited PANELBOARDS 16442 - 2 December 10, 2010 2.3 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH -CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: I . Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler -Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch -circuit type. C. Mains: Circuit breaker or lugs only. D. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt -on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent units. E. Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike. 2.4 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler -Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. B. Molded -Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with series -connected rating interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents. 1. Thermal -Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time -current element for low-level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit -breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger. 2. Molded -Case Circuit -Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories: a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. b. Lugs: Compression style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor materials. C. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high -intensity discharge (HID) lighting circuits. d. Ground -Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable pickup and time -delay settings, push -to -test feature, and ground -fault indicator. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Receive, inspect, handle, store and install panelboards and accessories according to NECA 407. B. Mount top of trim 72 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated. C. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box. 0 2010 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Unauthorized Duplication Prohibited PANELBOARDS 16442 - 3 December 10, 2010 D. Install filler plates in unused spaces. E. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties. F. Comply with NECA 1. 3.2 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify field -installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs complying with Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification." B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads and incorporating Owner's final room designations. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable. C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification." D. Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in distribution panelboards with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification." 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. B. Acceptance Testing Preparation: 1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit. 2. Test continuity of each circuit. C. Tests and Inspections: 1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 2. Correct malfunctioning units on -site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. D. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies panelboards included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action. END OF SECTION 16442 0 2010 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Unauthorized Duplication Prohibited PANELBOARDS 16442 - 4 December 10, 2010 SECTION 16511 - INTERIOR LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: I . Interior lighting fixtures, lamps, and ballasts. 2. Emergency lighting units. 3. Exit signs. 4. Lighting fixture supports. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 16 Section "Wiring Devices" for manual wall -box dimmers for incandescent lamps. 2. Division 16 Section "Lighting Control Devices" for automatic control of lighting, including time 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture, arranged in order of fixture designation. Include data on features, accessories, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Show details of nonstandard or custom lighting fixtures. Indicate dimensions, weights, methods of field assembly, components, features, and accessories. Product Certificates: For each type of ballast for bi-level and dimmer -controlled fixtures, from manufacturer. C. Field quality -control reports. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Comply with NFPA 70. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products indicated on Drawings. 2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS �,. A. Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility for recessed fixtures. B. Fluorescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5 and NEMA LE 5A as applicable. C. HID Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5B. 1 ® 2010 Chapman Harvey Architects. Inc. Unauthorized Duplication Prohibited INTERIOR LIGHTING 16511 - 1 J . December 10, 2010 D. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp comers and edges. E. Sheet Metal Components: Steel unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging. F. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position. G. Diffusers and Globes: 1. Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic. High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation. a. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch minimum unless otherwise indicated. b. UV stabilized. 2. Glass: Annealed crystal glass unless otherwise indicated. 2.3 BALLASTS FOR LINEAR FLUORESCENT LAMPS A. General Requirements for Electronic Ballasts: I . Comply with UL 935 and with ANSI C82.1 1. 2. Designed for type and quantity of lamps served. 3. Ballasts shall be designed for full light output unless another BF, dimmer, or bi-level control is indicated. 4. Sound Rating: Class A. 5. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 10 percent. 6. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2, Category A or better. 7. Operating Frequency: 42 kHz or higher. 8. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less. 9. BF: 0.88 or higher. 10. Power Factor: 0.95 or higher. B. luminaires controlled by occupancy sensors shall have programmed -start ballasts. C. Electromagnetic Ballasts: Comply with ANSI C82.1; energy saving, high -power factor, Class P, and having automatic -reset thermal protection. I. Ballast Manufacturer Certification: Indicated by label. D. Single Ballasts for Multiple Lighting Fixtures: Factory wired with ballast arrangements and bundled extension wiring to suit final installation conditions without modification or rewiring in the field. E. Ballasts for Low -Temperature Environments: Electronic or electromagnetic type rated for 0 deg F starting and operating temperature with indicated lamp types. F. Ballasts for Bi-Level Controlled Lighting Fixtures: Electronic type. I . Operating Modes: Ballast circuit and leads provide for remote control of the light output of the associated lamp between high- and low-level and off. a. High -Level Operation: 100 percent of rated lamp lumens. b. Low -Level Operation: 30 percent of rated lamp lumens. 2. Ballast shall provide equal current to each lamp in each operating mode. 3. Compatibility: Certified by manufacturer for use with specific bi-level control system and lamp type indicated. 6 2010 Chapman Harvey Architects. Inc. Unauthorized Duplication Prohibited INTERIOR LIGHTING 16511 -2 r—; ,I December 10, 2010 G. Ballasts for Tri-Level Controlled Lighting Fixtures: Electronic type. 1. Operating Modes: Ballast circuit and leads provide for remote control of the light output of the associated lamp between high- and low-level and off. a. High -Level Operation: 100 percent of rated lamp lumens. b. Low -Level Operation: 30 and 60 percent of rated lamp lumens. 2. Ballast shall provide equal current to each lamp in each operating mode. 3. Compatibility: Certified by manufacturer for use with specific tri-level control system and lamp type indicated. 2.4 BALLASTS FOR COMPACT FLUORESCENT LAMPS A. Description: Electronic -programmed rapid -start type, complying with UL 935 and with ANSI C 82.11, designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated. Ballast shall be designed for full light output unless dimmer or bi-level control is indicated: 1. Lamp end -of -life detection and shutdown circuit. 2. Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement. 3. Sound Rating: Class A. 4. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 20 percent. 5. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2, Category A or better. 6. Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher. 7. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less. 8. BF: 0.95 or higher unless otherwise indicated. 9. Power Factor: 0.95 or higher. 10. Interference: Comply with 47 CFR 18, Ch. 1, Subpart C, for limitations on electromagnetic and radio - frequency interference for nonconsumer equipment. 2.5 EMERGENCY FLUORESCENT POWER UNIT A. Internal Type: Self-contained, modular, battery -inverter unit, factory mounted within lighting fixture body and compatible with ballast. Comply with UL 924. 1 _ Emergency Connection: Operate two fluorescent lamp(s) continuously at an output of 1100 lumens each. Connect unswitched circuit to battery -inverter unit and switched circuit to fixture ballast. 2. Nightlight Connection: Operate one fluorescent lamp continuously. 3. Test Push Button and Indicator Light: Visible and accessible without opening fixture or entering ceiling space. a. Push Button: Push -to -test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operability. b. Indicator Light: LED indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle. 4. Battery: Sealed, maintenance -free, nickel -cadmium type. 5. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state, constant -current type with sealed power transfer relay. 6. Integral Self -Test: Factory -installed electronic device automatically initiates code -required test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is annunciated by an integral audible alarm and a flashing red LED. 2.6 BALLASTS FOR HID LAMPS A. Electromagnetic Ballast for Metal -Halide Lamps: Comply with ANSI C82.4 and UL 1029. Include the following features unless otherwise indicated: e ® 2010 Chapman Hervey Architects, Inc. Unauthorized Duplication Prohibited INTERIOR LIGHTING 16511 -3 December 10, 2010 Ballast Circuit: Constant -wattage autotransformer or regulating high -power -factor type. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 22 deg F for single -lamp ballasts. Rated Ambient Operating Temperature: 104 deg F. Open -circuit operation that will not reduce average life. Low -Noise Ballasts: Manufacturers' standard epoxy -encapsulated models designed to minimize audible fixture noise. B. Electronic Ballast for Metal -Halide Lamps: Include the following features unless otherwise indicated: I . Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 20 deg F for single -lamp ballasts. 2. Rated Ambient Operating Temperature: 130 deg F. 3. Lamp end -of -life detection and shutdown circuit. 4. Sound Rating: Class A. 5. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 20 percent. 6. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2, Category A or better. 7. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.5 or less. 8. Power Factor: 0.90 or higher. 9. Interference: Comply with 47 CFR 18, Ch. 1, Subpart C, for limitations on electromagnetic and radio - frequency interference for nonconsumer equipment. 10. Protection: Class P thermal cutout. 2.7 EXIT SIGNS A. General Requirements for Exit Signs: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility, luminance, and lettering size, comply with authorities having jurisdiction. B. Internally Lighted Signs: 1. Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs, 50,000 hours minimum rated lamp life. 2. Self -Powered Exit Signs (Battery Type): Integral automatic charger in a self-contained power pack. a. Battery: Sealed, maintenance -free, nickel -cadmium type. b. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay. C. Operation: Relay automatically energizes lamp from battery when circuit voltage drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger. d. Test Push Button: Push -to -test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operability. e. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle. 2.8 FLUORESCENT LAMPS A. T8 rapid -start lamps, rated 32 W maximum, nominal length of 48 inches, 2800 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 75 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, and average rated life 20,000 hours unless otherwise indicated. B. T8 rapid -start lamps, rated 17 W maximum, nominal length of 24 inches, 1300 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 75 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, and average rated life of 20,000 hours unless otherwise indicated. C. Compact Fluorescent Lamps: 4-Pin, CRI 80 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, average rated life of 10,000 hours at three hours operation per start unless otherwise indicated. 1. 26 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 1800 initial lumens (minimum). 2. 32 W: T4, triple tube, rated 2400 initial lumens (minimum). 3. 42 W: T4, triple tube, rated 3200 initial lumens (minimum). 0 2010 Chapman Hervey Architects, Inc. Urtwthwized Duplication Prohibited INTERIOR LIGHTING 16511 - 4 December 10, 2010 2.9 HID LAMPS A. Metal -Halide Lamps: ANSI C78.43, with minimum CRI 65, and color temperature 4000 K. 2.10 LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS A. Comply with Division 16 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel- and angle -iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports. B. Single -Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish same as fixture. C. Twin -Stem Hangers: Two, 1/2-inch steel tubes with single canopy designed to mount a single fixture. Finish same as fixture. D. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc -coated steel, 12 gage. E. Wires for Humid Spaces: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Composition 302 or 304, annealed stainless steel, 12 gage. F. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch minimum diameter, cadmium -plated, threaded steel rod. G. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equipped with threaded attachment, cord, and locking -type plug. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Lighting fixtures: Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls. Install lamps in each fixture. B. Comply with NFPA 70 for minimum fixture supports. C. Suspended Lighting Fixture Support: 1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches, brace to limit swinging. 2. Stem -Mounted, Single -Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin -stem hangers. 3. Continuous Rows: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod for suspension for each unit length of fixture chassis, including one at each end. D. Adjust aimable lighting fixtures to provide required light intensities. E. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables." 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify transfer from normal power to battery and retransfer to normal. B. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate compliance with standards. END OF SECTION 16511 02010 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. Unauthorized Duplication prohibited INTERIOR LIGHTING 16511 - 5 No Text Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. SECTION 313116 - TERMITE CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Sol] treatment with termiticide. Dec-2010 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the EPA -Registered Label for termiticide products. B. Product certificates. C. Soil Treatment Application Report: Include the following: 1. Date and time of application. 2. Moisture content of soil before application. 3. Termiticide brand name and manufacturer. 4. Quantity of undiluted termiticide used. 5. Dilutions, methods, volumes used, and rates of application. 6. Areas of application. 7. Water source for application. D. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A specialist who is licensed according to regulations of authorities having jurisdiction to apply termite control treatment and products in jurisdiction where Project is located and who employs workers trained and approved by manufacturer to install manufacturer's products. B. Regulatory Requirements: Formulate and apply termiticides and termiticide devices according to the EPA -Registered Label. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: To ensure penetration, do not treat soil that is water saturated or frozen. Do not treat soil while precipitation is occurring. Comply with requirements of the EPA -Registered Label and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. I" TERMITE CONTROL 313116- 1 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. Dec-2010 B. Coordinate soil treatment application with excavating, filling, grading, and concreting operations. Treat soil under footings, grade beams, and ground -supported slabs before construction. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Soil Treatment Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by Applicator and Contractor, certifying that termite control work, consisting of applied soil termiticide treatment, will prevent infestation of subterranean termites. If subterranean termite activity or damage is discovered during warranty period, re -treat soil and repair or replace damage caused by termite infestation. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SOIL TREATMENT A. Termiticide: Provide an EPA -Registered termiticide, complying with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, in an aqueous solution formulated to prevent termite infestation. Provide quantity required for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum termiticide concentration allowed for each specific use, according to product's EPA -Registered Label. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: ...- .... ....... a. P., 11- A'�!, if, tilt iii i(�du.,'. . Termidor. b. t�---=-':__na ^ t 4 r_._c; Premise 75. C. "_ c f ;; , f, ,,, ;: _ !� Dragnet FT. d. <; Prelude. _ 2. Service Life of Treatment: Soil treatment termiticide that is effective for not less than five years against infestation of subterranean termites. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION, GENERAL A. General: Comply with the most stringent requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and with manufacturer's EPA -Registered Label for products. 3.2 APPLYING SOIL TREATMENT A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for moisture content of soil per termiticide label requirements, interfaces with TERMITE CONTROL 313116 - 2 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. 2010 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. Dec-2010 earthwork, slab and foundation work, landscaping, utility installation, and other conditions affecting performance of termite control. B. Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. C. Soil Treatment Preparation: Remove foreign matter and impermeable soil materials that could decrease treatment effectiveness on areas to be treated. Loosen, rake, and level soil to be treated except previously compacted areas under slabs and footings. Termiticides may be applied before placing compacted fill under slabs if recommended in writing by termiticide manufacturer. 1. Fit filling hose connected to water source at the site with a backflow preventer, complying with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. D. Application: Mix soil treatment termiticide solution to a uniform consistency. Provide quantity required for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum specified concentration of termiticide, according to manufacturer's EPA -Registered Label, to the following so that a continuous horizontal and vertical termiticidal barrier or treated zone is established around and under building construction. Distribute treatment evenly. I. Slabs -on -Grades: Under ground -supported slab construction, including footings, building slabs, and attached slabs as an overall treatment. Treat soil materials before concrete footings and slabs are placed. 2. Foundations: Adjacent soil, including soil along the entire inside perimeter of foundation walls; along both sides of interior partition walls; around plumbing pipes and electric conduit penetrating the slab; around interior column footers, piers; and along the entire outside perimeter, from grade to bottom of footing. Avoid soil washout around footings. 3. Masonry: Treat voids. 4. Penetrations: At expansion joints, control joints, and areas where slabs will be penetrated. E. Avoid disturbance of treated soil after application. Keep off treated areas until completely dry. F. Protect termiticide solution, dispersed in treated soils and fills, from being diluted until ground - supported slabs are installed. Use waterproof barrier according to EPA -Registered Label instructions. G. Post warning signs in areas of application. H. Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation, grading, landscaping, or other construction activities following application. END OF SECTION 313116 TERMITE CONTROL 313116 - 3 No Text